### Temple Of Creation

  1. 1-0
  2. 1-1
  3. 1-2
  4. 1-3
  5. 1-4
  6. 1-5
  7. 1-6
  8. 1-7
  9. 1-8
  10. 1-9
  11. 1-10

## Guide

  1. Contents
  2. Start of Content

### _1-0_

_EMPTY?_

Ah Ri's lips part with a caught breath.

Dark eyes wide, she scans over the open boxes scattered on the desk a second time. A third. Her brown eyebrows scrunch close in a wrinkled stupor.

Where is it?

She stands so still that she can hear the palpable tolling of her own heart. She bites her lips. Thinks. Blinks. Paces in the dark.

Where? Where? _Where?_

Ah Ri puts a curled finger to her grit teeth. She studies the room again with her hands on her hips and she takes a deep breath. _Calm down. It has to be in here somewhere._ _This is the only place I ever leave it._ Ah Ri spots a small red box squished between two thick tomes in the corner of a bookshelf: the only unopened box left in the room. She pulls it out and unclasps it.

Empty.

Her face blanches of color. Why is it not here? Ah Ri's hands tremble.

If the _Commander_ finds out about this...

Ice gores through Ah Ri's chest. She clenches her hands to stop the shaking. _No._

She _won't_ find out.

Ah Ri springs to the bookshelves, yanking books, battle records, military strategy booklets from their places. Histories. Biographies. Maps. Anything. _Come on... please be here somewhere._ Her trembling fingers open each, page-flipping growing more desperate by the second. She scowls mid-way through the battle glories of a man she does not know and slams his biography back into place with a silent _fuck_.

She rests her head against the shelf, sighing. _One job._ One simple job and she couldn't even do that!

Ah Ri clenches the shelf top with a hand. _Okay, okay, okay... This is still fixable._ She swallows a hard breath. _The Commander shouldn't be back for three more days._ That should be plenty of time to find—

The office sliding doors scrape open.

Ah Ri clenches her teeth. _What now?_ She stoops to pick up some fallen maps, trying to maintain some semblance of dignity. "Yes? Can I help you with something?"

"Are you sure you can help me with something?" Answers an amused masculine voice. "You look like you need help more than me."

Ah Ri straightens immediately at the familiar voice.

The man who enters is clean-shaven, elf-slender in frame, and pale as most young Kim Clan men are, and he dons the blue tunic of the Tiger Fury Guard. Her lantern's light carves him away from the darkness, like a divine relief cut into a temple, not fully belonging to the wall or the living realm.

_Lord Sada Ham._ A younger officer who shares her rank, or rather...she _thought_ shared her rank. Ah Ri can't help but notice a bear-rank emblem on his antlered mogwan that he certainly did not have the last time they spoke.

Not taking her eyes off the bear, Ah Ri forces herself to give a polite bow. _I suppose anyone can be a high-ranking officer in the Kim Clan these days._ She busies herself toting her sheaf of maps. "Good evening, sir." Her gaze slides to the five guards behind him. Then to the blades at their waists. Her muscles tense. She forces her breathes to remain steady. "Is there something wrong?"

"Not at all. Just returning from patrol," Sada Ham says. "We were just looking for Commander Eun Hae."

Ah Ri stares at him, stiff-browed, wondering if the man came to stir a fight. _Do you have feathers in your head?_ "The _Commander_ hasn't returned from her trip, sir. She is not due to return for three more days."

Sada Ham's lips curl into a faint smile. "Oh? Have you not been told? Commander Eun Hae was seen at the Temple of Winds some time ago. I merely thought that she might have stopped by."

_Temple of Winds?_ How odd. That was where the Hand of Time resided, and it wasn't where a member of the Hwaranf typically paid a visit. What would the Commander want there? Immediately, Ah Ri's mind starts to race again. _Falling River Compound is a mess. The drakehorse stalls haven't been cleaned out. I don't have time to clean this all before my patrol._

Ah Ri's train of thought stops there. _Why didn't the Commander send word?_

She clearly remembers the Commander telling her that she'd arrive in the middle of the month. What cause would she have for arriving early? Surely if it was an emergency, she'd tell someone? Eyes narrowing, she studies Sada Ham's face in the low lantern light. "She is truly here?"

The square-faced guard behind Sada Ham dips his head. "I saw her with my own eyes. If you do not believe me, go scent the temple yourself."

"If you saw her, why didn't you speak to her then?" Ah Ri asks, putting her papers down. "How am I to know that?"

"I thought she might've spoken to you already by the time we finished our patrol," Sada Ham says with a shrug. "But that is no matter. I think I know where she is." He looks around the office. "Do you need help cleaning up? We can clean up here for you. I'm certain you have other things you want to get in order before your Commander gets to your compound."

Ah Ri's face burns as she remembers the mess she's made of the whole office. It burns even more at his sincerity. She'd been thinking nothing but unkind thoughts when Sada Ham hadn't even set so much as a toe out of line! Ah Ri touches the back of her neck, hesitant to meet his eyes. "You would do that for me?"

Sada Ham waves a hand. "I know how your Commander is about cleanliness in the compound. I'd rather you not get in trouble while you still have time."

Ah Ri dips her head, lips tight together. She mutters a quiet, "Thanks."

"Think nothing of it." Sada Ham stands aside to let Ah Ri out of the office. They each bow their heads politely in a cascading wave as she passes.

An almond-eyed guard at the back of the line watches Ah Ri disappear down the stairs. Once she's out of sight, he quickly locks the door. "She's gone, sir."

Sada Ham's eyes narrow. "Search everything."

The Tiger Fury move like one body: one moment as men, the next as beasts. Huge wolf-bear creatures with thick forelegs, twin tails, and wide bearish forepaws turn over every piece of furniture. They thrust their muzzles into every corner, every shelf, every nook, every cranny while the tribal animals tattooed on their backs flash to life. Roosters, oxen, monkeys, horses, and tigers pace across their owner's pelts, looking where their owner's eyes cannot see, bright forms rebelling against the office gloom.

The whole Leopard Office quivers under the unified growls of the Tiger Fury, their determined sniffing, their paws thumping the floor, and their tails slapping furniture in disregard. Glowing feebly, the tiny flame of Ah Ri's toppled lantern shrinks back close to its wick like a child frozen at the face of their own nightmare.

Before long, the five subordinates turn back to the white wolf-bear Sada Ham has become. A wolf-bear with an ox across his back says, "Nothing."

Sada Ham's ears twitches. "I expected as much." He eyes a brown-furred wolf-bear with a dragon in his fur. "Ha Jong, you are certain Ah Ri is part of Panthera Black?"

Ha Jong flattens his ears. His dragon spits tattooed flames in shared frustration. "She has to be! I found the Triple Fang here in the office."

A gray wolf-bear with a tiger tattoo bares his teeth. "That is not conclusive! They could've found it from their own investigation."

Ha Jong bristles back. "I know it's her. It had her smell all over it."

The gray wolf's ear flicks. "Or she was just the last one who touched it. I've stashed away stuff from confiscation before. I'm not the only one here."

"But it's here and it's the real deal! That has to mean _something_."

"Peace you two," Sada Ham snaps. "Having the Triple Fang is victory enough."

"And besides..." Ha Jong sits on his haunches. "Did you see Ah Ri's face when we walked in? She looked plenty guilty enough to me."

"We can't take her into custody on _looking_ guilty," The gray wolf-bear says. "The Wings of Heaven will not stand for unjust accusations. The Pak Clan will jump at the chance to fight if we are in the wrong. We can't afford to fight them, especially not with the Gayans, Baekche, _and_ the Darkborn pressing on us."

"I wouldn't be so certain, Wol Chun. Baekche has not moved at all in quite some time," Sada Ham says.

" _Yet._ It's almost time they started trouble," Wol Chun says. "They always do when it's time for trainees to come out."

"It is our duty to fight battles _when_ they happen, not look for trouble where there is none yet," Sada Ham says.

Ha Jong paces the floor. "So what then? We stand around like rabbits while Silla falls apart around us?"

"Of course not," Sada Ham says. "We'll keep an eye on Ah Ri's movements and the other Pungwolju of course. But for now we should look into the other matters Queen Seon Deok inquired about: Dae Wong's heirs in Gaya and the Magus Panthers. Ha Jong, you have Gayan family, don't you?"

Ha Jong's ears droop slowly. "Eh...They tolerate me?"

"So do we," says the gray wolf-bear, earning a glare from Ha Jong.

"Good, then see the scent fitter and have a sniff around," Sada Ham says. "As for the rest of us, that pin could mean that some Magus Panthers might still be operating in secret, possibly even mobilizing as we speak. We'll need to keep the ones in the registry under surveillance. And keep an eye out for new ones lest we have a repeat of Dae Wong's mistake."

"But sir, won't Commander Bo Jong say something if you're giving all of these orders?" Ha Jong asks. ""

Sada Ham snorts. "Only if he is a fool. The only time he has ever held real power in this guard was when Dae Wong was still king, and look at how long ago _that_ was." He shifts back to his human form. " Sada Ham pads toward the door. "Clean this room. I need to return to the manor to see about a few things."

The wolf-bears dip their heads. "Ye!"

As they turn back to clean, Sada Ham slips out of the office and into the dark snowy night.

Ah Ri steps out into the cool of the night. She looks up to the great auroral light of the Symphonic Stream shining up above past the humongous tree canopies and shivers in nervousness. _This is the worst time for experienced leadership to be away._

Just recently Bo Jong and the Tiger Fury Guard tried to deal with Magus Panthers on the border recently and he lost two of his best men. And to make matters worse there are rumors of nasty Darkborn on their own territory.

_Commander, I wish you were here to tell me what to do._ Ah Ri thinks as she leans up against the golden gates of Falling River Compound and waits for the rest of her patrol.

"Nervous?"

Ah Ri jumps at the sound of the female voice. She whips around to see the ivory face of Left Antler Wol Yun just around the corner. At once she spots the totem pole-like object hanging around her neck. " _You_ had the Harmonic Totem! I was looking all over Commander's Loft for that."

"Well, you were looking in the wrong place," Wol Yun says. "The morning patrol found it while they were out."

Ah Ri's face heats at the words. The Commander would kick her tail if she knew Ah Ri lost the Harmonic Totem.

Wol Yun comes forward to lay a hand on Ah Ri's shoulder and hands her the totem. "It is an honest mistake. Don't worry about it too much."

Ah Ri turns and rests her head on Wol Yin's shoulder. "But Wol Yun, I'm supposed to be more responsible than that. How am I supposed to be great as the Commander if I make silly mistakes?"

Wol Yun sweeps her umber hair out of her face and rests her head back on Ah Ri's. "I think you forget that Eun Hae did not make the Wings of Heaven great alone. We are one guard, one sword, one arrow to the enemy together. If we let anyone fall, we are weaker as a whole. No one here will stand by to let you struggle alone." Wol Yun lifts her head and steps back. She shapeshifts into a sleek cream creature with a wolfish-head, bear forelegs, wolf hindlegs, and two full wolfish tails and umber points on her paws, ears, tails and face. "And it's not like the Commander needs the totem for the Harmonic Command. Only you do."

The words reassure Ah Ri a little and she feels a little of the pressure lift, but not all of it. Ah Ri stands back to shift into a brown wolf-bear as well.

As Wol Yun finishes speaking, a thin and noodly feather gray wolf-bear comes out of their tree compound followed by a tan bear-wolf with jet black legs comes out.

Ah Ri perks at the sight of them immediately. "Kyu Ri! Ji Won!" She runs over to rub cheeks with them. Only a heartbeat afterwards, embarrassment floods Ah Ri as she realizes that's how a trainee approaches her guard mates not a leader. "Oops."

"Why oops?" The gray wolf-bear asks. "I'd be floored if the Commander still got that excited to see all of us."

"The Commander is always happy to see us, Kyu Ri," Wol Yun says. "But before she did not have to worry about knocking us around when she did so."

"By the way..." Ji Won begins. "Jong Hyun wants to tag along."

Warmth fills Ah Ri at the words. Left Claw Jong Hyun is a strong warrior, not much older than herself.

As they wait, a patrol of warriors in white and black uniforms approach the gate.

Ah Ri can't help but notice the confident strides of Commander Jin Yi, the slender round-faced woman leading them. Ah Ri starts to get up, but then forces herself to stay put. After all, it's what Commander Eun Hae would do. When Jin Yi gets close Ah Ri says, "Welcome back, Commander. Was the Baekche border quiet?"

"Baekche scuffled with us a little bit at Grave Road, but it was nothing we couldn't handle."

"It might be worth sending another patrol then,"Wol Yun says with a look at Ah Ri.

Ah Ri feels the weight of responsibility pressing on her shoulders. _My job..._ Ah Ri wishes she did not have to be Breath and Acting Commander at the same time.

A white, silver, and black wolf-bear steps out of the compound, drawing their attention. He bows his head respectfully to Commander Jin Yi. "Good evening Commander."

"Good evening." Jin Yi surveys Ah Ri's group and says, "I won't keep you a moment longer. Besides I need to fill our herb supply."

"Why?" Ah Ri asks. "We have plenty."

"Because this is the season young Baekche trainees officially become warriors," Jin Yi says. "They come out of training eager to prove themselves. It will mean more trouble with us. And plus, we have the Magus Panthers and the Darkborn to be concerned about. We will need as much medicine as possible if we are going to get by this season."

As she finishes speaking Jin Yi's patrol passes Ah Ri's and heads into the Compound.

Ah Ri can't help but shiver. She didn't look forward to dealing with Darkborn or Magus Panthers. Ah Ri steels her nerves. "Alright, it's time to go everyone." She takes the lead and pads out of the gate and into the snowy forest.

Red leaves float down from the rooftops. They drift past Ah Ri's paws. Ah Ri passes a small mound of snow before the sight of a white wolf-bear with black and orange splashes catches her attention up ahead.

The wolf-bear kicks their back legs up, springing up high to pin a large heron down by its wings. The heron struggles futilely beneath the wolf-bear until the wolf-bear finishes the heron off with a bite to the neck.

"Well done Bo Hui," Jong Hyun calls, his stare brimming with admiration.

Bo Hui waves her black tails in acknowledgement before letting them curl back tight like buns.

Another tortoiseshell bear-wolf white from the belly down steps out from the bushes, surveying Jong Hyun with narrowed eyes.

_There's nothing wrong here Seon Kyu,_ Ah Ri thinks. _Why do you look so grouchy?_ She notes, however, that Jong Hyun suddenly doesn't look as confident now that Seon Kyu is present. _Ah, Jong Hyun must be fond of Bo Hui._ Seon Kyu is probably keeping an eye on him.

Ah Ri can't help but be a little disappointed. She had liked Jong Hyun a little. She'd hoped that he felt the same way. With a sigh, Ah Ri reminds herself that she didn't come to the Hwarang to find to spouse and she forces herself to focus on the path ahead.

Before long the air begins to fill with an acrid sour odor.

"Yuck!" Ji Won wrinkles her nose. "We're not even at the border yet.

Wol Yun sniffs around with her nose to the snow. "It's not new. This is the same scent my patrol picked up the other day. It will go away in a few days."

"The smell is stronger up here," Jong Hyun says, walking in front of Ah Ri. "I think they've been here recently."

"Let's follow the river," Ah Ri says. "Just to make sure it's not recent."

Ah Ri takes the lead again and they follow the river northward until it veers east away from her patrol. The scent of Darkborn continues northward growing stronger. The group stops beside a boulder where the scent is nearly overpowering.

"This is definitely recent," Kyu Ri says, looking around. "I hope there's no nest nearby."

Jong Hyun sniffs under a bush. "There might be."

"Let's have a look around, but don't wander too far," Ah Ri says.

Wol Yun nudges Ah Ri. "The Harmonic Command."

Ah Ri blinks, then her ears flatten in embarrassment. She forgot she can cast that now as Acting Commander. "Thanks," she mutters. "I almost forgot about that."

Wol Yun gently lays her tail on Ah Ri's shoulder before passing her to investigate.

Drawing power from the totem, Ah Ri reaches out with her mind, feeling out for the minds of the others around her. She detects the minds of her fellow guard mates both near and far as if they were right next to her. Then she connects them all with her will. All of their thoughts flood her mind in an instant. Ah Ri slowly tunes them down until her own thoughts are clear again. Then she begins looking around.

It's not long before Ah Ri finds her first clue: a blackened goo spilled from a large broken egg. Ah Ri circles around it carefully before closing in. She stretches her neck to sniff. It's hard to tell if the eggs are broken from hatching or a patrol. As Ah Ri continues to sniff around, she detects the less offensive scent of Magus Panthers as well, however, from the smells of things it doesn't have anything to do with the Darkborn.

The movement of something dark with yellow eyes flickers in the corner of her eye. Ah Ri turns around bristling.

But she finds nothing there.

Ah Ri senses the minds of the others prodding her own.

_What is it?_ Wol Yun asks.

_I saw something move,_ Ah Ri replies. _Something that looked like Darkborn._

Immediately, the others begin to fan out and investigate their surroundings. They flatten bushes with their paws, turn over logs, and thrust their heads between thickets. However, they return to Ah Ri empty-pawed.

_I can't find anything,_ Ji Won says.

_Are you sure it was a Darkborn that you saw?_ Kyu Ri asks.

_It was something dark with yellow eyes, I'm sure it was a Darkborn,_ Ah Ri insists. She looks to Wol Yun for help instinctively.

However Wol Yun looks around and says. _There's lots of goo here. That's probably what you saw._

_But—_ Ah Ri tries to say, but the others are already splitting away, going back to their own searches. Ah Ri's shoulders slump. She feels like she's failing this patrol already. With a sigh, Ah Ri decides to go back to searching. She sticks her head between a pair of bushes.

Then she freezes.

Not far from her, a pair of eyes stare back.

At first Ah Ri is not certain she sees them, but then a head slowly emerges from the opposing bush. A hyena head. It flashes its teeth in a sinister grin, one that Ah Ri notes is mutilated. The edges of the creature's mouth is carved up as if someone tried to force the creature to have a larger smile.

Ah Ri realizes in horror that it's a Darkborn that she's never seen before. "Dark—"

Dark shapes begin to rise from all over and swarm them.

Cries of alarm sound all around Ah Ri.

Ah Ri looks around to find that they're outnumbered on all sides. She reaches out with the Harmonic Command to Bo Hui, Seon Kyu, and all of the rest of the Wings of Heaven in Falling River Compound. _Come to the river!_ She calls. _Darkborn attack!_

Ah Ri senses all of their minds become fully alert at the call before she gets bowled over by a six-legged wolf creature. Ah Ri rolls around with it on the forest floor before managing to sink her fangs into the cores on its shoulder.

The creature wails in pain before dissipating into nothingness.

Ah Ri clambers to her paws. She sees Jong Hyun nearby struggling beneath the weight of a wolf creature. Ah Ri immediately leaps in and digs her fangs into its scruff, hauling it off of Jong Hyun.

Jong Hyun manages to roll to his feet and finish the wolf creature with a deadly bite to a shoulder core. He flicks his ears to Ah Ri in thanks before plunging back into the fray.

Ah Ri spots Ji Won and Kyu Ri protecting one another's backs. Not far away she sees Bo Hui and Seon Kyu entering the fight. She can't see Wol Yun from where she is, but Ah Ri can sense Wol Yin's fierce determination blazing like a fire through the Harmonic Command.

Without warning, Ah Ri feels something sharp sink into her leg. She yelps and turns around to see a hyena with its head twisted upside down with its teeth clamped around her leg. Ah Ri swipes at it, but the hyena melts away like a ghost with a snicker.

"Struggle, struggle little wolfy," it jeers, reappearing to speak into her ear. "We know you scaredy at heart."

Ah Ri's temper flares at the taunt. She whirls to slash at the hyena, but it vanishes yet again. Frustrated, Ah Ri whirls around only to find the first mutilated hyena again.

"Don't you know curiosity kill all the kitty-cats?" It sneers.

_Since when do Darkborn talk?_ Ah Ri launches herself at it, but the hyena disappears. Ah Ri growls. _Are they just illusions?_

All of a sudden, familiar howls fill the air.

Ah Ri twists around just in time to see the pelts of her guard mates joining the fight. A new surge of energy fills Ah Ri. She jumps back into the fight, leaping onto another six-legged wolf.

However, the scuffle does not last long before her quarry breaks away from her. And so do the other Darkborn. They all begin to flee from the Wings of Heaven until only the hyenas are left.

"We not scared of Wolfies," says the mutilated hyena. "Not anymore."

The Wings of Heaven cluster together and charge at them, causing the two hyenas to flee.

"Yeah you better run!" Ji Won jeers.

Once the area is clear of Darkborn, the Wings of Heaven howl in victory.

Ah Ri does not join in. _They said they're not scared anymore._ What was that supposed to mean? Will they come back again?

Far away, a temple's chimes tinkle. Wind gathers beneath them and a cloaked woman steps out from the temple's doors. She looks into the distance to a where a city lies in the trees. A black panther comes out to stand by her side. The woman puts a hand on the panther's head. "Let's go Teacup."

Teacup touches his nose to the back of her hand and disappears, becoming a silver glyph on her skin.

"Don't get too comfortable there," the woman says. "I'll need your power."

The woman descend into the forest, pausing behind a tree to become invisible before going up into the tree city.

In the streets, children chase one another. People haggle for groceries. A man drinks openly and guffaws loudly. A couple eats together beneath an open air noodle shop. People are still being merry.

And yet unknown between them all, the woman senses a sickliness in the wind. Hidden calamity in the air. _Silla, you are more ill than you know,_ she thinks.

The woman goes behind a sign with a peach on it and becomes visible again. She takes a magic circle up to the highest level in the city to where a great slant-eaved manor rests under the auroral light. Removing her hood, she walks up to the entrance and up to the two blue-clad guards standing sentry.

The pair straighten immediately.

"C-commander Eun Hae!" Stammers the left guard. "I thought you weren't going to be here for another three days."

"I am only in Silent Bastion for a brief visit," says the woman. "After this, I will leave again and return when I promised. But I must speak with her Majesty and Al Cheon as soon as possible."

The pair look amongst one another.

"Her Majesty is currently with General Hae Baek," says the right guard. "We'll tell her you are here, but there may still be a wait."

"I will wait if necessary," Eun Hae says. "But I must speak to Her Majesty alone."

"We'll send for you when she's ready for an audience." The right guard calls for a servant. Then the pair stand aside. "Take Commander Eun Have to the Noble's Study to see Al Cheon."

"Thank you," Eun Hae says.

Eun Hae follows the servant into the vast courtyard where nobles sit around chatting on benches and huddling in their robes. The servant takes her by the stables where Eun Hae notices a gang of young men gathering.

"You think you can fight a real opponent with skills like that?" says a ponytailed young man with a scar on his left cheek. "Even Hwarang trainees who haven't picked up a sword can do better than that." Then he faces the whole group and puts his hands on his hips. "Now, who thinks they can fight _me?"_

A stable boy with a sword steps forward. "I-I want to try."

Eun Hae's steps slow as she observes his sword. It's red and silver with a phoenix icon in the pommel. Her eyes narrow briefly as she spares a look at her own blade at her side. Then her face resumes its look of nonchalance. _And where did you get a Wings of Heaven sword stranger?_

He couldn't have stolen it. The Kims would've put him to death as soon as he was found with it. But that red color. Tiger Fury blades were blue and gold.Training blades did not have any Hwarang colors. A stableboy with a real blade was strange enough as it is, but to not carry the blade of the clan he served?

Eun Hae vanishes and creeps closer in to observe.

"You want to t-twy?" The scar-cheeked young man sneers. "Come on be real."

The young man beside him elbows him in the ribs. "Look at that sword he has Bo Ri. It's from the Wings of Heaven."

"Eh?" Bo Ri leans forward to squint at the sword. Then he scoffs. "As if the Wings of Heaven would take someone like him Mijin Bu." Bo Ri pushes in closer. "Who'd you steal that from?"

"I didn't steal it," the stable boy says. "It's mine."

"Alright then." Bo Ri draws his own sword. "Prove it."

The crowd of young men stands explode back as Bo Ri lunges in for a thrust, but the stable boy blocks it.

"Yu Shin! Yu Shin!" Cheers the other stableboys in the crowd.

Eun Hae watches the boys fence back and forth from beside the stable, but then a flicker of movement near their feet catches her eye.

A small black panther half visible, maneuvers around the back of Bo Ri towards Yu Shin's feet. It crouches, ready to pounce.

Eun Hae's eyes narrow. _A Magus Panther!_ How dare someone try to cheat in a duel? _Teacup get that little panther._

Teacup half-materializes before her and leaps after the little panther, catching it by the scruff while Eun Hae becomes fully visible and marches into the fight.

"That's enough!" She barks.

A big brawny young man widens his eyes at the sight of her. "C-commander Eun Hae!"

Eun Hae looks to him. She recognizes him as Se Jong, son of the member of the Hwabaek Council of the same name.

The noblemen and servants bow their heads.

"Commander were you watching the fight?" Bo Ri asks, his eyes shining bright with hope.

"I was," Eun Hae says slowly. "And I do _not_ take pleasure in fixed fights."

"Fixed?" Yu Shin echoes.

Teacup reappears with the panther cub in his jaws.

Eun Hae lifts it up for everyone to see. Her gaze scans the crowd, gauging everyone's reactions first. The she asks. "Who's is this?"

"It's not mine," Bo Ri says quickly.

Eun Hae meets his gaze. With Teacup's power, she searches his mind, but she can't detect any signs of a lie. However, Bo Ri is too over confident for her liking. She figures that if it does not belong to him directly, then it must belong to one of his friends. "Regardless of who it belongs to, this servant was not told that it would be used in the duel. No Hwarang will keep you if this is how you fight all of your battles. Mine will not even accept you."

Bo Ri's mouth falls open. "But it wasn't mine. Why should I be punished for what someone else did?"

"In my guard, if someone does not own up to their fault, everyone is punished. Guilty or not. Keeping quiet about criminals is just as deadly as being one." Eun Hae drops the panther.

Teacup growls at it. The young panther inches away, cowering before Eun Hae's boots. It looks up at the Wings of Heaven commander with big green eyes.

"Leave," Eun Hae says.

The panther vanishes before her eyes. When the panther is fully gone, Eun Hae turns to the rest of the young noblemen. "And so should you. There's no honor in taunting those in lower positions.

One by one, the noblemen disperse and leave the stable area. Eun Hae turns to Yu Shin. "Yu Shin was it?"

Yu Shin dips his head. His eyes remain big as they fix on her. "Yes, ma'm?"

"Do not move," Eun Hae says. Then Eun Hae turns her attention to the rest of the stable boys. "All of you should go back to your duties. Your masters will not be pleased if they know you are slacking when you ought to be working."

Eun Hae waits as they to leave. Then she turns back to Yu Shin who scuffs the ground lightly with his shoes. "You fight well for a mere servant."

"Al Cheon teaches me in his spare time," Yu Shin says. "And the Grand Belle spars with me often."

_Very good influences._ But then her eyes find the blade again. "Nonetheless, it is too dangerous to be sparring with real blades. You could've seriously injured one another. Where did you get that blade?"

"I've always had it," Yu Shin says. "It's the only valuable thing I have."

_I can imagine._ Eun Hae can't help but note how earnest Yu Shin sounds. _He is probably not lying._ "Even so, that is not necessarily a good reason to keep it. Hwarang blades are made only for the Hwarang. There is only one for each man and there are each man and there are not many exceptions. To have that blade in your possession means that there is someone in the Wings of Heaven who does not have one. And if that is true, I have to execute you, sir."

Yu Shin's eyes grow until the whites are visible all around. "I didn't steal it. Honest I didn't!"

Eun Hae holds out her hand. "Let me see the blade."

Yu Shin looks down at his blade with pursed lips, then he hands it over hesitantly.

Eun Hae takess the blade with both hands, examining it. Two small dragon bird phoenixes frame the musical staves on the side. Inside, Eun Hae recognizes the song of the Wings of Heaven engraved on the grand staff. But that is not what gets her attention. What gets her attention is the tiny tick mark marring the edge of the right phoenix.

Her own eyes widen. _It really is that same sword._

Eun Hae glances at Yu Shin studying his wide-eyed face. Yu Shin looks away with his eyes squeezed shut as if already prepared for judgment.

However Eun Hae merely holds the blade out to him. "Here."

Yu Shin opens his eyes. He blinks at her, looking confused. "You're not going to take it?"

"I do not have the right," Eun Hae says.

Yu Shin takes the blade back looking both relieved and elated. "Thank Mother Bear."

"There is one more thing I would like to see."

Yu Shin turns his big brown eyes back to the Commander again. His eyebrows crimp in confusion. "Huh?"

"Your Soul Bonds," Eun Hae says, showing him her panther glyph.

Yu Shin freezes in place. His mouth opens and closes. He draws a step back. "Ma'm please no. Don't make me."

Eun Hae frowns. Just as she suspected. _Your reaction says it all._ "That is fine. I know what it is." She shifts her weight from one leg to the other. "And I'd advise you to join the Hwarang."

Yu Shin sheathes his sword back at his side. "But ma'm they'll make me show what I have."

"A new guard is coming," Eun Hae says. "One that will not ask such things."

Yu Shin's lips purse a second time. "But I am a servant. No one would take me in."

"Not true. You have that sword," Eun Hae says. "You have the right to join any Hwarang. However, if you are not joining the Wings of Heaven you will not be able to use the blade that you have. Right to wield it or not. But you play a dangerous game if you choose to remain here."

Yu Shin frowns and hangs his head, staring at his feet for several heartbeats. Then his head raises again. "Were you busy Commander?"

At those words, Eun Hae realizes that she completely abandoned her first escort. "I was supposed to be on my way to see Al Cheon in his study, but I've lost my escort." _But it wasn't such a bad idea to come this way after all._ It may even be vital that she did so.

"I can take you Al Cheon," Yu Shin says.

Eun Hae follows Yu Shin into the main foyer and up the stairs to the second floor of the manor. He takes her all the way down to the end of an open corridor and raps lightly at the last double doors. "Al Cheon sir. Commander Eun Hae to see you."

"Commander?" Comes a masculine voice from inside. The double doors part to reveal a muscular swarthy man bedecked in blue and gold tunic with the tiger sigil of the Kim clan over his right breast and black pants. His jaw drops at the sight of Eun Hae. "Commander it is you!" He opens the double doors all the way and steps aside. "I thought you weren't going to be back for another few days."

"Necessity called me back." Eun Hae steps inside. "I hope I didn't interrupt anything of importance."

"Not at all." Al Cheon closes the doors behind her. "Just preparing what I plan to bring up before at the clan meeting. We're going to discuss what to bring up before the Hwabaek Council soon."

Eun Hae smiles. "Then I arrived just in time. That's just what I wanted to talk to you about."

Al Cheon moves to sit behind his desk. "I'm all ears. Honestly, it hasn't been easy for me to figure out what to bring up. My head is for battle and security, not for sitting around with these old nobles."

Eun Hae chuckles and walks up to the desk. "I wouldn't be so quick to make fun of them. You are getting up there in age."

Al Cheon laughs. "Not any time soon! I've still got plenty of sword swinging life in me!"

At the mention of the word time, Eun Hae's smile slowly begins to fade. _There is much less of that left than you realize._ "It is very important that you try to loosen the restrictions on creating a new Hwarang guard."

Al Cheon's smile wavers. Then his face contorts in confusion. "Loosen them? Why? I thought they were fine."

"Right now, the restrictions don't allow anyone who isn't of noble blood to do it, even if they are full citizens. Foreigners can't even be in one at all," Eun Hae says.

At this Al Cheon says nothing.

"Al Cheon speak to me. Say _something,"_ Eun Hae pleads.

Al Cheon raises a hand to rub the back of his neck. "With all due respect Commander..." His voice trails as he looks away. Al Cheon purses his lips. Then he sighs.

"Just say it, Field Marshal. I can handle it."

Al Cheon lowers his arm. " _Foreigners?_ Really? _"_ He leans back in his seat. "I can understand wanting to push on loosening the restrictions on letting noble blood make a guard. But asking to let foreigners have their own guards isn't going to go over well."

"I'm well aware," Eun Hae says. "And I don't expect you to convince them all by yourself. Your best bet is trying to convince Bo Jong, General Hong Do, the Grand Belle, and Her Majesty first. Perhaps even some of the other nobles the Grand Belle is close to like Myung Hwa. If you try to get them onboard at the Hwabaek council, everything will fail."

Al Cheon folds his arms, frowning.

All of the hope inside Eun Hae begins to dwindle as Al Cheon shakes his head.

"Commander, I want to trust you. I really do, but Silla has plenty of young loyal men. Even if we let a nobody lead a guard, how would we know they won't mess it up?"

Eun Hae huffs. "I was a nobody when I came to the Wings of Heaven, remember?"

Al Cheon's shoulders slump. "Everybody's not you Commander. And you're Sillan."

"Maybe so, but I was not a patriot in the slightest, Perhaps worse than a foreigner in that regard," Eun Hae says. "But that is beside the point. Just as new trainees train under their elders, one guard can serve under another until they've proven themselves."

Al Cheon gives a heavy sigh. "But you know how the people feel about where a man comes from."

"I know, but it is those feelings that will get Silla killed and overrun by our enemies."

Al Cheon studies her face. "You must have someone in particular in mind."

"Someone will step forward," Eun Hae says. "If these things aren't in place, I fear Silla may not survive."

"I wish you would've said that part first," Al Cheon says. "It might be tough, but I think I can find a way to make that happen."

Eun Hae breathes a breath of relief. Then her face becomes serious again. "It is of the utmost importance that you do not tell anyone that this person will come. Don't even discuss after we've left this room."

Al Cheon blinks, looking puzzled. After a moment he nods and says. "Consider it done, Commander."

"And there's one more thing," Eun Hae says.

"What's that?" Al Cheon asks.

"If you can, see if that old Fenris chain case is still available to be investigated."

"That old case?" Al Cheon scratches his head. "Why?"

"Make sure that you hold onto it for our compound. I suspect some new things may come to light." As soon as Eun Hae finishes speaking, there is a knock at the door. Al Cheon gets up to get it.

A servant with large ears and gold tasseled shoes bows before them. "The Queen is ready to see Commander Eun Hae."

"Very well. I'm afraid we'll have to cut our time short Al Cheon," Eun Hae says.

"Not a problem," Al Cheon says. "I need the time to prepare anyway."

"Good luck with the Hwabaek," Eun Hae says before leaving the room.

The servant waits for Eun Hae to enter the hall before quickly taking off in the lead. Eun Hae rushes quickly to match the servant's pace. The servant leads her out past the manmade garden under the Symphonic Stream's icy blue light and into a great pavilion where servants shuffle to serve tea to a gold-clad woman with a gray streak in her coil-braided hair with arrow shafts, feathers, and arrowheads in front of her.

The servants' eyes turn to the approaching pair and they bow, stepping back to allow Eun Hae and her escort to approach the Queen. Eun Hae bows before the Queen. "Good to see you, Your Majesty."

The Queen nods at the acknowledgment before picking up her tea and sips. "And you as well, Your Majesty."

Despite her words, Eun Hae can't help but note the Queen's downcast tone of voice. "Your Majesty...is something amiss?"

The Queen sets the cup down. "More concerns seem to crop up than good solutions." Then she straightens. "But Silla will get through it as we've done in the past."

Eun Hae frowns at the emptiness in the Queen's voice. _You don't seem to believe that Your Majesty._ Truthfully, Eun Hae does not blame her. The danger to Silla's future is too great this time.

The Queen takes a piece of a bright blue feather, dips it in an adhesive, and sticks it to an empty arrow shaft. "What brings you here? I was told that it was urgent."

"I wanted to ask if it might be possible to send men to guard the Air Seal," Eun Hae says.

The Queen looks up. "The Air Seal? We have men in Stone Bear Pass."

"Yes, but the attack have been intensifying from the north. It's been a handful at that border."

The Queen tilts her head, looking away for a little bit. "I will consider it and bring the issue to the Hwabaek. But I cannot promise you that it will be done. Everyone is far more concerned about Baekche now than they are about the Darkborn. The Generals and other Hwarang are reluctant to spare any men from Silent Bastion. Especially when my husband has not returned from the capital."

"Not returned?" Eun Hae echoes.

The Queen nods, her expression becoming grim. "They were preparing to stop in Aeternum Ruins from what I hear, but I haven't received any correspondence. My husband has capable men with him, but Seung Man and my own mother is with him as well. I don't want to think anything ill happened to them, but..."

"Say no more, Your Majesty," Eun Hae says. "I will take some of my best men to see what happened. I'll ask the Lion Heart to accompany me."

The Queen's heavy frown lifts slowly into a relieved smile. "I would appreciate that greatly. Though I wish that it wouldn't take away from Silent Bastion's defense."

"May I suggest that perhaps it's time that some Hwarang restrictions be lifted so Silla can have enough men to defend it? Let some guards come up from the commoners and the diligent foreigners among us."

The Queen's eyes only narrow at the words.

Eun Hae feels her heart sink. _No different than Al Cheon._ "At least temporarily?" Eun Hae adds. "Until conditions grow better. And to see how things unfold."

The Queen shakes her head. "You are asking me to fight an uphill battle, Commander."

"But if it could mean Silla's well-being?"

The Queen only sighs. "Forgive me, but I will have to think much longer on that one, Commander. At the very least I respect that you are bringing more answers and not more problems. But please let me alone for now."

Eun Hae frowns. "Very well." She bows and steps back.

The large eared servant motions back to the manor. Eun Hae walks behind him. _I've done all I can do._ But whether or not it is truly enough is another matter altogether.

"What do you think, my sea?"

Deok Man does not respond and instead the lithe white wolf-bear takes a cautious step into the pale blue nursery. Her gaze narrows at the ball and toy blocks already scattered on the floor. Her twin tails twitch irritably as she looks at General Hong Do. "You moved Seung Man's things in here _without_ telling me?"

General Hong Do's round bear ears flatten at her sharpness. "My sea, this is the last room available in Kim Manor. She will be _fine._ Min Ah stayed in this very room when she was an unweaned pup, remember? _"_ At the sight of his wife's rising neck fur, the General adds, _"_ Besides, Seung Man and Chun Chu seem to like it here."

Deok Man exhales through her nose, glancing briefly at the white and black pups wrestling and giggling on the nursery floor. "The Magus Panthers that killed Seung Man's parents might return for her. And I'll not have her hurt just because you like the maid's decor-sense."

General Hong Do pads closer to touch his nose to her ear. "The nursing attendants are right across the hall. _We_ are down the hall. The imperial guards _and_ the Tiger Fury patrol once an hour. Seung Man is safe."

Deok Man turns her head away, fixing her stare on the tiger talisman on the crib. How could the man be so blind? There had been just as many guards patrolling for Guk Ban and Wol Myeong. Even more for her own sister Cheong Myeong. And a Magus Panther _still_ murdered them all. "I'd much rather keep Seung Man in our quarters."

He lays his head over her back."Then I will _double_ the amount of patrols here for you, and have the attendants check on her every ten minutes. Will that suffice?"

"No." Deok Man shakes him away. "Only that crib is warded. The whole room needs to be warded."

"I didn't have time to have everything warded, but for now Seung Man only needs to be here when she sleeps," General Hong Do says.

Deok Man's ear twitches, giving her husband a hard stare. "And you think Seung Man will stay in her crib? Are you jesting?"

General Hong Do grits his fangs. "For _now_...We can bring her in when she is tired and have guards take shifts in here until the room is warded."

Finally, Deok Man's posture relaxes. "Good. Has His Majesty said anything about his agenda for the rest of the Magus Panthers?"

General Hong Do stretches his neck tentatively towards his wife's face. When she doesn't shrink away, he settles down to groom her. "All he's ever told me is that he doesn't want to offend them. I doubt he'll say too much in court today."

Deok Man pulls back from her husband, skin flaming hot under her pelt. Doesn't want to _offend them?_ Has Dae Wong lost his mind? What do murderers care for courtesy? But before she can speak, a pained squeal makes her whirl around to find Seung Man's mouth clamped on Chun Chu's ears while his black paws flail at her face.

Deok Man bristles. "Seung Man let go of the prince right now!" She scoops the tiny black pup away from Seung Man.

Seung Man stamps her paw. "But _eomma_ , he booped me first! He booped my snoot and called me a Bok-Bok chicken, but he's a bigger Bok-Bok chicken!"

An indignant growl comes from between Deok Man's paws. "I am _not_ a Bok-Bok chicken! Take it back!"

Seung Man sniffs. " _Make_ me, Prince Chicken."

Chun Chu's black pelt fluffs up as he glares at Seung Man. "You're a bigger Bok-Bok chicken!"

"See _eomma_?" Seung Man whines pointing at Chun Chu with a paw. "Chun Chu's a meanie chicken!"

Chun Chu steps out from under Deok Man, only to be stopped by her huge white paw on his tail.

"Oh no you don't," Deok Man huffs. "Another peep out of you two and I'll boop you both." Deok Man lowers her muzzle to sniff Chun Chu's ear. Relief fills her when she doesn't smell any blood drawn. She smoothes his fur down until it is glossy again while glancing at Seung Man.

The white pup pointedly turns her back on Chun Chu, snowy tail high, and a loud, " _Hmph!_ "

Deok Man rolls her eyes. "You two squabble more than the birds outside my quarters."

General Hong Do chuckles. "My sea, you know they'll be friends again by tomorrow." He prods Seung Man gently. "Come here, Sul Li. I'll show you a secret battle move."

Seung Man's tail curls at the sound of her nickname. She bounces to her paws. "Battle moves?"

"That's right. The next time you get booped, you can put one over on the prince," General Hong Do says.

Deok Man swats at her husband's shoulder with her tails, but he dodges with a laugh. "Ooh, you're just as bad for encouraging her!" She gets up, but a warm wriggling at her belly stops her. She glances at Chun Chu to find him curling into her fur and closing his eyes, then she looks at Seung Man who darts between General Hong Do's legs, trips over her own paws, and bounces back up with all the vigor of a monkey on fire. _If only Seung Man were this easy to tire out!_ Then she wouldn't have to worry about her staying here! Deok Man picks up Chun Chu by his scruff and lowers him into the crib. _You can stay here until after the meeting._

A knock sounds at the door. A feminine voice says, "His Majesty and Prince Seo Hyun to see you."

General Hong Do straightens up, shifting into his human form. He picks up Seung Man. "Come in."

Deok Man shifts into her own human form as well, smoothing her blue and gold robes.

Powerfully-built, dark hair pulled into a top knot, and face a tan mask of ice, King Dae Wong enters the room. Behind him, his son Prince Seo Hyun couldn't be farther from his father's image: warm expressive eyes with an equally welcoming smile and moon-pale skin as he dons the red and black tunic of the Wings of Heaven guard.

Deok Man bows, uncomfortably aware of the King's gaze boring into her. When she rises, she takes Seung Man away from her husband and lowers her into the crib.

"No, _eomma_!" Seung Man squeaks, kicking her hind legs in protest. "I'm not tired!"

"Seung Man, you can play as much as you want when I come back from the council meeting if you behave," Deok Man says.

"But—"

" _Shh!_ "

"Where is Chun Chu?" the King asks.

"Making better use of the nursery than Seung Man is," General Hong Do says, with a nod towards the black bundle of fur nestled in Seung Man's pillow. "She tired him out."

"Then I'll send for him after the Council meeting," the King says. "No need to disturb him."

"And speaking of tiring people out..." General Hong Do smiles at Prince Seo Hyun. "I heard that you wore out those Baekche soldiers at Daeya Fortress, Your Highness. Well done. It's territory we needed badly."

Prince Seo Hyun ducks his head. "You praise me too much, sir. The Thunderwind pack were the ones who fought the hardest."

"Thunderwind?" the General echoes. "You mean those kisaeng-warriors?"

Deok Man ushers Seung Man away from the crib railing and then looks over her shoulder. When the prince had announced that the Wings of Heaven would accept a whole pack full of trainees from the kisaeng house, nearly all of the Kim Clan had flocked to her in the outrage that she chose to honor the Wings of Heaven as a real Hwarang guard with the other Clan leaders. It's a good thing that it turned out well for the prince's sake. The Kim Clan was agitated enough with the royal family as it is. One more mishap and she's certain they'll take up arms with her orders or without. _Perhaps I can finally have a night's peace around here._

King Dae Wong's gaze meets Deok Man's—who quickly looks away and studies the prince with a sudden great interest. "I'm glad that you could turn them into warriors Silla can be proud of, Your Highness. Mother Bear knows we need all the strong warriors we can find."

The prince's gaze flits away briefly. "They definitely are something." His lips curl into a small smile. "Eun Hae especially..."

"Eun Hae?" Deok Man echoes.

The prince's eyes widen. He clears his throat. "Er...Yes. She's the leader of the Thunderwind pack. And Heart Jin Yi is brilliant as well. Commander Yong Chun has taught her well."

"I'll have to thank them personally some time," General Hong Do says. "You all saved me the trouble of sieging it myself. If there weren't all these panthers running around here, I'd join you on the front. Baekche tails are my favorite ones to kick."

"Speaking of panthers..." King Dae Wong puts an arm around his son's shoulder. "I'm sure you'll both be glad to know that we've caught the panther that killed Seung Man's parents."

"Good," General Hong Do says. "And his punishment?"

"It will discussed in today's meeting. But I doubt anyone would object to the death penalty."

General Hong Do straightens up. "Where is he? I want to see the bastard myself."

"Seo Hyun, show him," the King says.

The prince bows his head. "Ye." Then he gestures to the door. "This way, sir."

The pair hurry out of the room, and the silence between her and the King mounts until it's nearly palpable. Keeping her gaze down, Deok Man breathes slowly to calm the palpitations in her chest. Was he waiting for her to say something? "Your Majesty—"

"Are you satisfied now?" The King asks.

At his sharp tone, her gaze flits up immediately. "Pardon?"

His bearish eyes thin at her. "Is that not what you wanted? You were so quiet when I said we caught the Magus Panther. I thought a head rolling across the floor would please you."

Deok Man's jaw tightens. "One panther head rolling solves nothing. Another can easily replace it."

"What would you have me do then, Deok Man? Behead an entire nation because you are scared?"

Deok Man balls her hands into fists."I don't care what you do with them. Magus Panthers _don't_ belong in Silla."

The King's nostrils flare. "Silla _needs_ the Magus Panthers to survive. Have you forgotten Baekche and Korguryo's forces outnumber us? We finally have an advantage they don't."

Scoffing, Deok Man folds her arms, "What use is a sword if you cut your hands on it again and again?"

"We will find out who that panther is allied with and punish _them._ I will not condemn anyone who is not guilty of a real crime," Dae Wong says. "If you could learn to look past your own nose—"

"I _am_ looking past my own nose!" Deok Man snaps, trembling. "Do you know how hard it is to sit and do nothing while my family dies? Do you know how it feels to look in the eyes of everyone in my clan and tell them that they should do nothing about their murderers because their king tells them so? Sometimes we all wonder if you want to watch us all die like King Jin Ji did." As she moves to step around him, the King bars her path.

"You know that's not true, Deok Man," he says, reaching out to touch her face with a hand. "I would fight like all of the First Ancestors for you."

She stops his hand with her own and for a heartbeat his warm cedar scent is in her nostrils. "That may be, but I'm not the one you need to convince of that."

"Then why don't _you_ forgive me?" The King asks. "What else have I done that you still punish me?"

Deok Man bites her lip and slowly pushes his hand back. "Nevermind the Magus Panthers. _You_ are the one who should be afraid for yourself and your family. I can't support the path you walk."

The King stares at her. "Will you bear a grudge forever, Deok Man?"

Deok Man looks up at him, her throat drawing tight. She swallows and utters a choked, "I need to go." Without waiting for his response, she leaves the room and shuts the doors behind her.

The King rubs his face with a hand.

Seung Man rears up on her hind legs, peering over the railing. "What's the matter, Your Majesty? Did _eomma_ boop you too?"

King Dae Wong sighs. "I suppose you could say that."

"It's okay! Boops only hurt for a little bit!" Seung Man chirps. "I get booped all the time!"

He approaches the crib, regarding the white pup thoughtfully. "You two are very lucky. You two don't have to think about the wars beyond Silla's borders. You don't have to make a choice beyond where you want to play and what toy you want to take with you." He gives Chun Chu a soothing pat. "You two don't even have to choose who you will fall in love with because you both have each other." The King pulls his hand back and looks at Seung Man. "Choices are pain."

Seung Man cocks her head. "Pain?"

"Yes, little one." He turns away and strides for the door. "A sheep of the flock will always be safe and cared for, but lone wolves have more enemies than there are stars in the sky." He punctuates that statement by closing the doors behind them.

Seung Man pokes her nose between the crib bars, watching him leave. _His Majesty sure doesn't seem happy. Maybe eomma booped him really hard._ Then she pads around, prodding the blanket lumps. " _Abba_ didn't put any toys in here."

A sleepy growl comes from Chun Chu. "Then go to sleep."

Seung Man huffs. "I thought you were soooooooo tired, Prince Chicken?"

"I was trying to sleep, but _somebody_ keeps jumping up and down on the bed." Chun Chu rubs his eyes with a paw. "Why don't you just play with the toys on the floor?"

"The bars are too high," Seung Man says, swatting the railing with her paw. "I'm too small to get over."

Chun Chu raises his head and looks around. "What about if you used some of the pillows? Here." He jumps down and nips the edge of his pillow dragging it to the railing. "There."

Seung Man stands on top of the pillow and plants her paws on top of the railing. She tries to hoist herself up from pillow, but her hind paws scrape uselessly against the bars. "It's no use. It's not high enough."

"Hold on." Chun Chu steps on the pillow. He nudges her leg with his nose. "Get on my back."

Seung Man looks down at him before lifting one leg onto Chun Chu's shoulder and then another.

Chun Chu grunts as he pushes up from the ground. "Ugh, do you only eat rice cakes? You're so hea—" A sharp kick to the ear makes him squeal. "Ow! What was that for?"

"Oopsie..." Her tone is not apologetic in the least.

"Well, can you reach over yet?" Chun Chu asks. "This is starting to hurt."

"Harrr!" Seung Man scrabbles to get her front half over. "Hey! I think I— _whoooooop!_ " Seung Man falls onto the floor with a thump. "Ow!"

Chun Chu peers between the railing. "Are you hurt?"

Seung Man gets up and gives her pelt a shake. "I'm okay. I think." Then she looks up at Chun Chun shyly. "Sorry I called you a Bok-Bok chicken earlier."

"It's okay. Sorry I booped you," Chun Chu says, his tail wagging. "But how are you gonna get back in?"

"Uhh..." Seung Man looks around. "I don't think I can. But it's only until the grown ups get back from the meeting-thingy."

"Zzzzz...booooooooring _._ " Chun Chu stretches and curls on the pillow with a yawn. "When I grow up, I'm not going to those stupid meetings. I'm gonna be in the Hwarang like my brother."

"And how are you going to be in it when you can't even beat me at wrestling?" Seung Man asks.

Chun Chu does not respond.

"Hey don't ignore me!" Seung Man barks. She eyes his still body. _You're not asleep, you Bok-Bok Chicken._ With a snort, Seung Man scampers away to play with her ball, smacking it out from the corner. She chases after it.

Behind her, the air in the corner shimmers. It blackens into a solid feline shape. One of the panther's ears swivels towards the door.

No one is coming.

Paws soundless, curved claws slowly splaying, eyes fixed on her prey, the panther slinks closer to the distracted pup. She shifts into human form and reaches into her red Wing of Heaven tunic for a black-linked chain. The Magus Panther reappears on the back of her hand, lifting its head in interest.

Neck fur tingling, Seung Man stops. Her ball falls out of her mouth. She looks behind her.

No one, but a long black chain and a small phoenix emblem that was not there before.

Seung Man stretches her neck to sniff the emblem curiosly. _That is Eun Hae's scent._ Then she turns her attention to the chain. Is it a toy? She prods it with a paw. It pulses softly with blue light. _Ooooh, it's magic!_ Seung Man prods it again and the chain pulses even brighter. Giggling, Seung Man abandons her ball entirely and scampers around the chain poking it.

The woman turns her attention to the crib and slinks closer to it.

However, a soft gold light envelops little Chun Chu. It stretches upwards transforming into the shape of a great winged angel. The angel faces the woman with a blade of light barring the way to the young pup.

The woman backs away with her eyes wide. She reverts back into her panther form and vanishes as quickly as she came. Once the woman is gone, the angel vanishes leaving Chun Chu and Seung Man alone again.

Without warning, one end of the chain rears and surges toward Seung Man like an adder.

Fur on end, Seung Man jumps away, but the chain loops around her hind paw and trips her. "Chun—"

The chain muzzles her.

Seung Man struggles to scratch it off. But the chain only burns and worms into her snowy fur like a parasite. Seung Man's eyes water. She whimpers as loud as she can.

Chun Chu stirs, raises his head, blinking at the harsh light.

But all he sees is the chain brand into Seung Man's body before she finally falls still.

### _1-1_

"YOU JUST ABOUT finished back there, Kurai?" calls the voice of Mr. Okinawa from the back of the barn.

"Almost," I say, tyin' up the bag of wool in front of me.

Mr. Okinawa steps in, closin' the door right behind him. "When you're done I need you to deliver some fresh groceries down to Chloe's."

I set my current bag of Suffolk wool aside and set myself to start tyin' up the next one. "Did she pay already?"

Mr. Okinawa grabs the first bag by the knot. "Yep. So all you've got to do is take it down there."

"Alright will do." I finish scooping up all the sheared wool and put it into big trash bags.

Scrawny and his cherubic face pink as a pig's behind, Mr. Okinawa's young son comes waddlin' into the barn. "Kurai! One of the lambs got caught in the fence."

"In the fence?" I finish tyin' up the bag in front of me. "Show me, Chewy."

Chewy runs ahead of me outside and waits at the door. I walk out after him.

The golden sun flashes bright in my eyes as it rests over the distant forest hills. Chewy picks his way down a worn dirt path that leads through the chicken coops. He pauses to open the gate that leads out to pasture. We walk all the way down to the forest's edge where the fence stands between us and the trees. I spot the tiny black-headed lamb squirming beside a bush. It bleats weakly as I kneel down beside it.

One of the lamb's legs hang limp and bleedin' close to the hind hoof. I touch the lamb's knee carefully.

"Baa!" The lamb squirms in protest.

"I hear you buddy," I say. _I can dab some marigold or marshmallow on it._ "Chewy do me a favor. I need some marigold. Can you run down to the flower patch and get me some."

Chewy gives me a blank look. "What's marigold?"

I reach into my pocket and take out a small book. I quickly turn the brown pages until I get to one with a sketch of drawn ball-shaped orange flowers. "Here's what it looks like."

Chewy takes the book. "I think I know those." He turns and takes off running along the fence.

I turn my attention to the lamb again and pull out the shears. I take the stuck leg and carefully snip the stuck wool away from the lamb's leg. The lamb wriggles and pokes his mouth around the ground near the fence. "What are you gettin' into now?" I mutter.

Once the lamb is free I turn it around to see what the darn critter is mouthin' on. I catch the sight of somethin' red and glassy. "Oh no you don't." I pry open the lamb's mouth with my right hand and take out the object to find out that it's an hourglass of sorts. It has red sand in it and has a red wing on the side. But only on one side. The other must be broke off or somethin'.

I open the lamb's mouth to check. "I hope you didn't eat it." But I don't see any glass in the lamb's mouth.

Chewy returns with my book and a fistful of marigolds. "Here Kurai. There wasn't a whole bunch."

I hold the lamb between my legs. "That's alright. This should be enough." I reach down for my satchel, untie it and take out a little bandage roll, before taking the marigold and biting off the heads. I chew the bitter herb into a poultice and smear it onto the lamb's cut leg. Then I wrap the lamb's leg with the bandage roll and snip off the excess roll. I let it go.

The lamb limps with its new dressing and bleats at me.

"There you go you trouble maker," I say, puttin' away my bandages. "Take him away Chewy." I shift my attention to the hole in the fence. "You might want to put somethin' in front of that so none of the other animals think about tryin' their luck." I pick myself up and dust the dirt off my pants. Then I hold the hourglass out to Chewy. "Is this yours?"

Chewy shakes his head.

"I'll ask Mr. Okinawa then," I mutter. I head back into the barn where Mr. Okinawa finishes linin' the wool up against the wall. Mrs. Okinawa stands at the door with bags in hand.

At the sight of me, he reaches in his back pocket for my check, "Here you go."

I take the check and slip it into my own pocket. "Thanks Mr. Okinawa."

Mrs. Okinawa comes close. "Here's the groceries for Chloe's."

I take them in one hand. "By the way, did any of ya'll drop this hourglass thing?"

Mrs. Okinawa adjusts her round glasses as I hold it up to her. "No. I don't have anything like that."

Mr. Okinawa squints up his wrinkled face. "Looks like something Chloe might wear. But she don't come 'round the back of the farm like that. You might as well keep it. 'Round here, it'd only get tromped on or dirtied."

"I'll just take it with me then," I say. "See you on Tuesday."

I leave the farm and pick my way in between Fala and Rhett's dark brown cottages. I squeeze between the fences with the groceries, carefully trying to avoid the poison ivy. I spot Fala's plump curly-haired wife pullin' weeds out of her tomato patch.

She stands up, lifts her wide-brimmed hat and waves at me. "Hey Kurai, where are ya headed off to?"

"Down to Chloe's," I say. "I've got to deliver these groceries and catch up with Tora and Yuna. They got my groceries too."

"Well I won't keep you." She gets back down on her knees. "See you 'round."

"See you." I move on through the fences and out to the other side where Chloe's Tavern sits as an upside down barrel-shaped buildin' between the island's air harbor and Delekti Deck's grocery market. I tent my hand to shield it from the sun as I cross the street. Then I open the door.

Inside, it's crammed with people all with bingo cards and dabbers on their tables.

In the back behind the counter, Chloe's copper-skinned daughter Thali turns the bingo cage with a hand until an ivory ball falls from the cage. She picks it up. "O67! Who's got it?"

There's a faint shiftin' and rufflin' as people look over their papers. Some dab diligently, others sit with frowned up faces, or, in the case of Crazy Pip, hunch over his papers and rubs his lucky rabbit's foot, mutterin' to himself like he's just about ready to channel the spirits of the bingo gods, which nets him some worried looks from Mr. and Mrs. Okiwara at the table nearby.

"What in the heck are you doing?" Mr. Okiwara asks.

Pip sniffs. "I'm playing bingo. What do it look like?"

"Bingo my cornfield! You look like you're trying to put a voodoo curse on everybody," Mr. Okiwara says.

Mrs. Ueda cups a hand to her ear. "Bingo?"

Giant frame squashed at the table, Rhett lifts his head, nearly bumpin' his head on the hangin' lights. "Holly, you got a bingo already?"

"No she don't. Her card ain't even got anything on it. " Pip snaps. "Tho'. Her. _Out!"_

I raise both eyebrows. Somebody ought to knock Pip's head off. Every Friday, it's the same darn mess. "Good gods, why you always have to be so savage, Pip? She just had a question."

"It's taking away the luck," Pip says.

I glance at Thali who only roll her eyes at Pip's theatrics. _Geeze, people can't even say the word bingo._ I put Chloe's groceries up on the counter. "Here's your delivery."

"Thanks Kurai," Thali says, taking the groceries in her own hands and goin' to the back.

As soon as she leave, a strong pungent odor waft from the back of the tavern, so strong that I cough. I bring up the collar of my shirt to shield my nose. Gee, what is that?

Rhett's face is the second to squinch up. "Woowee...What is that? Weed?"

"Yup." Maven comes in from the back, grinning while holding up a styrofoam box. "Our secret special garlic pot naan."

"Garlic pot?" Mr. Okiwara asks, adjusting his tweed cap. "Since when does Chloe have that?"

"We always put cannabis in stuff if people ask," Maven says. To Thali he says, " _Mele,_ hurry up with those wings. These need to go asap and there's still a lot that needs to be done."

"They're not done yet," Thali quips. "Where's Chu? He's supposed to deliver this."

"Chu?" Maven echoes. He scratches his head. "Haven't seen him." He goes into the back callin's'. "Chu!" When there's no answer, Maven comes back and shrugs. "I don't think he's in the restaurant."

"How is this gonna get delivered then?" Thali asks.

"Where does it need to go?" I ask. "Maybe I can take it."

"It needs to go to 4267 Chogo Ave in Kage Village," Thali says. Then she puts her hands together in a prayin' position. "Could you please take it? It would save my life right now."

_4267 Chogo._ I think I know where that's at. It shouldn't be too hard. "I can take it."

Maven puts his hands together too and gives a perfect ninety degree bow. "Thanks, _mahalo."_

Thali puts her hands on her hips. "But Chu...When I get my hands on him..." Her voice trails, but fists make a tearin' motion. "He better not be out there smoking."

_Chu you're in for it wherever you are._ But that only makes me wonder where Chu is too. It ain't like him to just not be around for work. _Though it would be like him to be smokin'._

The tavern door opens and two beast monks, one snow leopard and one tigress, walk in with groceries. They set them down next to the counter and the snow leopard raises his hands to sign, _No change._

"That's alright, Tora. I wasn't expecting any," I say.

Yuna, the tigress, signs, _Is your shift over yet?_

I shake my head and take the box of garlic pot naan up. "Yep, I'm waiting on something so I can deliver it."

Tora's whiskers twitch at the box. He sniffs once and his lips curl all the way back. With jerky hand movements, he signs _Why is that?_ For a minute, I think maybe he meant to say _what is that_? But with the way he's jabbin' his unsheathed claw at the weed box, I think he meant what he said the first time.

Maven leans a brawny arm on the counter. "That's weed, Tora. People smoke it to relax. Or bake it into stuff like brownies. Mrs. Ai might do it if you ask her."

Tora's green eyes go wide, lookin' most insulted at the suggestion. _Weed in Mrs. Ai's brownies? Unthinkable!_

"Hey, don't knock it until you try it," Maven says. "And by the way, that's going to a Kiyoko Wu in Kage Village when you go out. Address is on the box in case you forget."

"Well, heck. This Kiyoko is sleeping good tonight," Rhett says with a smirk.

"Who is Kiyoko?" Mrs. Ueda asks. "How come I've never heard of her?"

_New Kage resident,_ Tora signs.

_Wish that she lived here in Honeythorn._ As much as I don't mind helpin' out, I hate havin' to do stuff this late. The place ain't far or anything, but it's outside of Honeythorn's cozy little nook meaning that I gotta go by the guard shack, and the Dragon Palace guards are always crabby about lettin' us out for deliveries if we don't have any 'important mail'. "I really don't wanna go out there alone." I glance at Tora. "You want to tag along?"

Tora wrinkles his nose at the box. _No thanks._

I turn to Yuna. "What about you? You want to come with me?"

Yuna chuffs happily. _Of course!_

Tora's jaw drops. He gives a questionin' mew, then his paws start wildly signin'. _Yuna! What about our plans?_

_Oh it won't take long._ Yuna puts both paws together briefly in a 'pretty please'. _And besides, it's been ages since I've been outside the temple!_

Tora's ears droop. His paws fall to his sides.

Maven chuckles. "You heard the lady, Tora. She's going."

Tora scowls, his huge paws curl and uncurls. Yuna purrs, proddin' him. Then finally Tora sighs, the gray rosary beads around his neck clacking as he shakes his head and grumbles. He signs, _Fine. I will come too._

"I'll make it up to you with extra food for the game tomorrow, Tora," I say.

The timer goes off and Thali opens the oven. Heat and the welcome scent of buffalo wings plume from it. Tora looks at them longin'ly from over the counter as Thali packs them in a plastic bag and pushes it towards me.

Maven claps a hand to my back. "Good luck and stay safe out there. Alright?"

"I will." I pick the bag up. "Come on guys. Let's put those groceries at home."

"Speaking of home..." Rhett begins. "Are you still keeping Dollie for me? I've got to help my buddy set up the booth when the republic gets here."

"Yeah, I'm free all day tomorrow. Just bring her after the ceremony. Are you ready for the game?"

He raises an eyebrow. "Me? Tch, are _you_ ready to see the Black Ravens lose again?"

"Hey, man..." I jab a finger at him. "I already got Akane on my back about the Black Ravens. I don't need you on it too."

Rhett folds his hairy arms and boom out a loud, "Bwahahaha! No offense, but the Black Ravens ain't gone to the Quiverbowl since I was a kid. Ya'll know I gotta tease ya."

I snort. "Don't count out the underdogs, Rhett. Never know when they'll surprise you."

But Rhett's still smilin'. "I'll probably be long gone and dead by the time that happens."

I ignore Rhett and turn to Yuna and Tora. "Are ya'll ready?"

Tora signs, _We should tell Master Ushi that we're going out of the village, so he saves us dinner._

Yuna huffs and signs, _You want to eat again?_

Tora's whiskers twitch. _Yes. We still should tell him regardless._ _Master Ushi might send someone out_ _looking for us if it gets too late._ He picks up his groceries and is the first to scurry out.

Honeythorn Village lays out easy alongside one wide dirt road that leads to the airstrip and the sky beyond. The sun is cozyin' down behind the forest trees behind the village gates and the air is buttered up and cajun-spiced from Fala's Duelin' Crab just across Chloe's Tavern. This time of day, ain't nobody stirrin' much 'cept for Mrs. Ai who's luggin' flour out of Delekti Deck's for her bakery 350 Degrees. Only bit you can see of folks is the beer-gold glow in the windows and their shadows mosyin' by.

Yuna and Tora flank me as we sweep down the east side of the street until we stop at the dark brown two-story cottage where I live. Once at the doorstop, I find the door already cracked.

"Somebody left the door open?" I push my way in to find my uncle Yong Chun all suited up and fiddlin' with his hair in the mirror. "You're sure dressed up nice."

"I'm going out with Chloe tonight," Yong Chun says, without lookin' up at me. "Did you see her when you clocked out?"

"Actually, I've still got a delivery. I just stopped cuz Tora and Yuna got groceries for tomorrow." I say. "But I didn't see her leave yet. Is she comin' here?"

My uncle doesn't seem to hear me and instead pats around his suit pockets. When his hands grasp a small lump, he takes a shaky breath. "If you're leaving the village, take my sword with you. Stay safe."

I almost open my mouth to ask him about Chloe again, but he looks so jittery, I feel like I'd only make him even more nervous. _What are you so jumpy for?_ I ain't never seen him this worked up since he tried coffee for the first time. "Alright, Yuna, Tora, can you put those up for me? I need to go up into the attic."

Yuna nods enthusiastically and elbows Tora to get him to stop spacin' out. He nods too.

As they turn away, my roommate Gio comes down the stairs, beige Yoshi's Delivery service hat still on his head. He peers at my uncle, then at the food I brought. "Is something going on tonight?"

"He's goin' on a date," I say. "I'm goin' out."

Gio makes an 'o' shape with his mouth and slips into the kitchen. "'Scuse me then. I'll just be in my room all alone with no one to love me." He punctuates his statement with a dramatic sniff.

"No you won't," I say. "I'll be back to talk smack to you in about an hour."

"Oh really?" He peers into the fridge. "Aww yessssssss. Avocados!"

"Avocados that ain't for you nosy. I'mma knock your head off if you eat all that food I just bought. That stuff is for tomorrow's game," I say.

"What? Aww noooooooo." Gio backs away from the fridge with a frown. "Well at least we're eating good tomorrow then. Guess I'm eatin' noodles and a ham sammich tonight."

_You say it like it's a bad thing,_ Tora signs.

I leave them and go up the upstairs. I stop briefly in my room to throw my farm apron on the bed before heading up into our attic.

A beam of soft moonlight slants in, breakin' up the darkness. I feel around on the wall and turn on the lights. It's spotless up here. My uncle must've been up here to pray at his altar. He always prays and cleans before something big.

I approach the altar.

Two dragon censers sit at their edge, their mouths still smokin' with pine incense. All of our family heirlooms lay strewn across it: tiny gold statues of wolves and bears, phoenix emblems, a thick leather tome, my old dragonbird necklace. A hangin' scroll paintin' of a woman hangs behind it over another table, but my uncle's sword rest is empty.

I put both hands on my hips. _Why the heck did he tell me it's up here if he moved it? Unless..._ I lift the edge of the painting.

White and black robes that I ain't never seen before hang behind it. There's a leather belt, boots, gauntlets, and a leather breastplate, even a white antlered cap with a lion crest emblem on it. His sword lays sheathed in the corner, but instead I lift the cap up, touchin' the antlers.

I knew that my uncle and I came to Honeythorn from somewhere else, but he was always tight-lipped about where exactly and all other details about our life. His only answer about what he did was "officer". I'd always pictured him more like a security guard just sittin' and givin' face to the crooks (that's all I've seen security guards do anyway), and I figured the sword was more of a hobby he picked up. But this _..._ it almost looks like a full-on military uniform.

I pick up the sword sheath by its shoulder strap and put it over my head so I don't have to carry it. I cast a look back at the uniform. _How come he ain't never showed me?_

The sound of footsteps meets my ears. I turn to find Tora and Yuna walkin' into the room. _Slowpoke,_ Tora signs. Yuna elbows him with a glare.

"Sorry guys, I got a little caught up lookin' at my uncle's stuff," I say. "I'm ready to go."

Tora tips his head and looks at the uniform. _Your uncle was in the military?_

"I don't know what he was," I say. "He ain't ever told me nothin' about what we did before we got here. He don't like talkin' about it."

_Really?_ Tora asks. _Nothing._

"Nothin'," I say. "Now C'mon. Let's go."

When I go back downstairs, I find Gio makin' himself a sandwich.

I grab the food from the counter. "Did my uncle leave already?"

"No, he ran upstairs for something looking like a nervous wreck." Gio slathers mustard on his bread. "Kept asking me about his hair so much that he's got _me_ nervous."

The doorbell goes off and Yuna gets up to answer it.

Black strapless dress huggin' her curves, rose gold hair swept over one shoulder, Chloe steps into the livin' room. "Good evenin' ya'll."

Tora and Yuna both put their hands over their mouths.

Gio puts a fist to his mouth, tryin' to hide all of his grin. "And who might this fine lady be?"

"You look really nice, Chloe," I say.

She runs her hands through her hair. "Thanks. Is your uncle here?"

"Yes!" My uncle rushes down the stairs. "I thought maybe I forgot to tell you to meet me here."

"Oh no, I was just cleaning up the guest rooms at home," Chloe says. "I didn't mean to come late."

"Guest rooms?" Both of Gio's eyebrows go up. "Is something special going on tonight?"

Chloe huffs. "It's for my relatives if you gotta know, nosy. I always let them stay over."

"They ain't stayin' with the UKR?" I ask. Chloe's family is all the way from Pua'alowhe. As far as I know, their livin' arrangements are supposed to be taken care of by the palace.

Chloe puts her hands on her hips. "No Pua Moana worth a darn would make their family stay somewhere else! We _always_ stick together."

"As family should," Yong Chun puts a hand around Chloe's waist. He clears his throat, "Shall we?"

Chloe smiles at him. To the rest of us, she waves, "Have a good night, ya'll."

"You too," I say.

Yuna and Tora see them off with a wave.

"Come on you two," I say. "Let's go to the temple."

"Tora for the last time I don't know where I'm from," I say pickin' my way over the puddle-pocked path to the temple."

_But how can you not know anything?_ Tora presses. _You don't even have an idea from the old stuff you have?_

"My uncle never told me. You'd have to bug him."

_Have you ever asked?_ Tora asks.

I huff. "You think I ain't tried? Every time I ask, he don't want to be bothered."

_I'd still ask him_ , Tora says.

I shake my head. "You wouldn't have no mouth left to ask."

Tora and Yuna lift their paws, amused.

I roll my eyes. "Hush up. Ya'll know what I mean."

_But still, it's odd that he doesn't share anything about where you came from,_ Yuna says. _I mean he doesn't hide your belongings. Why hide your heritage_?

Tora will say, _Shame, maybe._

"Naw, if Uncle was shamed he'd burn it or throw it out," I say.

_Where do you think you're from?_ Yuna asks.

I pause. "Hard to say. Can't be from anywhere off the island because we don't have any kind of passport. Maybe one of the villages on the other side of the island, but I don't see why he'd be so shamed of that. They're just like here 'kept the food is worse."

Tora's eyes pop open wide in shock. Then he huffs. _You obviously haven't tried the peach cobbler from Kage._

"Sure I have Tora," I say with a smarmy grin. "350 Degrees is better hands down. Heck, I could probably make a better one and I don't fool with bakin' much."

Tora rolls up his sleeve like he's fixin' to punch me, but Yuna steps in between us.

_They are both good,_ Yuna says. _Peace you food critics._

Tora cuts his eyes at me, then folds his arms briefly before signin'. _I was peaceful! He's insulting food._

"Just my opinion Tora. No need to..." My voice trails as I feel runny mud squelch under my shoes. It's caking up so bad that I barely feel the layer stackin' up on the bottom of my black tennis shoes, and the cold dampness wellin' up through my socks. Yuck at its finest. "Ugh. I can't wait to be back home."

Middle Path Temple perches on a stone bed that rises three times over my height. With a single tower that reaches for heaven, it looks like a castle right out of grandma's book of fairy tales.

Yuna, Tora, and I bow at the gate in a brief rite of respect then we walk in.

Two older beast monks trundle under the eaves of the inside walkway: a lioness and a jaguar. They dip their heads to us.

_Welcome,_ the lioness signs, _I was almost beginning to wonder if we'd have to send someone after you. It's almost dinner time._

_We're going with Kurai to deliver something to Kage,_ Yuna says, gesturin' to the box. _Do you know where Master Ushi is?_

The jaguar sniffs curiously and then recoils.

_Don't ask,_ Tora says.

_Master Ushi is out in the statue yard,_ the lioness says.

Yuna tips her head to the side. _I thought he hated being out there._

The lioness shrugs. _He's been going out there a lot these last few days. He should still be there now._

_Thanks. And save me some dinner?_ Tora signs.

The two other monks laugh.

_Always thinking with your stomach,_ the lioness signs back. _I suggest you hurry then._

The three of us head deeper into the wooded area of the temple where memorial statues of past Tao Masters lay spread around, underlit by the temple lanterns. Despite their serene postures and expression, I can't help but feel uneasy. This place _is_ still a cemetery after all.

We find Master Ushi in front of a statue with his head bowed, bushy brows furrowed, and his feelers curled in tightly. At our approach he looks up, "Kurai. Been a while since you've been here, hasn't it?"

"It's been busy at Mr. Okinawa's," I say. "I can't really get out much until the weekend or a holiday. But what are you doin' out here?"

Master Ushi scratches his grizzled beard, lookin' up at the statue in front of him. "I've been having the same peculiar dream lately. I'd be walking out here and Heaven would be standing right here at this statue."

I look up at the statue, but it's the face of a Tao Master I don't know. "Maybe you've been eating something bad. I mean it's not like a person can come back from the dead, can they?"

Master Ushi's crimson gaze flicks away. "I suppose not."

_Speaking of eating!_ Yuna signs excitedly. _We came to ask if we can go with Kurai to deliver food._

_Can we take the back gate?_ Tora adds. _It'll be a hassle to go around to the guards._

"I don't mind you two going with him if the guards let you out, but I'm afraid that the temple is under strict orders from my brother not to let anyone out," Master Ushi says, his golden feelers straightenin' out. "There's a search going tonight. They're not looking for people per say, but some of the villagers in Kage have been reporting strange people in the woods that have been harassing villagers for food. The guards might attack first and ask questions later if they mistake you for them."

"Thanks for the warning," I say. "I wasn't planning on taking the main paths anyway."

"Before I forget..." Master Ushi says. "Your partner-in-crime is studying, make sure you stop by at some point and wish her luck."

_Luck?_ "For what?"

"Studying for her Ambassador Merit Exam," Master Ushi says. "The Republic representatives will be testing her tomorrow. Izumi didn't tell you?"

I blink. _Well, shut me up._ "I know she said she'd be busy this whole week, but I didn't pry."

"She's been studying here to get some peace and quiet from the palace." He stops in front of a pair of large double doors and slides them open. "But it would be nice for her to remember that there is still a world outside."

_Maybe I'll have to treat her to Wakiwi's or somethin' before Rhett brings Dollie._

We turn 'round and backtrack all the way to the village again. The wood fencing from Mr. Okiwara's farm follows the main road all the way down to the arched double gates and the guardshack that stands between the Honeythorn and the woods.

Three of the Dragon Palace guards are on duty and two of them are cuttin' their red eyes at me like I tinkled on their momma's graves. The last big fella is just flippin' through his checkout clipboard all nonchalant like he just wanna to be off the clock. He don't even look up. "Sorry, man. Nobody goes through."

I lift the box in my hands. "I need to deliver this food to Kage Village."

"Are your ears working fella?" The reedy dragon behind him leans against the counter. "Nobody includes you."

Tora folds his arms and cuts his eyes right back.

Yuna signs, _How come? It's for an important client._

Catfishy-feelers stretchin', the big dragon shrugs. "King's Orders. We could get in trouble if you go walking through here."

"Well, are one of ya'll gonna deliver this food to Kiyoko Wu then?" I lower the box. "I don't need Chloe lookin' at me funny because I didn't get her money. And I don't feel right holdin' onto some lady's weed bread either."

At the mention of Kiyoko's name, the two dragons in the back start makin' big eyes at each other. The big fella in front scratches his black stubble, then he looks at the two in back. "I think we ought to let him through."

The other dragon that ain't spoke says, "But we'll get in trouble."

The big guy says, "We'll get in trouble if that don't get delivered. And besides, since Professor Hart ain't around anymore, where are we gonna get locusts and wild honey from?"

At this, Tora's eyes bulge wide. He hastily signs. _Why would you want that?_

"Chop em up and put em in elixirs," The lead guard says. "Prophets keep a lot of good magic ingredients."

Tora's lip curls and he covers his own mouth.

"I don't think they can taste it after they mix it up, Tora," I say.

Tora huffs. _That is still gross!_

Yuna steps up to the counter. _What do you mean Professor Hart isn't around anymore?_

"You haven't heard? Professor Hart died," the reedy guard says.

" _Died?_ She just asked me to make her a big pot of pumpkin and goat cheese soup," I say. The Professor always been around here on the island since I was little. How in the heck can she be gone in a snap?

The lead guard shrugs. "I don't know the details of everything, but the woman you're delivering to is the one that's replacing her so I'll tell you what..." He puts the clipboard down. "You all go through the back of the shack and keep off the main paths. All the guards out there aren't going to give you a chance to explain yourself. But if they do, we didn't see you and you didn't see us. Got it?"

"Don't you worry your whiskers, sir. I ain't seen nobody," I say.

Tora and Yuna put their hands over their eyes in agreement.

"When you're there..." He makes his voice all quiet-like and slips a red silk coin purse onto the table. "You ask her to give you as much locusts and wild honey that this will buy. If she says, she don't have any, just bring back my money."

"Or else," the reedy guard adds, snortin' smoke out his nose. "We know where you live."

"Ya'll ain't gotta worry about all that," I say.

"Now come around back..."

_I can't believe you,_ Tora signs as soon as we're out of the guards' earshot. _Taking bribes!_

I scoff. "And what am I supposed to do, Tora? Just stand around with this stuff? Chloe would knock my head off."

_If we gave her the coin purse and just went home—_

Yuna slaps Tora upside his head. _Then we'd have to explain to the guards why we have no locusts and honey._

Tora rubs the back of his head. _Tch. I could fight those guards if they gave us trouble. They've never guarded a thing in their lives except their own chairs._

_You would still get Kurai in trouble. It's not worth it._ Yuna says.

As the two squabble, my arms start to ache. As the two squabble, somethin' bright and gold flickers in the corner of my eyes. I turn my attention to the left where the trees and squint.

It's hard to see what it is exactly, but the gold thing burns bright in the darkness. It's tall, shaped like a person, and standin' half hidden behind somethin'— a wall since that's the direction the ruins are in.

As I stand there tryin' to tell what the thing is, I can't help but feel a strong pull towards it as if it were callin' me without words. _What is that?_

_"Kurai...Kurai..."_

I take a step toward the gold thing. It's hard to tell if the voice is male or female from here. I pivot 'round to Tora and Yuna. "Guys, do you see that?"

Tora and Yuna stop their fightin' and turn to me. _See what?_ Yuna asks.

"That gold thing..." I say. I turn back to point to it, but the gold thing is gone. "It was just right there. I just saw it."

Yuna tilts her head, frownin'. _Are you sure you didn't just imagine it?_

"It was there darn you. I know my eyes don't trick me," I retort. "And I heard them call me. I think we should check it out."

Tora and Yuna exchange a baffled glance.

_Why?_ Yuna signs. _Nothing is there._

Tora frowns up. He puts his paws on his hips before signin', _Okay..._ _Do you plan on delivering that food this year? We don't have time to waste out here. And besides, all the people that know you, know us. If they want to see you, why don't they just approach us? It could be those strange woods people trying to lure us into a trap._

_Call them,_ Yuna says. _Whoever it is ought to answer._

I cup a hand close to my mouth. "Hello. Anyone there?"

But there's no answer.

_See? Just your imagination,_ Tora signs.

"Well I think somethin' is out there," I say. "Let me just check."

Yuna's whiskers twitch. _By yourself?_

"I've got the sword. I'll be fine," I say.

Tora scrubs his paw over his face. _You're really going after it._

"You ain't gotta come if you don't want to."

The haze of trees open up into a clearin' of a crumbly limestone fortress, (or maybe a castle, it looks like it coulda been one, but most of the upper floor ain't intact). Deep claw marks gouge the outer walls most everything around here, some of them ticked as though whoever lived here was keepin' score. Stone wolf-bears, one with pointed ears and another with round ones, stand sentry beneath worn vine-ridden archways, ears alert for enemies they'll never fight, but a warm familiarity in their eyes that seems to say, _Welcome home_ instead of _Hello stranger._

I put the box down on a pedestal and poke my head inside.

I catch a fleetin' glimpse of gold disappearin' around the corner. _So you are in there._ But as I step in, I feel a tug on my sleeve.

_You're leaving the food?_ Tora asks.

"It'll be fine," I mutter, my gaze trailin' to the inside of the ruins. "I'm sure. Let's take five. If somethin' happens, ya'll holler."

Yuna nods enthusiastically. And Tora looks at the food box and just kicks at a rock.

I leave the two and stroll deeper inside. The corridors are in the worst shape: chunks of wall missin', wolf-bear heads severed from their owners' shoulders, cracked wall busts and pillars that are the last of their sets, phoenix statues with only one fragmented wing left as if the others were purposely knocked off. Nothin' here is labeled and there's no writin' of any kind on anything here. It makes me wonder if the people who built it even wanted to be remembered by anyone.

I walk into the next room where I find the flicker of gold again hangin' close to another doorway. This time the shape is different, small and four-legged, sort of like the lamb I patched up earlier.

_"Kurai...Kurai."_

Goosebumps prickle up on my neck. But as I head toward the lamb, it disappears again. I chase after it from room to room. The gold lamb always stays just close to the next room.

_"Kurai...Kurai..."_

"What are you?" I breathe.

Eventually, I find myself runnin' round the corner to the biggest room which is the fortresses' heart. Sixteen tattered flags hang from the walls in different colors and each having a different animal. Tigers, dragons, phoenixes, bears, wolves, hawks...most too torn to say, but sweepin' weakly in the dark as though tryin' to hold onto what they used to be. Beneath them, a winged phoenix chair sits at the back of the room. Two totems of all the flag animals stand at the east and the west. The lamb is nowhere to be found.

_Where did that darn thing run off to?_ I take the sword off and lay it beside the chair so I can sit down. I sigh. _Maybe I am loony._ With no lamb to show for my efforts, I decide to look around at the flags more closely.

One flag is black and white. There's an ear of somethin' gold and some pieces seem to be stitched on, but the emblem is too fragmented torn to tell if it's a lion like my uncle's uniform. _I wonder if he did that himself..._ Probably not if what Tora says is true and he does come here to sit. And I reckon that if my uncle comes to any room, it'd have to be this one. He used to bring me here for walks, but he stopped when I started to ask about it. When I pestered him, he only said, " _Forget about it._ "

Heat swells up in my veins. _You obviously didn't forget about it. So why should I?_ We've lived in our cottage for years, but this place is still the one that feels most like home. Even with every crack in the wall, even with every broken stone, even if this place is no different than a bird with a wing too broken to fly, there's always the feelin' that I'm safe, that someone is lookin' out for me. How could it be so bad just to say a few words?

I clasp my hands together. _If you won't tell me, I'll figure it out myself._ I look at my watch. I'll give it five minutes, then get back to walkin'. Leanin' back in the chair, I start to close my eyes, but a gold brightness catches my eye and they buck open wide.

The lamb slowly steps in the room, gold tendrils radiating from its body. Then slowly, it transforms into a lion, so growing bright that my eyes struggle to stay open.

_What in the blazes?_ I put up a hand to shield my face.

The brightness engulfs the entire room and everything changes into a scene of a throne room. Six huge tapestries hang from the walls. Angelic bein's crowd the room, turnin' towards me and movin' aside to the sides to make an aisle. At the head of the room next to the throne, stands the lion. It brightens then shapeshifts into a tall angel as well. Intense brown eyes meet my own as its left wing sweeps towards the throne.

My heart races faster and faster. Are they all talkin' to me?

Then without warnin' the scene fades. The lion is left but it too fades.

I blink. _What was that all about?_

_"Sssssss."_

Huh? I look around to see what made the noise.

A shadow slithers around on the floor.

_What the?_ The back of my neck ices up. _What in the name of Phoenix Bumble pie is that?_ I rub my eyes to make sure I'm seein' it right. That shadow ain't attached to nobody.

It picks itself up off the ground and turns all hunched like little goblin with an eggy head. It stares at me with two bright yellow eyes and a crooked musical symbol on the forehead. _Sssssss._

I get up and inch away. "Err. You can have the chair back. I ain't gotta have nowhere to sit."

The goblin raises its arms above it head and starts runnin' at me, shriekin' like a psycho.

"Hey! Hey! Hey!" I back toward the wall. Rememberin' the sword, I yank it out of place and draw it. "Get back you! I don't hug strangers. Tora! Yuna!"

_Whoosh!_

An arrow spears the goblin right in the middle of the crooked note and it falls right over, twitchin'. Then it disappears.

I look around to see where it came from, but no one seems to be in here but me. "Hello?"

A flash of white makes me look up.

There's a woman crouched near one of the holes in the ceilin'. She jumps down, white cape flarin' and a bow in her hand. Her dark gaze sweeps the room warily.

My skin prickles as I take in her uniform. White headband. Lion crest. The tunic. The boots. _It's the same one my uncle has!_ She _has_ to be from where my uncle is from. "There was only one, miss."

Her attention snaps to me, lookin' me up and down. She cranes her neck a little, peerin' at my sword.

_Maybe she doesn't understand?_ "Miss? Do you speak English?" I say each word slowly. "I said the monster—"

The woman draws another arrow from her quiver, this time aimin' at me. "Put the sword on the ground and step away from it."

I gawk. "Huh?"

Her steely gaze narrows. "Are you hard at hearing? Down unless you and your friends want to die tonight."

Heart in my throat, I do what she says. And as I do, I notice shadows around the room slowly materializin' around us. _Real_ wolf-bear and bear-wolf creatures surround us, pupils reflectin' back eerie blue and green shines. Four men, in the same white and black uniforms escort Yuna and Tora into the room. One man holds Kiyoko's food, his face twisted in disgust. He dips his head to her. "The perimeter is secure, Commander. The outsiders had this strange parcel. I think they're both food, but one of them smells foul. I don't believe it's a poison. Just some weird ingredient."

"That's cannabis," I say.

"You were not asked to speak, outsider," The woman says curtly. "I'd advise you to keep quiet."

_But what in the heck did I even do wrong?_ I look at Tora and Yuna, but the two look as helpless as I feel. _These must be the folks harassin' the people at Kage..._ My breath catches.

My uncle... He couldn't be out here talkin' to these crooks, could he?

A black bear-wolf stretches his neck to sniff at the sword. "Commander, this is a Lion Heart blade."

"I know," the Commander says. She puts her bow away and picks it up, examinin' the blade for a long time. After a long uncomfortable moment, she looks up at me. "Even if I chose to forgive your trespass, do you realize that I have full right to execute you for having this in your possession?"

I blink rapidly, my breaths goin' shallow. "E-exceute? But my uncle never told me that! He just said take it with me to keep me safe."

Her expression doesn't faze. "Your uncle huh?"

"Do you know him?" I ask.

There is a beat of silence, then she sheathes the blade. "You've got me curious enough to find out. Come, outsider."

I blink, watchin' her cape swish behind her.

She pauses and looks over her shoulder. "Do you need to be told everything twice?"

"Uh no. Sorry." I follow her down another corridor. "What about my friends?"

"I doubt you all share the same uncle," she says. "I assure you they'll not be hurt."

The woman takes me into another room of wolf-bear and bear-wolf statues where a brown-haired woman in a red and black uniform speaks to two guards in matching uniforms. "Everyone is accounted for?"

"The Grand Belle wasn't with them," The taller guard says. "We picked up her scent, briefly but it smelled like her path crossed with the Gayans. I'm not sure if a whole tribe is here, but it smelled very close to it. We told the General to join us here when they were ready."

"Very good. I'll discuss the Gayan matter with Jin Yi and General Hong Do when he gets here. For now, rest and get ready in case things come to a battle."

They both dip their heads to her. "Ye." Then they take off.

My spine tingles at the words. _They're a real military!_

At our approach, the other woman's head turns. "Well speak of the Fenris, here she is. Something wrong?"

"I'm not certain yet. I wanted your opinion on it," Jin Yi says. Then she holds the sword out to the other woman.

The red-clad woman frowns, raisin' an eyebrow at Jin Yi. "Your sword?"

"Not mine." Jin Yi leans in, whisperin' somethin' to low for me to catch.

The other woman's gaze slides to me. "Uh-huh..."

Jin Yi steps back, gesturin' to me. "What do you think?"

Her lips curl into a smile. "I'm not one to butt into another Hwarang's affairs, but..." She puts a hand on her own sword, drummin' her nails on it. "You've got me _very_ curious now. Who are you, stranger?"

Ice threads through my blood. "I'm Kurai, ma'm."

"I didn't ask for your name." She draws the blade out. "I asked for who you _are."_

My hands start to get clammy. I look at Jin Yi, but she's doin' the same with her own sword. "What's the difference?"

"Family, lineage..." The woman taps my chin with the flat of her blade, makin' me look at her. " _Birth_ name..." Her grin widens. " _If_ you have one, of course."

My heart hammers so hard that it hurts. I feel like I'm on some kind of weird survival game show where you die for givin' the wrong answer. I summon a shaky breath. "My uncle's name is Yong Chun. I never knew my mother or father. I've been livin' in Honeythorn all my life. That's about all I can tell you."

"And your name..." The cold steel of her sword glides along my throat. " _Kurai,_ was it?"

The shakes run through my hands. "Yes, ma'm."

The woman lowers her blade. "And where are you going, Kurai?"

I let out the breath I didn't even know I was holdin'. "J-ust up to Kage Village to deliver somethin' with my friends."

"Then who are we to harass an honest stranger?" She sheathes her sword. To Jin Yi, she says, "I'll personally escort him to the edge of the clearing. Please bring his friends there."

When Jin Yi turns to leave, I call, "Wait a minute. Can I have my uncle's sword back?"

"If it really belongs to your uncle, then I'll put it into his hands myself," Jin Yi says.

"But how am I gonna to defend myself then?"

Jin Yi snorts. "Even if you had it, it would not save you. I saw the way you swung that thing. A wet noodle could protect you about the same." Without waitin' for a response, Jin Yi strides away into the other room.

_Yeah, but that ain't yours, pal..._

"Don't worry about the sword," The woman says. "Jin Yi might have a sharp tongue, but she will honor what she says. Come."

I follow her out into another corridor. "Well, I suppose I don't have a choice, do I?"

"Oh there's always a choice," She folds her hands behind her back. "You made some very smart ones tonight."

I shrug. "But I really don't know where I'm from. That's all my uncle ever says about where I'm from."

"Then you have a very smart uncle, my friend," She says, glancin' at me. "That's all anyone needs to know about you. Where we come from, a bad name can curse a man's descendants long after he's gone."

Curious, I peer at her. "And where is that?"

The woman laughs. "I could tell you, but your uncle went through such pains to be smart. I won't be the one to ruin all his effort."

"Why keep it a secret?" I blurt out. "I just want to know a little bit."

The woman beckons to me with a finger. When I'm close, she leans in. "A thought isn't safe just because it's in your head." An amused glint dances in her eyes. "That's why Jin Yi brought you to me _._ And you're very fortunate that Jin Yi can't see what I saw in your mind, Mr. _Kurai_."

My stomach tightens. _She knows my real name then._ "Why didn't you tell her then?"

"I could but... you chose who you wanted to be tonight. And like I said...who are we to harass an honest _stranger_?" She says, stoppin' at the edge of the forest trees. "But if I were as curious as you, I'd take the bridge past the monkey statue clearing to get to my destination instead of following the stream."

My nerves tingle again. "If you were the one curious', I'd have to wonder about your interests in life."

The woman looks up at the waxin' moon, smilin'. "I'm sure you would. But I think what you find there would make you reevaluate your own."

"If you don't mind me askin', who are you, ma'm?" I ask.

"That depends." She leans against a tree. "Who am I speaking to?"

_Again with that..._ I stick my hands in my pockets. "Just a curious guy."

"Is that so?" She tucks a loose strand of hair behind her oval face. Her body fades, leavin' just a faint hint of her mouth behind. "Then I'm just a concerned bystander."

"Which makes me wonder what you're so concerned about," I mutter.

Her warm chuckle follows. There is a hint of a cat-like purr in it. "The thing you're curious about, of course." Then she disappears completely.

I wave a hand in the spot where she disappeared. _She really is gone._ At the sound of footsteps, I look up.

Jin Yi comes with Kiyoko's food in hand. Tora and Yuna follow behind her.

I brace myself for a scathin' remark, but Jin Yi hands the food to me quietly and leaves without comment.

_See? I knew it was a bad idea to stop,_ Tora says.

_Did you even find what you were looking for?_ Yuna asks.

"I guess you can say I did..." I look back in the spot where that woman disappeared. "I found a lot more than I was bargainin' for."

By the time we get to the crossroads, my mind is still reelin' from meetin' those sword-swingin' folks at the ruins. I'd always thought my uncle had been keepin' stuff from me just so he didn't have to talk about it, but to think all his secret-keepin' saved my—

A sudden tug on my sleeve jolts me out of my thoughts. I look at Yuna whose jade eyes are wide.

_I hear someone coming,_ she signs. _We should hide._

Tora points towards a huge thicket. _There._

We tip over quietly and huddle in the bush cover.

A man wearin' a blue cloud-pattern tunics come out ridin' from the eastern path on a strange horse creature I ain't never seen before. Thick white featherin' drapes each hoof like some kind of shire horse, but a long beard runs down the underside of its snout. Gold feelers undulate from underneath it's nostrils: the same kind of feelers like Master Ushi and the dragon folk at the palace, but with the way it's snortin' fire, I doubt it'd be willin' to have a chat.

Two men in the same cloud-pattern tunics come from the west path, hunched and low like the sorriest-lookin' dogs I've ever seen. They stop and bow.

"Well?" The horseman demands. "Why are you empty-handed? You took long enough."

"Uh..." The chubbier of the two look at his partner and dip his head. "Sh-sh-she got away from us, sir."

The horseman bares his teeth. "Got _away?_ How? You ignorant— _"_

"Sh-sh-she screamed at us, s-s-sir!" The pale guard stammers.

The horseman's eyes narrow and even his weird dragon horse is givin' the two the mean-look. "Screamed at you? You let the Grand Belle go because she _screamed_ at you?"

"It wasn't like that! She didn't just scream at us," The chubby guard mutters. "She kicked me really hard in my weak knee too."

"Yeah, and she kicked me in my dragon pearls, sir!" The pale guard says.

"I told His Majesty that you were bringing her! What am I supposed to tell him now? He'll lower my pay!" He reaches over and smacks both of them upside the head. "I ought to take it out of both of your wages!"

The two guards look at each other with moon-wide eyes and drop onto their knees, grabbin' onto the horse creature's legs.

"P-please sir!" The chubby guard pleads. "I've got a wife and kids!"

The pale guard stares at him. "No you don't!"

The chubby guard sniffs. "Speak for yourself!"

The horse creature snorts and turn away from them like it don't want to be bothered with either of them. The rider scowls at them. "If His Majesty hears about this, your wages are the _least_ of your concern. Come back with the Grand Belle _tonight_ or don't come back at all _._ "

The pale guard lifts a hand. "But what about dinner, sir? We haven't eaten sir."

The horseman yanks a whip from his saddle bag and cracks it at them. "Insolent wretches!"

"Ow! Ow! Ow!" The two scrabble to their feet and run off back down the path they came.

The officer lingers a little to watch them leave, then wheels his mount around and canters off where he came.

Next to me, Tora and Yuna look at each other.

_And I thought growing up at the temple was hard,_ Tora signs.

_At least they're gone,_ Yuna signs, peerin' over the leaves. Do _you think those are the guys that have been harassing people?_

"It's gotta be." I stand up. "They were talkin' about kidnappin' some grand something or other..." That woman at the ruins said somethin' about not being able to find somebody. _It's gotta be the same girl._ But they were talkin' about a battle too. Things could get real ugly around here tonight if we stick around here. _And those two went down the path towards the bridge too._

_By the way they were talking, there might be a lot of them in the area,_ Yuna signs.

_And we haven't even run into any guards yet,_ Tora says. _Maybe we ought to go north. We'll have to go around the stream, but there's plenty of cover to hide in._

Yuna folds her arms. _But if we take that route, it's so long. We ought to go by the lake. It's much shorter._

Tora snorts. _But much more likely to get us stopped by someone._

_Not if we hurry!_ Yuna pulls my sleeve. _Kurai, which way do you want to go?_

I press my lips together.

_"But if you really can't quell your curiosity, you might try going through the bridge past the monkey statue clearing to get to your destination instead of following the stream. I can't promise you that you'll be safe if you go there, but you'll likely have all your questions answered."_

I look at my delivery box, then at the crossroads. _I've fooled around long enough on this job._ Thali and Chloe would hang my hide out with the laundry if she knew I fooled around like this. I really should just go on to Kage. "I think maybe..."

_When are you ever going to get another chance like this? Uncle Yong Chun will never say anything. Those folk at the ruins made it clear they'll just turn you into chopped liver if you ask._

I swallow. "How about we go to the bridge?"

Yuna and Tora both squint at me.

_Again I have to ask..._ Tora asks. _Do you want to deliver that package this year?_

"There's something over there that I have to see guys," I plead. When Tora's eyes narrow, I turn to Yuna. "Just this once. I'll never ask again."

But Yuna just scrub a paw over her face. Her shoulders slump as she sighs. _What's so important that you want to go almost ALL the way around the whole island?_

"I want to find out about my family," I say. "No one will ever tell me."

Tora signs, _And how is that going to help?_

"The woman at the ruins told me that if I wanted to find out then I should go there," I say.

He huffs, _And you believe her? They almost killed us!_

"But they let us go and they didn't hurt any of us."

Tora and Yuna just stare at each other. Tora shakes his head and turns away.

Yuna's paws curl and uncurl. Then finally she says, _Fine. But this is the last request. We go straight to Kage and we go straight back OUR way._

"Thank you guys," I say.

Tora glares at me, jabbin' my shoulder with a claw. _You owe me food for a week. Breakfast, brunch, lunch, dinner, desert, and midnight snack! I'm gonna wake you up when you never feel like it and be like: GIMME FOOD NOW!_

We sneak to the west side of the crossroad and creep along the western path. Those two guards aren't anywhere in sight, but the Dragon Palace guards start to become more and more frequent, walkin' up and down the roads with torches in hand. Soon the path stretches up to the clearin' of broken monkey statues where a bunch of dragons stride around, some with clipboards and others with torches. Tora, Yuna, and I keep low against the bushes and creep slowly around the outer edge.

"She was crazy, man. I swear..." one guard near the edge says as he strolls near. "Screaming and swinging on some chain like friggin' Tarzan."

"I keep telling you. The villagers around here are weird," his partner mutters.

"She's not a villager. I've never seen this chick in my life," The first guard says. "Besides, if you think _she's_ weird, you haven't seen the inside of Pip's house..."

We stay still until they pass, then keep going where the guards become less frequent. Soon there are none at all.

_I wonder what they're looking for,_ Yuna signs, when we're far away. _They've never cared about villagers before._

_Does it matter?_ Tora asks. _Everyone is crazy here._

"At least we're close to the bridge," I say, standin' all the way up.

"Uhh...you there! Hold it right there."

I look over my shoulder.

It's the chubby guard and his friend. The chubby guard peers at my box, sniffin'. "Sir, is that chicken wings you're carrying?"

"With butter sauce on the side?" His friend adds eagerly, earnin' a jab to the ribs from his friend.

"Hush, Su Ho," His friend hisses. Then he clears his throat and puts a hand on his sword. "Sir, I'm afraid I can't let you pass."

Tora and Yuna look at each other, then sign _Why?_

Su Ho squints at them. "What are they doing?"

"That's sign language," I say. "They're askin' why we can't pass."

"Well er..." He pulls his collar. "Th-there's a new law sir. It's the chicken wing law."

I stare at him. _Is this for real?_ "Chicken wing law." I don't even bother to make it a question.

"Yes, it just passed recently. All chicken wings that passes by here must be confiscated and thoroughly tested by our officers." He waves a hand. "But don't worry. You can take the bread and continue on your way."

_Ya'll ain't even puttin' in the effort to be crooked._ "What's your name officer?"

"I'm Officer Go Dong. Now..." He reaches for the wings. "I'll take those off your hands."

"Not so fast man." I hold them out of his reach. "I want to see your badge."

Tora and Yuna wedge themselves in between me, noddin'.

"Badge?" Su Ho echoes.

"Aherm yes well you see..." He sticks his hand inside his robe, slowly drawin' somethin' black. "I don't always bring it with me, but when I do I... _Fermata_!" He points a wand at us and a bright blue light tears from it.

I stagger back, but Tora and Yuna freeze where they stand. "What did you do to them?"

Go Dong points the wand at us. "How 'bout you hand over the chicken and we'll tell you?"

I hug the chicken closer to me. "Like heck I will! Ya'll are a bunch of bullies!"

Su Ho draws his own wand. "Shut up! We're just hungry like any other man! Now just give us the chicken or we'll freeze you too!"

Go Dong smacks him. "No! Do you want to eat frozen chicken and butter, stupid?"

Su Ho jerks back, rubbin' his head where Go Dong struck him. "Aish! Just trying to help!"

The moment they take their eyes off me, I turn and run with the chicken as fast as I can.

"Hey!" Go Dong calls. "Gimme that chicken!"

My blood and pulse roar in my ears as I streak down the road. I lookin' over my shoulder to find Go Dong and Su Ho catchin' up. _Dang. There's no where to hide around here._

The trees open into a wide chasm. A huge sign says _ONE PERSON PER CROSSING UNTIL WE CAN MAKE REPAIRS!_

I duck under the sign, but I test the first plank with a foot. _Double dang._ Should I cross? What if they try to cross too? We'll all fall to our doom!

Go Dong and Su Ho run into the clearin', wands drawn. Go Dong rolls a sleeve up and strides toward me. "Alright buddy. I was gonna let this go, but you're asking for—."

"Don't!" I yell. "Can't you read the sign? If you step on the bridge with me we'll all fall down!"

Go Dong and Su Ho look at each other. They both put their hands on their hips.

Su Ho throws his hands up. "Mother Bear almighty, I didn't ask for this!" He turns to me with his hands clasped together. "Come on. Can we just have a little piece of chicken?"

"Yeah. We're already in enough trouble as it is," Go Dong says. "I don't wanna starve too."

"How do I know you won't take the whole thing from me, huh?" I ask.

"Of course they won't take it because _I'm_ here!" says a cheery feminine voice.

A glimpse of blue flickers in the corner of my eyes. I turn to find a girl swingin' towards me on a linked chain. My mouth gapes. "No! Miss, don't land—"

But it's too late, she lands in front of me and pushes me back onto the bridge. She draws a sword from her belt, pointin' it at the Gayans.

Go Dong shakes his friend. "It's the Grand Belle! We can go back home! We won't starve!"

Su Ho frowns. "But I wanted some chicken."

"Well you're going home empty-handed," The girl says, backin' towards me.

"Uh, miss? Can you not stand on the bridge like that? It's not—"

She turns around, puttin' a finger to her lips. "Shh! I'm saving you."

"But the bridge—"

The bridge dips suddenly.

I grip the side cables. _Uh-oh._

Everyone goes still.

"Please tell me you did that on purpose," the girl says.

I shake my head really slow.

"Mother of—"

_SNAP!_

The bridge cables snap and me and the girl plunge down into the darkness below.

### _1-2_

"HEY."

_That voice._

"Come now. I don't want to be here all night."

_It reminds me of someone._

"HEY!"

Ice cold water splats onto my face. I jolt up, coughin' and sputterin'. I pinch my clothes off my skin. I'm all wet! "What the heck, man?"

"Well, you wouldn't get up," says a female voice. "And I'm _not_ a man!"

I look up.

A pair of brown boots kick nonchalantly as they dangle from a tree. I can't see much of their owner's body, but I can make out a pale girl puttin' something in her mouth and frownin' at me like I just messed up her entire day.

"Get up? What do you..." I put a hand to my head and glance around me. Trees. Darkness. Bushes everywhere. No landmarks or roads or signs. I spot my delivery bag still intact. I pull it close to me and touch it. _It's not hot anymore._ It's not even warm. _How long was I like this?_ I look up at the girl. "What happened?"

"We fell from the bridge remember?" The girl jumps down from the tree, her side swept curls bouncin' with her as she lands on the ground. "You were out for about an hour when we land. I thought you'd never get up."

"What about those guys?" I ask.

She shrugs, chewin' another mouthful of what I can only guess is some kind of bread.

I briefly take in the rest of her. She's not wearin' any gauntlets, or anything that resembles a uniform like those military folks I saw. She's got a sword though, a bow, and a blue and gold wand that look similar to the ones the thieves had. The gold choker on her neck looks real though, so do the sapphires hanging from her ears. _Probably from some well-off family._ And miraculously not hurt from fallin' that high. I get up, stretchin' and checkin' each part of my body for pain or injuries, but strangely enough I'm not hurt either. "You healed me, miss?"

She stares at me like I asked the world's dumbest question. "Why would I do that?"

I step back at the sudden attitude. "Gee, I was just askin'. I didn't need the side of salt."

The girl's gaze trails away, then she squints at me. "What are you talking about? Sillans don't get hurt from falls."

"Well how am I supposed to..." My voice trails when I realize what she said. " _Shi_ - _llan_?"

"You _do_ know that you're Sillan, don't you?" At my silence, she raises an eyebrow. "You really don't know where your own heritage, boy?"

My face burns. "My folks never talked about it, nosy. And who are you calling, boy? You can't be _that_ older than me. 'Specially not if you don't have the sense to stay off of a weak bridge."

Her skeptical look immediately sours into a nostril-flared scowl. " _I_ don't have sense? Why did you go there in the first place? Gayan scent was _everywhere._ "

"So!"

" _So?_ Of course you were going to be attacked by thieves. _"_ She points her bread me. "I was trying to _help_ you. I could've let the bears eat your face while you were sleeping, too. And you have the nerve to yell at me?" The girl looks me up and down. "Who do you think you are, anyway? I could have your head put on a pike for you being so insolent _and_ ungrateful!"

I clench my fists. _It's not my fault you didn't listen when I said that the bridge was out._ I exhale through my nose. But still...she _did_ try to save me. And she _did_ make sure I was okay when I was out. If only she wasn't so...so... _ugh!_ I rub the back of my neck. "You're right. I'm sorry. You did go out of your way for me."

Her red lips curl into a pleased smile. "You're forgiven."

I stick my hands in my pockets. "If you don't mind me askin', who are you so I don't have to keep calling you Miss?"

She clears her throat. " _I_ am Seung Man of the _Gyeongju_ Kim Clan, current acting Grand Belladonna of Lore for Silla."

_No wonder you're full of hot air._ "Well Some Man—"

" ** _SEUNG_** MAN!" she shrieks.

I cringe at the noise. Good gods almighty, this woman can _squeal!_ "Alright, alright... _Seung_ Man." I look at her. "Right?"

She lifts her chin. "Yes. That is correct." She nibbles on her bread and turns her back on me, makin' me wonder if I did something else wrong that she ain't tellin' me. Then she softly says, "You haven't told me who you are yet."

I stare at the delivery bag, then the ground. "I wish I could tell you. After everything I've been through tonight, I don't really know anymore. Heck, you probably know more about me than I do."

"Do you at least have a name, don't you?" Seung Man asks.

"You can call me Kurai," I say, stoopin' to pick up my delivery bag. "That's what most everybody calls me at home."

"Is that your real name?"

I pause. _Should I tell her?_ After all _,_ she ain't tried to kill me. And thus far she's been a pretty open book about information. She's full of herself sure, but not of any bad intentions from what I can tell. _It's not a good idea even if she can be trusted._ I don't want no more trouble with anybody else tonight. My stomach rumbles, remindin' me how long I've been away from home because of all my lollygaggin'. "Yes. And I'm already late on takin' this food to Kage." I pull up the bag. _Huh, is it lighter?_ I lower it. _I'm pretty sure that it was heavier than..._ My spine starts to prickle. I turn to Seung Man who is still nibblin' on her bread. "Seung Man? What are you eating?"

"Hmm?" She turns around, a piece between her lips. She swallows her mouthful. "It's the bread that was in the box. It's really good."

I clap my hands against my head. "You _ATE_ my food?"

Seung Man blinks, nibblin' sheepishly. "Not all of it. Just the bread."

I clench my jaw. "And that somehow makes it _better?_ And why are you still eating that?" I lunge for the bread in her hands.

Seung Man holds it out of reach. "Wait a minute!"

"Drop it, woman!"

"Drop it and what? You're going to deliver it the way it is?" Seung Man snaps back. "You might as well let me eat it now!"

"You _can't_ keep eatin' all of that!"

"Get off! You're going to make us—aaah!" We topple over, wrestlin' in the dirt, until Sul Li pins me on my back and puts the rest in her mouth. "There. No more problem."

I glare up at her. "You aren't supposed to eat a big edible like that in one go."

"Edible?" Seung Man echoes. "What's that?"

"It's food with weed in it." At her blank face, I say, "Weed. Marijuana. Cannabis..." But she's still starin' at me clueless. "Woman, you ate _drugs!_ "

Seung Man's eyes widen. She turns and spits the naan out immediately. "Why didn't you say that first?"

"It's not like it matters. You already ate too much," I say. "And you shouldn't be eating what doesn't belong to you anyway."

"What's going to happen then?" Seung Man asks. "I'm not going to die am I?"

"Oh, I doubt that." I prop myself up on my elbows. "But you'll feel really weird for sure. Maybe a little sick."

She shakes my shoulder. "Do something then!"

"What do you want me to do? It's _your_ fault," I snap. "And get off me. We don't know each other all like that."

Seung Man gets up, smoothin' her cloak. "What are you going to do then?"

I huff. "What do you think? I'm still gonna do my job. There's a bakery in Kage Village that stays open late. I'll just have to pay for more bread out of pocket, I guess."

"Let me go with you, then," Seung Man says.

I stare at her, stiff-browed. "Excuse you! You got your darn nerve!" I put my hands on my hips. "Why don't you go home? Ain't you got family or somethin', Miss I'm this and that of Silla?"

Seung Man's lips pinch together. "I can't. We were traveling from there. We got separated when those Gayans started harassing us."

_Then she must be the one that everyone is after._ I can't see why. I've barely been in this girl's company for ten minutes and I already want to knock her head off. The most she's got goin' for her is that she's a little cute if she don't say nothin', but that ain't worth the bother. I fold my arms, lookin' at the bread she spit out. _I wonder how long ago she started eatin' that._ It can't be long before she starts feelin' every bit of it. Even if she's a pain in the butthole, it wouldn't be right to leave her to alone out here. 'Specially not with strange men after her and all. "Fine. But after I make my delivery, we're goin' straight to my house and I'm gettin' some shut eye. And while you're in my house, you ain't no Nacho Belle Grande of nothin'. Got it?"

Seung Man blinks sweetly. "Of course."

I sigh and pick up the buffalo wings. _Gods help me._

Everything in me unclench when we finally find a lit road that I know. I've been prayin' to every god I know the name of to have some mercy on me so nothin' else crazy to happen tonight, and I s'pose one of them must've heard. We ain't seen any dragons or any of those thieves. And thankfully, Seung Man hasn't done anything—

_Giggle._

I glance behind me to find Seung Man smilin' again. "What?"

"Your ears!" she squeaks.

I squint at her. "What about them?"

"They're like..." She pinches her thumb and forefinger together. "Soooooooo cute!" I might actually be a little bit flattered by her words if she weren't talkin' to the tree next to us.

I suppress a sigh. _And so it starts..._

I can't even pretend like I don't deserve every bit of this. If I'd just went the way Tora and Yuna said, then I wouldn't even be in this mess. "Miss, that's a tree. Come on up here so we can hurry up and get rid of this chicken."

Seung Man's gaze flicks between me and the tree, her eyes go wide. "Whoa..."

I wait until she's next to me before I keep goin'.

"You know..." Seung Man chirps. "You remind me of someone."

"Does he have bark on him and grow acorns?" I ask.

"Pssssh, _no!"_ Seung Man huffs. "He's a real person! He was my friend, but he went away a long time ago."

I look down the road. "What happened to him?"

"I don't know. One morning, we were supposed to play in the gardens and no one could find him. I was really sad. _"_ She nudges me. "But I swear he had ears like yours!"

I roll my eyes, but I can't stop a smile from edgin' onto my lips. "Sure, he did."

"And I would always bite them, and he would _always_ boop me on the nose. So I would beat him up! And he would run to my _eomma_ and I'd call him Prince Chicken. I miss him a lot."

_Good lord, and he was your 'friend'? He probably ran away on purpose._

After a thread of silence, Seung Man says, "There was a lullaby that he really liked too. Do you want to hear it?"

"Maybe when we get to my—"

"SLEEP LITTLE SILLA SLEEP!"

I jump at her volume. "Miss, don't be so loud! There might still be—"

"Who's there?" a man calls.

"It's coming from over there!" says another.

I freeze. _They heard us!_ "Woman, stop! We have to hide!"

"But my solo..."

" _Later!_ " I drag her into the bushes on the side of the road and put the chicken down so we can both crouch.

Seung Man opens her mouth again, but I clamp my hand over it.

" _Stay still,"_ I hiss under my breath. "Do you want us to get in big—"

The sound of boots and hooves get close.

I huddle back closer into the shadows with Seung Man, silently willin' her to stay quiet.

More cloud-robed men on strange horse creatures canter towards where we were standin'. A wiry man dismounts. His lip curls. "A Sillan girl. Kim Clan. And some man...His smell is strange."

A stocky rider on a white horse creature pulls up beside him. "Probably from the neighboring village."

The first of the men sniffs, lingerin' in a way that make my stomach pull tight. His gaze trails to our bushes.

I crouch lower.

He takes a step toward us.

_Oh no._

"General! General! It's horrible!" squawks a new voice, makin' all the men look up.

A pencil-thin man on a beige horse gallops from further down the road.

"What happened?" the General demands. "Why did you leave your post?"

"Silla is attacking our camp! His Majesty wants every man to return to defend it," the messenger says.

The General mounts his horse immediately. "I hope we'll not be too late. Let's move." He kicks his horse into a gallop and his companion ride close behind him.

I clutch my hand against my heart. _Gods almighty..._ I was about ready to soil myself if he came over here. _Those folks at the ruins must've caught up with Sul Li's family._ With any luck, the roads ought to be clear of their lot and hopefully they won't be fightin' anywhere near Kage. We're so close now, just—gods, I want this night to be over. "Nearly gave me a heart attack..."

"Don't worry, _I'll_ protect you," Seung Man says...to the tree behind us.

I scrub a hand over my face. "I'm over here, Miss."

"Huh?" Her gaze flicks to me. "Since when do you have a twin?"

"Never mind that." I pick up my chicken. "Let's get out of here, alright?"

A beat-down sign marks the cobbled entrance to Kage. If it didn't have bird crap streakin' down the front, I'd smooch the darn thing. _Finally._ I glance at Seung Man to find her yawnin'. "How do you feel?"

She just shrugs.

_Well, you're doin' really good for just your first time._ When Gio and Maven get high, they're always paranoid about zombies eatin' their toes. But I feel like I shouldn't speak too soon, she ain't been high that long. _Hopefully, she'll sleep it off._

The bakery lays at the end of a tree-flanked lane and inside a portly Pua Moana shopkeeper idly scratches lotto tickets on the counter. He looks up through blocky black eyebrows. "Evenin' sir. What can I get for you?"

"Do you have any fresh naan with weed in it?" I ask, puttin' the chicken on the counter.

The shopkeeper's eyebrows come together. He looks at the near-empty vitrines beside the counter. "I'm afraid not. A group of party-goers just snatched up the last of it for the night."

My shoulders fall. " _All_ of it?" I rub my forehead. "Is it there any way you could bake it fresh? I'll pay double. Triple."

He lifts a single eyebrow. "You want weed naan that bad, mister?"

"Please...It's an emergency."

The shopkeeper folds his hammish arms. "Emergency, huh?" He runs a hand through his hair. "I don't normally cut the oven on for folks this..." His voice trails as his gaze slides behind me. "What in the heck is she doin'?"

I whirl around to see Seung Man pointin' her sword at the bakery floor tiles and givin' it the evil eye. "Uhh...You'll have to excuse her. She accidentally ate the naan edible I had without knowin' what it was and I gotta replace it."

A look of understandin' comes on the shopkeeper's face. "I'll tell you what... I'll make your bread for normal price. Just make sure she don't swing that sword around in here."

My heart flips at the words. "Thank you so much, sir! You have no idea how much it means to me."

He steps away from the counter, walkin' toward the back. "Oh I have an idea, alright..."

When he's gone, I face Seung Man again to find that she is starin' at the ceilin'. "What are you doin'?"

Seung Man taps her chin with the tip of her blade. "I am thinking."

_Should I even ask?_ "About what?"

"What if we're all in a game and we didn't even know it?"

I run a hand through my hair. "I don't know. If everything is a game, nothin' is serious then."

Seung Man puts a hand to her mouth. "Then our lives are nothing serious?"

_Conspiracy theories. Check. You are high indeed._ "I s'pose they aren't, Miss." I gently take the sword out of her hands and go lean against the wall. My eyelids are heavy, ready to doze. I almost would, but Seung Man keep pokin' in with her existential thoughts that I settle for starin' blankly at the clock.

It's almost ten.

_Wonder if Tora and Yuna got home safe._ If I was any good at fightin', I could look for them myself though that probably wouldn't be the best idea. If they're thawed out and okay, they could be anywhere by now. And their sense are much better than mine, they could find their way home much easier than me. I watch Seung Man for a few heartbeats more.

I haven't even thought about askin' her about that Silla place she said that she was from...or I s'pose I should say _we're_ from. On one hand, I almost too afraid to ask. After so many years of not having answers, how could one just fall into my lap that easy? Surely, it's gotta be a trick or a lie. On the other hand, if I'm not then nothin' that happened tonight makes any sense. The ruins bit I could let slide, but not survivin' a fall that would kill normal folk. Seung Man could've lied to save face, but somethin' in my heart tells me that she's been nothin' but honest so far.

The woman from the ruins passes through my mind for a moment. _Was Seung Man the one you were talkin' about, Miss?_ If Seung Man really is, then that woman is a whole lot more than just a "concerned bystander". She'd have to know the future like a prophet. But if that had the slightest kernel of truth in it, why the heck didn't she go there to pick Seung Man up herself instead of leavin' it to me? If Seung Man is all that important as she said, ain't that a bigger priority than lettin' her get cozy and high with a stranger?

But then again...it _is_ Seung Man. Nobody probably want to pick her up.

I shake my head. _She probably didn't mean Seung Man._ After all, she said the thing she was concerned about is the same thing I was curious about and I sure as heck wasn't curious about Seung Man. _But Seung Man did tell me that I'm Sillan._

Not long, the bakery floods with the smell of cannabis and yeast. The shopkeeper comes out with the bread in a flat box, and somethin' else tied in a small swatch of cheesecloth. "Here's your bread, and I'll give you some peppercorns for her."

"Peppercorns?" I echo.

"Some folk get real anxious and paranoid when they're trippin' out. Chewin' on peppercorns will help out a lot," he pushes the box toward me. "Hopefully, she won't need them, but you never know."

"Thanks, sir." I reach into my pocket for my wallet. My fingers brush the silk purse, and I remember the dragon guard's request. _I better not forget to get that._ I pay the shopkeeper, slip Seung Man's sword back into its sheath on her belt, tuck the peppercorns away, and pick up the bread and chicken. "Come on, Seung Man."

"But the colors..."

"Don't worry, we got the same ones at home," I say, shoulderin' the door open for her. "You can trip out at the pretty colors all you want when we drop this off."

Outside, I note the residence numbers on the outside gates of each house. Kiyoko Wu's house is the fifth set of gates down from the bakery. I pause and turn to Seung Man, who rubs her eyes which I realize are now bloodshot. "Sleepy?"

She nods. "A little."

I look around and spot a bench in front of the hedges on the other side of the gate. "Why don't you sit down for a little bit on that bench there?"

"Okay."

I watch her until she sits down, then I enter Kiyoko's yard. An ear-splittin' "HEY!" freeze me to the spot. My gaze dart around in a panic. But don't see anybody outside. My mind immediately goes to Seung Man, but then I see a shadow hurryin' back and forth against the gold light in the window and the same voice whines, "Why can't I do it? I worked hard on applying for that job!"

"And I gave you another that is _equally_ important," a quieter feminine voice says. "And they are hardly different, Connie."

"Yeah sis," a more timid male voice pipes up. "It pays well-enough and it's in a good area. Does it really matter who you work for?"

"Lu, you're missing the point!" Connie snaps. "Every time _I_ try to do something, it's the same thing. I never get to do what _I_ want to do without Mom butting in!"

I slow to a stop at the base of the steps, hesitant to get any closer. _Gee, this girl is talkin' to her Momma that way?_ If I raised my voice to my uncle like that, I'd get the taste slapped out of my mouth.

"I passed _all_ the advanced courses. I graduated at the top of my class," Connie goes on. "I'm every bit as capable as you, Mother. I can handle anything."

"Then you will handle the Blackfoot Tribe like I told you," Connie's mother says.

"But I—"

"That is _final,_ Connie."

The whole house goes quiet.

_Yeesh._ Guess that's the end of that. I head up the steps and knock on the door.

A leekish guy with a baby face steps up to the threshold in monk-like attire and a clear case of 'Save Me, Mister' in his gray eyes. "C-can I help you, sir?"

"I'm from Chloe's Tavern. I brought the food ya'll ordered. Sorry about comin' so late," I say. "Lots of crazy folks are out in the woods."

"We've heard," Lu says, takin' the food and settin' it on a small table near the kitchen entrance. Then he comes back and fishes a hand into his pocket. He gives me a handful of gold mon coins. "Here."

I tuck it away into my other pocket and pull out the guard's silk purse. "And before I forget, I don't suppose ya'll carry locusts and wild honey on you? A guard wanted to buy some for however much he can get with this."

Lu takes the purse and opens it. He blinks. "He wants an awful lot."

I put my hands up. "I'm just the guy that delivers stuff, man. I don't ask questions."

"I'll see how many I can get you. Wait here..." Lu retreats into the house, callin' to Connie.

I lean against the doorway, shoulders now feelin' light. My legs are startin' to ache. _Tomorrow I'm gonna be on my feet all day._ And busy. There's the Quiverback game to cook for. Izumi to stop by and see. The UKR coming to the island. Rhett is bringin' Dollie over. And on top of that, I've got 'company'.

Lu returns with the silk purse bulgin' way more than when I gave it to him. "Here you are. Make sure to refrigerate the locusts if you're not going to use them right away. Otherwise, they go bad."

"Ya'll have a nice night, sir," I say and turn to head out of the gates. When I find Seung Man, she's layin' across the park bench pickin' at a pinecone with a wide smile on her face.

"How do you feel?" I ask.

She gives me a thumbs up. "Really, reaaaaaaaaally _good._ "

"I bet you do," I say. "I'm done with my delivery, so we can go back to my place."

Seung Man sits up. "It's not a _pinecone_. It's the _universe._ " She holds it up in front of me. "Look!"

"Well it's a nice universe, Smiley. Let's get out of here, so we can get a good night sleep." I pat her shoulder. "If you're still tired, I'll carry you on my back."

"But the universe..."

"I'll get you another universe later. It'll be better than that one, I promise." I lower myself a little. "What do you say?" Seung Man looks between the pinecone and me, then she drops it on the ground and opts to climb onto my back. I help her up. "Cozy?" When she doesn't answer, I call, "Seung Man?"

"Zzzzz..."

_Well, I guess that answers that._ At least now, I don't have to give her those peppercorns. But dog...how am I going to explain this to my uncle?

"Hey, Uncle I know this sounds really crazy, but I sort of got jumped by some military guys at the ruins and they kinda stole your sword, but this girl helped me so can she stay until she gets better— No, no, no. He'll never buy that."

I groan. _He's gonna kick my tail._ Even though everything that happened to me tonight was technically the truth, when I say it back to myself it sounds like the biggest load of horse nuggets to ever come out any guy's mouth. _It's just my luck that the truth is crazier than what I would've made up._

Seung Man's warm body stirs on my back, remindin' me that my uncle ain't the only one that I've got to deal with. I still haven't figured out where she's gonna stay. There's an unused bed in the attic, but my uncle ain't comfortable with anybody stayin' there. 'Specially if he don't know 'em. I don't want to put a lady on the couch neither. Our couch is about as comfortable for layin' in as cat claws are for eye massagin'.

The lights of the guard shack greet me, but as I go around to the front I realize that the guards on duty don't look much like the ones that I say before I left.

"'Scuse me, a guard asked me to get some locusts and honey for him..." I say, duckin' a little to balance Seung Man and reach into my pocket at the same time. I put the bag on the desk. "Is he still here?"

The long-jowled guard in front peers at the bag, his feelers curlin'. Then he looks over his shoulder. "Hey, one of you order some locusts and wild honey?"

Another guard pokes his head out from the back room. His eyes widen at the coin purse. "If it's locusts, I'll take them!"

_Yeah, but you ain't the guy that ordered them._ "No, there was a different guy that ordered them."

"His name?" The head guard asks.

"Er... He didn't tell me, sir..." _He probably didn't think that I'd take this doggone long._ "There ain't no other way to find him? Can ya'll deliver it to him?"

"Afraid not. We can't leave our posts, buddy," the head guard says. "You shouldn't have even been out there in the first place."

"I had to take a delivery to Kiyoko."

"I ain't faultin' you for that _..._ " The guards shakes his head. "But even still, those locusts need to be kept in a fridge. We don't have one here. And I don't know who was on shift before us. We'd have to look the schedule back up at the palace and we don't get off here until midnight. So you're better off waitin' until tomorrow."

"Alright then. Guess I'll just do that." I put the locusts and honey back into my pocket, and head off towards my last stop before home: Chloe's Tavern.

As I start down the road, I feel Seung Man's hair brush my neck. She yawns. "Where are we?"

"Nice to see you're awake," I say. "My arms are gettin' tired so you gotta to get down. But don't worry, I only got one more thing to do, and you can go back to sleep."

Seung Man slides off my back. "But where are we?"

"This is my village." I gesture to the buildin's around us. "It ain't much, but it's quiet."

Seung Man peers around. "It's on the ground?"

_She must still be high._ "Yes, like all things should be. Now come on. I need to drop off Chloe's money."

I lead Seung Man around to the side of Chloe's tavern where a silver delivery chute juts from the side alongside a clear box of envelopes and pens. I put Chloe's money in the envelope, scribble the amount, and the delivery information on the lines designated under the flap. Then I slip it in the chute, and pump both hands up. "Freedom. Now we're all officially done."

Seung Man prods my arm, sidlin' up to me. "Then that means you can carry me again."

I glare at her. "'Scuse you? You have two good workin' feet, ma'm."

She puts her hands together, makin' puppy dog eyes at me. " _Please?_ "

I scoff. "Do you think I was born yesterday? You ain't pullin' no reindeer games on me. I ain't doin' nothin' else tonight unless I get a Pulitzer _and_ a Hugo for it."

" _Aish..."_ Seung Man pouts. "You could just decline politely, you know."

"Kurai, is that any way to treat your lady?" At the sound of Chloe's voice, I turn around. Chloe walks toward us, still in her date dress, but she's switched her heels for some black flip flops.

"Yes..." Seung Man folds her arms. " _Is it_ any way to treat your lady?"

I scrub a hand over my face. "Chloe _please_ don't encourage her. I'll never hear the end of it. And she _ain't_ my lady."

Seung Man huffs. "And you'll never have one long if you're always this grumpy."

Chloe opens her mouth like she's about to say somethin', but then just shakes her head and puts her key into the chute bottom. "What are you doin' deliverin' for me.?"

"It's a long story that I really don't wanna talk about," I say. "But yeah. I did it for Chu. I just got back."

Chloe glances at my clothes. "Well you both sure do look the part." Then she looks at Seung Man with a smile. "And like ya'll had some of Maven's edibles."

My stomach clenches at the statement. _Uh-oh._ It clenches even more when Seung Man opens her mouth, but thankfully the only thing that comes out of her is a yawn.

Chloe collects the money and stands up. And as she does, I notice a something shinin' on her finger: a new ring that wasn't there.

My eyes widen. "You're _engaged_?"

Puffin' up like a rooster ready to crow, she holds her hand out where the diamond-studded ring circles her finger. "Ain't it nice? Your uncle proposed on our date."

My own chest puff up with pride. Imagine that! My uncle's gettin' married! _No wonder he was all nervous and got out all the family incense._ "Well congratulations. Do ya'll know when the wedding will be?"

"We haven't decided yet," Chloe says. "But probably in winter when things are slower around here."

"Sounds great," I say. "It'll be nice to have some more family."

"Well, it's your turn to get married next, buddy," Chloe teases. "I've got enough kids already. You've gotta be the one to give him some."

"Well he's gonna have to wait a long time," I say.

"You say that now, but when a pretty girl gets your horses kickin', you'll have a heck of a time tryin' to stay that way." Chloe tucks her envelopes under her arms. "Anyway, I've gabbed enough. My feet are killin' me."

"So are mine," Seung Man says, battin' her eyelashes at me.

"Good, then you'll be too tired for shenanigans tonight," I say, battin' mine back.

Chloe chuckles. "Ya'll are too cute. Have a good night, okay?" She turns and goes around the back of the tavern.

When she's gone, I stretch and start on the road home. "Now, to figure out how to explain you to my uncle."

Seung Man sweeps a coil of hair out of her face, a coy smile on her face. "Just tell him it was love at first sight and you couldn't restrain yourself."

I roll my eyes. "Even if that didn't make me sound like I need to be locked up, my uncle would never believe that I'd go for a girl that obviously looks like she smoked a bowl. And that doesn't even explain what happened to his sword."

"Where is it now?" Seung Man asks.

"Your folks at the ruins took it," I say. "Some lady named Jin Yi said she'd give it back to my uncle."

Seung Man's brow crinkles. "Jin Yi? The Hwarang are here?"

"Is that what they're called?" I ask. "They were looking for you and the rest of your family."

" _Eomma_ must've sent them then." She folds her arms. "As for your sword, Jin Yi probably took it because it looked like one from her guard. The Hwarang consider it Stolen Valor to use a sword that doesn't rightfully belong to you. Punishable by death if the offender is Sillan, so it's a good thing that you didn't tell them who you really were."

"I got that vibe when she threatened to kill me," I say dryly. "Ya'll Sillans sure don't seem very friendly."

"Well to them, it's one of the highest insults you can commit. But still, the sword should've been given back to you when they didn't have any missing," Seung Man says, clickin' her tongue. Then she looks at me. "Who is your uncle anyway?"

I stop in front of my cottage door. "Not this again please."

Seung Man leans against the cottage wall. "Oh come on. You can tell me, can't you?"

I sigh. _Well she ain't tryin' to pull any reindeer games this time._ And tellin' the guards didn't seem to get me killed, so I s'pose it's okay. "Yong Chun."

Seung Man looks away. "Yong Chun?"

"I don't s'pose that means anything bad in Silla?" I ask.

She doesn't answer immediately. "No, but...what did you say your name was?"

"Kurai."

When Seung Man doesn't say anything, I push my keys into the lock and open the door.

Suit jacket still on, Uncle Yong Chun looks up from takin' his shoes off. His gaze flicks between Seung Man and me. "I thought you were just going to deliver something and come back home."

"I thought that too, but um..." I glance at Seung Man, who suddenly seems terrified of eye contact. "I sort of ran into her. It's a long story, you probably don't want to hear."

"No..." His gaze lingers on Seung Man, thinnin' into slits. "I want to hear _every_ detail, if you don't mind."

_Oh gods._ He make it sound like I'm already in trouble. What should I say? "Well, I..."

But my uncle puts his hands together and fully focuses on Seung Man. "What's your name, Miss?"

"Sul Li."

It takes every shred of willpower to keep me still. _Sul Li? What happened to your name being Seung Man?_

"If you don't mind me askin', why aren't you home with your family at this time of night?" Yong Chun asks. "Granted, no one here wants to hurt you, but most women around these parts don't go around temptin' fate. Not to mention we've been gettin' reports about strangers causin' trouble."

"I was separated from my family when the strangers started harassing us," Seung Man says. "And I was...intoxicated. Kurai thought it would be safer to bring me here than to leave me out in the woods."

My uncle looks at the floor, noddin' slowly. "He is right about that, and you're more than welcome to stay the night." He raises his head. "Kurai, I want to talk to you after you help her get settled."

"Yes, sir." I put the locusts and honey up on the counter before I lead Seung Man upstairs to my room. I close the door behind us. "Why did you lie to him about your name?"

She huffs. "Did you see the way he was looking me when we walked in? He already didn't like me before I said anything." Seung Man takes off her cloak. "And besides, I did not lie. Sul Li is my nickname. I like being called that more than I like being called Seung Man."

"If that's what you want to be called, then fine. But we don't know you and we're trying to figure out if you're trustworthy or not. So what's really goin' on here?"

Sul Li sheds her cloak, turnin' away.

But I hold her by the shoulders and whirl her around to face me. "Don't lie to me, Sul Li. Please... The whole reason why you saw me at the bridge was because I thought I would finally find out about my family. If you know somethin', just say it. I don't care of it's good or bad."

She studies my face for a long stretch of time. Then she finally says, "I'm sorry. I wouldn't know where to start, even if I could. If I were really a danger to your home, I wouldn't stay here tonight no matter what I accidentally ate. But if you're not convinced—"

"No. I believe you," I say, lettin' her go. "Just not sure that my uncle does. I'm sure he won't take back his offer to let you stay here at least unless you really are that bad."

She folds her cloak in half. "What do you want me to do then?"

"Just make yourself comfortable like he said, I guess," I say. "If he says anything different, I'll be back up to tell you. If he doesn't, then goodnight, I s'pose I'll see you in the morning."

"Good night, then," Sul Li says.

I leave her and head back down the stairs where my uncle waits with his arms folded. When I reach the bottom stair, he gestures to the couch. "Sit down, boy. I need to say something to you."

_Oh lord._ Those are trouble words if I ever heard 'em. I just sit in the middle with my hands in my lap. "So how bad did I screw up?"

"Dunno. We'll see when you tell me the truth about what happened to that sword. I'm well-aware that girl didn't tell me much of it and I don't know how I feel about that just yet. But as for you..." He paces the length of our rectangular black rug. "Start talkin'. Where's the sword?"

"Taken by some of Sul Li's folks at the ruins." I reflexively wince, expectin' anger immediately, but my uncle's expression doesn't faze one bit. "I think she called them the Hwarang or somethin;."

My uncle just paces the rug in silence. I almost start to wonder if he wants me to keep goin', but then he asks, "And Sul Li was with them?"

I wring my hands. "No, sir."

"Then who was in charge?" he asks. "Did they say what guard they were from? Or did you pay attention to what colors they were wearin'?"

"There was this lady named Jin Yi who stopped me first. There was another lady who was wearin' red and black, but she wouldn't tell me her name. But Jin Yi brought me to her, so I figure she must be important too."

"Huh..." He stops pacin'. "And what did this Jin Yi say to you about the sword?"

"She said that she wants to put it in your hands herself."

He nods slowly. "Not surprisin'."

"Uncle, do you know those folk?" I ask. "She had the same kind of uniform as you."

Sighin' through his nose, Uncle Yong Chun starts pacin' again. "I feel like I brought this on us."

"Uncle, we ain't in danger, are we? Those Hwarang folk let me go."

"Boy, it's not the Hwarang I'm worried about. I know what Jin Yi wants to come see me for," he says, lookin' toward the stairs. "It's that girl you brought home that I'm worried about. I'm sure I know why she lied, but what's her _real_ story, boy?"

"Well, some weird Gayan guys in these robes were tryin' to rob me," I say. "Sul Li really did try to help me, but the bridge was weak and we both fell."

Uncle's eyebrows scrunch. "Gayans tried to rob you?"

"Well it's cuz the guy that was in charge told them they couldn't have any dinner, so they wanted the chicken I was takin'. They were s'posed to kidnap Sul Li apparently."

Uncle snorts. "If they're really from Gaya, then they're not from any tribe I'm familiar with. Or want to be familiar with." Then he looks at me. "So why is that girl with you?"

"She ate the edible Maven made," I say. "I let her tag along just to make sure nothin' bad would happen to her when the high kicked in."

He shakes his head. "Figures." He massages his brow. "And she didn't do anything suspicious like ask you to go anywhere discreet or stop to talk to anyone you didn't know?"

"You make it sound like she wanted to ambush me or somethin'," I say, gettin' up. "What did our folks do that was so bad? I almost got killed for it."

My uncle closes his eyes. "Nothin'. Sit back down for a minute."

I do as he says.

He squats down in front of me. "Look boy. I know who she is. Even if her clothes didn't say it, I know Kim Clan when I smell it." He looks down at his hands briefly. "She's probably too young to really understand or care what happened when we lived back in Silla, but most of her folk have long memories and they might kill you if they figure out who you are." His gaze meets mine. "I swore an oath to your father to keep you alive. And I intend to keep it as long as I live. I know she might be cute and all, but she needs to go on her way. Understand?"

I press my lips together. "But Uncle—"

"She _goes_ , Chun Chu." He gets up. "I'm sorry, but that's how it's got to be."

I exhale. When my real name comes out, there ain't no negotiation. "Well can you at least tell me what we did?"

"I already told you. Nothin'," My uncle says. "But when people are scared, angry, and hurtin', they want the blood of the first thing they don't like, and that was our lot." His fists clench a moment before he forces them to relax. "Ain't fair, but you remember we have a good enough life here. Don't go wantin' for what we left behind. Silla ain't worth all that."

I glance at the stairs. "I'm lettin' her stay in my bedroom. Can I use the bed in the attic?"

"That's fine. "He takes a step toward the stairs and then pauses to look back at me over his shoulder. "Soon as she's awake and ready, send her back where she belongs and make sure she don't come back here again."

### _1-3_

NIGHT BLINKS AWAY and Mr. Okiwara's rooster squawks right at dawn's crack.

My eyelids feel no better than rusty metal hinges. I'm sore all over too and still exhausted as if I ain't slept a wink. I rub my eyes, but I nestle back into the covers. _Do I really have to get up?_ Then I remember the locusts and I jolt right up.

_Dang, those were s'posed to go in the fridge, weren't they?_ Did I remember to do it before I went to bed? I scrape a hand through my hair, tryin' to remember what I did before I went to sleep. Then I push back the covers and rush out of the attic.

I veer around Uncle and Gio's room, but as I get to mine a strange guttural sound stops me at the door. I knock. "Sul Li? Are you okay?"

There is a pause. A gasp, then violent retchin'.

_She don't sound too good._ That bread must not have agreed with her. I try the knob. Open. "Sul Li, I'm comin' in."

Inside, my red and black blankets are strewn about the whole bed. Sheets are barely hangin' on the foot of the bed and reach all the way to the bathroom like she jumped over in one go. The bathroom door is slightly ajar.

I take a few hesitant steps towards the bathroom, then I steel my nerves. _No bein' a scaredy cat, she needs help._ I poke into the bathroom. "Sul Li?"

She's curled on my bathroom rug (which thankfully is still clean), stomach heavin' heavy.

My chest lurches. I get down on my knees and start to scoop my arms under her, but I stop, bitin' my lip. _If I move her to the bed, she might start throwin' up again._ My eyes dart around the room until they land on the cabinet under the sink. Then I yank open the cabinet door and move the cleaner bottles around. _C'mon..._ My hand finally touches the skin of a plastic bag. I pull it out and check the bottom. _Good, no holes._

Sul Li's nose brushes my knee. "Wha..."

I put a hand to her damp forehead. "How do you feel?"

"Dizzy... nauseous..." She moans. "Light-headed... Cold..."

I sweep her hair off the floor. "I can give you something for the nausea and make you some hot soup and tea." I peer at the toilet openin' to find it empty. "Did you throw anything up, or were you just dry heavin'?"

"I did at first." Her hands brace against the floor, but as soon as she try to lift herself, she change her mind and goes right back down. "I can't get up."

"Don't worry about it. I'll pick you up," I say. "But I'm going to get you that ginger first and start your tea, alright?"

Her head moves slightly. That's probably the closest thing I'll get to her consent.

I lay the bag near her neck. "I'm gonna leave this here in case your stomach still doesn't feel good. I'll be right back." I hop up and hurry downstairs. I stop at the sight of the locusts and honey on the counter. _Uh-oh..._ I _did_ forget to put them in the fridge. I open the bag and sniff. _They don't have a smell or anything. They're not molded either..._ I drum my fingers on the counter. There's no way I can buy more.

I sniff again. _They're still good right?_ How the heck do you even know if locusts are good? But it's not like he's poppin' them raw in his mouth. He's puttin' them in elixirs. _I'll just put them in the fridge._ He probably won't even know the difference.

After I take care of that, I start drawin' up hot water for Sul Li's tea and take fresh ginger out of the crisper. I slice a knob off and peel the skin away. _Feels good to cook at home again._ I open the fridge. _Maybe I should go ahead and make the sundubu jjigae now._ I was gonna make it closer to the game, but this is a little more urgent.

The doorbell rings.

_Someone's here this early?_ I look up at the clock. It's just barely after seven. _Maybe it's the guard comin' to get his stuff._ I head over and unlock the door. "Who is—"

A furry paw flies at my face, smackin' my cheek.

I stagger back, holdin' my face in shock.

Yuna restrains Tora in the doorway, until she manages to wedge herself between the two of us.

_You said you wouldn't hit him!_ Yuna signs.

_I changed my mind when he opened the door,_ Tora says with a huff. _Besides, he deserves to have a piece of my mind._

"Heck, did you have to give me a piece of your fist too?" I rub my cheek. "I'm sorry for last night though. I figured that it would be the smartest thing to come home. I had a guest with me that needed to be safe indoors."

Yuna smacks Tora on the shoulder. _See? I told you that he had a good reason._

Tora just folds his arms and glare at me.

"Thanks for not bein' mad, Yuna," I say. "I know you're probably tired of me askin' for stuff, but the girl I brought home yesterday ain't feelin' well. Can you check on her while I start makin' the _sundubu jjigae_ for her?"

Tora's ears flatten. _Hey! I thought that was for the game!_

"She needs to eat somethin' that won't upset her stomach, Tora," I say. "And besides, the _ttukbaegi_ will keep it warm enough until the game starts. It'll just be ready earlier is all."

Tora still looks like he might smack the other side of my face, but he unfolds his arms and signs, _Where is she?_

"Probably still on my bathroom floor. I doubt she's moved any," I say, takin' out mushrooms, bok choy, and tofu.

Yuna and Tora exchange a bewildered look and go upstairs.

I get out the huge claypot and grease the bottom of it with sesame oil. The nutty smell of it quickly overtakes the ginger. As I lop the vegetables, footsteps thump from the stairs.

Uncle Yong Chun comes down in his mornin' robe, scratchin' his belly. "Good mornin'. You're up awfully early. And cookin' already?"

"Sul Li is sick." I set the chopped vegetables aside and slice up my beef. "I figure I could kill two birds with one stone if I just make the stew now."

He steps into the kitchen, openin' the cabinet next to me. "And did you tell her what I told last night?"

I frown, edgin' away from him. "Uncle she's sick, it was the last thing on my mind when I saw her."

"Boy that girl wasn't sick last night," He says.

"She was high last night. I'd be surprised if she remembered _anything_ we said."

He snorts. "You're just givin' excuses."

I grit my teeth. "You want me to throw her out while she can't even get up off the floor?"

"I didn't say that." He points his canister of coffee at me. "All you had to do was tell her what I said and I don't see what's worth waitin' around for. That girl needs to be with her own kind. They can take better care of her than we can."

"Uncle why do you keep talkin' about her like that? She didn't even do anything to our family," I blurt out. "You said she was too young to remember. Rushin' her out makes us just as bad as what her folks did to us."

He jabs his finger at me. "Because it don't matter how old or young she is. A tiger is a still a tiger, no matter how much you feed and pet it."

I fix my stare on the raw beef cubes. _I'm still not turnin' anyone away while they're sick._

Uncle's shadow hovers over me. "Be hard-headed if you want. But when you get another sword put to your neck, you'll be no-headed." He moves away to make his mornin' coffee without another word.

I keep my attention on the cuttin' board until he's gone. _Thank gods._

As I finish the stew, Yuna comes down the stairs and pokes her head over the counter. _We moved her to the bed._ With a twitch of her whiskers, she adds. _Tora won't leave her side. He's like a kitten! She seems to enjoy his company._

I snort. "Are we talkin' about the same Tora that punched me in the face when I walked in?" I ladle a few spoonfuls of stew into a bowl. "How is she now? She didn't vomit again, did she?"

Yuna shakes her head. _There was some dry heaving when we tried to pick her up. She's fine now, but her body is still very weak._

"Then pour her some tea in that cup over there." I say, jerkin' my head towards a red teacup near the stove. "I don't want to give her any food until her stomach gets settled."

Yuna nods and scurries into the kitchen, while I scoop an extra bit of tofu into Sul Li's bowl and put the lid back on the _ttukbaegi._ We both carry the food and tea upstairs where I find Tora with a chair pulled up next to Sul Li who has her arms crossed over her stomach.

"Hey, I brought somethin' for you, Sul Li," I say.

Her glassy eyes open. She shakes her head. "I can't hold it down."

"Well we've got your tea for you." I set the bowl on the nightstand. "Even if you feel you can't drink it, at least keep it under your nose. The smell will help you feel better."

Yuna holds the tea close to her face.

Sul Li sniffs at it a few times, then takes a deep inhale and lifts her hands to take the cup herself.

"Any better for your nausea?" I ask.

"Much better." She takes a tiny sip, then hesitantly adds, "Thank you."

My shoulders sink in relief. _Good._

Tora and Yuna purr as she drinks more. I move around the edge of the bed and pick up the fallen sheets. "Tora, if ya'll are hungry, you can go and have some soup downstairs."

Tora's ears perk up immediately, but then he looks to Sul Li as though tryin' to play off the fact that he wasn't just ready to leave her at the drop of a hat a second ago.

"It's okay Tora," Sul Li says, her voice strengthenin' as she speaks. "I know you're hungry."

Tora gets up and tugs Yuna's sleeve. She nods and the two leave.

When they're gone, I ask, "You can understand them?"

"I can hear what they're thinking," Sul Li says, takin' a longer swig of tea. "Any musigician if they're trained."

"Musigician, huh? What about those guys that we saw on the bridge? They had some magic wands on them. Are they musigicians too?"

Sul Li's eyes narrow in thought. "What guys?"

"You don't remember the guys that tried to rob me?" I ask.

She shakes her head. "I only remember bits and pieces of last night. And the parts that I do remember are very strange to say the least." Sul Li puts her teacup aside. "I didn't do anything that would shame my family, did I?"

"We almost got caught and you talked to a tree here and there, but nothin' too bad." I move around to the edge of the bed and pick up the fallen sheets.

There's a light jinglin' and my silver dragonbird necklace fall onto the floor.

_What the?_ I always leave it up in the attic and I know damn well I didn't bring it down here. Gaze thinnin', I pick up the necklace and stand up. "What's my necklace doin' down here?"

Sul Li lays her soup into her lap, then looks up. As soon as her gaze settles on the necklace, she scoffs, "What do you mean _your_ necklace? That is _mine._ I probably dropped it on the way to the bathroom."

"So you're tellin' me that I'm imaginin' my necklace bein' on the floor of my room and not up in the attic like it's supposed to be?"

She puts a hand over her chest. "You think I'd _steal_ from you like some lowlife?"

"I don't want to think that, but when I see _this—"_ I shake the necklace. "I don't know what to think."

"Well you can think about whether you were thorough when you look for yours," she says coolly. "I am _not_ a thief. And even if I were, I wouldn't steal something as common as a betrothal necklace."

I blink. "Pardon?"

She dips her spoon into the broth. "You didn't know that?"

"I just wore it till it started gettin' caught on stuff while I was workin'," I say. "I just thought it was family heirloom or somethin' of that sort."

Sul Li shakes her head. "Dragonbird pendants are betrothal gifts in Silla. When families agree to let their children marry, they have a pair made for the couple. And _besides..."_ She sips her broth and points the spoon at me. "You are holding it wrong. A girl's bird always faces the left when the chain is untwisted. A boy's faces the right."

I untwist the pendant chain to find that the necklace does face the left. "Huh. So I was betrothed to somebody then? Hope the girl I was supposed to marry don't have any hard feelin's."

"I'm sure the girl probably got over it by now." Sul Li starts to eat her soup.

I lay the sheets down on the foot of the bed. "I'm gonna go back up and bring mine down if I see it."

Sul Li brings her bowl onto her lap. "They're not going to link if that's what you're hoping for."

I roll my eyes. "Why on earth would I hope for that?"

She sniffs. "You would be fortunate if a noblewoman even _looked_ in your direction, let alone didn't call the guards on you."

"I don't know if I'd want to be looked at if she's that petty." I head out of the room and upstairs to check the altar. And just as Sul Li said, my necklace is there, facin' the right. I pick it up and hold both together. Neither of them have an obvious signs of a clasp or anything that could link either to another necklace. _Maybe it would be on their match._

I head back downstairs. "You were right. I owe you an apology."

"I told you," Sul Li says.

"How are the birds supposed to link if they're a pair?" I ask. "They don't have any clasps on them."

"Because they don't _need_ one, first of all..." She plucks her pendant out of my hand and puts it on her neck. "And _second_ of all, both owners aren't wearing them."

I sit down in the chair next to the bed. "So if it's not the right pair, what do they do then?"

Sul Li tips her head. "I'm not quite sure. Maybe they repel? Or don't react at all?" She shrugs. "Put yours on and we'll find out, I suppose."

I put my pendant on.

Sul Li puts her soup back on the nightstand and leans forward a bit. She holds our pendants so the flat undecorated parts of the bird face each other.

Without warnin', both birds glow white and jerk toward each other, snappin' into one phoenix while the two of us stare at them completely speechless.

At least until Sul Li breaks the silence with a loud laugh.

I lean away as far back as the pendants allow. "What's so funny?"

She points to the stuck pendants. " _This!_ I think it's very cute that you would use magic to make them stick."

"Umm Sul Li—"

"But you can't fool me." The corners of her lips twitch as she taps the birds with a finger. "I know who the other half belongs to. _So..._ " She gestures to the birds with a hand. "What spell did you use?"

I rub the back of my neck. "I didn't use any magic."

Her smug expression wavers, then it reforms into a thin smile. "I'm not sure why you're lying. I'm not blind. I know that's not real."

"Sul Li, I didn't do anything to the necklace. You saw they did that on their own."

"No, they _didn't."_ She holds the birds and tries to pry them apart with a chuckle. "Because if they did, that would mean he gave away his pendant. He would _never._ " When the birds don't budge, she presses her lips together and tries harder. "He wouldn't just..." As her voice starts to shake, she blinks a few times, swallowin'. "He wouldn't just throw me away like that..." With shakin' hands, she yanks both birds by the chain. "It's just a... _very._ " She grits her teeth. "Convincing. Trick!"

But the birds don't give.

My heart pang a little as I watch her and then it halt as my mind start to click too. "Sul Li? What was his name?"

"Chun Chu of the Kim Clan," Sul Li says. "He was my best friend."

_Sweet mother of birth-givin' donut holes..._ "And he disappeared?"

She stop pullin', squintin' at me. "Who told you that?"

"You did. While you were high on that bread," I say. "But as for this Chun Chu fella... You can stop with the pullin'. I'm right here."

Sul Li just stares.

And stares.

And _stares._

"I didn't give it away or nothin'," I say. When she doesn't say anything, I add, "Sorry I don't remember nothin'."

Sul Li opens her mouth, looks away, and just shakes her head, not able to say anything. "If it's really you...then let me see your ear."

"Does it matter which one?"

She shakes her head.

I lean over to let her look at my right ear.

Her cool fingers feel around the rim. Then she gives a dolphin shriek of delight. "Hey! I can still feel my bite marks!"

I pull away with my hands up. "Alright... New rule of friendship. No bitin' me ple—" My mouth gets muffled full of Sul Li's hair as she pulls me into a tight hug. "Mmrph!"

"I missed you so much. I thought you'd been kidnapped by a Magus Panther, or worse."

I spit out Sul Li's hair, and start to pull away, but then she presses her warm cheek to mine. Between that and how tight she's holdin' me, I don't really have the heart to pull away. Instead I wrap my arms around her, takin' in her lemon verbena scent. When she finally pulls away, I say, "So umm...just for the record, we don't still have to get married, do we?"

Sul Li's face reddens. She clears her throat. "No, I don't expect you to honor the betrothal now." Then she playfully swats my arm. "Especially not when you act like such a grumpy _ahjussi_!"

I take the pendant off my neck, causin' them to finally come apart. "And what the heck does that mean? I don't like the sound of it."

"It means you are a middle-aged man like your uncle," Sul Li teases. "Can't even carry me when I'm not even that heavy!"

"I don't know about that. I think you've been packin' on the rice cakes for half a millennium." I rub my arms. "I'm still sore."

She folds her arms. "Oh I see how it is. You don't remember _me,_ but you remember all the mean rice cake jokes."

"It ain't like I would know that, woman..."

"True, but still..." She presses a knuckle to her cheek. "Most Sillans can remember as far back as when they first opened their eyes. And your uncle seems to remember clearly enough. It's rather strange that you don't remember _anything_." She inflates a cheek. "You don't remember Ui Ja either?"

I shake my head. "No, is he your brother or something?"

"No, he is the Prince of Baekche. When his parents came to Silla, we would play with him all the time," Sul Li says. "When you first disappeared, Baekche was where the guards followed your trail to. Ui Ja did tell me that you stayed in Baekche temporarily with your Aunt Seon Hwa, but he couldn't say more than that."

"I have an aunt too?" I ask, leanin' in.

Sul Li nods. "She's Ui Ja's mother. I'm not certain that you have any other family anywhere else, besides my—" Her lips quickly purse.

"Your what?" I rest my elbow on my knee.

"Yes...your _what?_ " My uncle's voice made me jolt up straight as a bamboo tree. I look up to find him loomin' in the doorway with his arms folded. "I'd like to know too."

Sul Li's head ducks a little. "My _..._ mother?"

"Don't try to run game on me, girl," he growls. "I know that's a lie."

I stand up. "Uncle, she was just—"

"Go on say it, girl," Uncle says, walkin' in.

Sul Li shrinks away at the volume of his voice. "I-I don't—"

"You were going to say Deok Man, right?" His lip curls. "Or should I say Queen Seon Deok now?" When Sul Li don't respond, he gives a snort of contempt. "I should've known." Then he turns a cold glare on me. "And you're here listenin' to her nonsense."

"I told him the truth!" Sul Li blurts out.

"It's too late to find your tongue, girl. And quite frankly, I'm losing my patience," Uncle says. "Commander Jin Yi just arrived downstairs. The Lion Heart are here to take you home, so get your stuff together."

"But Uncle she's—"

He silences me with a sweep of the hand. "Sick? She don't look it to me, boy. And Commander Jin Yi is a fine healer. Far better than you. Let her do her job." Without waitin' for a response, Uncle turns and leaves.

"Sorry, I forgot to tell you that he don't want you in the house," I say.

"It is alright. I didn't expect him to be fond of me, _but_ ..." Her mischievous smile returns. "I don't have to be _in_ the house to talk to you. And my family isn't leaving until the full moon. I could come until then."

I sigh, but I can't help but manage a smile. "You're a bad influence. You know that?"

"Bad influence? A belle always carries herself with dignity and good moral conduct," Sul Li says.

I huff. "Oh hush up, Sul Li. You broke that rule soon as I met you."

Sul Li clicks her tongue. "Not that it _matters._ Soooo..." She bats her eyelashes at me. "When are you going to show me around your home?"

"I don't know. I already made promises to people today," I say. "I'm gonna be watchin' kids and cookin' and havin' friends over for the game today and that don't end until almost ten. There ain't much to see when the sun goes down either. I could show you around tomorrow. What do you want to do?"

"Well tonight, I could bring my Lifebook to show you some memories we had. It might jog yours," she offers. "Tomorrow, I could come to see the village."

"Tomorrow sounds good." I say. "But I doubt my uncle would like it if you showed up at our doorstep at night."

Sul Li gives a dismissive wave. "Oh, I'm not coming to your door. I'd come through the window."

I gawk at her. "You'd _what?_ Sul Li, this room is on the second floor."

She shrugs. "I can jump higher than that. And it's not like falling would hurt me."

I massage the side of my head. "I think you're missing the point. You'd still be _in_ the house. Not to mention that you'd be makin' racket on the side of the house."

"I won't get caught if that's what you think," Sul Li says. "I've done it plenty of times before. With even taller buildings!"

_Somehow, that's not comfortin' to hear from you..._

Downstairs, I find Uncle layin' a cup of tea for Jin Yi at the table and wearin' a much better mood than he was upstairs. Jin Yi wear her same poker face, but her gaze flits to Tora and Yuna shufflin' in the kitchen every so often.

Uncle pours a cup of tea for himself. When I catch his eye, he gestures to the table. "Come over here, boy. I know ya'll met already, but I reckon I owe you a real introduction. Jin Yi here was my former trainee when I lead the Lion Heart Guard. I left it to her when I left Silla." He pulls a chair out for me. "Truthfully, she was _supposed_ to get my sword too, but..." He glances at her. "Well, you know what happened."

Jin Yi shrugs. "It would've been foolish for you not to take it. And besides, I fare well enough with the one I have." To me she says, "But I still have to wonder why you carry it with no idea how to use it." Her tone seems to suggest a joke, but her face sure don't seem to mean one.

My face warms. I sit down. "Erm...I've always liked cookin' for people rather than cuttin' them up."

"Don't blame him," Uncle says. "If I wanted to, I could've taught him any time." His cheek balloon briefly, then he exhales. "But I thought it would be better keep him away from all that Sillan stuff. Besides, there ain't that much need for it here."

Jin Yi loops a finger through her cup handle. "I wouldn't be so certain about that now. The woods in this area aren't safe. Not even for us."

Uncle's eyebrows scrunch. "Is it the Gayans?"

She shakes her head. "We drove them all off last night. It's the Darkborn that we're worried about."

A hard chill crawl up my neck. "Darkborn?"

"That creature you were screaming at in the ruins," Jin Yi says. "Where there is usually one, there are likely more in a nest somewhere. I haven't been able to find the nest, but we'll keep searching until the full moon."

"What happens if ya'll don't find it?" I ask.

"They breed and their gunk rots the area around them," Uncle says. "They don't usually bother ordinary folk unless they're desperate, but our presence drive them crazy. Once, I was alone and they flash-swarmed me. Thank Mother Bear I wasn't far from our compound."

Jin Yi sips her tea. "With any luck, it might have been a roamer that was just passing, but you can never be too careful."

Uncle nods minutely, his gaze driftin'. "But we ain't never had that problem before..." Though he says the words aloud, they seem more like he's sayin' them to himself than to us.

"What of the Grand Belle?" Jin Yi asks. "She's ill, isn't she?"

When my Uncle doesn't respond, I realize that Jin Yi is talkin' to me.

"She was throwin' up and feelin' dizzy earlier," I say. "I made her some ginger water and..." My voice trails as Jin Yi's eyes narrow. "...Sundubu jjigae?"

"Ginger water?"

I tug at my shirt collar. "Yeah, just a few slices in hot water. You don't need that many. Just two or three can make a strong cup of it. It's good for if someone is nauseous. Sul Li perked right up after just smellin' it."

Jin Yi glances at my uncle. "Did you teach him?"

Uncle raises his head. "About medicine?"

"And cooking," Jin Yi says.

Uncle shakes his head. "I taught him some here and there. He was curious enough about everything else when he was little. And the folks around here were nice enough to show him the ropes about food. Ancestors know I barely had a head for cookin'. Bet the Lion Heart was grateful they didn't have to eat my terrible cooking anymore."

Jin Yi's lip edges quirk into what I think is s'posed to be a smile, but she brings her cup up to her lips. "That is what a Heart is for, sir." Then she gets up. "I'd like to see the Grand Belle, if you don't mind."

I get up out of my seat. "I'll show you."

Jin Yi follows me with soundless steps. I rap on the door. "Sul Li, Jin Yi is here to check on you. Are you decent?"

"Come in," Sul Li says.

I push open the door to find the stew and tea completely devoured on the nightstand, the bed made, and Sul Li in a fresh change of blue and gold robes, wrestlin' her hair into a top knot in front of the mirror. Once she's finished she smoothes her robes with a hand and turns to Jin Yi. "Did my mother send only you?"

"I brought a company of my own guards. The Wings of Heaven are here as well," Jin Yi says. "She wanted us to investigate why the general's company didn't arrive."

Sul Li's gaze flicks up toward the ceilin'. " _Eomma_ did not need to do all of that for my sake."

Jin Yi dips her head. "She is only concerned about your safety, Your Highness. And rightfully so, with Gayans running about in the area. Her Majesty said that your father didn't mention bringing any men."

_Her Majesty and Your Highness?_ Well she sure wasn't fibbin' about her fancy pedigree. Feelin' left out of the conversation, but unsure if leavin' is appropriate, I stick my hands in my pockets, and prop myself against the door so Jin Yi can go inside.

Sul Li just sit on the bed and sigh as though she's hearin' old and worn out news. "Well it is too late now. I'm not certain Aeternum has the space to accommodate the Hwarang _and_ Father's men for our stay. We certainly don't have the supplies for a large company."

"The Hwarang will make do with what we can find," Jin Yi says. "But more importantly, are you well? I was told you were ill."

"I ate something yesterday that I shouldn't have. But Kurai took care of it quickly. He is a wonderful cook and his hospitality was excellent," she says with the most innocent of smiles. "I believe he deserves something for his trouble."

I press my lips together. _I don't think there are pockets deep enough to pay for that horror._

Jin Yi's narrowed gaze flits between us both, makin' me wonder if she suspect Sul Li ain't tellin' the whole truth. But if she do, she don't make anything of it. "We don't have much since we're so far from Silla and Silent Bastion."

"Perhaps not, but he did express an interest in our culture," Sul Li says. "Even with the limited space, I think that he would enjoy coming to the Telling on the full moon."

My breath catches. I get to go to _their_ gatherin'? Skin tinglin' warm all over, I can't help but blurt out, "Ya'll would really let me come?"

"I don't see why not," Sul Li says. "And I'm certain that my family will want to thank you personally."

"Forgive me, but...Is that wise, Your Highness?" Jin Yi folds her arms, side-glancin' at me. "He is an outsider. The Hwarang might not have an issue, but will the Kim Clan approve of it? It _is_ unprecedented even if there is no rule against it."

" _Halmae_ is acting Clan Head in mother's absence, so I am certain she would be accepting," Sul Li says. "The clan will respect whatever she decides."

"I'd love to come, if ya'll will have me," I say. "Do I have to do anything special there? What do ya'll do at these Tellin's?"

"Not very much," Jin Yi says. "The Queen Mother will lead a ceremony to acknowledge the trainees who will become Hwarang in Silent Bastion and acknowledge those who came of age, then she'll read a story from the Ancestral Annals, Her Highness will read our Bound Vows which _should_ be memorized by now." She finishes that last statement with a hard stare at Sul Li who seems to find the red walls of my room suddenly very interestin'. "Your Highness—"

"I can memorize them in a few days!" Sul Li chirps. "They're not that long."

Jin Yi scrubs a hand over her face. "You worry me when you say things like that, Your Highness."

Sul Li jumps to her feet. "If you worry too much, you'll get old before your time. Now, let's be off. I heard there was a temple in the area."

"I'm afraid there'll not be any sight-seeing until your family sight-sees _you_ first," Jin Yi says. "And I doubt the Queen Mother will have any of it when she hears that you haven't memorized anything."

"But I have time..."

"And we are wasting it," Jin Yi says quietly. "Come, Your Highness."

Sul Li pouts, glancin' at the window as though considerin' a last minute Houdini escape, but finally relents and heads in front of Jin Yi, whose gaze, for the briefest of seconds, flick toward the ceilin' while her nostrils flare. Up until now, her face ain't really had too many clear feelin's on it, but that's clearly the feelin' of wantin' to snatch some weaves if I ever seen it.

Downstairs, the rest of the Lion Heart stand in the doorway, gazin' around our house with a gape-mouthed stupor while my uncle rub his forehead and stare in his teacup like he wish it had some liquor in it.

"Sir..." One guard asks. "You live on the _ground?"_

"We _all_ live on the ground here," my uncle says, his voice a strained calm.

The guard look amongst each other, but then the same guard asks, "All the time?"

" _Yes..._ Like I've already told you— _"_ At the sight of us comin' down the stares, he stands straight up. "Jin Yi, it was a pleasure to see you."

"I take it the men have gotten on your nerves already?" Jin Yi asks.

Uncle coughs and rubs the back of his neck. "Not at all." His gaze slides to Sul Li. "Do you have everything so you don't have to make another trip?"

I almost cringe at his bluntness. _Way to not be obvious you don't want her here, Uncle._

Sul Li's face don't show any sign of bein' offended, but she dips her head to him. "If I have, Kurai is permitted to bring it to Aeternum Ruins before the full moon, or I will send for it myself."

Uncle's gaze flits to the stairs as if maybe he suspects she left somethin' up there on purpose, but he just drum his fingers on the desk. "Very well. May your travels be safe, Your Highness."

"See you..." I have catch myself from sayin' 'later'. "If ya'll ever come around here again."

Sul Li turns her head as if to say somethin', her sights trail to my uncle and she seems to think better of it. One by one, the guards fall in step to flank Sul Li as they head out of the door. Jin Yi brings up the rear, seein' the company out without a word. Yuna gets up to close the door behind them and quiet blankets the house.

Uncle wipes his forehead, which I notice now is damp.

"What's wrong with you?" I say. "You look like you're sweatin' out the Pacific over there."

"I'm just glad she's out of the house. Out of sight. Out of mind. Out of the tiger's claws," He says, headin' into the kitchen to wash his and Jin Yi's teacup.

"I can tell. It was written all over your face," I mutter.

"Don't get started with me boy," Uncle says, cuttin' on the water. "I already told you she belongs with her own kind. Don't let her bewitch you."

"What would she want to do that to me for?" I ask. "She's like a Queen or somethin', ain't she?"

"But she's a _Kim._ They _always_ smile to your face, but hunt you from the back. I could tell she was plannin' something in that head of hers. Just can't figure out what."

It's hard not to sit and claw my own ears off. Gods almighty, he's like a broken record with this! Why can't he see that she don't want nothin'? Sure, Sul Li can get under my skin and all, but he make her sound like she's some kind of bloodthirsty monster. _I feel like you're the only prejudiced one around here, Uncle._ I decide to change the subject. "Don't ever miss what you had in Silla? Even a little bit?"

He just sponge up the dishes with soap, not answerin'.

I clench my jaw. _I know you hear me._

As I turn back to the stairs to get dressed, Uncle finally cuts the water off and says, "It's still not easy sometimes. You were just a tiny pup when I took you, so you didn't have much to make you want to go back. But your father just asked me out of the blue. I was a soldier so I obeyed. But as soon as I got out there with you, I was miserable. A pack wolf just ain't meant to be alone." He stares through the kitchen window solemnly. "I remember the first few nights when I couldn't smell Silla anymore. I had to stop myself from runnin' straight back to the border more than once. But meetin' Chloe made it not hurt so much. That's why I say not to want for anything from Silla." He looks at me. "It can mess you up in the head."

"Like make you crazy?" I ask.

He nods. "So stay away. Better to not even start. Even if you could go, there's nothin' there for you."

When no more words come, I head up the stairs. _But if I was betrothed to somebody as important as Seung Man, there was a little somethin'. It wouldn't hurt to just know a little more._

I step under into the warm shower water and lather myself up with tea tree soap. Uncle's words ain't left my head since I started to get ready and neither have Sul Li's. I haven't decided whether or not to tell Uncle that I'm goin' to her Tellin'. On one hand, I feel like it ain't nobody's business if I want to spend my free time with a friend on my vacation week. But if I don't say anything, I feel like I'm carryin' somethin' dirty and rotten beside me.

_It ain't like you're gonna to stay with them. You're just visitin' and seein' what they do. Nobody ain't told you anything about where you came from and now you can see it for yourself. And if it weren't safe, Sul Li would tell me._

Even still, I can feel Uncle's disapproval like a wall of cactus needles pressin' in on me.

_How do you know that boy?_ I can hear him say. _Just cuz she says she's your friend?_

Realizin' my fingers are sodden and pruny, I put it out of my head and focus on washin' the rest of myself.

I head downstairs to find the beast monks enjoyin' tea and Gio makin' himself a protein shake in the kitchen. At the sight of me he grins, "Well look who it is."

"What the heck are you smilin' about?" I check myself all over, makin' sure that the joke ain't on me. "You make it sound like I did somethin'."

His grin widens. "I don't know if 'did something' is the right phrase...A little bit more like had some plans even after a certain somebody said that he wasn't doing anything last night!"

I roll my eyes. "I _didn't_ do anything last night."

"Oh yeah?" He screws the top back on his whey protein. "If that's true, then who was in your room? And who was downstairs this morning, bro? Don't sit here and tell me she was a ghost."

I stride past the counter, mutterin', "You sure know how to be nosy." I open the cabinet for a bowl of soup.

"Yeah and you sure know how to put one over on somebody," Gio says. "Did you kiss her?"

I glare at him. "I didn't touch her. You know I ain't like that."

Gio's eyebrows come together. "Then why'd you bring her?"

"Cuz' she got separated from her folks and she accidentally ate one of Maven's edibles," I say. "We got harassed by some guys on the way to Kage and I couldn't leave her walkin' around high as the moon."

His eyes widen. He shakes his bottle and takes a sip. "I bet she felt _gooooooood._ "

"Good until she threw it all up this mornin'," I say, ladlin' stew into my bowl.

"But you didn't try to make a move on her at all?" Gio asks. "Not even for another date?"

I walk past him. "We moved her off the bathroom floor. Happy?"

"Tch." Gio picks his keys off the kitchen counter. "You're a grumpy old man just like your Uncle, you know?"

"Thanks," I say dryly. "She told me that too."

Gio clicks his tongue. "So much to learn about women, young grasshopper. Anyway..." He shakes his bottle again. "Just a heads up. I might be late for the game. My friends called a meeting for us wyverns so I'm goin'."

I pull a chair out at the table and sit down. "Meetin'?"

"Folks at the palace and in the other villages are tired of the way we're treated," Gio says. "I agree with them. Just recently they started takin' extra money out of my wages at Yoshi's Delivery Service. Turns out they're doin' that to every wyvern now. You'd think King Ryuu have enough up there in the palace with everybody payin' him tribute."

I slurp soft tofu into my mouth. Dragons ain't never seen wyvernfolk as equals in all my days of livin' here, mostly cuz wyvernfolk don't look any different than other humans and don't really have much magic to their name. "I don't like him neither, but ya'll better not say or do nothin' to get yourselves into trouble. There's no tellin' what they might do if they think people are colludin'."

"Don't worry about it. We ain't fools," Gio says. "Really I'm just going to..." His voice trails as a pair of guards pause at our window, lookin' at somethin' up higher. Then they disappear for a brief moment. There's a knock our door.

Yuna sets her cup down to get it.

"W-wait, Yuna—" Gio says.

But it's too late. The guards at the door are the ones that were at the shack yesterday.

"Hey, I was lookin' for you yesterday," I say.

"Sorry. I was hoping that you'd be back before my shift ended." He says, rubbin' his head. "Did you get what I asked?"

"Yep, I kept them in the fridge." I get up and walk past Gio—who I notice is as white as my tofu.

The guards nod at him to say hello and he just stand pole-still. Yuna pokes him.

"Gio?" I call. "You okay?"

"Uhh...yeah, yeah. I just...thought I forgot something important," he says.

The guards look amongst each other.

I hand them the bag of locusts and honey. "Here ya'll go. There wasn't no change so this is all of it."

The dragon guard opens the bag and takes a big sniff. From the couch, Tora makes a face like he wants to gag.

"Ahh...They're fresh," the guard says with a smile. "Thanks for gettin' them for me."

"No problem." _And hopefully, there's no problem when you use those things._

Yuna closes the door behind them. Gio puts a hand over his chest. "Wooo...I swear to the gods, my life flashed before my eyes right there."

I sit back down. "Heck, you looked so guilty, I was surprised they didn't take you in for that."

Gio wipes his forehead. "I thought they heard me talk about..." He pauses with a self-conscious look at the windows.

"Thought who heard you?" Uncle asks as he comes down the stairs.

"The guards," I say. "Gio said something he didn't want nobody hearin'."

"Well ya'll ought to have more sense next time," Uncle says. "You know they just walk around like they own the place."

Gio frowns. "Like we all need _that_ reminder."

"I'm just sayin'." Uncle grabs his cap off the hat rack. He stops beside me. "By the way, I'm gonna be helpin' Chloe all day today at the tavern. I don't think that I'll be back until after midnight, if at all, so if you need anything that's where ya'll can find me."

"You ain't gonna be with us for the game?" Gio asks.

"I would but..." He holds up his newly ringed hand. "You know how it is. See ya'll later."

As Uncle leaves, Gio pouts at his empty hand. "No. I _don't_ know how it is."

"I'm sure you'll find somebody, Gio," I say.

Gio snorts. "Not in this zip code. I've never clicked with any girl around here."

"Don't talk like that, Gio...There's hope with the UKR comin'."

"I _know_ you ain't tryin' to give _me_ advice with your moved-her-off-the-floor-rabbit-head-self," Gio says with a loud huff.

I grin. "She liked it enough to invite me for a second round."

Gio throws up his hands. "I swear... All the jerks get the girls! You know what? I'm out. _Good. Bye._ "

When he's gone, Tora gives me a dirty look. _Ahem... **We** were_ _the ones that moved her off the floor, Mister Brag._

"You know I was just teasin', Tora," I say. "Besides, he was teasin' me. I should get to mess with him a little bit."

Yuna shakes her head, but I catch an amused twitch of her whiskers. _You shouldn't tease him. The villages aren't really all that great for matchmaking._

She's plenty right about that. Most people on the island are either kitsunefolk that came already hitched, ordinary folk that don't live as long as a wyvern, or too old, or too young. Most wyvernwomen are holed up as servants at the palace and ain't allowed to marry, so there ain't much luck there. "He'll live a long time. I'm sure he'll find somebody eventually. Cuz if even somebody as loud and bougie as Akane can get her butt a boyfriend, I don't see why he can't get one."

_I'm gonna tell her that you said that,_ Tora signs with a grin.

"Go right ahead. Akane already know I think she's bougie," I say. "After this bowl, I'll be ready to head out."

_Head out to where?_ Yuna asks. _We are not cooking?_

"We are but I promised Master Ushi that I'd pay a visit to Izumi to wish her luck, remember? And on top of that I need to go to the bank really fast. There should be time to treat her to something healthy at Wakiwi."

_You'll eat and eat_ _**again**?_ Tora signs.

Yuna huffs. _Look who's talking!_

_But I can eat anything_ Tora signs. ! _He eats like a bird._

"You hush up, Tora. I can eat plenty much as you if I want to," I say.

Tora tilts his head. _You can try and fail if you want to. I still have the record for eleven of Mrs. Ai's Phoenix Bumble Pies!_

_For the love of the gods, where do you put it all?_ Yuna signs.

Tora pats his belly and flex his arms.

"Wait until you get a beer belly like Pip," I say. Gulpin' down the last of my savory broth, I head into the kitchen to put my bowl in the sink for later. "You'll be rethinkin' all those pies when you have to work them all off."

I grab my check and keys and head outside with Yuna and Tora. Outside, mornin' light shawls the path to the airstrip in a soft gold, where I notice a bunch of podiums and chairs have been laid out for the arrival of the United Kitsune Republic like they do every season. Beast monks and wyvern servants dot the road, carryin' equipment down to the airstrip. Paper lanterns and welcome garlands festoon the plaza street lights and signs and there are a few early booths set up but with nothin' there.

_Perfect day to have my check._ I've been havin' my eye on some new cookware and seasonin's for a long while. I might go down and check them out with Sul Li tomorrow. As I get in line to have my check cashed, I notice two beast monks with two huge bags of tea in each hand accompanyin' a dragon nobleman who gestures vaguely to the teller.

"I didn't know dragons drink all that tea," I mutter.

_They don't,_ Tora signs. _All of that tea is for Yami. He's staying at the temple._

"Yami?" My attention wavers briefly as the female teller unties a string holdin' gold mon coins and counts them in front of me. "Is he famous or what?"

Yuna's hand seesaws back and forth. _He seems to be. From what I heard, the dragons went through great pains to get him to come here._

The teller pushes a silk bag of gold coins towards me. "One man is gonna drink all that tea?"

_He says that it helps him think._ Tora signs. _I'm not sure what it helps him think about. He doesn't do much aside from meditation and he never joins our sessions at the temple._

Yuna signs, _I was told he studied magical engineering all over the world. And rumor has it, he's studied in the Brother World too._

I pocket my money. "Strange thing for a monk to study." And a stranger thing to 'go through pains' for. I don't know much about magical engineerin', but as far as I know it's up the same alley as inventin' chi-powered robots, equipment, and weapons. The Brother World is s'posedly full of 'em, but I never thought there was a way for ordinary folk to go there from this world. Plenty of sciency folk on the mainland died tryin' to get their shuttles through the impassable barrier that keep 'em away. "If he's really gone through to the Brother World, I'll eat Gio's nasty work socks."

Tora's eyes gleam. _Really? If you do that, it'll make up for last night._

Yuna smacks him upside the head. _Did you learn nothing from the forgiveness sermon this morning?_

Tora rubs the back of his head. _What happened to being non-violent?_

Yuna huffs. _You didn't care about non-violence when you punched Kurai in the face, you two-day monk._

_You're a two hour monk,_ Tora chides back.

_Two minute monk!_

"Come on you two. It's too early in the mornin' to start misbehavin'," I say. "I want to see Izumi off to her exam with smiles."

Tora makes a grumblin' sound. _I'd like to see her off without lumps on my head._

_Then behave,_ Yuna signs.

We head out to the wet roads to Middle Path Temple where we have to dodge past beast monks carryin' chairs and other sundries back and forth. Inside, I find Master Ushi talkin' with an unusual panther beast monk—or rather I should say beast _man;_ he's way too tall to be any of the regular beast monks here and his hands are padless and strangely humane-sque.

"Don't worry. I assure you that we have plenty of tea to sustain you," Master Ushi says. As we approach, his feelers curl, "Welcome. Come to see, Izumi?"

"You bet. Is she still studyin'?" I ask.

"I could not pry her away from the Sun Hall," Master Ushi says, shakin' his head. Then to the beast man he says, "Yami, this is the one I told you about, Kurai."

A knee-jerk jolt makes my heart skip. _Ya'll been talkin' about me?_

Yami's sea-blue gaze fall to me. There's no...light in it. He don't look hostile or nothin', just...he don't seem to have the spark that livin' people have. "Ah..." His voice is a low thunderous rumble. "It is a pleasure to meet you, Kurai. Everyone here seems to praise your skill with herbs. Perhaps you could make a good tea?"

I relax. "Oh thanks. If you're stayin' for a while, then I'd be happy to rustle somethin' up for you at the when I get off my vacation."

Master Ushi and Yami exchange a look that seem to be a conversation in itself. Then without a word, Yami turns and leaves, headin' toward the refectory which Tora also step toward, but a stern look from Master Ushi make him step back.

Yuna's gaze follows Yami and she gives a minor shake of her head to herself and signs, _Let's see how Izumi is doing._

We follow Master Ushi down the windin' road to the gable-roofed livin' quarters. Thrushes trill up a song up on the clay-tile roofs. Light confettis through the trees all the way to the stairs where the statues of the Four Benevolent Beasts flank the doorway, each with a head bowed toward the sun-shaped chimes that _clink-clank_ under the eaves.

I file after Master Ushi into the narrow entry hall and we all head up the stairs and to the end of the hall to a door distinguished by the tiger relief on it.

_She's stayin' in Heaven's old room?_ I crane my neck to see past Master Ushi's shoulder to make sure. It even still has the gold plaque with Heaven's name. I'm surprised it hasn't been removed long ago. Though with how superstitious dragons are, I s'pose I really shouldn't be. If a black cat walked into a room, they'd clear it in a heartbeat.

Master Ushi raps on the door with his cane. "Izumi. You have a visitor."

A squeakish whine comes from inside. The door opens. Izumi is the spittin' image of the King of Dragons and Master Ushi: same golden feelers of the Imperial Family, same small crimson eyes, same thick black hair—only hers is long and tied in a glossy fishtail braid. She tackles me into a hug. "Hey! Where've you been you big lug?"

Warmth bloom up in me. "Normal folk gotta work for a livin'." I pull away and immediately get an eyeful of books, highlighters, flash cards, instant coffee packets, study guides in foreign languages, and empty cellophane wrap on the desk and on the floor. "Now, I _know_ you ain't been livin' off this junk all week. Uh-uh. We're going'to Wakiwi's right now. Ya'll need to get some real food into your system."

Izumi's cheeks puff up. "What do you mean? I _do_ eat real food."

Tora purrs. _Yeah! We feed and water her twice a day!_

Master Ushi gives his wheezy laugh. "Instant coffee and dragon cake isn't real food little one. Why not go and get out of the temple? Some air and a breakfast will put you the right mindset for your exam."

"And no books at the table," I add.

Izumi fold up her pale arms. "Fine, but at least let me bring my study guides."

"Can't forget those, can we?" Master Ushi says with a chuckle. "I'll leave you to it."

I lean against the door frame, waitin' quietly with Yuna and Tora while Izumi scurries around the room to gather leaflets, annotated worksheets, and highlighted documents. She crush em into the junct' of her arm and swing around one-eighty with a triumphant look on her face.

I grin. "Well dog, you sure you ain't wanna bring the whole buildin' too?"

Izumi roll her eyes. " _Ssh._ "

Outside, Republic Day is in full swing and the streets are swollen with wyvern servants and beast monks. All of us nearly have to fight just to get down to the blue and white awnin' of Wakiwi's. I open the door for Izumi and at once the lime green and earthy brown shop sighs its minty and espresso fragrance right up in our noses. Hands powdered with yellow chalk, Bonnie writes _Daily Special: is Gone With The Wind_ on the chalkboard while the iridescent Tohenian feathers grow from the crook of her ear. She looks up. "Hey ya'll. Havin' breakfast?"

Izumi takes a big whiff, and eyes the croissants in the vitrines. "I missed the smell of real food."

"Well, if you missed it that bad you ought to have some more tonight," I say. "I'm makin' short ribs."

Her red eyes gleam. "Tempting."

_Enough to put down the study guides?_ Tora teases.

But the slitty glare Izumi give him put that down quick.

I take a ham and cheese croissant with green tea while Izumi decides to have egg avocado toast with almond milk tea. Full already, Yuna and Tora get a Thai tea each. Izumi claim a window-side booth by scatterin' her papers on the table. I peer over. It's all in Pua Velu, the language of the Pua Moana kitsune. I'm too rusty at foreign languages to read much of the curly script before my brain fizzle out and glide to the next language: Vak' Gonkuxia from the Flamehammer Clan. And the last Adjusted Hangul of the Tribe of Endless Skies. "What kind of exam is this anyway?"

"Fluency Test with writing, reading, and speaking parts," Izumi says, pickin' out a Gongkuxia vocabulary test and shufflin' the rest of the papers into a neat stack. "I want to be Ambassador for one of the kitsune tribes, but you have to be fluent to be considered. Today, I'm only having my Vak' Gongkuxia Exam. Tomorrow, will be Adjusted Hangul and Saturday is the Pua Velu test."

"Well Akane know all of 'em. She's comin' over for the Quiverback game tonight, if you want to ask some last minute questions."

Izumi frowns. "But she'll be all into the game."

_No she won't,_ Tora signs. _It's a Black Ravens game._

"Yeah, Tora's right," I say. "Akane is too bougie to watch the Black Ravens."

Izumi put a hand over her mouth, chucklin'. "Don't let her hear you say that."

I snort. "And why not? It ain't like she won't fess to it. She know she's bougie."

"Alright, but I'm just sayin' that it's your funeral." Izumi flips a page over, mouthin' Vak' Gongkuxia under her breath.

Yuna put a paw under her chin, then ask, _What's the point of coming over to watch then if she doesn't like the Black Ravens?_

I shrug and fold my hands behind my head. "It's a culture thing. Ya'll know how Tohenians get about their Quiverback. 'Sides, Akane gonna want a front row seat to make fun of me if they lose."

" _When_ they lose," Bonnie says with a wink from the counter.

I huff. " _If_ they lose. Don't you get started too, Bonnie. Rhett's been crowin' about that all week, but I think they've got hope this season. By the way, where's he at?"

"Probably tryin' to get Dollie to stop pickin' up all our furniture." Bonnie sighs. "She's been makin' a bad habit out of throwin' the couches and the tables."

Yuna and Tora look at each other with wide eyes. And my eyes are wide with them. Out of all the kitsune races, Tohenians are best-known for their strength and bein' able to get hit by most anything without much of a scratch. But all that strength they got ain't so great outside the Tohen Islands, where everything ain't braced and reinforced to accommodate them. Bonnie, Rhett, and Akane gotta wear special power cuffs, but Dollie don't know no better.

"Wait a minute...She ain't gonna be throwin' stuff at my house, is she?" I ask. "Cuz my uncle would throw a fit."

"Oh heavens _no._ Rhett is pickin' up her cuffs from Yoshi's Delivery before he brings Dollie," Bonnie says. "I wouldn't let her..." Bonnie's voice trails as Mrs. Ueda come in the door with her red hair frazzled and her big purple glasses slidin' off her nose. "Where's the fire, Haruka?"

"Have Masami come past this way?" Mrs. Ueda asks.

"Masami?" Bonnie's eyebrows crinkle. "I saw her earlier playin' with two other kids. Why?"

Mrs. Ueda put a hand on her chest and sigh like that's the best thing that she heard all day. "I thought she ran off. She's been sneakin' off here and there without tellin' me lately. I just happened to look cuz I saw she ain't been doin' her chores."

"Well ya'll know how that go ," Bonnie says, gettin' a towel to wipe down the counter. "Kids ain't never want to do their chores."

"But who did she sneak off with?" Mrs. Ueda asks. "When I get _my_ hands on 'em..."

"Come to think of it, I don't know whose kids they are really..." Bonnie's gaze meanders away. "Hmm... I wanna say they're from Kage Village, but their clothes didn't look like it."

I sit up a bit. _Sul Li's family maybe?_ "What about the clothes? What did they look like?"

"Really raggedy," Bonnie says with a frown. "I can't believe that anybody would let their children walk out of the house like that. But they didn't seem like they had much so I went and gave them something to eat."

_Definitely not Sul Li's family then._ And it can't be those Gayan folk since Jin Yi and all of them sent those guys away. _The Sillans might know about strange folk runnin' around in the forest._

Yuna seem to be on the same train of thought because she signs, _Should we ask Sul Li? She might know._

"That might be a good idea," I say. "Mrs. Ueda, if you want, I can ask around."

"Please do. Because Masami usually comes back from her sneakin' by now," Mrs. Ueda says, rubbin' the back of her neck. "I don't want to get to thinkin' negative but..." Her lips come together. "Oh never mind."

"If they've been playing outside, the guards will probably see them," Izumi adds. "My dad has been giving them stricter orders so I doubt they would let Masami out. But they would still let those kids in. It might not hurt to ask."

"I'll do that then," Mrs. Ueda says. "Hopefully, I'm just worryin' for nothin'."

"I hope you find and talk some sense into her," Bonnie says. "You can't be sure of all the types of folk that might show up around Republic time."

As Mrs. Ueda leaves, Yuna stands up. _I will go and see if Sul Li has seen anything strange._

As she leaves, I can't help but look out at the crown of trees beyond the village borders. _I wonder what Sul Li is doin' now._ Probably studyin' like Izumi...Though I have the funny feelin' that Sul Li probably ain't takin' any of those studies half as seriously.

Bonnie brings out Izumi and my tea in blue-rimmed porcelain and our food on matchin' saucers. I cast one last look at the forest. _I s'pose you were right after all, Miss Concerned Bystander. I really did get answers to questions that I wasn't askin'._ Hopefully, I'll get plenty more tonight when I see Sul Li. Feelin' an unexpected rush of warmth at the thought, I take a bite of my croissant: swiss and sweet honey ham sandwiched in warm flaky bread.

"What are you so smiley about?" Izumi asks, breakin' off a piece of her toast.

"What do you mean? I just like my food," I say.

"Bonnie's food is good, but you're smiling a little _too_ hard over there," Izumi says, her feelers curlin' in amusement. "Just sayin'."

Heat flares in my face. "A man can't just enjoy a good day?"

Izumi twirls her highlighter and underlines another Vak' Gonkuxia word with a tiny smirk on her face. "Not saying he can't."

"That reminds me..." I begin. "Earlier we saw that Yami fellow at the temple. You know what he's all about?"

Izumi dab at a stray dot of mushed avocado at the corner of her mouth with a napkin. "My dad wanted his consultation for some project with the guards," Izumi says. "I don't really know the details, but it's probably just to design new locks and keys for the palace. He's been worried about our security a lot lately, but he always gets worried about that around Republic time."

Tora cocks his head, brow furrowin' up. He raises a paw as though he's about to sign somethin', but he puts his hand down.

"What Tora?" I ask.

But he just shake his head more incessantly and poke his straw into the whipped cream on top of his thai tea.

Drumbeats thunder, drownin' out Izumi's statement. Outside, flag bearers march with the yellow dragon banners of Dragon Palace. Guards flank them. Then the Dragon Council follows in their red imperial robes. Then finally the King of Dragons.

"The ship is here already?" Izumi looks up at the clock where both hands almost touch the twelve. "Geeze... time is going by so fast. I'm not ready for the exam."

"Well, you ain't got time for that," I say with another glance outside.

Izumi frowns and starts to gather up her stuff. "Oh boy..."

Tora gives a slow sympathetic blink, then stands up. _We should go out then, so we don't miss the performances._

### _1-4_

TWELVE O' CLOCK on the dot a fleet of airships spot up the eastern skies beyond the Airstrip. Villagers from Soraumi and Kage, dragons, wyverns, and beast monks crowd up the seats in front of the harbor. Much to my surprise, I spot Lu a few rows ahead of me. Next to him a spindly, curly-haired girl with the tell-tale gold Oracle's Wing on her right ear is chattin' with Gio who seems really self-conscious about his surroundin's. Master Ushi takes his seat next to the King of Dragons, whose expression I can't see that well.

Before long, they are joined by a woman wearin' a white gownish robe and a black tasseled hat like she's just graduated from a fancy college. Her long snow white ponytail end in a thick dab of black like a dipped paintbrush. She sweeps it out of the way to sit beside the king who greets her with a smile and mutters words that I can't hear. Judgin' by her own pinched mouth, she don't want to hear none of it.

Cerulean hulls gleam bright like new coins, and a squad of ships converge into a line to follow the grand flagship: the Myobu. Its huge shadow dwarf everybody as it comes down to the limestone landin' strip. Hot chi gasoline-fumed air blows in our faces, makin' the island trees toss about and the palace flags flap. A chevron of scared crows explode from the trees.

I cup a hand over my nose to buffer against the smell, but in the corner of my eye, I spot Yuna slippin' in at the edge of the crowd. She sit at the empty seat next to me.

"Welcome back, Yuna. Did Sul Li—" But before I can answer there's a loud _shhhhh_ from behind me.

All of the pier get quiet, so quiet that I can hear a someone hawkin' up loogies from way in the back row. The Myobu's gangplank swing on down. From the top of the deck, flags rise over the rails and then shuffle forward down the line.

Short dwarf-like men march down in sand-colored khaki, holdin' the red Black Tortoise-bearin' flag of Vak' Bahar's Flamehammer Clan. A hippo-sized black komodo-turtle carries the thick-bearded Tsar on its craggy-shelled back in a red and gold howdah, flickin' its forked tongue at air. Then come the commoners: men in long flowin' white robes and headdresses. Women come out in colorful saris and holding decorative lil' parasols.

Beside me, Izumi gulp a breath. No doubt that it's the exam spooks.

I pat her on the shoulder. "Don't worry, Izumi. You'll be fine."

But if Izumi is listenin', she ain't givin' signs.

Next, the white flag bearin' Pua'alowhe's Azure Dragon sigil goes up. Blue-clad officers parade down first with the famous cheek to cheek Pua Moana smile on their faces. A portly guy in an admiral jacket and white pants waddle close behind. Tattooed guys trail behind in only sarongs around their waists. Women come behind them in full body ones.

A blue flag goes up: Vermilion Bird, sigil of the Tribe of Endless Skies from the Tohen Islands. They're the totally different ball game than the Flamehammer and the Pua Moana: pale, built like skyscrapers, lanky limbs, elfy ears with colorful feathers between them that seem to shine like gems, and wings on their back that catch the light. The shortest Tohenian there could easily be five-foot-seven, just an inch shorter than me, but if ya'll wanna meet eyes with the rest of them ya'll gonna need a ladder or a telephone pole or somethin'.

Red-clad officers ride on the backs of colorful phoenixes. Some birds small, long-necked and graceful like cranes, in blue, purple, and yellow. Falcon and hawkish mounts strut behind 'em in mottled brown, red, black, and darkish green. Then big guns come out: heavy-framed buzzard and vulture mounts that come in dusky gray, flat white, and liver brown.

Black flags unspool next and the White Tiger of Tokaido snarl against the background. Blackfoot Tribe's Chief's Guard march forward. Red hair yarded back into a ponytail, Akane, the Guildmaster, marches behind. The mixed pale and tan faces of the regular Blackfoot Tribe members pour in after.

All four tribes stand at attention in front of us. Master Ushi get up and take his place at the podium. The mic shriek so bad everybody start coverin' their ears. A wyvern servant woman on the sidelines rushes to help him get it under control.

Master Ushi clear his throat and then say, "Welcome everyone to the seasonal reception of the United Republic of Kitsune. Normally, the introductions would be handled by a prophet, but unfortunately, as some of you may have heard already, our own Professor Hart has unfortunately passed away."

The crowd get to murmurin' as he finish, mostly from the villagers from Kage and the kitsune that just came.

"So in her place, Professor Kiyoko Wu, Headmaster of the Wu School of Prophets, shall proceed with the placements," Master Ushi continues.

The plaza hush up as the gowned woman rise from her seat and take her place at the stand while Master Ushi go and sit back down. She study the crowd for a while, so long a while that I start to thinkin' that maybe she's baked from that naan I delivered. Then she says, "Professor Hart was a dear friend and a very respected member of our school. She will be missed terribly by students and teachers alike. However..." Her dreamy eyes thin up like the blade of a knife. "Let me make something _very_ clear..."

At this, I notice the King and Master Ushi stop whisperin' and look at her.

"It is my understanding that Professor Hart was not ill at the time of her death, nor did she have any preexisting conditions that would justify an early grave. Because of this, the Wu School of Prophets will conduct a _thorough_ investigation into her death before I officially take my place as the new oracle of Soraumi Island.

"In the meantime, Flamehammer Clan, you are all assigned to the rooms around the Summer Court. The Tribe Of Endless Skies will take the Spring Court. The Pua Moana will have the Autumn Court. And finally, the Blackfoot Tribe will have the rooms around the Winter Court. The check-in desk is located in the Conference Room and that is where you'll all receive your room keys. Vendors, servicemen, and any international organizations, there will be a booth in the palace foyer for you all to check-in separately for your permits. However, this is _not_ the same as your room key check-in..."

My head start bobbin'. I blink and sit up straight, grindin' my palm into my eyes to keep woke. _Dog...How much longer this gotta go on for?_ I need to get on home and start on food for the game. I look past Yuna to find Tora dozin'. Yuna nudge him awake. _You're going to miss the performances if you fall asleep!_

Tora fold his arms up. _At this rate, I just want to go to Kurai's house. All this talking is boring._

I open my mouth to say somethin', but loud drummin' fill up the air again. One by one each tribe's drill team do a little number in the plaza and the crowd follow with the standin' applause. Once the Blackfoot Tribe finish up, Kiyoko dismiss everybody. And folk pop right out of their seats like they been waitin' for that moment their whole life.

Izumi gets up. "I think that's my cue to go to the exam room."

"Good luck then," I say. "You're welcome to come over later for dinner if you want. I know that exam is long."

Izumi's feelers curl. "I might take you up on that. They're serving liver and quail egg at the palace for dinner. No way I'm eating that junk." She waves a quick goodbye and then hurry off.

Tora's whiskers twitch. _I'll eat it if she doesn't want it._

Yuna makes a huffin' sound. _Is there anything that you don't eat, Greedywhiskers?_

_All food is good!_ Tora says, gettin' up. _And it's always food time! So how about we go out and make some?_

"Tora, you ought to be shamed of yourself..." I say, rollin' my eyes. "And besides, you know I gotta go and see Akane."

_We should be quick about it,_ Yuna signs. _Don't forget Rhett is coming over with Dollie._

_That's right._ I should get movin' then.

So many people are in the plaza that I can barely see. I spot the Blackfoot Tribe startin' to disperse. Out in front, Akane hands her keys to a gal I don't know well. I crane my neck to see if I can catch sight of Koda, the vice guild master, but she must be somewhere further back in the crowd cuz I don't see her nowhere.

"Akane!" I call. "Long time no see."

Akane turns around, glossed lips curlin' up in a grin. "Oh ho _ho!_ What's that I smell?" She sniffs loudly. "The future salt of a Black Ravens fan?"

"Oh hush up. You smellin' the salt from _your_ tears when the Black Ravens win the Quiver Bowl."

"Whoa, whoa, whoa, man." Akane put a hand up. "Calm _down._ You _do_ realize that they have to win a game, right?"

"I got a good feelin' about them this season, Akane," I say. "Especially with some of the newbies they brought on board."

Akane makes a gaggin' face. "They need divine intervention, okay? And the divine intervention they need probably needs more divine intervention. And _that_ divine intervention—"

"Akane!"

"Oh come on..." She locks me into a bruisin' Tohenian bear hug. "You know I gotta mess with you when it's a Black Ravens day."

Pain stabs through my body. _Holy butter nut cookies!_ I forgot how strong Tohenians are. Face crushed into her shoulder, I flail my arms. "Ow, ow, hey! Akane don't break me in half, geez!"

"Whoops." She lets me go. "Muscle up then, Twiggy. Heya. Yuna."

The two beast monks wave from afar, not willin' to be huggin' range.

I stretch my arms and my back, testin' for damage. "Not all of us got fancy super steroids in our genes like you." My gaze falls to her bandaged hand, and the purple cloud-like bruises spottin' her skin in the shadow of her sleeves."What the heck happened to you?"

"Oh this?" She raises her hand. "Accidentally got an arrow stuck in my hand. I was shootin' with my boyfriend."

_Was he using you as a target?_ Tora asks.

Yuna elbows him. _Rude._

_What am I supposed to think when I see_ _**that**?_ He jabs a paw at Akane's injury.

Akane gives short laugh. "Oh, it's nothing like that. One of the arrows splintered when I shot it. Don't worry. Koda took care of it."

_Then why are your wrists bruised like that?_ Bruisin' a Tohenian is hecka harder than tryin' to bruise a normal person from what I know. A normal guy like me can't even scratch her, so there's no way that can be your run-of-the-mill accident. Heck, I don't even think she'd get a bruise if she fell from the moon. I start to open my mouth to ask, but Akane don't really look up to more conversatin'.

"And why can't you leave it to someone else for a little bit?" A man's voice says.

"I appreciate the concern, but really..." The familiar blue-eyed Pua Moana face of Koda breaks from the crowd of Blackfoot Tribe. "I can juggle the workload just fine."

A tall Tohenian man with silver feathers growin' between his feathers steps after her. "But it's more efficient to give all of the work to someone else."

"Are you two at this vice thing again?" Akane says with a huff.

"I'm not," Koda says with a smile, though it's noticeably strained. "Just making sure there aren't any misunderstandings before I go off on HWB duty. I'll see you tonight after my shift." Then to me, she says, "Wish I could stay and talk, but I have to go."

"Don't worry about it," I say. "I'll just come visit ya'll or something."

"I'll bring your luggage to your room then," Akane says.

The Tohenian man watches Koda with narrowed eyes as she leaves. His height alone makes me reel. He's about a whole two or three heads taller than Akane, who is already a head taller than me. And his muscles...Gods Almighty, does he lift skyscrapers? "I don't understand what the problem is. All I suggested was that she take a little break from being vice for the duration of the trip. She's not even doing vice duties."

"At all?" I ask. "How come?"

"Eh...She's stuck doing some Healers Without Borders stuff. Apparently, if you're a Pua Moana, they draft you into it and you have to serve terms when they ask," Akane says. "They can't legally force her from vice duties, so she has to serve her terms now."

"Dang a draft?" I frown. "Sounds awful. Even if it is for a good cause."

"Yes..." Akane smirks. "Just like playing for the Black Ravens."

"Hey watch it you..." I fold my arms. "And to think I was gonna offer to help carry all your stuff."

Akane sticks her tongue out at me. "Worth." She points to her duffle bag on the ground and her bow. "Carry my stuff anyway though."

"No need to bother," The Tohenian man says, musclin' himself in between us and eclipsin' Akane out of my sight. He picks up Akane's duffle bag in one hand and her bow in another. "I've got everything covered."

_Hey! No need to be rude about it!_ I step back a few paces to be careful, but not too many to look too scared. This man could probably send me flyin' to the moon if he ain't careful.

"Well...Thanks, Seok." Akane peeks around him at me. "I don't think you two have met, have you?"

"Huh?" Seok turns around, his eyebrows raisin' at me. "Oh hey. Is this a friend of yours?"

_He must be Akane's boyfriend._ I've known that she's had one for a while, but not much more than that. Though seein' him in person, I'm not sure if I should take that as a good sign or a bad one.

Akane stands between the two of us. "Kurai... this is Seok, my boyfriend. He came to Tokaido to stay with me." She gestures to me. "Seok, this is my friend Kurai, the one that cooks really well. He set us those pressed cookies."

"Really?" He grab my hand and shake without askin'. His grip is hecka worse than Akane's hug; it feels like he's crushin' my bones. "Nice to meet you buddy. They were delicious."

I grind my teeth together, holdin' my breath until his grip loosens. And I notice, quite acutely, that he _ain't_ wearin' any power cuffs. "So you're with the Blackfoot Tribe now?"

Seok nods. "I still visit home from time to time. But I'm settling well." He smiles at Akane who stares at her watch as though it's got a miracle on it.

"Well I've got to go and get our room assignments and talk to Professor Wu," Akane says. "I'll see you later for the game. Come on Seok."

_I wonder if she knows about the prophet switcheroo that Professor Wu did..._ Though I suppose if she ain't found out by now that Headmaster Wu lady will tell her soon enough. I glance around behind me to find Connie handin' Gio a card of some sort and goin' off to join her brother.

A tug on my sleeve gets my attention. Yuna signs. _We ought to get home before Rhett does._

"Yeah, let's go." I pull on my shirt a few times to keep it from stickin' onto my skin. "It's hotter than a barbecue pit out here."

Once in the house, the first thing I notice is Chloe lookin' troubled at the kitchen counter while my uncle ain't nowhere to be found.

"Hey Chloe, what's goin' on?" I ask.

Chloe's lips press together. "Tsuli ain't gettin' up."

An icy pang ring through my chest. "At all? Is she..." I can't bring myself to utter the word.

Chloe shakes her head. "Her body is warm. At first I thought she was playin' games and just didn't want to get out of bed, but she's in some kind of coma. Your uncle is tryin' to get some smellin' salts."

I rack my head tryin' to think of any remedies I know, but none come to mind. My shoulders slump. "I don't know nothin' that could help."

"It's alright." Chloe hugs herself. "If this don't work, I'm gonna try to see if I can get the Healers Without Borders to come out. Or ask Koda when she's not busy."

"I wish we would've known earlier," I say. "We could've asked Koda when we saw her, or Yuna could've asked..." The name Sul Li get stuck in my throat as my uncle come down the stairs with the smellin' salts in hand.

"What?" He asks. "I got somethin' on me?"

"No..." I pause to swallow. "I was just sayin' that maybe Yuna could've asked Jin Yi about Tsuli's condition. She's a healer of some kind too right?

Uncle holds my gaze for an uncomfortable heartbeat. "She is...but the better bet is stickin' with tryin' to get the Pua Moana to do it. They've got the better medicine. Besides, Jin Yi's folk wouldn't appreciate it if we kept trespassin' on their land. And she already said that it ain't safe out there."

"I don't think we should rule stuff out, Yong Chun," Chloe says. "We haven't gotten hold of any doctor yet."

" _Believe_ me, Chloe," My uncle says, puttin' an arm around her. "You _don't_ want Sillans pokin' in our business."

I suppress a scoff. _More like you just don't want any excuse for Sul Li to come back._

Chloe huffs. "If they'll help my child wake up, I don't care who it is." Walkin' towards the door she says, "Next time you see this Jin Yi lady, ask her if she know anything about it. If she can come down here, even _better._ "

_You tell him, Chloe!_

Uncle exhales through his nose, and guides his wife-to-be to the door. "Fine, but make sure that Jin Yi don't bring extra baggage."

When the door shuts, I turn to Yuna and Tora. "Do you wanna go back Yuna or do you want to switch?"

Tora raises his hand happily.

_Good,_ Yuna signs. _Because I have yet to tell you what Sul Li said, Kurai._

"Is it bad?" I ask.

Yuna seesaws her paw. _I was not sure how to interpret it._

"Well, let me hop in the shower first." I say. "I don't want to feel hecka sticky while I'm listenin'."

Not long after I hop out of the shower, the doorbell rings. I come downstairs to find Yuna lettin' Rhett in. Dollie waddles in, gigglin' and two shiny orange cuffs on her wrists.

"Well look who finally showed up," I say. "I was startin' to wonder if I'd ever see your face around here."

"Of course you'd see my face!" Rhett gives a wide grin. "Why wouldn't I show up to see the Black Ravens lose?"

"Keep that up and you'll be watchin' from the window," I say.

Chucklin', Rhett lowers a baby bag onto the couch. "Don't worry. I promise I'll behave." Then he musses Dollie's hair. "Now you be good, ya hear? No tearin' up Kurai's house."

"Okee, Pooba!" Dollie chirps.

Rhett scoops her up and puts her on the couch. "I'll be in the plaza if you need me."

"See ya later, Rhett," I call after him.

As he heads out the door, Tora returns heavin' heavily.

_You sure got back here awfully fast,_ Yuna signs. _Did you run?_

Tora pauses with his paws on his knees. He nods instead.

"Well, you catch your breath," I say. "I still ain't heard what Yuna had to say about those kids."

Yuna reaches inside her robe for a thin scroll and hands it to me. _Sul Li said that the Hwarang has seen those children on many occasions. They play in the woods often apparently, and sometimes Masami goes with them._

I unravel the scroll.

Two children stand side by side in startlin' photo-like detail. A chubby boy with a grimed face and a flu mask over his mouth stands next to a scrawny girl whose clothes don't look more than flour sacs. Both of their eyes gleam an unsettlin' yellow.

I shiver. _They don't seem human._ Or like any friendly magic creature I know of. "Are they dangerous?"

Yuna shrugs. _Sul Li is not certain. They run away when the Hwarang get too near. Her people have seen them do magic, but never harm Masami or anyone else. She said because they're observing their Telling ceremony, they aren't really supposed to interfere with the areas and people they pass unless they absolutely have to. At most, she can order the Hwarang to keep a watch on them when they appear, but no Sillan would agree to bother children for no reason._

"Well keepin' an eye out is help enough in my book. Though if that's right..." I roll the scroll back up and look at Tora, "I s'pose it's safe to assume Jin Yi probably don't wanna come out here?"

_No, she agreed to look at Tsuli,_ Tora signs. _She will arrive in the morning if she is not busy, but she can't promise her time for certain._

"They ain't found those Darkborn things yet, have they?" I ask.

Tora shakes his head. _They're still looking. The guards aren't making it easy for them. There are more roadblocks now since last night. And they won't let the Hwarang investigate. They might have to leave without taking care of it._

_Jin Yi didn't say anything about what Tsuli's condition could be?_ Yuna signs.

Tora shakes his head. _It's not any normal disease that she's heard of. She said, if possible, to have Tsuli's chi examined._

"I s'pose that'll happen anyway if they manage to get a hold of some from Healers Without Borders," I say. As I finish speakin', I feel a pattin' at my leg and I look down.

Dollie holds up somethin' bird-shaped and wrapped in cellophane. "Ooochu! Look! I brought cookie."

"Aww is that for me? That's awfully sweet of you, Dollie." I take the cookie, set it on the counter, and pick her up. "I'll eat it when I'm finished cooking. How about we watch some cartoons?"

At this Tora's ears prick. _Turn on The Red Hood!_

Scrunchin' my face at the suggestion, I put Dollie on the couch. "What in the heck is _The Red Hood?"_

Yuna roll her eyes. _Some silly anime he watches._

"Tora I didn't know that you liked that kind of stuff." I pick up the Smart Mirror remote. "What channel it come on? You wanna sit here and make sure Dollie don't get into trouble while we—"

_YES!_ Tora runs and plops onto the couch next to Dollie. _Channel 0862 please._

_Well, guess that answer that._ I change the channel then hand the remote before goin' into the kitchen with Yuna. "Let's get started with the ribs since we don't have to bother with the stew."

Yuna stoop to look in the bottom cabinets and pulls out the cheese grater. I take the Tohenian pear out of the grocery bag, wash it, then check the clock. It's almost two. Four hours til' the game. Yuna hands me a bowl to grate the pear into, the we add the soy sauce, brown sugar, a pinch of salt, sesame oil, and minced garlic. I let Yuna stir it up while I wash the short ribs, put them into a resealable bag. While I wash my hands, the doorbell goes off.

Yuna hurries to go get it.

Arms overflowin' with textbooks, Izumi comes in.

"Hey, hey..." I put the ribs in the fridge to marinate. "How was the exam?"

"Oh that?" Izumi's feelers twist. "Well the exam part was fine. I won't get the results on the Vak' Gongkuxia section until tomorrow."

"Why sound so glum about it then?" I ask. "Ain't you study all week?"

She takes a seat at the table. "The proctor was just so rude. He had the nerve to say a dragon shouldn't be an ambassador and..." She shakes her head. "You could just tell he had issues. It was just stupid."

I snort. "Why is that any of his business? I know some kitsune don't like ya'll but—"

"He _wasn't_ a kitsune, Kurai," She says with a sigh. "He was a dragon."

I blink at her. "A dragon? And he didn't know who he was talkin' to?"

Izumi's shoulders slump. "No. He knows who I am. That's just the attitude that the older dragons tend to have around here. I just hope I score well enough on the other exams. I'll be glad to get away."

"I'm sure you'll do well," I say, "You've always had a thing for languages and that international stuff."

"Not really..." Izumi's feelers curl. "I like it, but it's really tough."

I open the fridge for the avocados I bought yesterday and slice one down to the pit. "At least you don't mix 'hello' and 'you suck' like I do in Adjusted Hangul."

Izumi snort back a laugh. "I can't blame you there, the two sound almost the same."

I pry the two avocado halves apart. "What is it again? _Punkeso_ or somethin' like that?"

"That's 'you suck'. Hello is _puunkeso."_

"That's confusin'," I scoop out the seed. "Why the hell are hi and 'you suck' an extra second apart like that? I reckon they want people to start fights when they see each other."

"Don't ask me. I'm not an expert yet," Izumi says. "The Tohen Islands was my last choice for ambassadorship anyway."

I grin. "Well I'm gonna try that on Akane and see what she's got to say about it."

Izumi raise an eyebrow. "Alright, but if you get your teeth knocked out, I know a good dentist." She peers over the counter. "Need some help?"

"Yeah, could you help chop up stuff for the guacamole? I need to get started on the buffalo wings."

"Sure thing, just let me wash my hands." Rollin' up her sleeves, Izumi brushes past me on her way to the sink. "By the way...since when was Professor Hart gone?"

"I just barely heard it myself, so I only know as much as you do. Don't know what I'm going to do with that pumpkin and goat cheese soup I made for her now."

Izumi's face scrunch up like a pug's. "Pumpkin and goat cheese?"

"And fish," I add. "I made a big ol' pot for her, and now ain't nobody gonna eat it." I look over my shoulder at Tora. "Unless you want to be the hero and eat it, Tora."

Tora makes a face and shakes his head.

Yuna snorts. _The one thing you don't eat! What happened to all food is good food?_

_I've had too many bad experiences with pumpkin,_ Tora signs. _My stomach needs time to forgive._

"Well, can it forgive before three to four days from now?" I scoop the avocado flesh into a separate bowl. "I'd rather not have any of this go to waste if I can help it."

"I was willing to try a little bit until you said fish," Izumi mutters. "I'm gonna miss Amelia though. Dad never did anything important without consulting her."

I pass her a few tomatoes and lemons. "He's gonna have to now. That Headmaster lady sounded pretty serious."

"She _was_ serious. Heck, even her middle name is Sirius."

I side-glance at her. "Nuh-uh..."

"No, I'm serious. She's Sirius. Kiyoko Sirius Wu." Izumi lops the tops off the tomatoes. "But still, no fortunes for the whole investigation was kinda extreme if you ask me. She's still getting paid on everybody's money."

Yuna folds her arms, then signs, _Try to look at it from her perspective. Her colleague died and she wasn't sick or old. Professor Hart isn't the type to be up to no good. It makes sense to investigate even if the cause is something small._

"Yeah, but she made it sound like the palace had something to do with it," Izumi says. "No one here is like that."

"Then you ain't got anything to worry about. She'll come to the truth sooner or later," I say.

"Probably, but...I don't know. She always gives my Dad a hard time about paperwork, verifications...just _everything_."

"Can't worry about those kinds of folks. You can't ever please 'em," I say, openin' up the cabinets.

"I know but _still..."_

Yuna, Izumi, and I make quick work of the guacamole and sauce up the chicken for the oven. Once those are tucked away, I take out the ribs for Yuna to grill.

A loud knock booms against the door.

Izumi dries her hands. "I'll get it."

I close the fridge just in time to see Akane standin' in the doorway with a gift-wrapped box in her hands and a gift bag. "Surprise!"

I smirk. " _Punkeso."_

Akane's mouth falls open. "Excuse you! Come all the way on a ship to see you and you want to be mean?"

"Izumi told me to say it."

Izumi shoots me an indignant glare. "No I didn't! Kurai is just being a moron!"

Akane's red hair bounces as she storms into the kitchen. "And to think I went out of my way to get _this_ for you." She waves both the box and the bag in front of my face. "I ought to take it back to the store, loser."

"Oh wait a minute now. You didn't say it was for me." I reach for the box.

"Oh ho ho!" Akane holds it out of reach. "Now you wanna be nice because I bought you something! Well _punkeso!_ "

"It's nice to see you brought the jokes," I say. Then I notice that she's wearin' a long-sleeved jacket. "You're not wearin' your Red Lions jersey? That's a first."

"Huh?" Akane looks down at her jacket. "I forgot to grab it out of my luggage. It's no big deal."

I raise an eyebrow. "Your Red Lions jersey _not_ a big deal? When they're playin' the Black Ravens?"

Rather than jump at the chance to make fun, Akane just shrugs and hands me the box. Then she glances at Izumi, "You're watching the game too?"

"More like just here for the food and to get some last minute studying done for the Pua Velu and Adjusted Hangul exam," Izumi says.

"Oooh! I'll help!" Akane pulls out a chair next to her. "Kurai, turn on QSN. Some of the guys on the ship told me that the Red Lions were gonna switch their starting line up."

"Right before a game?" I ask. "Ain't that risky?"

"What risk?" Akane says bringin' one of Izumi's study guides closer. "Your birdies will throw the game anyway."

"Tch." I grab the smart remote. "Tora, you want to keep watchin' your show in my room or are you stickin' with us?"

_I'll stay,_ Tora signs.

I turn the channel to QSN where a long-haired Tohenian pop idol holds up a bottle of soy sauce and winks at the camera. The commercial cuts to a shot of marble arcade from the Tohen Islands Sky Coliseum, then two male reporters appear on the screen. "Before I forget, do you think you could talk Koda into goin' down to Chloe's?"

"What for?" Akane asks.

"Her daughter won't wake up and they don't know why," I say. "She's gonna try to get someone from HWB but their urgent care takes forever. I thought it might be better to ask someone directly."

"Eh...I can try?" Akane runs a hand through her hair. "I can't guarantee anything because HWB gets pretty anal about their doctors' logged hours. I'm sure that she'd do it, but is Chloe okay with her coming super late? All her shifts end either around midnight or like three in the morning."

"Honestly, I don't think she'd care as long as Tsuli get cured," I say.

"I'll pass the message then," Akane says.

I put the remote down and glance into the kitchen real fast to find Yuna turnin' the short ribs in the skillet and turnin' the fire back up on the _sundubu jjigae._ _The chicken is in the oven._ Nothin' needs my—

A knock-like tappin' fills the air.

Instinctively, my eyes go to the door, but the sound don't seem like it's comin' from the door. "Ya'll hear that knockin'?"

"It sounded like it was from upstairs," Izumi says.

"I'll be right back," I say, joggin' up the stairs. "Answer the door in case Rhett comes by."

At the top of the stairwell, I pause and strain my ears to hear. _My room?_

The noise comes again.

_No, it's the attic._ Could Sul Li be here already? But I told her ten o' clock. _Maybe somethin' got into the house?_

As I open the attic door, I notice a shadow stretchin' from the window in the shape of a woman. When I get closer, I find it's that Hwarang woman, sittin' on the windowsill. She waves with a warm, "Hey."

I blink, stunned. "Hey yourself."

She puts both hands in her lap. "Mind if I come in?"

"No...Err. I mean, yes?" Hastily, I clear my throat and lift the window up. Only to find that it only comes up halfway. "Uhh... Does that work?"

She looks at the halfway open window with an eyebrow raised. She disappears and reappears in the center of the attic and she winks at me. "Sure does."

"Well..." Unable to gather my thoughts to finish what I was gonna say, I close the window. When I shift my attention back to the room, I find her strollin' around the room takin' in everything. Once I finally regain my composure, I realize that she's not in her full Hwarang uniform. Instead she's just out in a pair of beige harem pants and a bright red turtleneck vest. Her light brown hair falls free past her shoulders instead of bein' tucked under her hat. The only tip off of her guard are the small phoenix emblems on her boots. Realizin' that I've been starin' for a while and still don't know while the heck she's here, I ask, "Did Sul Li send you?"

She looks over her shoulder. "No. I'm here by my own free will. I'm off duty, but I imagine that she'd still want me to relay the message."

"A message?" I echo.

"Mmhmm." She turns around. "Thought you'd might to like to know that the Queen Mother decided to allow you at our Telling. Though it did cause some dissent in the Kim Clan."

I move away from the window. "Does that mean I shouldn't go or what?"

"I doubt any Sillan would go so far as to harm an esteemed guest of the Grand Belle, but _..._ " She glances briefly at the wall and altar of Uncle's Sillan stuff. "There _is_ something that I'm personally curious about. _"_

_Curious enough to come out here to see me?_

"Yes," she answers my thoughts with a grin. "Though maybe 'concerned' is the better word."

I stiffen. "I forgot you can hear what I was thinkin'."

"Most people do." She faces the altar. "I take it that my suggestion helped?"

"I had one heck of a night, but I think it was worth it," I say. "I owe you something nice."

"You don't have to do that for me."

"But I _want_ to do something nice for you. Besides, you kind of saved my life and I learned somethin' about myself." I sit down on the attic bed. "But that only makes me want to know who you are even more."

She gives me a gentle half-smile. "I would tell you if I could."

"But why can't you? What? Are you a serial killer or something? A drug ring leader?" I look her up and down. "You torture kittens when no one is looking? All of them combined?"

She give her soft purrin' laugh. "Kitten-torturing drug-selling serial killer? That's a new one."

"Just sayin'. I'm pretty acceptin' as long as you ain't doin' any of it to me," I say. "Your secret can't be that bad, Miss."

"It's not that it's good or bad for you to know." She laces both hands behind her back. "I'm concerned what you would do if you found out who I am. Or who you are for that matter. Would you be willing to give up this life?"

"This life?" I echo. "What do you mean?"

She gestures to the rest of the attic with a hand. "The life you live here with your uncle. Would you be willing to put all of it behind you?"

"Pardon me, Miss, but I think the better question is why would I have to give that up just cuz I know you?" I ask.

The woman looks at the window, but makes no move towards it. "It's not a matter of having to give something up. It's a matter of would you really remain here if you knew?" She looks at me over her shoulder. "If you do not, then you would do well to not attend the Telling."

A hot flare rise in my chest. "You think I'd jump into Silla just cuz I go to this gatherin' of yours?"

"I doubt you would for merely that," She says. "But knowledge is its own terrible burden regardless if it's good or bad. I do not wish to give you a burden you do not intend to bear."

"Miss, I appreciate the concern, but I don't think you have to worry about that. I can't just give up my life here even if I wanted to."

The woman stares at the altar for a long while. "Who are you?"

I exhale though my nose. _This question again?_ "I already told you who I was."

"I know... But reminders never hurt."

I stand there wonderin' if this is all part of some game she's made up. She already knows the answer, what's the point of askin' the same thing again and again? "That depends. Which me gets to find out who you are. I'll be him."

"Chun Chu has a very good chance of that. Kurai has even better chances. But _you_ ..." Her smile turns coy. "...are better off not knowing."

I can't even hold my scoff. "At least all those me's have a name. Come on... What about all your family folk and the people that work with you? They gotta call you somethin', don't they?"

She tips her head. "Yes, most call me Commander, unless they know me very well."

I scowl. "Play it that way if you want, but I bet you I'll figure out who you are by tomorrow night."

She gives a soft laugh. "Is that a challenge?"

"That's a _promise_."

She walks past me toward the window. "Don't make promises that you can't keep."

I start forward to open it for her, but the woman's body fades before she even gets to the glass and the room feels strangely emptier than it was before. I frown. _I can't even have a hint?_ It ain't like she had to run from Silla because of who she is. But still, not knowin' just _bothers_ me.

_Come to think of it... If she knows who I am, then maybe she's somebody that I knew in Silla?_

"Kurai, get your butt in here so you can see Black Ravens's fail line up," Akane calls from the livin' room.

"Hush up, Akane. I'll be there," I call back. I close the window, lingerin' briefly to see if I'd find any sight of the woman, but there's no trace of her at all on the ground.

Soon as I head back downstairs, the timer for the chicken goes off.

"You sure were gone up there a long time," Izumi says. "Did you find out what was making that noise?"

"Yeah, it was just a bird," I say, openin' up the oven. "How's the ribs comin' along, Yuna?"

Yuna makes a thumbs up sign.

Akane rubs her hands together. "Victory is gonna taste hecka good."

"Hush up woman. The Red Lions might just lose."

"WHO SAID THEY'RE READY TO SEE THE BLACK RAVENS LOSE?" Rhett's voice boom from outside. A loud knock on the door follows."

Dollie claps her hands and squeals, "Pooba!"

Tora gets up and opens the door for Rhett. He ducks under the doorway wearin' his big grin. He sniffs. "I smell Red Lions victory."

"Shut up Rhett." I set the hot pan of wings on the stove. "That's chicken and ribs you're smellin'."

"Close enough to me." He rubs his hands together, then he picks Dollie up from the couch. "You behave today, you little couch-throwin' booger?"

"She was mostly just watchin' tv with Tora," I say.

Tora gives Rhett a thumbs up. _No problem here._

"Good." Rhett holds Dollie at his hip. "That means you get ice cream when we get home."

Akane gets up to peer into the kitchen before grabbin' a plate for herself. "Are you stayin' Rhett?"

"Yeah, but I got to drop off Dollie," he says. "Bonnie will pluck my feathers if I don't bring her home."

"See ya in a bit then," I say and then start makin' myself a plate.

By the time, I finish and get myself settled at the table, Rhett returns and anchor down onto the couch with a loud thump. "I love me some Quiverback."

_"Let's have a look at today's match-up,"_ blares the Smart Mirror. _"I know everyone is excited that Quiverback season is back and Red Lion fans have been eager to see if hotshot Junho is going to live up to his big brother's legacy."_

"He'd better," Akane mutters. "He's on my fantasy Quiverback team."

Rhett look over from the couch. "You do fantasy Quiverback?"

"I like a little gambling every now and then," Akane says.

I scoff and look over at her. "Where the heck your bougie-butt get money to gamble, but you ain't paid me back for the curry powder you keep runnin' off with every time you come to my house?"

"For your information, I bought you some better curry powder from _overseas_ , but somebody said 'you suck' when I walked in the door."

Izumi throw me a 'told you so' look from the other side of the table.

"Hush up Izumi," I say.

She scoffs. "I didn't even say anything!"

"I know you were thinkin' somethin' I'd say shut up for," I say.

Rhett get up from the couch to make himself a plate. "Gio ain't home watchin' the game?"

"He said that he was gonna watch it," I say, splittin' a chicken wing apart. "I think he was gonna meet some friends or somethin' like that."

"But he needs to come and victory-gloat with us..." Akane mutters. "It's not fun to victory-gloat alone."

"Hey! What am I?" Rhett calls.

"Rhett you gloat because the Black Ravens lose, not because the Red Lions win. There's a difference," Akane says.

I snort. "Tch, and what are you gonna to do if the Red Lions lose?"

Akane stares at me. "You're kidding me right?"

"Anything can happen in Quiverback," I say.

"Kurai..." Akane wipes her hands on a napkin. "In order for the Black Ravens to win, they have to score goals. More goals than the Red Lions—"

"Well no duh Sherlock—"

"—And to get that many goals the Black Ravens need a heap of divine intervention. And that divine intervention needs divine intervention. Which the gods that be will not provide because they are too cursed."

"Akane—"

"And to prove it I will pray to the Quiverback gods for you." Akane put her napkin down and her hands together. "Bow your heads and close your eyes everybody."

Rhett snickers from behind the counter. "Are you for real?"

Akane peer at Rhett with one eye. "Shush Rhett. I'm calling on the almighty Bird Jesus right now."

Izumi stops mid-page flip to glance up from her book. "Bird Jesus?"

"Yes, do you know of another almighty god who could possibly remove the Black Ravens's game-throwing curse? Because they need all the help they can get."

Izumi cover her mouth with her fist, then she says, "I'm just gonna leave it alone."

Akane bows her head. "Great Bird Jesus, we come to you now and ask that you lead us not into another tie-game. But deliver us from stray arrows shots, for the Black Ravens can't shoot and throw almost every game they play. Amen."

Both Rhett and Tora snort back laughter. Yuna cover her muzzle, but giggles seep out anyway.

I scowl. "They don't throw _every_ game."

"They throw enough." Akane sniffs. "Come on. When was the last time they won a Quiverbowl? Heck, when was the last time they won _a game_?"

Once Tora stop laughin', he signs, _Why do you like the Black Ravens if they always lose?_

"Because they got grit and good character," I say. "They're good folk."

"You can't win no Quiverbowl on that, boy," Rhett says. "And besides, plenty of teams got good character _and_ skill."

"But they ain't no underdogs Rhett," I say. "I like seein' the Black Ravens win."

Rhett cock his head. "You mean once a millennium?"

I glare at Rhett. "Behave or I'm sendin' _you_ home."

Rhett puts up his empty hand. "Hey, I'm just callin' it like their record is, man."

"Well you can't judge anybody on what they used to be when they're changin," I say, sittin' down on the couch.

Akane scrub a hand over her face. "Is this conversation real?"

"They've gotten some better players and got strict with their trainin'," I say hotly. "And they've pulled together some of the best plays in the whole league. You can't just count them out."

But Akane just cut her eyes at me like I just said two and two make five. "Alright. Suit yourself. But _don't_ be surprised when they flop."

A lit arrow sails through the air on screen, whirlin' past the phoenix riders on defense. It misses the aerial goal ring by a few inches. The crowd boos as the clip is replayed in slow motion.

_"And that's the game folks! That last arrow is unfortunately gonna keep the Black Ravens at the bottom ranks. If they lose one more game, they're gonna have to say goodbye to a shot at the Quiverbowl this year!"_ The announcer calls.

In the corner of my eye, I spot an ear to ear smirk formin' on Akane's lips. As the screen flashes to the player statistics, she stands up to stretch. "Those were some pro plays, huh?"

I drum my fingers on my chair arm. "Hush it."

"Especially that game-winning shot."

" _Puunkeso."_

"Hello to you too."

"Tch, whatever." I get up. "Are you happy now?"

"Hey don't look at me like that. I tried to intervene on your behalf, Kurai," Akane says. "But if even almighty Bird Jesus can't save it, then it can't be saved my friend."

A loud snore rips from the couch, gettin' my attention: Rhett, who fell asleep halfway through the game.

I wince at the noise. "Damn, I didn't know he snore that loud. How does Bonnie sleep with that racket?"

"I don't know, but he has the right idea if you ask me," Akane says. She picks up the revised sheet of answers Izumi hands her. "Though I'll give you credit. The Black Ravens did pretty well compared to how they usually do. It was _almost_ a close game."

I snort. "You give them some time to grow into their new lineup. I bet you they'll be able to beat the Red Lions."

Akane looks over the top of Izumi's papers. "If they manage to pull _that_ off, I swear to you, I will strip butt-naked and run across the Coliseum."

"I'll remember that," I say.

"Hope you have a really long memory, then," Akane says, flippin' through Izumi's papers. "These all look really good Izumi. You should be fine for the Pua Velu section."

"Good." Izumi pushes her chair back to get up. "That's the one I'm hoping to do really well on."

I walk over to the couch and shake Rhett. "Yo Rhett. Get your butt up. The game is over."

"Humrph?" Rhett lifts his head up off the cushions. He yawns. "Already?"

"Yep." Akane stands up. "They crashed and burned as predicted. Lost 7 to 4."

"Hey at least they scored more than one goal," Rhett gets up and rolls his shoulders. "A moment of silence for all the Black Ravens fans who sat through the embarrassment at the Coliseum. But I think I ought to be go home before Bonnie starts to wonder what happened to me. I need to be at the shop early tomorrow to catch all the customers. Thanks for havin' me over."

Akane follows Rhett to the door to lock it. She glances at her watch, and for a moment, her body seems to stiffen. "I ought to hurry back to the palace too. Rumor is going around that you can buy a phoenix. Isn't that crazy?"

I pick my plate off the coffee table. "Are they only sellin' it for a few days or somethin'? Can't you buy it tomorrow?"

She touches the back of her neck. "Sure, but I'm not the only one buying, you know? I want a good bird for Quiverback. I might want to play sometime."

"But you have to take care of the bird _all_ the time."

She waves a hand. "I know. I've taken care of them before."

Droppin' the dishes into the sink, I ask, "Where in the heck would you put it? Those birds are huge."

From the table, Tora pats his belly eagerly.

Akane huffs. "For your information, it's illegal to eat Quiverback phoenixes, Tora." She opens the door. "I'll catch you later, Kurai. _Thalur Luma,_ Izumi."

" _Thalur Luma,"_ Izumi says back.

"See ya. Don't forget to ask Koda if she can come to Chloe's," I call, then I glance at the clock. It's about nine now. _Sul Li is gonna be here soon._ I look at Izumi gatherin' her stuff. "Ya'll get a lot of studyin' done?"

Izumi beams. "Sure did. Akane really knows her stuff. I'm surprised she has time to learn and manage the Blackfoot Tribe."

"She don't. Akane learned waaaaaay before they took her in at Tokaido. " I head into the kitchen and run the hot water for the dishes. "She lost her home when she was young and she couldn't live in the Tohen Islands. But she got good work around in the other tribes and got to live with all of them for a bit."

"I never knew she lost her home," Izumi says. "I'll have to ask her about it one of these days." She looks at the clock too. "I have to go home. Dad is gonna flip if I stay any later."

"I'm surprised he ain't flipped already."

"Don't worry. I'm sure he's done a few by now." She balances her books and study guides. "If not about me, he's definitely flipped over what Professor Wu said. See ya, Kurai."

"Good luck on your other exams." Once she leaves, I turn to Tora and Yuna. "Guys can you help me put the house back together? I don't want to look tore the heck up when Sul Li gets here."

Tora's ears perk. _Sul Li is coming?_

Yuna tilts her head. _I thought your Uncle didn't want her in here._

"He don't, but she got something important to show me and I might never see her again so it can't hurt," I say.

Tora _tsks_ at me. _Naughty boy. Having a girl over when your uncle said no._

"Hush up Tora. The house gotta be clean anyway."

With Tora and Yuna helpin' me, we make quick work of all the leftover mess from the game. By the time we finish, it's a quarter to ten and my legs muscles are barkin' up a storm. When Tora and Yuna are gone, I rest my achy legs in bed with an ear pricked towards the window.

Before long, a light tappin' sounds at the window.

I get up to find a sea hawk on the windowsill. There's an unmistakeable primness in the way this bird sits there and I can tell that this one is Sul Li through and through. I open the window for her. "About time you showed up. I just got finished cleanin'."

The sea hawk cocks its head. "You recognize me?" She sounds thoroughly disappointed that I do.

"Why you have to say it like that?" I sit on the edge of the bed. "You'd rather I shoo you off like you're a pigeon or something?"

Sul Li dips under the window and shifts into her human form. She folds her arms. "No. I was just prepared to explain it is all."

I chuckle. "So in other words, you just wanted to look smart."

Rather than fire a comeback, Sul Li just sniffs and walks past me.

My smile shrinks. "What's wrong with you?"

She sits on the edge of my bed and just shakes her head. "Politics are just politics."

I close the window. "Does it have something to do with me goin' to that Tellin' thing?"

"No." Sul Li smoothes her robes down. "And before I forget, my grandmother decided to let you attend."

"Yeah, that other lady told me as much."

Sul Li looks up at me, her eyes narrowin'. "What other lady? We didn't order anyone to tell you anything."

"I've been dyin' to know too. She won't tell me her name, but she knows mine," I say. "But she's a part of the Hwarang."

"Jin Yi?" Sul Li asks.

"No, the other lady. The one in the red uniform," I say. "Do you know what her name is?"

Sul Li rubs the space between her eyebrows. "I think I know who you're talking about, but I'm not familiar with her name unfortunately."

I sit on the other side of my bed. "How do you not know who's protecting you?"

"Chun Chu, there are _twelve_ Hwarang guards." She lowers her hand. "No one has time to sit there and memorize the name of all the soldiers in each one. If she were part of the Tiger Fury I'd know."

"Are they a Hwarang too?"

She nods. "They're a Kim Clan guard, so every soldier that joins is part of our family..." Sul Li pauses, leanin' up to look past me. She lowers her voice. "Is the house empty?"

"Yep. Uncle is out with Chloe for the night," I say. "He's not coming back until midnight, so you're fine. Do you want anything to eat? We've still got chicken and ribs leftover from the game. Gio might come in the house, but he won't say anything. I'm sure."

"I've already eaten. And besides, I didn't bring any scent erasing powder with me," she says. "I'd rather not leave my scent on anything your uncle might happen to smell." As soon as she finishes speakin', a blue leather book poof onto her lap.

I lean over. "What's that?"

"My Lifebook. Every Sillan has one." Sul Li traces her finger over the surface. "This is where we record our memories, and when we die our soul is printed into it and stored in our Grand Library of Lore."

"You mean I had one of these?" I ask.

"Yes, but I can't say what happened to it." Sul Li says, openin' her book. "I can only assume that it's either frozen somewhere in our family annals or the library."

I watch her finger turn the pages. Like the scroll, there are pictures embedded in the cream pages, each as crisp as photo still, but under her touch they thaw into movement like a silent film. "The pages just move on their own like that?"

Sul Li smiles. "Of course they do. They're memories. Instead of just looking at it..." She stops at a page where a small white puppish creature tussels in the grass with a brown one. "Why don't we experience it first hand?"

Tingles erupt through my skin. "Really? We can do that?"

"Mmhmm. But you should probably close the door," Sul Li says. "It's best contained to one room."

I jump up and close the door immediately. "What's that memory of?"

"Your aunt brought Prince Ui Ja over to play with me."

My shoulder slump. "You got my hopes up. I thought that was me."

Sul Li rolls her eyes. "I was going to get to you, Mr. Impatient. And is your memory so bad that you don't remember what you don't have brown fur?"

"Well 'scuse me! A guy forgets when he ain't done somethin' in half a millennium."

Sul Li clicks her tongue. "Apparently." She starts turning the pages. "Ui Ja is brown. You are black."

One pages turns to the next, I notice that there are an awful lot of pages with Ui Ja and Sul Li in them. There are quite a few with me in them too, but Ui Ja seem like he's on nearly every one.

"How often did he come over?" I mutter. "He's everywhere."

"It only seems that way because that's what I chose to record," Sul Li says.

"Why did you record so much of him?"

Sul Li closes her book gently on her palm to hold the page and clears her throat. "Last I checked, this was _my_ private Lifebook. I can put whatever I like in it, nosy. You should feel fortunate I share it at all."

"Alright, you win." I pull a pillow off the bed and lay on it while Sul Li turns the pages. "What are we gonna look at?"

Sul Li puts a finger to her lip. "I'm trying to think."

"Take your time." I pull a pillow off the bed and lay on it while Sul Li turns the pages until she lands on a scene with Ui Ja and her, and me, a small black pup together in the grass. Miss Mysterious and another guy about her age watch us not far away, but here she's significantly younger. Mid teens maybe, if I had to place her.

"This is a good memory," Sul Li says. "I think this is the last time Ui Ja came over before _eomma_ told me that I wasn't allowed to see you two anymore."

She flips back towards the front pages until she settles on a page with her, me, and Ui Ja in the middle of a forest. Sul Li dips a finger into the page, makin' the surface ripple. She pinches it as she would somethin' small and then pulls out a silver glowin' thread, unravelin' the memory from the page. Once all of it is out, she drops it onto the ground. Luminous mist rises from the floor, thickens like smoke, and wraps around us like a blanket until I can barely make out the rest of the room behind me in the sea of mist.

Soft light splits the haze, warm like real sunlight. Crisp cool air brings the scent of herbs into my lungs. The smoke gives way to the mountain-high tree trunks, and the bright blue splatters of sky between the gaps in wisteria.

My breath leaves me. I get up off my bed, unable to keep myself from touchin' the bark of a tree. It's rough under my fingers. Dry too. It's feels so real. "Holy noodles! This is amazing, Sul Li."

Sul Li closes her Lifebook with a self-satisfied smile. "I know. But don't forget that we are still in your room. Pulled memories stretch space a little, but you can't expect to walk anywhere in here."

I sit back down next to Sul Li, drinkin' in the whole scene. "So where is this?"

"Gyeongju, the capital of Silla," Sul Li says. "But more specifically this is Forbidden Grove where the nobles and the royal family stay. The capital guards stay here as well."

I rub the back of my neck, gazin' around at the bushes. "Uhh...Am I missin' somethin'? It doesn't look all that much like a palace."

"That's because you're looking down here." Sul Li points up toward the trees. "The buildings are up there."

I squint up at the trees, and sure enough, I can make out at the trees, and sure enough, I can make out bridges, arches, and the bottoms of clay-tiled roofs as well as the faint shapes of people movin' around. "Why ya'll live in trees?"

Sul Li give me a dirty look like I insulted her momma or somethin'. "What do you mean why do we live in trees? Why do you live on the _ground_? It's barbaric and weird!"

"It ain't that bad," I say. "I'm just surprised ya'll ain't scared of your house fallin' or burnin' to the ground. One good kitchen fire would do ya'll in."

"Well, I'll have you know that living in tree is a _very_ sophisticated art form. You don't just _live_ in the tree. You _partake_ in the tree. You _breathe_ the tree. You _embrace_ the tree. You are _transformed_ by the tree. You _become_ the tree. Do you understand? _Become. The. Tree._ " She emphasizes every word with knife hands.

_I understand ya'll too bougie to live on the ground._

Before I can say anything, a flicker of movement gets my attention. The brown form of Ui Ja prances in front of the smaller versions of Sul Li and me and hops onto a small boulder.

"And my _abba_ sent those scaredy Korguryo soldiers packing with their tails between their legs," Ui Ja says, chest puffin' up. "And now the river is all ours. Impressive huh, Sul Li?"

"That's not surprising," Sul Li says with a flick of her tail. "Korguryo couldn't fight even if you swing the sword for them. But if he tried that on Silla it would be waaaaaaaay different."

Ui Ja's ears flatten. "Yeah right! You should see our army. Gye Baek is so good." He leaps in front of the man who lays on his back in the grass beside Miss Mysterious. "Huh, Gye Baek! We could beat Silla any day, right?"

"It takes more than brute force to win a war, my lord," Gye Baek says. "There are routes to block. Supply chains to cut. Enemies to dance with." He shoots Miss Mysterious a playful smile. "Isn't that right, Head Hwang?"

_Head Hwang?_ Guess someone else was in charge at this time. At least that's half a name. Though Hwang probably ain't her first name.

Head Hwang leans over him. "You can do all that but I wager Baekche would still lose, sir."

Gye Baek raises an eyebrow. "How so?"

She _tsks_ at him, flashin' her own coy smile back. "Because a good musigician _never_ reveals her secrets."

Gye Baek scowls.

"Yeah, and because you always run away when the battle gets hard," Little Me jeers at Ui Ja.

Ui Ja growls and lunges at me who jumps out of the way. "Take that back, you Bok-Bok Chicken!"

Little Me bristles at him. "HEY! _I'm_ not a chicken! Stop calling me that!"

"Are too!" Ui Ja stamps his paw. "You're the biggest scaredy mega poo poo chicken."

Sul Li huffs. "Well if you ask me, you're both big giant bok-bok chickens. You're both scared of everything!"

"Are you pups starting a fight _again_?" A white wolf-bear pads into view, followed closely by two others. All of them have marking of animals in their fur much in the same fashion of my tattoo, only their animals shine and move across their backs as though they're real animals.

"Who is that?" I whisper.

"That's the Queen," Sul Li says. "But this is a while before people started calling her that. Right now, she's still Deok Man." She points to a smaller bear-wolf behind her with rounded ears, a docked tail, and green animals in her fur. "That's your mother, Cheong Myeong. The one next to her is Seon Hwa, your other aunt."

My hands shake in my lap. That's really her? It takes all my willpower to not get up and run to my mom.

Ui Ja runs between his own mother's forepaws, leavin' Sul Li and Little Me to cower alone in Deok Man's shadow. Deok Man gives us a stern look. "How many times have I told you to watch what you say to others?"

"Yes, and you're just as bad, mister," Seon Hwa says, steppin' away. "I never want to hear you speaking to another noble like that, ever."

" _Eomma_ ..." Ui Ja crouches low to the ground. "We were only playing."

"They meant no harm," Gye Baek says, sittin' up. "They're just pups."

With a final glare at Sul Li, Deok Man says, "Even so... Words ought to be wielded wisely. Plenty of noblemen and women have gotten into trouble from just word of mouth here."

My mother bumps shoulders with Seon Hwa with a look of mischief.

Seon Hwa blinks, eyes widenin'. "What? Surely, _abba_ isn't still mad at me for going to Baekche with Mu?"

"He stopped saying it out loud, perhaps," says Deok Man. "He always made a point to remind me to never run off every chance he could." She curls her twin tails around her paws and starts to groom herself. "But we can't all have a foreign prince whisk us away with a love song, can we?"

Seon Hwa averts her gaze at the comment. "It wasn't like that."

"As if you need a prince to motivate you to run for the hills, Deok Man," my mother says. "You're always out hunting with the king these days."

Deok Man pauses mid-lick. "What of it?"

"Nothing." My mother stretches forward to sniff at the smaller me. She scoops me closer with a paw. "It's just odd you don't hunt with your own husband. He's always complaining about how there's nothing to do around the palace. I'm sure he'd appreciate the exercise more."

Deok Man's neck fur lifts a fraction, then flattens almost immediately. "The most he'll ever hunt for is a chair to sit in so he can paint. And besides, I only go at His Majesty's invitation. Would you have me insult the king by never attending?"

My mother picks me up by the scruff and puts me between her paws. "Of course not."

Seon Hwa's ears pin back. "You speak so candidly about your husband now. I thought you two were friends?"

"That stopped once I realized he'd rather write poetry in his quarters than decide important matters in his own clan." Watchin' Sul Li creep closer, Deok Man waves her tails enticin'ly in front of Sul Li who pounces on them with an excited bark. "He can get away with not getting anything done, but I have to answer to our entire clan. They're getting impatient enough as it is these days."

Seon Hwa nuzzles her sister's shoulder. "Well, you are right to take care of the family first. I'm sure he'll see sense."

Deok Man doesn't say anything more at the statement and the whole memory starts to ripple like a stirred soup. Sul Li gets up from beside me and stretches out a hand. All of the scenery fades and sucks toward her hand where it reforms it's silver string. Sul Li presses it back into its page."

"Wow... That's almost as good as an HD movie," I say. "How do ya'll transform into those big dog-bear things? Can I look like the bear?"

"Those are not dog-bear 'things'," Sul Li says. "Those are Treble and Bass wolves. Bass and treble musigicians get their ears and tails trimmed to look like that. But for transforming in general... You really forgot how to do it? Where's your Helping Hands? Don't they speak to you anymore?"

"Helpin' Hands?"

Sul Li scrubs her face with a hand. "Chun Chu, your Helping Hands are on your body. How do you not know that?"

I glance at my shoulder and pull my sleeve. "Is that what this thing is? I thought it was just an itchy birthmark."

"Yes that exactly..." Her voice trails. She pokes the dragon tattoo with a finger. "That's strange...Forte doesn't appear to move at all."

"Forte?" I ask.

"That's his name," Sul Li says. "Helping Hands are guardian spirits that help us by lending their power. When I came here, I was using Cadenza's power. He can become a sea hawk. But as for you..." She lowers her hand. "You've never heard Forte's voice since you've lived here? Not even once?"

"Not unless feelin' itchy from time to time counts," I say.

Sul Li taps her cheek with a finger. "It might be because you've lived outside of Silla for so long. I'm not certain if magic can undo it."

"Well, it ain't like I can miss something I barely knew about." With another glance at Sul Li's Lifebook, I ask, "So the whole Kim clan is just one big family?"

"No," Sul Li says. "There are several branches. Technically, your family didn't really come from the Kim Clan."

"I was about to say...I think I would've flipped if you were my cousin or something."

"You wouldn't be marrying me if I were," Sul Li says.

"Did the Queen not get along with my uncle or something?" I ask. "The way he was actin' when you brought her up..."

Sul Li laces her hands together on her lap. "She was the acting clan leader of the Kim Clan when your family was driven away. I'm not certain if she gave the order to do so, but I suppose that is close enough in your uncle's eyes."

"But why? What happened that made everyone so mad?" I ask. "Does it have somethin' to do with us bein' outsiders?"

Sul Li just stares at her fingers. She opens and closes them. "Truthfully, I think it has something to do with me."

I frown. "About us gettin' married?"

"No. It's just Silla has always tolerated outsiders. Being one in itself wouldn't drive anyone to do that." She gets up. "And now that you've reminded me, don't take your necklace to the Telling, or anything from Silla for that matter."

"But wait a minute." I get up too. "What do you mean by us leavin' havin' something to do with you? You did something?"

Sul Li takes a deep breath. "Not directly. I'm not sure, Chun Chu. It's just a feeling I had. People don't like to talk about what happened back then. I don't want to either."

I pout."Fair enough. Wouldn't want to ruin the mood for today."

"Today is far from ruined. We are here after all." She glances at my closet. "Did you decide what you're going to wear tomorrow?"

"No, do I have to wear anything special?"

Sul Li shakes her head. "I'm the only one that has to worry about looking nice. Everyone else can wear whatever they want. And besides, I think people would be more interested in your normal attire. It's very rare that we come across ordinary people outside of Silla."

I pull the closet door back. "Do you want to help me pick out what to—?"

Before I finish, Sul Li sprints to my closet, her whole face lit up brighter than Christmas as she appraises everything in my closet. "Oh I never thought you'd ask, Chun Chu!"

_Oh gods almighty, what did I let out on the world?_ "Pickin' my clothes is that excitin' to you?"

"I _never_ get to do anything like this in Silla," Sul Li says. "Min Ah won't let me pick any for her, and maids pick most of mine." She pulls out a black shirt with a gold phoenix on it and holds it up to my chest. "I like this one on you. What do you think?"

"I like it fine, but I can't just go in a shirt, Sul Li."

Sul Li pulls the shirt back. "I know that! But I don't know if I want to pick it yet. I have to look at everything."

I roll my eyes. "Woman, you ain't gonna have time to get through all the stuff I own in no hour and a half."

"I will if you shh and let me _concentrate!"_

"Alright, alright..." I lean against the closet door. "But while you're doin' that, think about where you want to go tomorrow. I'd like to take you somewhere for breakfast, so don't eat too much, if you don't mind."

Sul Li walks her fingers across the hangers. At first I'm not certain if she heard me, but then she says, "I want to go to the temple."

"The temple?" I echo.

"Yes..." She takes out a blue shirt and some jeans. "Isn't that where Tora and Yuna come from?"

"Yeah, but what do you want to go to the temple for?" I ask. "There ain't really that much over there besides all the beast monks."

"It's for something personal," Sul Li says. "I wanted to ask you to take me there earlier, but your uncle was in such a hurry to get me to leave. Jin Yi wouldn't take me, and I don't think my family would let me go if I asked."

_Given everything you've done so far, it's surprisin' you ain't grounded till you're dead._ "Why not? Ya'll hate religion or somethin'?"

"No, it's just..." She holds up the shirt to my neck. "The person I want to see isn't exactly in good standing with Silla."

"Wait a minute. You aren't seein' that Yami fellow, are you?" I ask.

Her gaze meets mine. "You know of him?"

"I met him this morning," I say. "But how do you even know about him?"

"Yami visited Silla once for a long stay," Sul Li says, puttin' the shirt back and takin' out another. "He wanted to study and do research for a project with our musigician at Grand Staff Academy. And it was..." Sul Li's eyelids flutter a bit as her lips purse. She takes in a breath and says, "Well let's just say that he's not welcome in Silla anymore."

My mouth hangs open. "That bad?"

"Truthfully, it's not his direct fault," Sul Li says. "He only conducted the research. But his inventions caused so many problems that my family won't be convinced otherwise. And if they found out I went to go see him, I'm sure I wouldn't see the outside of my room for a decade. But I don't think it's his fault."

"If you would've told me, I could've asked Master Ushi to let you stay at the temple or something," I say.

Sul Li shrugs. "It's fine. It's not that hard to sneak away from everyone else." She plucks a gray vest and a white dress shirt from the closet with a gasp. She spins around with it. "What about this, Chun Chu?"

"You want me to wear that?"

She fondles the sleeve, givin' me the puppy eyes again. "I like it a lot. I think you would look very classy in it." She reaches for a pair of gray dress pants. "And with these pants."

"As long as you're happy about it." I get up and take the two hangers from her and hang them up on my dresser handle.

Sul Li puts her hands together. "What else do I get to pick?"

I narrow my eyes at her. "What do you mean 'what else'? Woman, if you don't take your sneaky butt home..."

"Oh come on, Chun Chu. _Please..._ After tomorrow, I'll never get to see you again."

"Sul Li—"

" _Please_ ..."

"Alright, you can pick my shoes but..." The rest of my words get drowned by Sul Li's excited dolphin squeal as she hurries back to my closet to examine my shoes.

"I won't disappoint you," She chirps.

"Yeah, but you'll make me go deaf," I mutter, rubbin' my ear. "Goodness gracious, how do you squeal that high without losin' your own hearin'?"

But Sul Li ain't listenin' to me anymore and busies herself liftin' up my shoes and examinin' them.

Despite myself, I can't help but find her energy infectious. _They must not have a lot for people to do for fun if this is excitin' to her._ I look out the window toward the road that leads into Middle Path Temple. _Wonder if that Yami fellow is inventin' somethin' now..._ I know Izumi said that it's for security reasons, but we ain't never had any kind of problem with burglars even in the village. Tryin' to rob the nobles or do anything shady is probably a hundred times harder in the palace compared to Honeythorn, so what could the king be scared of?

_Well it ain't like you live there, how would you know if the palace need protection or not?_ My common sense remind me.

Once Sul Li gets out a pair of shoes for me, she steps back to admire her work. She motions to her handiwork with a huge smile. "Voila, you will be the twenty-third sharpest looking person at the Telling tomorrow."

"Twenty-third?" I repeat. "That's an awful lot of folk lookin' spiffier than me."

"A lot of my family will be there and they have much nicer clothes, but you can look better than the _other_ clans that will be there." Sul Li says, pickin' up her Lifebook.

"Lucky me?"

She heads over to the window, lingerin' in front of window with an innocent pout on her face. "I suppose now I really _have_ to go home now."

"Yes, you _do,_ pup," scolds a new feminine voice. "And while you're at it, you can explain why you've been sneaking away so much."

Sul Li gasps, clutchin' her book to her chest. Then she opens the window and scowls. "Min Ah! What are you doing here?"

A giraffe head thrusts into my window, glarin' down at Sul Li through the spectacles on her nose. "Trying to keep you out of trouble! The General is worried sick about you. He started to send a whole patrol to look for you." The giraffe's head swing around to face me. "Ah ha! Slipping away to see a secret boyfriend. Shame on you! When the General hears about this..."

"He is _not_ my boyfriend," Sul Li says in a matter-of-fact tone. "He is my _guest_ and I was picking his clothes out for tomorrow, nosy."

"And you couldn't have told someone this first?" Min Ah bops Sul Li on the head with her own.

"Ow! Hey! _Stooooooop!_ " Sul Li shields herself with her book. "You're embarrassing me!"

Min Ah sniffs. " _Good._ You should feel fortunate I can't get my hooves on you from here." To me, Min Ah says, "My apologies for intruding into your home, sir. I trust my sister wasn't a nuisance?"

"No, she picked my clothes out and everything, Miss," I say. "And she was pleasant enough company." _For once._

"See?" Sul Li adds with a mutinous look toward Min Ah. "I'm more than capable of handling myself."

"That doesn't matter. So many things have been happening in the woods that even the Hwarang need to be on their toes," Min Ah says. With a steely look at her sister, she adds, "It is _not_ a place for a Grand Belle to be wandering alone."

"Do you mean those Darkborn creatures?" I ask.

Min Ah's ears prick. "You've heard of them?"

"Jin Yi mentioned them."

Min Ah clears her throat. "Well... I assure you that we are handling them and they will be gone before the 'morrow But as for _you,_ little miss naughty pup... You are coming with _me!"_ Min Ah nabs Sul Li's sleeve with her teeth, draggin' her to a window.

"H-hey! Don't drag me! You're going to get your spit all over my clothes!"

"Mmmmph! Mmmmrrrrph!"

I watch as Sul Li shifts into her sea hawk form to avoid hittin' the window and she flaps ungracefully out of the house.

I wake up the next day feelin' sweaty. I get up to walk to the bathroom. I yank a towel out of the cabinet and step in front of the mirror. I'm sweatin' so much that the hair on my forehead hardened into tapered spikes.

I mop my face with the towel. _Gods almighty._ As I lower the towel from my face, a silvery glow pulses from my shoulder. I twist to look at it.

My dragon looks a bit more lively than before, though it still doesn't seem to be capable of movin' like Sul Li was talkin' about yesterday. _She might know somethin' about why it did that._ I can ask her when she gets here.

That is...if she ain't busted from sneakin' yesterday. But knowin' Sul Li, she'd find some way over here no matter what anybody have to say about it so I might as well get dressed now in case she do pop up over here. And besides, she didn't say exactly what time the Tellin' start. I'd rather be ready early than scramblin' at the last minute.

I get in the shower and scrub sweat from every inch and pore of my body and get dressed in the clothes that Sul Li picked out for me. Afterwards, I head downstairs to pick into the leftovers from the game. As I reach the base of the steps, I realize the wrapped box that Akane got me is still on the counter, untouched next to Gio's Yoshi's Delivery hat.

_Can't believe I forgot to open it._ I tear off the blue bow and the wrappin' paper.

It's a huge bulk shaker of curry powder. The label reads: _Slap Ya Mama Curry Powder. So good she won't know what hit her! And neither will anybody else!_

I turn the shaker over, givin' the whole thing a once-over. _Akane must've bought it straight from the Tohen Islands._ That's the only place I know that sell this much Slap Ya Mama. The UKR vendors sell it sometimes too, but the bottle is so little that it might as well be called Tap Ya Mama.

I set the curry powder down and dip into the fridge. I start to pull out the ribs, but then I stop. _I shouldn't be eatin' when I promised Sul Li I'd take her out somewhere._ I s'pose I'll just have a cup of tea instead. I go into the cabinet and get out a mug.

Footsteps thump from the stairs followed by Gio's cheery whistlin'. "Oh ho ho! Look who it _is."_

Feelin' lazy, I fill my mug with water, put it in the microwave, and punch in the time for my water. _Uh-oh._ I must've done something if Gio comin' down the stair ho ho hoin' like it's the holidays. "Don't you ho at me, Santa Clause. It ain't Christmas yet."

"Oh is it now?" Grinnin', Gio leans over on the counter like he's posin' for an old RnB album. "It had to be mistletoe for _somebody_ last night. I know I heard a secret voice when I came in here last night."

I stiffen.

Gio's grin get wider. "So I wasn't hallucinatin'?"

"Shut _up!"_ I hiss. With a wary glance at the stairs, I lower my voice and ask. "Is Uncle here?"

"No," Gio says. "I passed him on my way over here yesterday. He decided he was gonna stay overnight with Chloe's family. I don't know when he's comin' back."

My shoulders sag in relief. "Thank the gods." The microwave dings. I take my food out of the microwave.

Gio comes in and takes out a foiled plate. He crumples the foil before puttin' his food the microwave. "So you really had a girl over?"

"I did, and don't you go gabbin' about her bein' here," I say. "My uncle can't stand her bein' in the house."

Gio's eyebrows come together. "Really? She's that bad?"

"No, Uncle just...Well long story short, he don't like the folk she live with. They got some bad blood with ours apparently. So I let her come up through my window, so my uncle wouldn't know she was here."

Gio makes a squinty face. "Gee.... I know he gets grumpy sometimes, but _gee_. I didn't think your Uncle was that savage." He watch his plate rotate in the microwave, but then his expression suddenly brighten with an impish light. He pucker his lips up. "But that I can see that didn't stop' the good ol' Romeo mojo."

"Uh-uh." I jab a finger at him. "Keep them thoughts to yoself. Sul Li came over here to help me pick my clothes and that was it. She's leavin' back home tonight."

"And you ain't gonna see her one last time?"

"I'm gonna take her around to some places she wanted to see this mornin' and I'll hang out around her folk tonight."

"Yeah, but what about this afternoon?" Gio asks, his voice a little _too_ hopeful.

I pick my plate up with a hand, glarin' at him. "Why the heck are you so doggone nosy about me and Sul Li?"

"Come on man. You're livin' for the both of us here," Gio says. "And I just want to know if I should be out of the house by a certain time so you can—"

My jaw falls. "She's my _friend_ you pervin' dingo! And I doubt she wants to be cooped up in my room all day."

"Should I leave earlier then so ya'll can get in and get out?"

I open my mouth to curse him out, but I just bite my tongue and say, "This is probably why you ain't got a girl."

"Maybe..." He drums his fingers on the microwave as the final seconds tick down. "Baby let's make—"

Unable to hold my temper, I fling Gio's hat at him. "If you don't get your pervin' rabbit head up out of here—"

Gio dodges as the microwave goes _ding!_ "Alright! Alright! I'll stop, Mr. Touchy. Geeze..." He picks his hat up and gets his plate out of the microwave. Then he throws me a smarmy look over his shoulder. "But just in case she's feelin' it—"

"GET. _OUT!_ "

Gio scurry out of the livin' room so fast that he leave the microwave door open.

When he's gone, I shake my head to myself and take my food to the table. _Somethin' is wrong with that one._ Rememberin' Akane's gift I turn back to the counter only to find that the Slap Ya Mama shaker ain't there. _Huh. Maybe I put it up already?_ I could've sworn I put it back down on the counter though. I settle down, eat my food quickly, and wash my hands. Soon as I set foot on the steps, I hear a quick rappin' noise. _Must be Sul Li._ I jog up the stairs to find Sul Li on the windowsill as a sea hawk again.

I open up the window. "Heya. You came as soon as I finished eatin'."

Sul Li flaps inside without a word and shifts in the middle of my floor with a quiet, "Good morning." Lookin' at my open door, she asks, "Is your uncle here?"

"No. He's at Chloe's," I say. When Sul Li's haunted expression doesn't leave the door, I ask, "Are you alright?"

After a delayed beat of quiet, she gives a minute shake of her head, though it seems more meant for herself than for me. "I'm just very tired. The Telling is going to be draining too. I just want it to be over with."

"I hear ya on that one." I close the window.

Sul Li sweeps her hair off her shoulder in her Sul Li-ish way and says, "Don't just admire me all day. Aren't we going to see your village?"

I hold my scoff, but I can't hold my smile. I never thought I'd be relieved to hear her crowin'. "I hope your stomach ain't as full as you are of yourself. I'm in the mood for crab boil."

She sniffs. "I didn't forget we were eating!"

With a glance at the window, I ask, "Just to make sure...There ain't nobody out there followed you, right?"

"No, I'm here with permission," Sul Li says. "But Min Ah will come get me if I take too long."

"Min Ah is coming?" I echo. "Not Jin Yi?"

Sul Li's lips pinch briefly. "Jin Yi couldn't come this morning because the Hwarang had an emergency to attend to. She may still come after she's dealt with it, but with the way things seemed at the ruins, I really can't guarantee whether she can come or not before we leave. But she will try to honor her request as best as she can. She was given permission to arrive at the Telling late if need be."

"Good. I'd hate for Chloe to be thinkin' help is on the way when it ain't really gonna be there," I say. "If we see her while we're out, I'll tell her, but... is everything really gonna be alright at the Tellin'?"

Sul Li's eyes widen. She almost looks wounded. "You think you wouldn't be safe around us?"

"No, no. I don't mean that, but everyone just seems jumpy and worried." I put my hands in my pockets. "And I barely know what's goin' on myself here. I already almost got my head nicked off more than once in one night. I ain't in no hurry to repeat the experience."

"Chun Chu, if I thought even for a moment that anyone would get hurt at the Telling I would not have it held," Sul Li says. "And if you are worried about the Darkborn, they will not come anywhere near a company as large as ours. If you are worried about what the other attendees might do, don't. Violence is forbidden at the ceremony and if someone _did_ draw their sword, they will answer for it. " When I don't say anything, she adds, "Does that ease your fears?"

"Yes. Anyway, I don't want to spoil the whole day talkin' about what I'm scared of. We're s'posed to have a good time today and I'm hungry, so what do you say we get some breakfast?"

She nods slowly. "I'll meet you outside then."

"You ain't comin' through the..." My voice trails as my uncle's angry face flash through my mind. "Er... on second thought, I ought to open the window for you."

I meet Sul Li out in the back of the house and we walk together down the empty road that runs down to the plaza. The village barely stirs in the soft mornin' light. If it weren't for the booth tents out, you might think that it was just another day as usual here.

Sul Li remains quiet as I name and say a little about each of the buildings that we pass by. When we step under the bannered arch that leads into the plaza, she asks, "Chun Chu, do you ever feel trapped here?"

"What do you mean?" I ask. "Trapped like what?"

"It's just...this whole area is on an island, isn't it?" Sul Li says, glancin' down the airway where the airships lay. "If you wanted to go somewhere else, you can't really."

I paw through my hair with a hand. "I ain't never really thought about it much. Honestly, leavin' this place never cross my mind. Life is pretty cozy here and I like it, even though it ain't much."

Sul Li clasps her hands under her chin. "Yes, but if you could have _more..._ Would you take it?"

I squint at her. "More of...?"

She looks away. "I don't know. Whatever you really wanted, I suppose. But would you leave?"

"Sul Li, why would you want to know a thing like that?"

Cheeks tingin' red, she shrugs, "I'm just curious is all."

"Yeah, but you sound like that lady that came up into my house yesterday," I say. "I was startin' to wonder if she put you up to it."

Sul Li's hands lock into fists at her sides. "As if I'd come here on _her_ silly errands!"

We step into the buttered-cajun airs of the Duelin' Crab where I find Fala on a ladder fixin' the huge hangin' fishnet that covers the walls. He pins the edge up on a nail and steps down. His eyes widen at the sight of us. "Oh howdy Kurai. I ain't even hear ya'll come in." Then his eyes go to Sul Li and he take off his crab-shaped cap. "I didn't know you had a girlfriend."

"She ain't my girlfriend, Fala," I say. "Sul Li, is my friend from out of town. I figured she can't leave here without havin' a taste of your crab."

"Oh really?" Fala rubs his neck. "Well I'm honored ya'll think so much of—"

"PEOPLE CAN'T GET FULL OFFA THAT, FALA!" Pip come out from the back with a machete in his hand. "If you don't get your bush-head back in that kitchen and get these people they food, I swear to the almighty—"

I hold up my hands."Pip! Let the man alone! We ain't even ordered nothin' yet!"

Pip point the machete at Fala. "Why you ain't take their orders yet? Take yo snailin' behind to the back right now."

Fala bolt to the kitchen. When he's gone, Pip motion to an empty table with two menus on it. "Come on ya'll. Let's get ya'll started this mornin'." He lays the machete down on the table and reach into his apron for a notepad to take our order. "What ya'll want?"

I glance beside me only to find that Sul Li ain't there and instead she's taken to standin' behind me. "Actually, Pip...can you give us a minute to get settled and look at the menu? I don't want to hold you up in case ya'll get other customers."

"Well if ya'll say so." He put away his notepad and pick up the machete. "I'll be back in a few minutes." He leaves to go join Fala in the back. Moments later, Pip start bark orders at Fala like a mad seal.

I pull out Sul Li's chair for her.

She casts a wary glance at the doorway before sittin' down. She whispers, "Is he always so...candid?"

"Don't mind Pip none," I whisper. "He's a bit hard to get along with at first, but he knows his seafood better than anybody else around here. That's why Fala keep him here."

Sul Li's eyebrows come together. "Then Pip isn't the owner of the restaurant?"

"Nope, Pip _could_ have his own, but he don't like all that bother," I say. "I wouldn't mind."

She cocks her head. "Having your own restaurant?"

"Uh-huh." I pick up my menu. "Do you see anything that you want to order? Keep in mind that all the meals are kinda big. So whatever you want to eat, you're gonna be eatin' a lot of it."

Sul Li picks at the edge of her menu. "Well if there's a lot, wouldn't it be wiser to share? I don't have any preference."

"If you want, I don't mind," I say puttin' the menu down.

A flicker of white get my attention. I look towards the door to find Jin Yi enterin' the door. She gives the room a wary once-over before approachin' our table.

"Howdy Jin Yi, did ya'll take care of that emergency ya'll had?" I ask.

Rather than answer me, she looks at Sul Li. "Should I?"

Sul Li's gaze flicks between Jin Yi and me. "I'd like to hear as well."

"I feel more that we placated the situation rather than took care of it, but I doubt it will be a further problem," Jin Yi says. "At the very least, the woods should be secure while we are here."

Pip come back around with note pad—and thankfully without his machete. His eyes go straight to Jin Yi and the hilt of her sword, then his lips suck in. He look at me. "She eatin' with ya'll too?"

"Err... do you want to eat crab boil with us, Jin Yi?" I ask. "It's my treat."

She raise an eyebrow at me. "Crab boil?"

"Yeah, ya'll folk ain't had no crab boil before?" Pip asks. "I'm tellin' you ya'll are missin' out." He gives a yellow encouragin' smile.

Jin Yi's expression remains unfazed. "I'll be the judge of that." She lays her sword next to her chair and sits down next to Sul Li.

Pip fish into his apron for his pencil. "What ya'll want? Just the crab boil?"

"Yep. One big one for all of us. Make it..." I look at Sul Li. "Do ya'll eat spicy?"

"We do 'nuh-uh', 'roast me', and 'hellfire'," Pip says.

"Hellfire," Sul Li chirps.

"You alright with it bein' that spicy Jin Yi?" I ask.

Jin Yi just shrugs. "If that's the highest it goes."

"Well ya'll bold, I'll say that much." Pip scribbles the order down, tucks this notepad away, and walks to the back. Though not without stealin' a wide-eyed look at Jin Yi.

"I reckon you scared him, Jin Yi," I say.

"Scared?" Sul Li huffs. "Maybe if you're _blind_. He was clearly taken with her." She says the last part with a mischievous smile at Jin Yi, who seems to be makin' a huge effort to not be part of the conversation at all by lookin' around at all the nailed dolls, sea-themed decorations, and Pip's good luck decorations pinned to the wall between the fishnet gaps. Sul Li clears her throat and nudges Jin Yi's arm. "What do you think?"

"The decor here is very strange," Jin Yi says. "There is mixed magical energy coming from it."

"Huh? What do you mean? Pip don't know any magic," I say. "He do some funky rituals sometimes, but most of that junk up there are just his good luck charms, I think. He's just really superstitious."

Jin Yi's eyes narrow. "Good luck? Most of those are invitations for spirit possession."

My mouth run dry. "Come again?"

"He is inviting spirits to come and possess this restaurant," Jin Yi says. "And wishing them the best of luck in doing so."

"Errmm..." I fidget in my seat. "How exactly can you tell that?"

"Jin Yi is a treble musigician," Sul Li says. "I'm training to be a one too. One of our jobs is to make auspicious charms to protect others."

"Which is why I wonder why you didn't sense it before me," Jin Yi says, eyein' Sul Li. "I thought your sister was tutoring you?"

Sul Li sinks a little into her seat. "She _is,_ but Darkborn defense is much more important."

" _All_ parts of being a treble musigician are important, Your Highness."

"Well it is too late now. I'm at the end of my training," Sul Li says indignantly. "And why did you come to _us_? I thought you were supposed to help Kurai's neighbor."

"I neglected to ask the address," Jin Yi says. "Your scents were the freshest so I came here, but I am also hungry."

"Good cuz I brought ya'll the first catch of the day," Pip says, bringin' out a steamin' aluminum pan in one hand and a stack of plates and forks in the other. He set the pan in the middle of us and then lay a plate and fork out for each of us. "Ya'll want any kind of drink before I leave ya?" The question is directed at all of us, but his eyes only speak to Jin Yi, which Sul Li seems to delight in by the way she keep throwin' amused glances over the table at me.

"I'll have a black coffee," I say.

"I'll just have water," Sul Li says.

"And what about you, miss?" Pip says, inchin' toward the empty seat beside me like he want to sit in it. "You want some coffee, or orange juice or—"

"Water," Jin Yi says curtly.

"Alrighty one water," He scribble on his notepad, which I start to notice, ain't got no writin' on it at all. He's just makin' the motions with his hands. "Anything else you might want? Dessert or somethin'?"

"I want to know why you're putting a curse on—"

Sul Li coughs loudly into her elbow, gettin' Jin Yi's attention. And get everybody to stare at her.

"Baby, what's wrong with you?" Pip asks.

"Oh, erm, excuse me?" Sul Li says with a pleadin' look at me as beggin' me to say somethin'.

"Umm...bless you?" I rub the back of my neck, not sure what to do. But then Jin Yi start peerin' closely at Sul Li and I understand. _She just wanted to distract Jin Yi so she don't offend him._ Though I'm not sure why. Sul Li can't _really_ be thinkin' to try to get Jin Yi to like Pip knowin' full well everybody gotta leave tonight, can she?

Jin Yi puts a hand to Sul Li forehead briefly, then promptly drops it. "You are not ill."

Sul Li fans herself with a hand. "Oh I think I must have inhaled too much of the spices. They're so strong."

"I told ya'll it's hot," Pip says. Then he finally scribbles our order down for real. "I'll be right back."

Pip hurries into the back. As soon as he leaves, Sul Li scowls at Jin Yi. "Do you always have to be so...so...brusque?"

"Huh?" From Jin Yi's flat quiet tone, it's hard to tell if she's really surprised at the statement or just humorin' Sul Li.

"The man is trying to get to know you and you were going to insult their restaurant," Sul Li says with a pout.

"I would think a man would want to know if he were openly invitin' the horrors of the abyss into his kitchen," Jin Yi says. "After all, if something strange really did come in here, who would he call?"

"I reckon he could call that oracle lady that gave a speech, or one of the Pua Moana," I say.

"Yes, but that is _after_ there is a problem," Jin Yi says. "And after the damage is done." Then she sniffs at the mixture of crab, crawfish, corn, shrimp, and potatoes in the middle of us. "How is this eaten?"

"You can just eat most of it with your hands and the potato with your fork," I say. "I can ask Pip for more utensils if ya'll want."

Sul Li's eyes brighten. "Please do!"

Jin Yi frowns at Sul Li. "Match-making does not suit you, Your Highness."

"But he _does_ like you," Sul Li mutters, pickin' out a potato with her fork. "I can see it in his eyes."

"Your Highness, we have to return to Silla..."

"But he likes you..."

"Please no..."

I crack open a crab leg as Sul Li keep badgerin' poor Jin Yi. The crab boil is a fine mix of buttery and spicy perfection: sweet corn, meaty crab legs and craw fish, well-seasoned potatoes, I can barely taste the flavor through all the cajun. And I can tell that Jin Yi seem to think so too, because her stony expression seems to thaw just a little. Much to my surprise, she don't even flinch at how hot it is. And neither do Sul Li. Apparently, hellfire must be the norm out there in Silla.

"How do ya'll like it?" I ask.

"I'll have to tell the cooks to make it from time to time," Sul Li says. "It's certainly delicious."

"The fishermen catch so many crab along the coast, but we often don't do much with them," Jin Yi adds. "This is a far better use of them."

"It would be nice if you could open that restaurant in Silla," Sul Li says.

"One of ya'll would have to pass the buck," I say. "I can't just up an leave my home."

Sul Li turns her pleadin' eyes onto Jin Yi.

"I'll consider it, but not until _after_ I retire from the Hwarang," Jin Yi says.

"You're fond of cookin'?" I ask. "I thought you were more of a doctor."

"There is little difference between the two in the Hwarang," Jin Yi says. "Good health starts with what you put in your body."

"Huh...I ain't ever thought of it like that."

The rest of our time at the restaurant passes quietly, with the only exception bein' Pip comin' around to check on us. Afterwards, Jin Yi and Sul Li both thank me for the meal and we both head over to Chloe's home.

I knock on the door and stick my hands in my pockets.

"Are you sure Chloe is going to be here and not at her restaurant?" Sul Li asks.

"Chloe don't work on the weekends." To Jin Yi, I say, "Do you need me to stick with ya while you're workin' or will you be alright?"

"I'd prefer to be alone," Jin Yi says. "If the child really is afflicted by something magical, you could be injured if you're standing in the room."

The door open and a prunish woman answer the door. " _Sala'am._ How can I do for you?"

_Must be one of Chloe's relatives from Pua'alowhe._ "Is Chloe here? Tell her I brought someone to look at Tsuli."

The old woman's eyes widen. "Oh, oh, Tsuli, come here."

" _Sozzei?_ " Chloe comes to the doorway. "Oh hey Kurai. What are you doin' here?"

"I brought that doctor I was tellin' you about." I motion to Jin Yi, who gives a respectful dip of her head. "This is Jin Yi. She can look at Tsuli if you still need her to."

Chloe opens the door wider "Well, come on in Miss Jin Yi. Tsuli ain't moved none." She bid us goodbye when Jin Yi enters.

"Welp. Just the two of us now." I turn to Sul Li who is wrinklin' her dress. "Now let's go to the temple."

### _1-5_

TOGETHER, SUL LI and I tread the mud-sogged path to the temple. I step carefully over the puddles, but I notice that Sul Li is laggin' behind me. "Sul Li, why are you walkin' like you got turtle feet? I thought you wanted to go to the temple."

"I do," She says sharply. "And I don't need your rushing to do so." She skips over a puddle to go past me.

I watch her continue down the road. _Did I miss somethin'?_ Just at the restaurant and Chloe's house, she was all happy and jokey and now she's all irritated again? I shake my head. I'll _never_ understand that woman, I swear. _At least, after tonight I don't really have to._ I hurry to catch up with her.

Sul Li hardly takes notice of my presence. She's too busy wringin' the fabric of her dress.

I can almost feel my own stomach bunchin' up as tight as her dress. "Are you tryin' to tear your clothes or something?" I ask. "You're startin' to make me nervous doin' all that."

Her lips lift in a scowl. "I am just..." She clears her throat. "I'm not certain how my request will be received is all."

"Well it can't be that bad can it? The most a man can say is yes or no."

Sul Li's mouth thins into a small white slash. She exhales through her nose. "Chun Chu it's _not_ that simple."

_What in the heck are you askin' for then?_ "Not simple how? He ain't gonna try to hurt you, will he?"

"No. He would not dare." Her tone doesn't invite anymore conversation, leavin' questions still burnin' inside me.

As we step onto the temple grounds, we spot Tora stuffin' his face with chips at one of the covered tables while Yuna flashes color-coded cards at Izumi beside him.

Yuna holds up a blue card.

Izumi snaps her fingers. " _Uyana_ is mountain."

Yuna nods and holds out a green card.

" _Uthelu._ It means "Teller of Lies"."

I approach the table. "That don't sound like hello or 'you suck'."

"Nope. I got tired of it," Izumi says. "Besides, I'm putting in all my effort for the Pua Velu test. So the lower score I get on Adjusted Hangul the better." When Yuna holds up a yellow card that reads tomorrow, Izumi says, " _Uma._ "

"You are studying Pua Velu?" Sul Li asks.

"I've already studied it," Izumi says. "I'm just brushing up."

"Oh well in that case... _Shalase_ Kim, Sul Li _silessim. Nanise laleshe falo silessim whe?_ "

Izumi's mouth drops at the question. "Uhh..."

"I thought you already studied it," I tease.

Izumi's feelers stick up. "Of course I did! She just caught me off-guard." To Sul Li, she says, " _Shalase_ Izumi _silessim."_

Yuna claps encouragin'ly, but Tora puts his chip bag down and signs, _Conversations won't be that simple on the test._

Izumi huffs. "I know that!" She looks at a watch on her wrist. "Oh yikes. I ought to get going too. I need to go and check in with the proctors."

"Already?" I look up at the clouds. "Time is blowin' by fast."

Izumi gathers up her cards from the table and Yuna. "I'll see you guys later."

"Good luck!" I call after her.

_What brings you two here?_ Yuna signs.

"Sul Li needs to see Yami. I don't suppose you two know where he's stayin'?" I ask.

Tora and Yuna exchange a bewildered look.

_Why do you want to see him?_ Yuna asks.

_Yeah, he's weird._ Tora adds, though I'm not completely sure that's what he meant since he's tryin' not to drop the chip fragments on his paws.

"I have something to ask him," Sul Li says. I can't help but notice the guardedness come back to her tone, though I can tell that she's tryin' not to be as brusque with the beast monks as she was to me.

_Hmm, I think he accepts visitors,_ Yuna signs. _At the very least it's worth a try._

"And before I forget," Sul Li adds, "My family is hosting a ceremony at Aeternum Ruins tonight before we leave for home. Kurai is coming and I would like it very much if you both could attend."

Tora's whole face droop like a tear. The chips in his mouth fall out. _You're leaving us so soon?_ He look at me like I'm s'posed to do somethin' about it.

"You know Uncle Yong Chun ain't havin' none of her in the house even if she could stay."

_I didn't know the ruins were called Aeternum,_ Yuna signs. _Were they always called that?_

Sul Li nods. "It's always been a pilgrimage site for Sillans. But it's not often that we travel this way."

"Which reminds me..." I cross arms up. "How exactly do ya'll even get here in the first place? This island is surrounded by nothin' but air on every side. And I ain't ever heard of Silla on this island."

"It's hard to explain without having anything to show you, but in the ruins we have special mirrors that we call Vision Gates," Sul Li says. "Those gates transport us to a corresponding place in Niflheim, which is much easier for us to traverse, and then we simply find the Vision Gate corresponding to where we want to travel. Truthfully, it's quite rare that we run into anyone from a local village or that we've stayed in any area for so long. But circumstances have been so unusual these days."

Yuna signs, _Well it's not like that is a bad thing. We enjoy your company._

Tora gets up. _Let's hope that Yami feels the same way. I don't want Master Ushi cutting back my dinner for this._

I lower my arms. "I doubt that Master Ushi would do all that just for a visit."

Yuna gets up too and she motions towards a skinny road around the main temple. We follow her and Tora past most of the buildings that house the beast monks until we come to the oldest of the livin' quarter buildings, which strike me as odd since Middle Path Temple has newer and even designated places for guests to stay. But this sorry thing in front of us got some tatters in the walls here, broken floor boards there, and cobwebs up the wazoo in the eaves.

My gaze sweep the whole place up and down. "Why is Master Ushi makin' him stay in here? I thought ya'll only put the bad cubs in here to scare them."

_We do,_ Yuna signs. _But Yami wanted to be in this one specifically. Apparently it helps him focus._

Tora snorts. _Focus my toe claws. How can anyone focus when_ _**that** is_ _outside their door?_ Tora points at a large long-legged spider makin' itself at home under the corner eaves and shudders.

"Maybe he likes spiders." I turn my attention to Sul Li, who I realize hasn't said anything.

She has that same antsy look from earlier, as if maybe she's rethinkin' comin' all this way. When she realizes I'm lookin' at her, she straightens. "He is staying here on his own?"

_For now,_ Yuna says, steppin' over a cracked stair to get into the doorway. _Watch your step. We've never gotten around to repairs on this building._

I follow after her. "What's Master Ushi waiting for? It looks like a death trap already."

_The king doesn't want to fund it,_ Tora signs. _He's hoarding all the island's money for something else. Probably to bring Yami out here._

_I doubt that,_ Yuna says. _It is more likely that all of the money is going to Professor Wu for prophet services. The bigger the reputation of the prophet, the more money you have to pay._

Yuna and Tora lead us down the dusty hall to a pair of brass-plaqued doors with no name on them. Yuna knocks on them.

There is a watery sip from inside, then Yami's familiar rumble. "Please come in. Visitors are always welcome."

Yuna opens the door and gestures for us to go inside.

Huge tacked blueprints and pictures of strange symbols I've never seen fill the walls. Tea caddies and tea cups stock his bookshelf, all of them stained from constant use. Yami sits in the corner at his desk with a stormy gray cup in his hands. He turns in his chair, his blue eyes welcomin'. "Ah. Mr. Kurai. I didn't expect to see you of all people here in my own room."

An embarrassed flush creeps through my face. "I didn't expect to be comin' here myself either. I hope we ain't disturbin' you or nothin'."

"Not at all." He lifts a pale blue kettle from the edge of the table and pours himself a cup. The toasty aroma of oolong blooms into the room. "Would any of you like a cup?"

Yuna takes a cup, but Tora declines.

I politely say no thanks.

Yami's gaze shifts to Sul Li. "And what of you Ms. Kim?"

Sul Li's eyes widen at the address. "How do you know who I am?"

The panther man tips his head to one side. "Your clothes, dear. I've spent enough time in Silla to be aware that only the Kim Clan would wear blue and gold."

Sul Li's seems to relax at the response, but her expression suddenly becomes guarded.

_I thought you wanted to come here so bad. Why are you clammin' up now?_ When an uncomfortable lull starts to creep in, I ask, "I've been wonderin' if it's really true that you went and studied over in the Brother World?"

Yami lifts his teacup to his mouth. A white blossom unfurlin' on top of the golden tea. "I have. Ise Shrine is a fascinating place if you ever get the opportunity to visit." His whiskers perk a little as he sips. "Did you know the gods can manipulate the flow of the worlds as if they were merely two sides of a puzzle box?"

"A puzzle box?" I echo. "How can you tell that?"

Yami's face lights up at the question. "Have you ever held a puzzle box in your hands, Mr. Kurai?"

"No, they don't really sell them here," I say.

Yami reaches into his robes for two wooden cubes. He holds one out to me. "Twist any of the faces."

I turn my cube over in my hands. Every face is blank. I twist the right most face or rather try to, but it don't move. But much to my surprise, the right face of Yami's cube move instead. "It's magic?"

"Not entirely." Yami takes my cube. "Chi is more a mix of life energy and magnetism. The clashing and harmony of Yin and Yang bring everything else into be. Like fire and water. Snow and lightning..." He sets both cubes on the desk. "Isn't that fascinating?"

_No, not really._ But Yami look so happy to have explained it that I don't really have the heart to say otherwise.

_I don't get what that has to do with the worlds being a puzzle box,_ Tora says.

"There is a place called the Temple of Creation that is rumored to govern the well-being of both our worlds. I've never been in the temple's main body myself, but I've seen the sites of its parts." Yami leans back into his chair, makin' it creak. "If I were a god, or a messenger of the gods, I'd be able to go into one part and manipulate the core. That would make a corresponding hall in the main temple open." He raises his cup again, but then lowers it again. "Supposedly if you opened all the halls in the temple, a greater power would be accessible but..." His blue gaze lofts to the ceilin' by his own imaginin's. Then he looks at us. "Legends say that both worlds were originally created as one, but Amaterasu drove them apart because—"

Sul Li steps forward. "As fascinating as that sounds, sir, I'm afraid that we don't have the time to endure a whole history lesson."

"Sul Li!" I hiss.

But Yami gives a loud purrin' laugh. "Let her be. I can tell Ms. Kim has something she's itching to say."

Drawin' a deep breath, Sul Li glances at me. "Leave."

"Ouch." I put a hand over my heart. "I see I'm not wanted."

"I'm sorry, but this is really private," Sul Li says. "It's uncomfortable expressing to one person. I don't think I could endure a room of four."

Yami lays his cup down and puts his hand on his knees. "Very well. Gentlemen and Yuna, please wait outside. If you have more questions, I'll answer them afterward."

_No offense, but you were lecturin' just fine without them._ I step outside with Yuna and Tora. Sul Li closes the doors behind us.

_Should we just go then?_ Tora asks.

_I think we should wait for Sul Li,_ Yuna suggests.

I nod absently, my eyes fixed on the door. Despite my better sense tellin' me it's none of my business, my feet don't want to go anywhere, and I'm fightin' my self-control to not press my ear to the door. Instead, I strain my ears for the sound of their voices.

"And what brings you so far away from home?" Yami's voice is just a breath above a whisper.

"It's something of a..." There is a creak. Quick footsteps come to the door.

My heart skips. Does she know I'm tryin' to listen?

But the door never opens. Instead, Sul Li says, " _Tacet."_ And all sound from inside stops.

I strain and strain, but not even a scrap of their voices get through. _Must be some kind of spell that she did._ I lean against the wall and just stand around with Tora and Yuna. Every so often, I glance at the door. And the longer the talk takes, the more often I look at the door. _What are ya'll talkin' about that's takin' so long?_

Tora, who's taken up pacin' the hall, signs, _What is this even about?_

Yuna shrugs and looks at me. _Do you know?_

"Nope. She wouldn't say a word to me."

Yuna puts a paw to her mouth. _Perhaps we should leave then. Who knows how long we could be standing—_

The door opens.

_CRAAAAAAAASSSSSSSSSHHHHHHHH!_

"There is no sense in rebelling," Yami says. "You cannot deny him—"

Sul Li steps out of the room ands slams the doors together, mutin' Yami's voice.

We stare at her.

"What?" She says through grit teeth. "He just dropped his teacup is all." She strides briskly down the hall with clenched fists.

_One teacup? He sounds like he dropped all of them._ I open the doors to find Yami dabbing at a tea puddle in the midst of shards of broken porcelain and fallen tea caddies. Nearly all of them are gone from the shelf. Yami, however, merely looks at us and waves as if it's all just another average weekend for him.

"What happened?" I ask.

"Your friend merely became a little...overexcited," he says. The he stands up and holds out a hand. Each fallen reforms and returns to its proper place.

"Then what's she looking all upset for?" I demand, feelin' my hands close into fists of my own. "If you did something to her—"

Yami's ear swivels. "Is that not a question you should be asking your friend? She asked her questions and I gave her the answers she sought so badly. If that is a crime, then what is the purpose of truth?"

Tora, Yuna, and I look at each other and then hurry to follow Sul Li.

Sul Li is already halfway through the living quarters by the time we outside.

"Hey! Wait up Sul Li!" I call after her.

But she doesn't. Tora, Yuna, and I have to run to catch up with her.

"Sul Li!"

But Sul Li does not stop until we're at the temple entrance, and even then she seem only a heartbeat away from runnin' off again.

I stop beside her. "Good gods woman. What are you so upset for?"

She whirls on me, lips curled into a contemptuous snarl. "I'm surprised you don't know already, considering that you were trying to eavesdrop on me."

I flinch back on her words. _She did know!_ "I didn't mean..."

"Didn't mean to eavesdrop on me?" She folds her arms. "Do you take me for a fool? I know you were. Tora and Yuna were both thinking about it."

Tora and Yuna duck their heads in shame.

"Ya'll didn't do anything wrong," I mutter.

"It doesn't matter if they did or not," Sul Li snaps. "I told you it was private for me. You shouldn't have been trying to listen at all!"

"I'm sorry! I couldn't help it, okay? Everybody's been keepin' secrets around here, I just..." I rub my neck. "I guess I just got ahead of myself."

"Well that's alright, as long as no parts of you separate in the process, it's all fine."

The sound of Min Ah's voice makes me jump right off the ground. I whirl around to find a giraffish slender woman with long twin ponytails behind me. "How long you been standin' there?"

"Me? I just poofed here via Circle of Fifths actually." Min Ah adjusts her spectacles. "Only caught the tail end of what you were saying, I'm afraid. I hope I didn't miss anything important." Then she turns to Sul Li. "Now everyone at the ruins isn't in the mood for shenanigans today. I hope you're all—"

"I want to go home at once," Sul Li says.

Min Ah's mouth sucks in at the declaration, as if she had already planned for Sul Li puttin' up a long drawn-out resistance. "Um. Okay. The Circle of Fifths will take some time to recharge so err... How was everyone's morning?"

I stick my hands in my pockets. "Mine was pretty okay how about—"

"This is ridiculous. I am walking to the ruins," Sul Li says and promptly turns and leaves through the temple entrance.

"Wait! Pup! Puuuuuup!" Min Ah runs after her. "For goodness sake, can't you sit still for _one_ second?"

I watch them go and my own heart sinks like a stone in a pool. Then I turn to Tora and Yuna who look at me with droopy ears and frowns. "I really blew it, didn't I?"

Tora throws away his chip bag. _I don't think not eavesdropping would've softened her temper._

Yuna sighs. _Whatever she is upset about, she ought to find a healthier way to deal with it. Breaking Yami's teacups? Even if you are upset, that's no excuse to be childish to someone you're visiting._

Tora puts a salt-dusted paw to his chin. _You think she did it on purpose to spite him?_

Yuna sniffs. _You think Yami would break his own cups? Granted he fixed them, but honestly Tora, why would he lie?_

Tora shakes his head. _I don't think he'd do any of that. But Sul Li has been strange this morning, hasn't she?_

_It's hard to say what's strange when we've only met her a day ago._ Yuna folds her arms, then turns to me. _Was she acting strange this morning when you two met up?_

"She seemed pretty anxious earlier because she didn't know how he'd react," I say. "I think this is all just about that Yami fellow and whatever he said."

_But Yami didn't do anything out of line._ Yuna signs.

_As far as we know,_ Tora says. _The door was closed and she silenced the room. Would she get mad for no reason?_

Yami's door reopens in my mind and Sul Li's departure replays like an old film. Then the earlier haunted look in her eyes. Her unnatural stillness when I told her my dream. "Yami was sayin' something when she left, right?"

_Something about there being no sense in rebelling,_ Yuna says. _And not being able to deny someone._

Tora scratches behind his ear. _Then there is someone else that she doesn't want to deal with?_

"Probably someone back home in Silla, I'll bet," I say, shovin' my hands back into my pockets. "She's the noble sort so it could be a marriage thing."

Yuna's ear gives an incredulous twitch. _Why does anyone need to go to a monk then? And a magical engineering one at that? It makes no sense. And that is still no excuse to break his teacups._

"No it's not, but like Sul Li said, it's none of our business, and she's leavin' today, so no point in beatin' the poor horse dead," I say. "Best thing that we can do is settle ourselves down, wait until tonight, try to have a good time Sul Li's party, and don't make any trouble."

The rest of the afternoon is a long thorny wait in my room. After that whole episode, a part of me start to wonder if Sul Li even wants me to come there after what happened, but I try not to think of it and instead try to figure out a thank-you gift for that woman which is a whole lot harder than it sounds. I want it to be something nice, but still somethin' distinctly from here.

Unfortunately, that disqualifies all the shiny things from the UKR. And there ain't many trinkets in Soraumi worth givin' as a gift. At least, not one that don't mean cashin' out big time which only leaves me with the restaurants around here. And I really don't think she'd want a whole three course meal to take home.

_What's something small I could give her?_ Something from Wakiwi's? No, too much that ain't good if it sits. Delekti Deck's? Bleh. The snacks there aren't great. That's worse than not thankin' her at all.

_Hmm...350 Degrees?_ Mrs. Ai's cinnamon buns are the best on the whole island. And they aren't too bad if they're not eaten right away.

My train of thought is quickly cut off as a loud tappin' sounds at my window. I turn to see Min Ah's giraffe head there with something in her mouth.

I open up the window. "Hey Min Ah, what brings you here? Ain't the Tellin' about to start?"

She sets the three objects on the window sill. "It is and I have to be there for the preparations. Otherwise, I'd escort you to the Telling myself." Min Ah points to the with her muzzle. "Pup ran off in such a hurry earlier that she neglected to give you this pin. Keep it visible on your clothes at all times so people know that you're an honorary guest of the Kim Clan. We're testing some new security measures at the Telling as well so please be patient with us."

"Thanks a bunch for bringin' it to me. I pick up a pin with a hand. The prowlin' tiger on it gleams gold with blue stripes. I remove the needle guard on back and attach it to my vest where it's plenty visible. "How's that?

"Very good, now don't forget to give the others to your friends," Min Ah says. "Everyone is still rather unhappy with the previous intruders we came across, so it's very important that you don't lose your pins." She pulls back briefly. "I can't think of anything else that I'm supposed to tell you, but those are the main things." She sticks her head under the window sill. "I think that's all so. I will leave you to make your final preparations then." She backs away from the window. "See you there!"

I linger at the window to wave goodbye to Min Ah. For a brief moment, it cross my mind to ask about Sul Li, but then I decide to keep my mouth shut. _You'll find out at the Tellin'._ She can't be that mad to still let me come to the Tellin'. Soon as I close my window, the door bell ring. I get to find Yuna and Tora dressed up in cleaner robes at the door.

_Sorry it took us so long,_ Yuna signs quickly. _Tora_ **_insisted_** _that he pick out the right-colored robe._

Tora gives an indignant-soundin' huff. _Of course! I can't go to Sul Li's party looking like I just came out of the cycle of samsara! I want to look good._

Yuna's whiskers twitch. _Better? Your color choices are poop brown and mustard yellow. It should not take hours to pick!_

_It is not poop brown! I have umber, chocolate, terra cotta, and burnt sienna_ , Tora signs.

"Hey, hey, come on now you two," I say. "We can't go to this party actin' a fool, alright?" I pass them a pin each. "Make sure you wear these where people can see them clear. Don't take em off for nothin'. "

As they pin the tiger to their robes, Gio come trottin' his way downstairs. He stops beside the counter. "Hey, do you have a minute or are you running late to something?"

"I'm not in a hurry. What's up?"

"Just wanted to let you know I'm gonna be out real late for one of my meetings," Gio says. "And I'm gonna bring somebody back with me tonight, so don't be freaked out if you hear noise or something in the middle of the night."

"Does my uncle know?" I ask. "I don't mind, but you know how he gets about this sort of stuff."

"I was going out to look for him now." Gio moves past me to grab his keys off the doornail. "Is he still with Chloe?"

"He might still be with her folk at her house if he ain't helpin' at the tavern."

"Alright, thanks man." Gio leaves.

When Tora and Yuna finish puttin' on their pin, I lock up the house. "Guys, I need to detour to 350 Degrees to get a gift for somebody."

_A gift?_ Tora signs. _For Sul Li?_

"No," I mutter. "For someone else. I kinda already took Sul Li out this mornin' so I don't want to bring her more food."

_Well let's make it fast. Master Ushi will have the temple gate open for a little bit,_ Yuna says. _We can go to the forest from there instead of trying to negotiating with the guards._

I nod, glad not to have to deal with any guards. And besides, I don't really have a good excuse to be runnin' out there this time around. My delivery was kinda important so I got away with it, but I doubt that anybody will want to hear me out for some party.

We hurry to 350 Degrees and I pick out a cinnamon bun in a dainty pink box for the woman. I sniff the intoxicatin' sweet scent briefly before closin' the box. _I hope you like it Miss Who Are You._

When we get to the gate, we find Yami standin' just outside of it with his hands behind his back. He looks over his shoulder at us. "Going to see the Sillans?"

I pause, taken aback by the question. "How do you know?"

Yami chuckles, makin' his neck beads clack. "Only a traveling Sillan would have reason to celebrate on the night of a full moon. Though, I'm surprised that they accepted you so easily. They're generally the more militant sort."

"Oh believe me. I've already been on that side of them, sir and I nearly got my head lopped off for it," I say. "But what are you doin' standin' out here? Are you goin' too?"

"I doubt they'd want my company at their ceremony." Yami looks up at the pinkenin' sky. "But something about the darkness is attractive to me. I know some fear it, but...I'm perfectly at ease it. It's very peaceful."

"Heck maybe you ought to tell that to my roommate sometime," I say. "When he gets to smokin' he turns into the biggest chicken I ever seen. You can't even get him to look at his own shadow."

Yami laughs, then he turns back to the forest. "Oh don't tease him, Mr. Kurai. There are many people who fear their own shadow."

"Well I ain't one of them," I say.

"You are not afraid of the dark?"

I shrug. "What for? All you got to do is turn on the light."

Yami's blue eyes fix on me. "And you are not afraid of what lies _in_ the dark? Or what comes from it?"

"When I was little, my uncle always liked to say, that light-lovin' folk are afraid of the dark because they can't see. But dark-lovin' folk are afraid of the light because they can't see," I say. "So if there's anything out there in the dark, I figure it's just as scared of me as people are of it."

"Hmmm." Yami cants his head. "I've never thought of it that way."

Yuna tugs on my sleeve. _We're wasting time, Kurai._

"Oh we gotta get goin', Yami," I say. "We'll have to chat when we get back."

"Very well," Yami says. "Be safe during your travels."

"We will."

We take off down the dirt road leading out of the temple. I gaze at the trees on the left side of the road, tryin' to gauge our distance from the ruins. This way is a little shorter if I remember it right. The road should curve pretty close to the—

"Oh look Skoll!" chirps a girl's voice. "I spy with my eye something...Wolfish!"

"Ooo! Oooo!" says a boy's voice. "Is it big, Hati?"

"Maybe heh heh..."

"Is it bad?" Skoll asks.

"Yes, yes, and it is big meanie to poor innocent sheep!" Hati says.

"How terrible, Hati! What an awful monster!"

I look up.

Two children stand in the glow of the road lanterns: a stocky boy moppish hair, a cloth over his mouth, and a dagger in his hand. And a skinnier girl standing behind him with an eager smile and a flour sackish dress that seem much too big for her. Their eyes are a bright almost glowing yellow in the dark, just like the picture in the scroll Sul Li sent me.

I stop walkin'. _They must be the ones that Sul Li was talkin' about._

Yuna and Tora step in front of me, their own faces wary.

The boy cups a hand to his mouth and yells, "Hey mister. We're playing wolf in sheep's clothing. Why don't _you_ play the big bad wolf?"

"Yeah, we're not big enough. Or wolfy enough," Hati says.

_Ain't ya'll imaginin' the wrong fairy tale?_ "No thanks, you two. I'd love to play but I've got people waitin' for me to show up. Maybe later if I feel up to it."

The two kids exchange a look.

"Oh boo hoo..." says Hati. "We have to wait."

"I don't mind!" Skoll chirps. "Good things come to those who do!"

The two turn and run off further down the road. Yuna and Tora don't relax until they're out of sight.

_I sense a lot of energy coming from them,_ Yuna says.

Tora nods. _Maybe we shouldn't come back this way._

"Sul Li didn't say they were dangerous though," I say. "She just said they could—"

But Yuna's warnin' look stop the words in on my tongue. _No. Please trust us about this, Kurai. We shouldn't take our chances with those children no matter what Sul Li says._

Tora nods his agreement. _And we are losing precious daylight._

"Alright. I s'pose I owe it to ya'll anyway." But I look down the road again before I follow after Yuna and Tora.

As we get close to the ruins, the forest start to get noisy with voices, horse whinnies, shakers, and bells, and the strong smell of smoke, and manure. I don't see anybody yet, but a snazzy pair of gold tiger-dog statues stand in place of the familiar wolf-bear ones, their mouth open in the Ah' and Un' position.

Tora rubs his chin. _I don't remember these being here._

Yuna chuffs. _I hope they stay. I like them lot._

"They're probably just here for the ceremony." I say, walkin' toward the ruins entrance. "Sul Li's folk seem to be awful fond of ti—"

"NOT SO FAST SUSPICIOUS CREATURE!" roars a high-pitched female voice. The long spitz-ish tails of the tiger-dog statues come down in front of me to bar the way. The Ah' statue lowers its head to bare its fangs in my face. "YOU DON'T SMELL LIKE YOU'RE ON THE VIP LIST!"

I stagger back and almost fall. "Ya'll talk too?"

"Of course we talk, suspicious creature," The 'Un' statue says in a congested-soundin' male voice and British accent that I question the legitimacy of. He jumps down from his pedestal, and I notice that his nose is broke off. "We aren't just silly Stone Age statues that go 'Ug'. And besides, _you_ talk, don't you?"

"AHEM!" The tigress dog jumps off her own pedestal to stand in front of me. "I am the Great Guardian of the Left!" she says. "And this—" She points to the other statue with her tail. "Is my partner Dave."

Dave waves a clawed paw at us. "Hi."

Yuna puts a paw to her muzzle.

Tora squint at the 'Un' statue. _His name is Dave? Where is the Great Guardian of the Right?_

Dave cocks his head back at Tora. "What? Do I have something on my ear, suspicious creature? Why are you looking at me like that?"

"Well uhh... We don't mean to be rude or nothin', but Tora here want to how come you don't call yourself the Great Guardian of the Right?" I ask.

Dave and the Great Guardian of the Left look at each other. Then their lips start shakin' up like gonna start cryin'.

The Great Guardian of the Left throw her head back and start full and howl, "He was one of the best friends a statue could have!"

Dave sheathes his claws to wipe his eyes. "Poor fellow almost died to a Magus Panther! They gave him one too many deep cracks. Now he's gone a tad nutty."

"Yes, he's not well enough for guardian duty," says the Great Guardian of the Left.

Dave sighs and shakes his head. "Poor chap runs around in circles and jumps around claiming he's being controlled by a 'joystick' and an 'A' button. The doctors have tried everything I tell you. Even up, down, up down, left, right, left, right, B, A start, but it's no use. His condition could be incurable as far as statues go, so unfortunately he cannot go on."

The Great Guardian of the Left salutes. "But his five-star service will be remembered among all statue-kind! Especially the way he fought at the Battle of Gogi-gui."

"He will honored like a legend!" Dave howls.

"And I the Great Guardian of the Left shall be twicely great in his stead. No, no, no... I shall be his greatness _squared."_

Dave straightens up and puts a paw over his hear. "For the Great Guardian of the Right!"

"For the oh so magnificent Great Guardian of the Right!" The Great Guardian of the Left says, puttin' a paw over her heart too. The she circles around Tora once. "But you hardly have the right to be talking, suspicious creature. Your name means 'tiger' which you are clearly not!"

Tora put his hands on his hips, then he signs, _I didn't give myself that name._

"Why is he making aggressive gestures at us?" The Great Guardian of the Left asks. "Is he American?"

"No. That's just how beast monks talk around here," I say. "He's just sayin' that he didn't pick his name."

The Great Guardian of the Left huffs. "It doesn't matter. It is false advertising!"

I put my hands up. "Alright. It's whatever ya'll want, but can ya'll let us in? Sul Li asked me to come and say goodbye to her." I point to my pin. "She even gave us this special pins."

The two statues stare blank at me like I lost my marbles.

Dave gasps. "Let _you_ in? Oh heavens no. What if you're a Magus Panther?"

_Magus Panther?_ I ain't ever heard of that before. For a brief moment, I think of Yami, but then I push him out my mind. _Sul Li probably would've said something if that were the case._ And Sul Li ain't never shy about tellin' people what to not do.

The Great Guardian of the Left nods. "Exactly. Every guest must pass with approval from us, regardless of if you wear very fetching pins or not."

I roll my eyes. "But ain't none of us even heard of these Magus Panthers, you're talkin' about. I ain't even heard that until you said it."

The Great Guardian of the Left leans a bit towards me, her eyes narrowin'. She turns to her friend. "Well then if that's really the case, I suppose we'll have to let them in, Dave."

"But Great Guardian of the Left, what if that's what he _wants_ us to think?" Dave asks, squintin' hard at us. "What if he really wants to get inside our heads and control us with this... 'A' button?"

The Great Guardian of the Left gasps and flatten her ears. "Villains! Horrible villains! Good thinking, Dave. If only we had your genius earlier, you could've saved the Perfectly Wonderful Supremely Wise Great Guardian of the Right from a Magus Panther." Then the Great Guardian of the Left break out into full on blubberin'.

"Oh don't cry friend." Dave nudges her with his nose (or rather I should say lack of nose). "You're getting tears all over your gold leaf and you'll ruin your 'Ah' pose. That will simply not do for a Kim Clan statue."

I clench my teeth. _At this rate the Tellin' will be over and we'll still be sittin' out here with these doggone...catdogs._

A flash of a red tunic catches in the corner of my eye.

_That woman!_ My chest fills with a surge of relief. _She_ could probably put some sense into these two. I turn around and open my mouth to call her over, but my mouth never make the words.

It's not the woman, but a girl about my age with long straight reddish hair comin' toward us ridin' one of those huge dragons horse creatures. She wears the same red and black tunic that I saw the woman wearin', but hers has a thicker furry ruff around the neck and shoulders and she only wears a headband instead of a fancy cap on her head. The horse creature's hooves clop heavily over the stone walkway as she approaches. "Is something the matter?"

"Yes, there is, officer!" The Great Guardian of Left says. "This man says that we should let him in! But he's very suspicious, don't you agree?"

She pats her mount's flank. "Down, Helm." The chestnut creature lowers itself to the ground to let her off.

My stomach tighten at the quiet lull that follows. "There's not a problem, is there, officer?"

The newcomer studies me for a moment. Then Tora and Yuna. Her lips curve into a smile. "Not unless you expect me to park those two. I don't quite have a license for that unfortunately. I barely have one for drakehorses as it is."

_We are not beasts of burden!_ Tora signs. _I can parallel park myself without help!_

"Oh I know. Just a joke." she says, startlin' Tora. To me she says, "But the parking here unfortunately is _not_ a joke. Violators will be fined, towed, and possibly either beheaded or prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law."

Yuna's mouth purses. _Good thing we walked here._

I sigh in relief. "Well if we're not in any trouble, can you _please_ tell these two that I'm s'posed to be here?"

The girl looks at both statues and then gives me a sympathetic look. "I can't tell them that."

My heart sink deep into my belly, then rise with a fire. "And why not?"

She holds her arm. "I'm only in charge of horse valet tonight, and they are Kim Clan statues. My brother was the one who was assigned to greeting duty, so I don't really have a say in what these two do unfortunately."

My shoulders slump. "Then we're _stuck_ out here?"

"Of course not!" The Great Guardian of the Left stamps a paw down on the blue brick. " _I_ shall settle this!" She studies all of us. Then she stares at the Hwarang girl. "You there, girly human!"

"Yes?"

"You wouldn't happen to be a Magus Panther, would you?" The Great Guardian of the Left asks.

"No. Why do you ask?"

"Just establishing the status quo to make a point," The Great Guardian of the Left says with a nod. "I figured that you were. But _you_ sir..." She glare at me. "You seem very Magus Pather-y-ish-some-like! My inner Magus Panther detector is sensing some high forbidden energy in these halls!"

I ball my hands up. "But I _ain't_ a Magus Panther. If a guy were a Magus Panther don't you think he'd know..." My voice trails.

Unless...was _that_ why uncle and our folks were kicked out of Silla? I swallow uncomfortably. What if I am and he didn't tell me that either?

"You're looking quite guilty Mr. Magus Panther-y-ish-some-like man!" Dave says, barin' his sharp teeth.

"If you are truly not a Magus Panther as you claim, then you must pass my full-proof anti-Magus Panther test," The Great Guardian of the Left says.

I take a step back. "And what in the heck is that?"

The Great Guardian of the Left puff up her chest and say. "You must fill in the CAPTCHA!"

"CAPTCHA?" I echo. "I've never heard of that either."

The Great Guardian of the Left huff. "Well then you are a Magus Panther. Because if you weren't, you could've been done with the test by now."

"But—"

"NO EXCUSES! FILL IN THE CAPTCHA TO CONTINUE!"

"But friend..." Dave come up beside her. "I thought the CAPTCHA test was the Magus Panther test. Not the anti-one."

The Great Guardian of the Left gasps. "Nonsense, Dave. Are you implying that _I_ would mix up my flawless guardian tests?" She swing her head to look at the Hwarang girl, who studies a silver panther-shaped glyph on the back of her hands idly. "You there! You are not a Magus Panther. Please fill in the CAPTCHA!"

"Um, give me a moment." The panther on her hand glows brighter, then retreats down her arm, out of the statue's sight.

"Are you alright, pretty human?" Dave asks. "You seem to have a suspicious marking on your skin."

The girl waves her hand. "Just my allergies."

The Great Guardian of Left puts a paw to her mouth. "Oh dear. And I just ran out of all my allergy medication too. That's a shame. Perhaps I can get some for you after our shift."

"It was just a CAPTCHA, wasn't it?" the girl asks. "I think it was MG792A."

The Great Guardian of the Left turn to Dave. "You see? It _is_ the Anti-Magus Panther Test!"

Dave's ears swivel back. "But friend—"

The Great Guardian of the Left hushes him up with her tail. She clears her throat. "I shall generate a new CAPTCHA for you, suspicious creature. Now, fill in the CAPTCHA to continue or prepare yourself for epic and mildly painful battle!"

"But friend..." Dave pins her tail down. "The guardian handbook says we have to offer to save his progress before we do epic battle in case we make a mess with his entrails."

The Great Guardian of the Left whirls on Dave. "I KNOW WHAT I'M DOING DAVE! NOW HUSH!"

Dave cover his mouth with both his paws.

Yuna and Tora inch back from me.

The Great Guardian of the Left turn back around, lips peelin' back. "Now... Fill. In. The. CAPTCHA."

Warm sweat wets the back of my neck. _She looks really serious this time._ But what in the heck am I supposed to do? I don't know what the heck a CAPTCHA is. "Erm..."

_Psst._

Huh?

_Say 24UIN9._

Is that another voice...in my head? _Hello?_

_Yes?_

_Uh... if you don't mind me askin', who are you?_

The voice gives a warm feminine purr-chuckle that sounds so close that it seems to be in my ear. _Just a concerned bystander._

My neck nape prickles. Is it that woman?

I look around, but there's no one else out here in the front, but the Hwarang girl, Tora, Yuna, the statues, and me. It cross my mind that maybe the girl might have said something, but judgin' by the startled way she's lookin' around, I doubt she's the one that slipped the answer, or expected to hear one. That woman must be here somewhere. Who else would say that to me?

The Great Guardian of the Left growls. "I'm getting tired of waiting, suspicious creature. Fill in the CAPTCHA or else I'll—"

I blurt out, "24UIN9!"

The Great Guardian of the Left and Dave make "o" shapes with their mouths. They both shimmy aside. The Great Guardian of the Left clears her throat. "Err... I see now that you're not a Magus Panther. You're free to go inside."

Tora and Yuna heave two of the biggest sighs I ever seen anybody heave, but the girl regards me with a smile.

We all walk inside. As soon as we're out of the statues' earshot, I whisper. "Did you hear that voice?"

The girl puts a hand to her chest. "Oh good, I'm not the only one who heard it."

"You don't know who it was?"

She shakes her head. "It was too quiet for me to hear. But..." She gives me a thoughtful look. "It's surprising a stranger would just do that for you." She looks over her shoulder. "Magus Panthers usually don't just whisper in someone's head."

"So there's Magus Panthers here for real?" I ask.

The girl puts her finger over her lips. "Yes, but thankfully those statues aren't very bright."

"About as bright as a broken light bulb," I mutter. "I didn't think they'd give me that much trouble. For a minute there, I really thought I was a Magus Panther."

Her brown eyes warm at the statement. "Oh don't worry. If you _were_ one, you would never have to wonder it." She shows me the back of her palm where her silver panther curls onto its side. "It's not something you can be ignorant of."

"If that's the case, then why did they keep hasselin' us about it?" I ask.

The girl's gaze strays away for a moment. "Hmm...I know that Magus Panthers give off a strong smell to some magic creatures, even if the panther hasn't been around you for many hours. You've probably just walked around one and didn't know it."

My eyes widen. Walked around one? But the only ones I was around today were Min Ah, Jin Yi, and... My jaw drops. _Sul Li can't be a Magus Panther, can she?_ Maybe that was why she asked to see Yami in secret? I mean, the guy literally has panther written all over his face. And sort of all over his walls too. I clap my hand to the side of my face. "Boy, sure fooled me. I didn't even know it."

"I was going to give you the answer myself, but she beat me to it," the girl says.

"It's alright," I say, offerin' a smile. "It's the thought that counts, right?"

She laughs softly. " _Literally_. By the way, I don't believe I caught your name, stranger."

"I'm..." I almost start to say Chun Chu, but I catch myself. "I'm Kurai." Then I gesture to Yuna and Tora, "These are my buddies Yuna and Tora. What's your name?"

"Mi Shil. Mi Shil of the Jeong Clan," she says with a polite dip of her head.

"Well it's certainly nice to meet you. When I saw that uniform, I almost thought you were that other lady. But you don't have the hat with the wings on it."

"Wings?" Mi Shil echoes. "You mean the Commander?"

My heart leaps. "You know her?" I ask in a rushed breath.

"Erm... not very well?" Mi Shil gives a sheepish smile. "I'm only an honorary volunteer for the event really. Hwarang are supposed to be here, but they're busy for the night."

"But don't she at least tell ya'll her name?" I ask, tryin' hard to bite back my frustration. "Ain't she top dog for her guard or something like Jin Yi?"

"Oh, the Commander's name is Eun Hae of Hwang Clan," Mi Shil says. "I'm surprised she didn't just tell you that."

"Believe me, I'm surprised too," I say. _And frustrated._ But now it's hard to keep away a smile. _Heh...I finally know your name, Miss Who-Are-You._ As we continue toward the sounds of the celebration, I glance at Mi Shil, who still walks beside me. "Hey, Mi Shil. I don't mean to be rude, but ain't you on duty or something? I'd hate for you to get in trouble because of me."

Mi Shil shakes her head. "I was done putting all the horses in the stable actually. I only have to make a few rounds and check on things during the ceremony, but right now I think I need to find my brother. If the Commander finds out he's not at his post he could get into big trouble."

"Well maybe we can help look for him?" I offer. "Sul Li didn't say I have to be at any place in particular when I got here. And I don't mind meetin' new folk. Maybe we can find that other panther too while we're at it so I can tell her thanks."

"I don't know how much of a help I can be for that." Mi Shil's friendly expression melts into hesitance. "But my brother isn't very warm towards..." Her gaze flits to my pin. "Strangers. Just leave the talking to me when we find him."

The first room is molasses-thick with wolf-bears and bear-wolf folk, the animals on their fur glowin' bright enough that the room don't even need to be lit with torches. A few regular-lookin' folk jostle through the crowd in decorative moccassins and buckskin dresses that I'm guessin' must be only for the ceremony because it's a far cry from what I always see Sul Li in, and the Hwarang that are walkin' around aren't wearin' anything of the sort. Women have their left ears adorned with a wing-shaped crest of hawk feather while guys got it on the right. And everyone's perfume here sure is strong enough to choke up an elephant. I smell mango, mint, spice, lemon. Gods almighty, I got used to Sul Li's smell, and Mi Shil's strawberry scent ain't half bad, but _pew!_ Ain't anybody ever tell these folk that less is more?

"What exactly does your brother look like?" I ask. "There's an awful lot of folk in here."

"Not very different from me," she says. "We are twins. He's in uniform too."

_That makes it simple then._ As my gaze searches the crowd, I keep a special eye out for the red Hwarang uniforms in the room. Not just for Mi Shil's brother, but for any sign of Eun Hae too. Wonder if she's on duty tonight? I know she's gotta be somewhere around here. Though if she's a Commander type like Jin Yi, I'd imagine that she's busy. But now that she's helped me out of two binds (I've decided to put my near brush with death the first time as help), I've got so many questions. Sul Li made it clear today she ain't in the mood for questions, and I'd rather not risk confidin' into the wrong person in a place like this.

Mi Shil and I squeeze past a few Hwarang guardin' the doorway to the next room and the throng of people ain't any thinner. There are a lot more Hwarang in this room I notice. Not just in red and white, but blue, green, yellow, just about any color you can think of like the flags. I strain through the crowd for any sight of a Wings of Heaven boy who looks like Mi Shil, but I ain't seein' much.

Mi Shil stands on the tips of her toes. "I don't see him."

"Maybe we should look somewhere else," I suggest. "What kind of guy is he? He ain't the sort to do this normally is he?"

Mi Shil falls back onto her heels. "No, he's not. But that's not what worries me. He can be very..." She bites her lips. "Well, let's just say he's not good at socializing. Not even with our family. Since there are so many clans here, I worry that he might—"

"I'm not apologizing for nothing, you stuck up dandy!"

Mi Shil's face pales as she turns toward the direction of the sound.

_Guess that must be her brother._ I follow Mi Shil into the crowd. In the center of it, we find people backin' up and formin' a wary circle around two brawny men in Wings of Heaven uniforms glarin' each other down. I spot Mi Shil's brother standin' behind his brunette friend, red hair a stark contrast from the crowd, but he's tense and has his teeth bared as if he wants to jump at the paler guy any second.

"Mi Saeng!" Mi Shil wedges herself in between all three men. "What's going on?"

"Move," her brother says without takin' his eyes off the pale man. "Se Jong insulted Duk Bae first."

"Liar!" Se Jong spits. "You Paks always blow everything out of proportion."

"It doesn't matter who insulted who first," Mi Shil says.

"She's right," says another pale young man who comes to stand beside Mi Shil his expression dignified. "What would the Commander say if she saw you two fighting right now?"

"Tell that to this idiot, Sul Won," Se Jong says. "I was doing my job. It's not my fault his little feelings got hurt."

Sul Won's gaze flicks briefly to me. "Even if that's so, it's a Telling night. And we have a guest. Don't shame our guard and our clan over nonsense."

But no one moves.

My stomach tightens to watch, but I can't help but feel a spark of admiration for both Mi Shil and Sul Won. Duk Bae and Se Jong are bigger than them. If that were _me_ out there, I would've swerved myself out the way.

"And brother you shouldn't be out here in the first place," Mi Shil says. "The Commander gave you orders to be out in front to oversee the tiger dog statues. They nearly attacked an innocent guest because you weren't there."

At the mention of Eun Hae, I feel a sudden shiver. That's a good question. After all, Eun Hae didn't seem to be anywhere around when the guardian statues were going to attack, but she might as well had been. And she seems to know a lot of things normal folk shouldn't for that matter. Does she see us now? Is she somewhere in the crowd, ready to step in? I give a self-conscious look around.

But Eun Hae, all-knowin' or not, don't seem to be here. Or if she is, don't seem to be interested in interferin'.

"So _I'm_ wrong for not standing by while this Kim Clan fool gets to tell us what to do like he's the Commander around here? Mi Shil they're _always—_ "

"I didn't say that," Mi Shil says in an even tone. "But you should still be at your post." She glances at Se Jong. "All of us should."

Mi Saeng's scowl only deepens, but he turns around and stalks through the crowd. Duk Bae pointedly turns his back on the Kim guys and follows suit. Se Jong watches them leave through narrowed eyes and just shakes his head.

Sul Won and Mi Shil glance each other and regard each other with respectful, but obviously forced nods as if their cooperation only meant armistice, not peace.

To me, Mi Shil says, "I need to go put away my horse, are you going to be okay finding the Grand Belle on your own?"

"I'll assist him," Sul Won offers. "I saw the Grand Belle not long ago."

"Very well," Mi Shil says. "I'll leave you to it."

Sul Won's gaze follows Mi Shil until she's gone. Then it returns to me and my pin. "Forgive me. I didn't introduce myself. I'm Sul Won of the Kim Clan. You are the guest that the Grand Belle was telling everyone about?"

"Guests." I gesture to Yuna and Tora. "She invited all of us. I'm Kurai and these are my friends Y—"

" _You_ the guest of the Grand Belle?" Se Jong leans over to peer at my pin. "Come on. He had to steal that. Why would she let a commoner in here?"

"Because he is _my_ guest just as he said, Se Jong."

My neck prickles. _Sul Li!_

Dressed again in her fancy gold robes, Sul Li strides towards us, attendants followin' at her heels. The crowd parts to let her through. Sul Won dips his head to her.

Se Jong scrabbles to straightens himself like a streetlight, face bright red. "Oh, err... is he really?" He looks at me again. "Yes. Now that I'm paying attention. I can see that he fits your excellent taste!"

Sul Li's eyes narrow at the comment, clearly not buyin' the sugar. "If the two of you have nothing to do, help the attendants recover my things."

"Ye!" Sul Won and Se Jong both chorus and they run off towards the room we just came from.

Once they are gone, Sul Li turns to me. Instinctively, I brace myself for her to finish what she started this mornin', but Sul Li only asks, "What took you so long?"

I relax. _Oh good, she doesn't sound mad._ "Those statues you guys have outside tried to attack me because they thought I was some Magus Panther."

Sul Li's lips edge into an amused smile. " _You?_ A Magus Panther? _"_ She shakes her head. "I'm not certain how they could mix _that_ up. But they are statues that my mother wanted, so I can only assume she'll deal with them when we return to Silent Bastion."

"Well a Hwarang girl told me that it's because I might've been around a Magus Panther and didn't know it," I say. "But the only ones I've been around are you, Jin Yi, and Min Ah."

Sul Li's brow furrows. "Well, I'm certainly not a Magus Panther. If Min Ah were a Magus Panther, I would know. I can't speak for Jin Yi. She could be, but I highly doubt it." She tilts her head. "Are you sure you haven't been around anyone else? The smell can linger for hours. Sometimes it can follow a person."

"Hours?" I echo. _Then again Eun Hae came to my place last night._ "How many hours? Can it linger overnight?"

"I doubt it would linger that long. Besides, you bathed before I saw you." She waves her attendants away with a hand. "But it doesn't matter now. You are here. And we can actually start the Telling."

Yuna signs, _You were waiting for us?_

"We're not allowed to start until every attendee is present," Sul Li says. "But I don't think anyone will be upset, we've had Tellings that started at in the middle of the night." Then she takes me by both of my hands. "Come, there is someone that you _have_ to meet."

"I _have_ to?"

"Yes. _Have_ to," she says with a smile. "I think you'll like her very much."

At this, my face warm up like a furnace. _Her?_ I look to Yuna and Tora for help, but they're grinnin' at me with boatloads of mischief in their eyes. "What are ya'll smilin' at? Ya'll are in on this too?"

_Nope,_ Yuna signs. _All Sul Li's doing._

Sul Li pulls me down another hall of broken pillars and we make a turn into the room of flags where I was attacked the last time I was here. Now with all the Sillans here, it's nearly unrecognizable. At the head of the room, an old woman in a long buckskin shawl sit cozy on the chair with a thick book open on her lap. Her long pipe oozes an orange-smellin' smoke. Her eyes, though milked over in the pupils, do not seem to have trouble findin' me.

As we walk, there is a flash. And all the bodies in the room begins to be replaced with skeletons that are dissipatin' away as if they are sand.

I rub my eyes in disbelief. But the instant I remove my hands, everything is back to normal.

_What in the world?_

"Kurai!" Sul Li calls, gettin' my attention to the woman. "Over here."

I walk over.

The old woman removes her pipe from her mouth. "Sul Li?" Her voice simmers low and warm. "Is that you? And the guests?"

Sul Li lets go of me to put a hand behind the old woman's back. " _Halmae,_ this is Kurai, the boy who saved me and cared for me. And his beast monk friends Yuna and Tora." To me, Yuna and Tora, Sul Li says, "This is my grandmother, Queen Mother Ma Ya." But from her broad smile, I can tell what she's really burstin' to say.

This is _your_ grandmother.

I slow my steps as I approach the chair as though I'm beholdin' somethin' holy. It's hard not to reach out and hug her. It's even harder that I can't even tell her who I am. But in this moment, I still couldn't have been happier. "It's certainly nice to meet you, Queen Mama."

"Queen _Mother,_ " Sul Li corrects with a scowl.

Queen Mama Ma Ya laughs. "Oh leave the boy alone, Sul Li. I like the ring of it. It sounds kind of sassy," She wriggles in a little chair jig." She turns to me, and for a heartbeat I almost think that she really does see me. "You have the Kim Clan's deepest thanks, young man. Come here..." She reaches a pale hand out. "Let me see you."

_See me?_ "But how in the heck—"

Sul Li clears her throat. "Let her touch your face."

_Well 'scuse me._ I lean in until my cheek presses up against Queen Mama Ma Ya's palm.

She hands her pipe to Sul Li and feels all over my face. Her touch is as light as powdered sugar as her thumbs follow the ridge of my forehead, the shape of my nose, the curves of my lips, and the outside of my cheekbones. They feather over my ears. My hair. Then finally my eyes. My skin still tingles when she takes her hands away.

Queen Mama Ma Ya smiles at me. "I See you."

"You can really tell what I look like from just touchin' me?" I ask.

"That's not what she meant," Sul Li says. "In Silla, 'I See you' doesn't mean that they see you visually. It's an expression."

I fold my arms. "An expression that means what?"

"Well..." Sul Li opens her mouth, but then closes it, mirrorin' my posture. "It means everything."

"Everything?" I echo.

"And anything," Sul Li adds.

"Then how are ya'll supposed to know what it means when somebody say it?"

Queen Mama Ma Ya puts her hands on Tora's head. "In Silla, there is a lot more to seeing than just that what's in front of you." When she finishes, she turns to touch Yuna. "We say 'I See you' to mean that we're acknowledging your presence, or to mean that we understand you, or to mean that we love you. Sometimes all those things at once, and more. It can hurt our feelings deeply, when we don't feel that we are being seen by our loved ones."

"Speaking of seeing..." Sul Li lowers her arm. "Where is _abba_? I told him I want to start at the hour of the dog. The statues are going to announce it in a little bit."

The Queen Mama merely shrugs. "There is nothing happening tonight that he hasn't seen a hundred times before. Apart from Kurai, of course."

As soon as she finish speakin', a boomin' roar shakes the whole ruins, then comes an echoey, " _AHEM!_ HUMANS! _I_ , the Great Guardian of the Left—"

"And Dave," Dave adds.

"—are pleased to announce that it is time for the ceremony to begin. However, I regret that I must ask if any of you know the owner of a white drakestallion named Himey? He left his rear flames on and the chaos is...very disconcerting to say the least. Also he is not parallel parked, so I'm afraid that the horse will be towed and the owner beheaded if this is not remedied immediately."

_Wasn't Mi Shil supposed to be workin' on that?_ Well, I guess she'd get to it soon if she haven't started already.

"If all guests would be so kind as to migrate to the Aeternum throne room in a timely manner," Dave says. "It would be very saddening if the Hwarang had to disembowel someone on such a beautiful night. Thank you and please enjoy tonight's events, friends which are sponsored by Tang China."

"Unless you are Magus Panther," The Great Guardian of the Left says. "In which case, I will kill you in a very brutal manner. But please enjoy the show while you live."

At the end of the announcement, people start filin' in from the other rooms, changin' into human form.

Sul Li nudges me toward them. "You should go sit down. Only speakers and performers are allowed to be up here."

"Alright then. C'mon Tora, Yuna..." I turn round. "Let's scrounge up some seats."

We head on all the way to the eastern door plop ourselves down against the wall. A dumplin'-bellied man in blue armor comes in with Min Ah behind him. I figure he must be Sul Li's adopted Pa cuz he nod at her and Queen Mama Ma Ya before they sit off to the side. I spot Jin Yi come in from one of the side doors and sit down near the wall. Mi Shil and Mi Saeng enter next. She waves politely, but she remains with her brother.

As more people come in, my gaze jumps to every door, hopin' for a glimpse of the only person I ain't seen yet: Eun Hae.

_Come on...Where are you?_ Eun Hae works here for goodness sake so why is she missin'? I don't want my cinnamon bun to go to waste. _Maybe she knows I figured her out and don't want to show up._

But the thought is quickly thwarted as Eun Hae arrives in the room last with Jin Yi and the two sit together.

The first performance is bunch of folk bangin' drums and shakin' rattles. The next they twirl fire sticks as they go around the totem pole in the room. Next, a few hefty men come up from the audience and stamp around and shout. Then they move off to the left side of the room, drummin' folk form a line on the right; everybody face us and shift together: bearish lookin' ones on the left and wolfish lookin' ones on the right.

The whole room goes so quiet I can hear my own breath.

Sul Li steps forward. "Time is but one thread. What is past is only sewn because of the present and what is sewn in our present is what becomes our future fate. So tonight we will honor our ancestors as they have done before us and as our descendants will do in the ages to come. The words I speak tonight I speak for the blood we shed to keep our nation as one. Korguryo takes the crane phoenix as their royal Einherjar for its longevity. Baekche make the hawk phoenix for its might. But Silla takes the dragonbird phoenix because no matter how many times an enemy breaks its body, its spirit never breaks. And that is what we must remember in these times most of all: that even though our future may feel shrouded in the Blinding Dark, Silla is one country united under mountain, air, and sea."

As Sul Li finishes, the wolf-bears and bear-wolves in front lift their heads into one communal howl. As they end, the crowd begins to shift and everyone lifts their voices in perfect sync. The sound is crisper than the purest flute and it sends a powerful thrummin' through my whole body as if their strength were mine and mine were theirs, completely distinct and yet inseparable.

When the last note dies out, Queen Mama Ma Ya finally speaks, "They say when the first Hwarang of King Jinheung's reign howled together in a room, their resolve to fight for our nation was so strong that it shook the walls and rang out across the entire nation. I think the First Commanders would be proud of those who are here tonight in Hwarang uniform for the first time. Your leaders did well in choosing you and we should all be proud that there are so many of you." She clears her throat and opens the book on her lap. "But that was not always so, was it?" She pauses to puff from her pipe, and she breathes out a plume in the shape of a wolf and a bear. "Once we were not very much. No Einherjar to protect us. The world was bitterly cold and twice more dark. The Darkborn hunted us freely as the wolf hunts the elk and humans could do nothing but flee to preserve their lives." Her fingers dip into the pages and pull out a long luminous strand and casts it to the ground.

A white mist consumes the ruins, and everything around us becomes nothin' but snow, mountains, and high-towerin' trees. A huge gray wolf and a brown bear sniff along a fissure in a mountain cliff where a man and a woman huddle close.

"Father Wolf and Mother Bear often walked together in the snow as they did every day to reaffirm their bond. But on this particular day, they found two humans on their walk. And these two were the last in the world," Queen Mother Ma Ya says.

At the sight of the huge wolf and bear, the man falls onto his face. "Please do not eat us! You have taken our homes, our families, and devoured all that we own. Do not take our lives too!"

"Peace, human," Mother Bear says. "We have only come this way to walk."

"But why do you say that we have taken all you own?" Father Wolf asks. "We are neither thieves nor monsters."

"Forgive my mistake, my lord," the human says. "But the Darkborn have come to and fro through our lands so often, we thought you were them."

"The Darkborn have been here?" Father Wolf asks. "Is that why all of the lands we have visited are empty?"

"We are the only ones left, my lord," says the man. The Darkborn have slain our villages and we will follow their fate."

Mother Bear touches her nose to Tangun's head and his wife's in turn. "Fear not. You shall be as our own children, your lives are with us and we will be with you always."

Father Wolf tilts his head back into a long howl. The sound makes glowin' circles appear around him and a different animal appears in each. Father Wolf faces them. "Friends, please help us grant this wish. Man will die without our aid. Help us protect him from the ones who would do him harm."

A tiger steps forward first, "Then I shall give him my fierceness, so that he may strike fear into an enemies' soul like me."

The ox follows, "And I shall give him my strength, so that he may fight like me."

"And I shall give him my swiftness, so that he may outrun the darkness like me," says the rabbit.

"And I shall give him wit, so he may outwit his foes like me," says the monkey.

"And I shall give him my eyes, so that he may See," says the owl.

Father Wolf nods as each animal lays their paw, hoof, or wing on the couple, then he lays his own nose on each of them. "I shall give him the strength of the wolf, so that one day as humanity grows he will have the strength of his pack like me."

When he steps back, Mother Bear comes forward and does the same. "And I shall give him the unconditional love of the bear and the patience to endure all storms like me."

Then the animals finish bestowin' their gifts, Tangun and his wife get up.

"Thank you," Tangun says. "How can we ever thank you all?"

"Live and thrive," Father Wolf says. "Do not let your enemy extinguish you."

"Return to your home," Mother Bear adds. "The creatures you face will not be so eager to fight you with our power within you."

Happy and excited, the couple get up and run off. As the other animals start to turn to leave, only the owl still watches the couple leave.

"Owl, why do you look that way?" Father Wolf asks.

"Man has the powers of all within him," the Owl says. "But I see a strange thing there that was never there before we touched him."

"What do you mean? Mother Bear asks. "What kind of thing?"

"For every good thing we gave, a bad thing grew in them also," the Owl says. "It is like two phoenixes fighting for the same skies. A very terrible beast."

The tiger bristles. "A beast! How do we slay it?"

"You cannot lest you want to slay Man too." the Owl says. "A beast like that will only be satisfied when one head feeds and the other starves. But only Man can decide which one."

"Surely we should tell them?" Mother asks.

"Such words would only be wasted," the Owl says. "You can give Man a thousand warnings and he will still never believe."

As the owl finishes the snowy scene fades and Queen Mama Ma Ya closes the book. Then Sul Li steps forward, "All Hwarang old and new please stand for our vow."

Tunics, capes, and cloaks of all colors stand up, nearly blockin' my view of Sul Li.

"Once you speak these words with me, your service is consecrated before heaven and the eyes of the warriors that have gone before you. Speak them with your whole heart so every sound rings true," Sul Li continues.

There is a brief pause, then everyone standin' says, "From times of old, we were given the Owl's Eye to See," Sul Li continues. "To find our way in the Endless Snow and the Blinding Dark. To know the weakness of our foes and to see the pain in our friends. And as the slain guide our steps, may they hear as we make our vow.

We are the bane of Darkborn as they are the bane of light. Until the last is slain, we will take up our father's fight."

Every Sillan howls again and my soul stir up even stronger than before. Afterwards, everyone rises up and become human again.

A sniffle from the side makes me look over. Tora is dabbin' at his eyes. Noticin' me, he put his hands down right away. _I wasn't cryin'._

_Liar._ "Didn't say that you were, Tora."

Yuna's green eyes flit over to a dark hall. _I think we should get going before we can't see our way home._

My heart sinks at the mention of home. _But I was startin' to feel at home here._ A tug on my sleeve makes me snap out of my thoughts.

Tora points to the box in my hands. _Weren't you supposed to give that to someone?_

_That's right._ I forgot all about that when I saw Sul Li and the Queen Mama. "Hope she doesn't mind it a bit cold."

Tora gives a thumbs up. _If it's only cold and no mold then it's still good in my book._

Yuna's face scrunches up in disgust. _I worry about what the rest of this book says is permissible._

_What? It's not like a cold cinnamon bun is bad,_ Tora signs.

"Nevermind that Tora," I say. "We need to see Sul Li and tell her we're leavin'."

The three of us worm our way through the crowd to get to Sul Li, who is listenin' to an attendant with her Pa. I only catch the tail end of the attendant's words. "We'll look again, Your Highness."

Sul Li's hands scrunch palmfuls of her dress. "Please..."

"What's the trouble, Sul Li?" I ask.

"My jian and my bag," Sul Li says. "I don't know what happened to them."

"Jian? You mean that sword you had?" I ask. "Did you leave it at my house?"

She shakes her head. "I didn't bring it when I came this morning."

"What about when you helped me pick my clothes out? Or when Jin Yi came to get you?"

Sul Li huffs. "I wouldn't be that forgetful! And besides, Jin Yi would've taken notice that I didn't have it."

Her father puts a hand on her shoulder. "Even if it is missing, we can always get you another."

" _Abba,_ that one was important to me," Sul Li says. "It was the last I had from my real family."

I scratch the bridge of my nose. "If it mean that much to you, I could help you look." Tora elbows me, causin' me to add, "Well shoot, ya'll can go back home if you really need to be there."

Sul Li's eyes widen. "You are leaving _now?_ "

"We were gonna," I say. "I've got work tomorrow."

"Then you ought to leave the searching to the servants," says Sul Li's adopted father. Then he turns to me. "I don't believe we've met, sir."

" _Abba,_ this is Kurai, the one who let me stay in his home," Sul Li says.

Her father smiles. "I am General Hong Do of the Kim Clan. It's nice to meet you and to say goodbye, I suppose." He says the last with a glance at Sul Li whose expression seems to shrink more and more. "Oh don't look like that dear. You have your own duties at home."

Sul Li studies the ground. "I know that, but..." She looks up. "What about the Vision Hall? Is it open now?"

"The mirrors are not ready," says the General. "But if you just wanted to look, it is open."

"Excellent." Sul Li turns to me. "There's one last thing I want to show you before you leave."

I look at Tora and Yuna who both perk their ears in interest. "It's up to ya'll and how big of a hurry you're in."

"Actually, it's for Kurai's eyes only," Sul Li says.

Tora's ears droop. _Really?_

_I guess we can wait outside then,_ Yuna says.

"We'll have the Hwarang see you home safely when you're ready," says General Hong Do.

Sul Li hugs Yuna and Tora each before the two depart. Then she motions to the right exit.

Night air cools my face as I walk with her along the side of the ruins and put my hands in my pockets. "Tonight really sure blew by fast. I thought it would be..." I pause, tryin' to find the right words. "I dunno. I guess I expected a lot more to happen."

Sul Li side-glances at me. "What more do you want from us? To blow up the forest?"

"I don't mean it like that, Sul Li," I say. "I liked all of it, but it's just over now." _And I won't see you again._

She frowns, as if the same thought came to her as well. "Not completely." Sul Li stops at another doorway and motions for me to follow her.

The moment I step in I gaze around at the walls. The walls, the round mirrors on the pedestals, and the ceilin's... they're not broken like the rest of the ruins. "I didn't know there was a room that's still intact."

"There isn't," Sul Li says, stoppin' beside the biggest mirror at the front of the room. "This room only reforms on the night of the full moon. The Vision Gate always works regardless, but its strength waxes and wanes with the phases of the moon."

I peer into the giant mirror. Sul Li's face and mine reflects faintly in it. "What is this thing for?"

"It takes us to Niflheim so we can either go back home or to Silent Bastion." Sul Li's face tinges pink in the moonlight. "Or I suppose I should say so _I_ can go to Silent Bastion but..." She bites her lip. "If you really wanted to..." The rest I barely catch because Sul Li mutters it so quietly I can't hear a fart.

"If I wanted to what? Go visit you?"

"W-well you don't _have_ to visit me specifically," Sul Li blurts out. Then she clears her throat. "But if you really desired it—" Her gaze trails to the mirror and then purse shut and she shakes her head. "Never mind. Forget I said anything."

I laugh. "Oh come on, Sul Li. There ain't no shame in tellin' a guy that you'll miss him, you know."

She folds her arms and turns away from me. "Who said anything about missing you? I'll be too busy to be worrying about things like that."

_Which is exactly why you showed me how to get to your place, right?_ I open my mouth to start to tell her how busy Chloe's is, but then I stop and put my arms around her instead. I breathe in her lemon verbena scent. "Well, even though I don't have my memories. I'll miss you a whole bunch. At least try to think of me once in a millennium, you hear Miss Busy Majesty?"

Sul Li's soft hair brushes my face as she turns to face me. She wraps her arms around my neck. "I'll try to be a little more generous than that."

"More generous with _what_?" Min Ah's disapprovin' voice comes uncomfortably close to my right ear.

I jump and turn around to find a giraffe head right in my face and not lookin' too pleased. "Min Ah, what are you doing here?"

She huffs loudly. "It's all fun and games until there's a giraffe in your window, isn't it? Good thing I _did_ show up. Otherwise, there'd be little pups running around when we get back to Silent Bastion."

Face redder than a Wings of Heaven uniform, Sul Li stands in front of her sister's snout. "You're being ridiculous! I was only going to hug him goodbye!"

"It all starts with a hug, Pup!"

"Oooh! I can't _wait_ until we get home. Then you'll be more busy with your Sage Duels and less _annoying!_ " Sul Li storms out back through the doorway, leavin' me in the room with Min Ah (or rather Min Ah's head and neck.)

I rub my neck. "Erm, I wasn't really gonna do anything, Min Ah."

"Oh I know _you_ won't." Min Ah points toward where Sul Li left. "It's _that_ _one_ I don't trust sometimes. Seung Man has a knack for acting first and thinking when it's too late."

"I agree with you there," I say.

"Did you enjoy tonight at least?" Min Ah asks.

I nod. "I just wish it didn't pass that quick. I feel I didn't really get to savor any of it."

She tips her head. "Yes...It's too bad you don't have a Lifebook of your own. Otherwise, you could relive the same night as many times as you wished."

I glance at the mirror. _I bet I'd get mine if I went to Silla._ The thought is almost enough to make me consider Sul Li's "offer" seriously. What if I _did_ leave all this behind?

_"I'm wondering what would you do if you found out who you really are. Would you give up this life?"_

Eun Hae's voice echoes so sharply in my own mind that I look over my shoulder, half-expectin' to see her face. But of course, it isn't there.

I leave Min Ah and head out back to the front where Tora and Yuna wait with the Great Guardian of the Left and Dave.

"Oh human!" The Great Guardian of the Left knead her paws on the pedestal's edge. "Did you have fun?"

"Do you have time to complete a small feedback survey?" Dave asks. "It would mean a lot to indie guardians like us."

"Dave! You're supposed to chat him up a little bit more before you solicit from him!" The Great Guardian of the Left chides.

"Ooops. Oh well, it's just a quick question." Tail curlin' Dave says, "On a scale of '1' to '10', how likely are you to recommend our services to a friend or family member?"

"Umm. I dunno. Eight I guess," I say.

The Great Guardian of the Left put her paw to her mouth. "Oh. Eight is pretty good."

"See? I told you he wouldn't hold any hard feelings for trying to obliterate him." Dave's tail wags. "We're going places friend!"

The Great Guardian of the Left nods. "Shall we awkwardly sashay together to celebrate?"

"Oh friend I thought you'd _never_ ask."

They both hi-paw each other.

Not sure what the heck I just encouraged, I turn away from them both and move close to Tora and Yuna. "Hey ya'll. Sorry it took so long. Are you ready to go?"

_Yes, but I thought we were getting an escort,_ Yuna signs.

_I think we should leave without them,_ Tora says. _We don't have all night for this._

Yuna smacks Tora upside his head. _That would make us look rude!_

Tora massages the spot where she hit him. _It's not like we're ever going to see them again._

"Yuna's right, Tora," I ask. "Let's give them some time. Everybody is probably scattered after all that."

"Waiting will not be necessary."

My neck prickles at the sound.

Eun Hae comes from the left hand side of the ruins atop a pale gold drakehorse. Mi Shil leads the creature by reigns.

"It's just the two of you?" I ask.

"Actually, I'm not going," Mi Shil says. "It will just be the Commander." When the drakehorse butts her shoulder, she adds, "And Honey. I just wanted to come and say goodbye."

My heart warms, but then sinks. I would've liked to get to know her better. Everyone better. _If only the night didn't have to end._ "Well, I sure appreciate you coming out."

"Perhaps one day we might be able to come back this way?" Mi Shil asks, lookin' hopefully at Eun Hae.

"The route is up to what Her Majesty finds suitable. And even then, one day could be a millennium away." Eun Hae takes Honey's reigns and urges her into a slow trot. "Or it really can be just one day."

Mi Shil frowns, turnin' her eyes on me. "Goodbye then."

"You take care, Mi Shil," I say.

As Mi Shil waves and leaves, I jog to catch up with Eun Hae and Honey. "I'm surprised they sent you to escort me."

Eun Hae smiles. "What? I can't escort the Grand Belle's esteemed guest?"

"I ain't sayin' you can't..." I pause and look behind me, glimpsin' the ruins for the last time in the hopes I'll see Mi Shil or someone else passin' by, but it's only strangers millin' around now. "I just figured that maybe they'd send you some more company with what's been happenin' in the forest and all."

She winks at me. "I assure you that I am more than enough to protect you all from the evil twigs and leaves."

"I'll have you know there are some really mean twigs out here, Ms. Cocky."

Eun Hae laughs. "I'll keep that in mind."

"And speakin' of keepin' stuff in mind, where in the heck were you all night?"

"Busy making sure there wouldn't any mean twigs left after we leave, of course," Eun Hae says.

I hold up my box. "I wanted to give you somethin', but you came so late. Now, it's probably cold."

She peers over at the box. "What is it?"

"A cinnamon bun from the best bakery on this whole island." I hand it to her. "Would've been better hot, but it's still good."

"Ooh la _la._ " She opens the box and sniffs. "It certainly smells delicious." The box poofs into thin air. "I'll eat that later. The gift is appreciated."

"I'm glad. Because I was running out of thank-you options," I say.

"You didn't have to thank me," Eun Hae says.

"I already told you I wanted to." I say. "But never mind that. Answer my question for real, how come you're by yourself?"

"My guard has been working twice as hard since we've been here, Mr. Curious. That's why trainees and volunteers were on duty tonight. Everyone is getting a well-deserved break," Eun Hae says.

_And besides..._ Her voice goes on in my head. _I was under the impression that you wanted to speak to me alone._

I tense. _So you're one of those Magus Panthers too then?_

_That I am. And I am curious, did you see anything interesting tonight?_ She asks.

I tilt my head. _Like what? A lot of stuff was interesting here._

_I'm thinking more along the lines of anything unusual,_ Eun Hae says. _I'm sure you must've at least seen one._

My walkin' slows. Immediately, my mind goes to the vision of skeletons. _Well, there is one thing. But I'm not sure if I really saw it._

Eun Hae glances at me. _Tell me._

_My face warms. I saw these skeletons I guess... And they were fadin' away like they were sand. They seemed scared._

_That was not your imagination,_ Eun Hae says. _But let's not talk about it just yet._

I blink. _Wait a minute...you saw it too? Were you pokin' around in my head all night?_

_I am aware. But no of course I wasn't poking around in your head the whole night. Even if I wanted to, I don't have to exert the effort. You are not that difficult to read._

My face blazes in embarrassment. _I was that obvious?_

_Oh come now. I was running through your mind all night, sir._

_Because I figured out that name of yours,_ I say.

A spark of amusement tickles my mind, but though I feel it in my body, it doesn't seem to come from me. It must be Eun Hae's. _I know you did. But that was not the deal._

_Well, that's not all I've got! At least hear me out._

She chuckles. _Very well then. Entertain me when your friends leave._

And though Tora and Yuna seemed to be in a hurry to leave at the party, all that rush and urgency seem to have run out when we get to the temple. Yuna practically has to drag Tora away to keep him from moonin' about the ceremony.

Once the two leave, Eun Hae pats Honey's neck, and the huge horse creature lowers herself to let Eun Hae off.

"You're walkin' all the way to my house?" I ask.

"Yes, I believe that is how you escort someone to their home," Eun Hae says aloud. "And I'd not like Honey to see anything that would spook her."

"Oh I know that, but aren't ya'll leavin' soon?" I ask. "I don't really want to keep you."

"I think we both know that's not what you _really_ want," she says. "And being left behind is the least of my worries."

"Well if you insist." I wait for her before we both stroll through the temple grounds and I can't help but notice that Eun Hae's form seems to repel the darkness as if she were light.

She folds her arms. "Why so quiet now? I thought you were eager to tell me who I am."

"Eun Hae of the Hwang Clan." I gauge her expression. No change. I add, "Commander of the Wings of Heaven."

Her lips curl into that familiar coy smirk of hers. "That is what you learned?"

"Don't tell me that ain't who you are," I say.

She folds her hands behind her head. "It is, and it is not. That name is very far from who I am."

"Then who _are_ you?" I ask, once we stop in front of my house. "Come on. Don't leave me hangin' when ya'll are leavin' this place and ain't comin back."

Eun Hae leans against the wall, considerin'. "You're certain you really want to know it?"

"A man needs some closure about certain things, woman. If you don't tell me I'll go crazy thinkin' about it," I say.

The world is quiet for a beat, then Eun Hae says, "I Am That I Am."

My whole face scrunch up. "Wha? I Am...That I Am? That's for real? You're not pullin' my leg?"

"If I did pull your leg, it would not be attached to your body," Eun Hae says.

"That's a peculiar thing to call yourself, or...be," I mutter.

Eun Hae looks up. "Even my closest friends do not know that. I'd not forget it if I were you."

"Which makes me wonder about you..." I mutter. "I know you're not a stranger. Sul Li showed me one of her memories. And you were in it."

Eun Hae chuckles. "I suppose you could say I've known you forever."

"Then why hide yourself if I already knew you?"

"Because a child's world is very simple," Eun Hae says. "None of what I am today meant a thing then. Now that is no longer the case. I must be careful with what I do and say."

I rest my shoulder against the door. "So why tell me anything? Why not just stay a concerned bystander? Why not just keep me a stranger? Why spare me? Why help me? Why come to me at all?"

"I suppose you can say it has something to do with those skeletons," She stands up straight. "But it is hard to say, if my doing this will really change that." Then she turns to me and says, "You have something. An hourglass. Bring it to me."

My eyes widen. "How do you know that?"

Eun Hae merely closes her eyes and smiles. "I have very sharp eyes."

I pause, studyin' her. Sharp eyes is an understatement. I open my mouth to ask, but then close it. "I'll go get it." I go inside and jog up the stairs. I look around to the room until I find the hourglass sittin' on my nightstand. I bring it back out and shut the door. I hold it out. "Here."

Eun Hae takes it. Light gathers in the center of the hourglass. The missin' wing restores and the sand begins to brighten. Then she hands it back to me,

I stare at the hourglass a bit before liftin' it out of her hand. I hold it up to the sky.

Despite the nightfall, the hourglass glows brilliantly with its own light. It's almost like a Tohenian feather. No, something heavenly. Because even their feathers aren't this beautiful.

"It's gorgeous," I say. "But why'd you do that?"

"That depends..." Eun Hae tilts her head. "But by now, I'd be amazed if you don't know already what I'm going to say."

I go rigid. "Who am I?"

She gives a small clap. "You're getting very good at this game."

I snort. "Who does it make the most sense to be?"

Eun Hae's body starts to fade. "You know I can't answer that for you."

"What if I'm Kurai?" I ask quickly.

Only a hint of her body remains. "Then it is just an hourglass and nothing more." She disappears.

My teeth grind together like two dry cogs. I jam my hand in my pocket to fish for my key. Under my breath, I mutter, "What about Chun Chu?"

Eun Hae's purrin' chuckle fills my ears. _I imagine that he will find out very soon._

My neck prickles at the words. "And how do you know that?"

I linger at the door listenin', but it seems that's all Eun Hae had to say.

I open the door and head upstairs to my room.

A hint of Sul Li's lemony scent remains. I inhale briefly and sit on the edge of the bed. My leg brush up against somethin'. I pull my bed cover up to find Sul Li's bag and the tip of her sword pokin' out near my shoe.

_Uh-oh._ She _did_ leave it. _But how did she miss it? She was so sure that she didn't leave it here._ But then again, Sul Li is always doin' stuff first and askin' questions later. _Maybe I can still catch Eun Hae._ I pick up the sword and the bag. And hurry back outside. "Eun Hae!" Experimentally, I try calling her name in my head again. But when there is no reply, I try, _I Am That I Am?_

Still no reply.

_She might be at the temple._ I sling Sul Li's bag over my shoulder and run all the way back to the temple gates. They're still open, but Eun Hae's drakehorse isn't there.

_You always seem to know how to make a clean getaway, Miss Mysterious._ I take a step outside the gate, but then pause. _It's so dark out there._ I hadn't really been payin' attention to the sun goin' down. But then again, I didn't have to. I had Tora and Yuna with me. _They're probably not gonna want to go back outside._ And even if they did, I'm sure Master Ushi is gonna ask somebody to close this up soon. _I'll just be quick about it._ _If worst comes to worst, I've got Sul Li's sword, and I can always come back in through the village's main gate._

I hoof it down to the ruins as fast as my legs allow, but when I arrive it looks like the same ghost town I saw on the night I met Sul Li. No Great Guardian of the Left or Dave. No Eun Hae or Honey. No Mi Shil. No sounds of anybody howlin' or talkin'.

_Oh come on, ya'll were just here a few minutes ago! Nobody moves that fast!_ I jog to the entrance and peer into the ruins. No one inside. All the halls that were guarded before aren't protected now. Lingerin' scents are the only sign that anyone was here.

"Damn. Splittin' like a banana must run in a Sillan's blood," I mutter.

A whoop echoes through the halls.

I perk at the sound. "Hello? Somebody still here? I found Sul Li's stuff."

"I'm here," Sul Li calls. "Please come."

"Where are ya at?" I look around. "I don't see you."

"In the hall with the Vision Gates. Please hurry. It won't stay open for much longer."

I head outside and hurry along the flank of the ruins until I step into the room with all of the mirrors. The mirror shines a soft white like the moon, but Sul Li ain't anywhere to be found. "Sul Li, where in the heck are ya? I ain't got time for all these games. It's dark out there and I ain't got Yuna or Tora with me."

A hyenaish snicker answer instead.

Something in the corner stir.

As I turn to face it, yellow eyes stare right back at me. A bone-skinny hyena thing slink into the open with weird music notes on its head. It's lips peel over it's sharp teeth till it grins. "Oh you came, Wolfy." It says in Sul Li's voice. "How nice of you to bring my things back." Then its voice slowly twists into something high-pitched and guttural. "Skoll, little Wolfy came to play like he promised!"

Ice spikes through my spine at the sound of the voice. _Those kids!_ They weren't really kids! " _Ya'll_ were the ones who stole Sul Li's stuff."

"Oh little Wolfy, little Wolfy, we just wanted to play," Skoll's deeper voice sings. I turn around to find a huge hyena lumberin' toward me. As a child he had a mouth cover, but now I can see his mouth is split at the edges like someone tried to make him smile by cuttin' his mouth up with shears. "Where are your friends? Does poor Wolfy have no friends, Hati?"

Hati lift a wiry paw like she's hurt and she whimpers. "Oh no, poor Wolfy have _no_ friends. Wolfy's friends all gone! Forever alone Wolfy!"

Sweat slicks my hands. I draw Sul Li's sword, pointin' it at the skinny one and then the other hyena, tryin' to keep em both in sight. "H-hey! I ain't want no trouble, ya hear?"

"Trouble?" Hati echoes. "But Wolfy, we just want to play the game."

"Yes, play!" Skoll snicker. "Wolfy said he would play game with us later. You can still be the Big Bad Wolf!"

"Heh heh." Hati twists her neck til her head is upside down. "Now...Who's afraid of the Big Bad _Wolf_?" Hati lunges and snaps at my leg.

I jump back. But the big hyena ram me to the floor. I try to get up, but a huge paw crush my head to the ground. Pain clangs in my skull.

"Certainly not _me_ ," Skoll snarls into my ear. He raise his paw to grind my face into the rock again and again and again. "I know a wolf in sheep's clothing when I see it!"

"Why?" I cry out. "I ain't did anything to you."

Hati's upside down face sneers at me. "Oh, but isn't that what all the guilty Wolfies say? It's all part of the game."

"So much fun, isn't it?" Skoll chuckles. "Goodnight, Wolfy. Play again sometime?"

Skoll's paw come down on me one more time and the whole hall goes dark.

### _1-6_

_SEEK...MY FACE..._

_Bring the hourglass...to the Shrine of Life..._

_Restore Silla...restore time._

A sharp throbbin' wake me up. _Ow...It feels like Rhett took a crack at my head with a rollin' pin._ I open an eye.

Dark mushroomy lights blink on the ground. Strange trees lay up like twisted black licorice, some with branches curled to look like the bars of a jail. And from the look of things, I'm up in one of these tree jails too.

Fear pricks into my back like tiny icy needles. _What in the heck is this place?_ It sure ain't the ruins. It don't look like any normal place in the Sister World. I try to move, but my body don't feel right. I can't budge my fingers for nothin'. I look down and I see a black shaggy bear paw. I lift it up. _What the—?_ I twist around to look at the rest of me. The rest of my body is covered in fur too. I got a long tail, and my hind legs look like a wolf's. _I'm one of those wolf-bear things!_

"Oooooh Hati look!" A familiar voice sneers. "Wolfy is awake!"

I stick my muzzle through the bars, lookin' down.

Skoll and Hati stare up at me, yellow eyes gleamin' like headlights in the dark.

"Good morning, Wolfy!" Hati chirps. "You like new home?"

I growl. "What's the big idea puttin' me in here? Lemme out!"

The two cock their head like they don't understand, then look at each other and start their eerie laughin' and whoopin' again.

"Let Wolfy out? Ha! So good joke." Skoll turn around and start paddin' off. "Maybe Wolfy should do Saturday night comedy! I watch!"

Hati takes a few steps after him, but then stops to stare at me with narrowed eyes for many heartbeats. The grim seriousness in her face is so strangely human. Too mature for a child that simply wanted to play a 'game'. She quietly says, "Why should we let Wolfy out when he is exactly where he belongs?" Then a goofy ear-to-ear grin splits her face. Hati sticks her butt up in the air at me and then runs off to join Skoll. The two lope away, whoopin', laughin', jeerin' at me long after I can't see them anymore.

Rearin' up, I push and claw against the black branches. They only close up tighter on me. I shrink back. _Okay bad idea._ There ain't much room in this case to begin with and ain't nobody got time for bein' crushed to death. I get up and pad around the outer edge of the tree cage. _There ain't I can use anything to get out of here._

_Be patient, human. Help will come._ The voice is rough and masculine.

I look around. _Hello?_

_I am inside you. That is how you are wolf and bear._

I freeze in place. _You're one of those Helpin' Hands then? I thought you were a dragon._

_I am, but the form of the wolf and bear is given to all of those that we protect. You may call me, Forte._

My skin tingles at the name. _If you can talk how come you ain't said nothin'?_

_The longer a Sillan is away from their home, the weaker our voice becomes. It weakened me until I could not speak to you,_ Forte says. _Aria could not even show herself to you._

_Who is Aria?_ I ask. _Is she another spirit?_

_Yes, she is coming to help._ Forte says.

_Well, I'm grateful. I don't s'pose you know where we are?_

_This is the Blinding Dark,_ Forte says. _Or rather a small pocket of it. This is where the Darkborn live._

A chill roots me in place. _I'm surprised those hyenas brought me here. I thought they were gonna just finish me off._

_I thought so as well,_ Forte says. _But that hourglass you have in your possession interrupted them. Neither could deal a death blow._

_The hourglass?_ The crimson hourglass that Eun Hae restored quickly returns to mind. I had a feelin' it was magical in some way, but savin' my life? I wouldn't have imagined that.

But then again, who imagines gettin' mauled by hyenas?

_Guess I owe you again, Miss I Am That I Am._ But that only makes me crave to know her even more.

_Forte!_ A feminine voice squawks.

In the distance, a bright golden light come into view. It's a golden bird with a long curl-tipped crest that reminds me of the one on my necklace. On its back a white hot spring monkey rides along wavin' a cudgel.

_Hiiiiiiiii, Forte!_ The monkey calls.

The phoenix lands on an outstretched branch. _We would've been here earlier, but we had to land because_ _**someone** had_ _to pee,_ she says glaring at the monkey crawlin' off her back.

_Not like it matters,_ the monkey says, _They aren't going anywhere._

Pokin' her beak in between the bars, the phoenix blinks at me with a brown hawkish eye. _Hello there, little human. I am Aria._

_And I'm Brio,_ the monkey says. He inspects the tree bars and pokes at one with his cudgel, making the whole tree shake.

Aria spreads her wings to keep balance. _What in the name of Father Wolf are you doing, you baboon?_

_Keep your crest on, I know my trees,_ Shi Hou says. _This one will give, I think. But I need to have one of your feathers._

Aria tucks her wings in, lookin' insulted. _Have! You think you can just pluck my feathers like I'm some kind of chicken?_

Shi Hou fold his arms. _You wanna free Forte and the human or naw?_ He plops down on an outer branch. _I don't mind chilling here for eternity._

Aria sighs and grumbles out a low, _I just preened them._ She stretches one wing toward Brio. _Just don't pluck any blood feathers._

The monkey reaches over and plucks a long golden feather and turn it over in his hands. _This ought to do._

Aria sniffs. _You're welcome._

Brio ignores her and climbs to the top where the branches meet. _Alright, everybody...I suggest you stand back because this thing is gonna blow when I tickle it and it ain't gonna be a gentle ride._

Aria flap away to a branch on another tree.

_Should I do anything?_ I ask.

_Nah, you're good. You won't hurt much with Forte inside you,_ Brio says. _Though you should probably sit as still as possible. The less you move, the less of a chance of something going wrong._ He runs the feather along the branches.

Without warnin', the tree start to shake.

"Ah, ah, _aaaaaaah!"_ The tree gasps. "AH WIGGLE WIGGLE WIGGLE!" Without warnin', the tree tilt and spit me and Brio out on the ground. Then it gives a congested sniff. "Ugh...another human."

I pick myself up off the ground. _Thanks ya'll. I thought I was stuck in there for good._

Brio stand up too and dust himself off. He pick up his cudgel. _Hey, don't even worry about it, human. It's what Helping Hands do._

Aria swoops and lands in front of us. _And speaking of humans, what are you doing here? It's dangerous to go alone._

_So take us!_ Brio chirps which earn him a peck on the head from Aria.

_Hush monkey,_ Aria chides. _Let him get his bearings before you just invite yourself._

Brio massages his head, glarin' at her. _Weren't you a part of him, Aria? You should know how he got here already._

_I've never been allowed to show myself,_ Aria says matter-of-factly. _He left Silla very young before his abilities could mature to what they were properly._ She turns to me. _I could only know things about you if Forte shared it. Unfortunately, I did not witness what put you in the tree._

_Skoll and Hati nabbed me from my world,_ I say. _And they stuck me in that tree._

Aria's crest stand straight up. _Skoll and Hati! Oh you poor thing... But what are you going to do now?_

That's a good question. This is completely left field of what I meant to do. Heck. Left field of everything good logic has ever told me in my life. I can't even throw in the towel and go home. _I don't know. I only wanted to bring my friend her stuff, but I don't where her stuff is now. Or where Silla is._

_I have your friend's belongings,_ Forte says. _It's in the Key Items pocket._

I sit down and check myself over. _Uhh. I don't see any pockets._

Brio puts a hand on my forelegs. _It's not a real pocket buddy. It's a figure of speech. Just know that us Helping Hands store all your stuff so you don't have to worry about losin' it._

_If you still want to find your friend, I know how to get to Silla,_ Aria says. _And it would be much safer if we traveled with you through Niflheim._

My ears prick. _Travel with me? You mean on my fur like the Sillans?_

Aria nods. _That way you can make use of our abilities much easier._

My heart leaps. _Great! Does that mean you can fly us out of here then?_

_Erm, no. You see..._ Aria makes a steeple with her wings. _I'm a dragonbird phoenix and we have a strict Terms and Conditions agreement. I can't fly you anywhere unless you have certain amount of 'KEXP'._

My shoulders slump. Is she for real? _That don't make any sense, you_ _**just** flew_ _here._

_I know, I know, but it is phoenix policy,_ Aria says. _But I am still useful for navigation and hints in the meantime!_

I stare at her, barely convinced. _Well how do I get this 'KEXP'?_

_Mostly winning battles,_ Aria says.

_And since we're on the subject of battling,_ Forte cuts in. _We should show him how to—_

Aria and Brio's eyes both go wide.

_Oh no, no, no, no ,no, no,_ **_no._ Brio** makes an 'X' with his arms. _Uh-uh. We are_ _**not** doing_ _a 'tutorial'. Especially not in the middle of the Blinding Dark. Never. Again._ He plops down on the ground. _I refuse. I'm just done with those._

_Me too._ Aria says, ploppin' down next to him. _I'm sorry, Forte. But your tutorials are too long, too complicated, and too boring._

Forte heaves a sigh. _And how do you propose that we teach him then?_

_Look. How 'bout we do this..._ Brio gets up. _Just leave the fighting bit to us for now. Aria can auto-target stuff for him and you and I can take it down._

_But he won't get any_ 'KEXP' _for Aria that way,_ Forte growls.

_I know, but he can make up for all that once we're around the Sillans,_ Brio says. _And it's much safer to boot._

_It is up to the human,_ Forte says.

_I don't know about all of this fightin' junk,_ I say. _I really didn't plan on stayin' for a long..._ I pause.

Now that I'm thinkin' about it, this _could_ be my chance to see what Sillan life is really like. And to see what Uncle's been tryin' to sweep under the rug. I wouldn't mind bein' near Sul Li again. And my grandma. And then there's _Eun Hae_ ...or I s'pose I should callin' her I Am That I Am now.

_Hmm, I guess stayin' a little bit won't hurt._ Chloe might kill me for missin' work, but how can I pass up an opportunity like this? I might never get it again. _We'll see for how long after I give Sul Li her stuff. But I want to travel along with ya'll, if you're willin'._

_Very well then. Hold still so we can properly bond with you._ Aria lowers her beak to my head. The misty light around her brightens and warmth rushes into me. Once she disappears completely, Brio touches his cudgel to my head and he disappears too.

_I call dibs on the Equipment pocket!_ Brio says.

_Nope,_ Aria chirps. _I'm already handling it. And the Navigation panel._

_Then what's there for me to do besides the Medicine pocket?_ Brio grumbles. _I don't want to be in charge of that! Being Support is lame._

_Healing is_ **_important,_ Forte** snaps. _Stop complaining or I'm J-kicking you out like the last human we bonded too._

_J-kicking?_ Aria echoes.

_Legend has it that Forte once kicked someone so hard that the 'J' in all the Asgardian gods' names became silent. And believe it hurts even if you don't have 'J' in your name,_ Brio says. _But can we at least rotate the pockets or something? I don't want to be stuck with the Medicine pocket._

_Unfortunate,_ Forte says unsympathetically.

_Which way do we go?_ I cut in, already tired of their arguin'.

Aria's warmth surges into me and she nudges my attention toward a stream of colored light weavin' through a thicker tangle of trees. _We need to follow that Symphonic Stream, human. Pro tip: Whenever you're in the Blinding Dark, the Symphonic Stream always leads to the Spouts that'll take you back to Niflheim._

_Thank you, Ms. Tutorial,_ Brio says dryly.

_What? That wasn't long. And the human should know,_ Aria says. _It's not like I was telling the entire history of the Helping Hands like_ _**some** spirits_ _do._

_Hush up ya'll,_ I say startin' down the mushroom-lit road. _I can barely hear myself think._

Every time I think this place can't get stranger, it does somehow. Trees jiggle like jello when you walk by. Something like rain falls from the smoky gray sky; it sound like rain too, but I don't feel anything touchin' me at all. The ground is smooth, but I feel like I'm walkin' on coarse salt.

Aria and Brio clammed up a few moments ago, but Forte ain't said anything since we were back at the tree and it's a bit worryin' since there ain't no sound out here.

I step over a mushroom light. _Aria? Forte? Ya'll still awake?_

_I see how it is,_ Brio grumbles.

_Hush monkey,_ Aria says. _Of course we're still awake, human._

_Ya'll just seem awfully quiet,_ I say.

_We have to be,_ Forte says. _This part of the woods has—_

_Ssssshhhhh!_ Brio hisses.

_Don't shush Forte!_ Aria squawks.

_Ssssshhhhhhh!_ Brio warns.

Brio's energy locks my legs rigid and I can't move.

_What's going on?_ I try to turn my head but Brio got that locked too.

Brio whispers. _I'm going to turn you to stone, human. Whatever you do,_ **_don't_** _move. At all._

Before I can ask anything else a huge shape leap from the trees and land a few yards ahead light as a fleck of ash. It's huge like an elephant, but with a wolfish body and no eyes. Weird glyph letters glow on its sides. A dark triangular nose presses to the ground and sniffs, turnin' around toward me. Its jaws part and a long ropey tongue snakes out of its mouth and hovers just an inch above the ground and flick left and right.

My chest and throat tighten at the sight. _What in the name of Pip's lucky butter sticks is that?_

_Don't. Move._ Brio repeats. _It can't see you if you stay still. It can't hurt you as long as we're stone like this._

The creature's tongue lingers in front of me, twitchin' back and forth like a cat's tail. Tiny barbs line the entire length of it like the thin bones of a fish. It sniffs vigorously around my paws, snorts as if annoyed then turns and lumbers away.

Once it's far out of sight, Brio releases me.

I stare in the direction that it went. _What was that?_

_A Seeker,_ Forte says. _And it's very fortunate Brio spotted it first. Those long tongues can paralyze you._

_And they move fast,_ Aria says.

_What was it doing with its tongue then?_ I ask.

_Trying to track your movement,_ Forte says. _It can't see you if you do not move. But also it cannot scent you if you are not flesh. Which is why Brio turned you to stone._

A shiver seeps into my spine. Imagine if I _didn't_ have Brio around... Hope that exit is close by, cuz I don't want to run into another one of those.

The ground from here on out get lumpier and rockier till the trees don't grow anymore. Jagged ridges spike up from the ground. Aria uses her 'Auto-target' power to help me jump to the top of them till we get up to a ledge that wind into a ravine where the Symphonic Stream lead.

_It's not much farther to the spout,_ Aria says. _Should be at the other end of the ravine._

_I don't suppose you can 'Auto-target' it for me, can ya?_ I ask.

_I'm afraid not, human. That's a violation of my Terms and Conditions,_ Aria says. _I could mark it on my mini-map, but that's not really helpful to you._

I sigh and pad into the ravine. Can't ever have it easy here, I guess. I keep to the left of the ravine walls, notin' the crooked music notes on the rock, they're similar to the ones that are on all those Darkborn things. _Just wondering why are all the music notes crooked here?_

_Oh those are discord notes!_ Aria chirrups. _They—_

Brio coughs loudly. _No tutorials, hypocrite._

_What am I supposed to do? Ignore his questions? It's not a tutorial if I just explain something to him,_ Aria says.

_Then do a TL;DR version or something,_ Brio says.

Aria sniffs. _Maybe Forte_ _should J-kick_ _you, monkey. Anyway, to put it in the shortest words possible... Discord notes are tiny enchanted symbols that occur naturally here. Darkborn absorb them when born and that's how they get their power. If you were a musigician, you'd be able to play your instrument and fight the Darkborn that way._

_And you'd be able to do that if you did my tutorial,_ Forte grumbles.

_We don't have time to sit through a four year degree program,_ Brio says. _Or the tuition._

Forte snorts. _Do you want to be able to fight or not?_

_Shush Forte, we got this,_ Brio says.

A loud snore cut us off. I look up. Tongue curled out like a pumpkin stem, a giant Seeker snooze on a ledge higher up, flank risin' and fallin'. But that ain't what scares me.

What scare me is on the ledge on top of it.

Skoll and Hati.

"Oh look it's our friend, Wolfy!" Skoll sneers.

"Would be shame if Seeker tried to eat poor little Wolfy," Hati calls loudly.

The Seeker's ear twitch and it raises its head.

_Uh-oh..._

"Hush little Seekers don't you cry," Skoll sings.

Hati shakes her butt on the ledge. "Mama Hati will cook you up a Wolfy in chick-en fry!"

"But something missing," Skoll says. "Not enough friends at the party."

"Oh yes, yes. Seekers, seekers! Come out friends! Free Wolfy barbecue! So paw-licking _goooooood_."

All over the ledges, seams of darkness open up and Seekers step out, sniffin' around. They all jump down into the ravine and stampede toward us in a mob while Skoll and Hati cackle away.

_RUN!_ Brio screeches.

My legs spur into action at Brio's words. _Hey! What happened to not moving?_

_Stone doesn't protect against stampedes!_

_Forte, what do we do?_ Aria squawks.

_I'm thinking,_ Forte says.

The ground quakes hard under my paws. I look over my shoulder.

The lead giant Seeker lashes its tongue out at me.

Ice jolt through me. I swerve to avoid the hit. _Think faster, Forte!_

_Aria, auto-target the giant Seeker,_ Forte says.

_You want to go **to** them? Forte are you crazy? _

_No, unlike you two, my brain functions all of the time,_ Forte says flatly. _Auto-target the giant Seeker's head. Brio, as soon as we lift you turn us to stone._

_Uhh..._ Brio starts. _I don't know if that's a good—_

_DO IT!_

My body warm up with Aria's power. We spin around and at once, I get yanked up.

Brio set us in stone just in time for the giant Seeker's tongue to bat us up in the air. We hurtle over the craggy peaks.

My stomach give a huge lurch as we fall down toward a tree. Brio unstones me just before we hit the ground. And pain shoot through my whole body. "Ow..."

_Well, that went better than what I expected,_ Forte says.

_You mean...you didn't know that was going to work?_ Aria asks.

Forte says nothin'.

_Forte!_

I roll onto my stomach slowly. _Let's not do that again._

_We don't have to. Look human._ Brio nudge my attention to a pool of geyserin' Symphonic Stream water. Right in front of it are two tiger dog statues on their pedestals that look a heck of a lot like the Great Guardian of the Left and...

I stretch my neck forward a little bit to get a closer look.

That _is_ the Great Guardian of the Left and Dave! I get to my paws and pad to them. "Hey! Ya'll remember me?"

The Great Guardian of the Left's tail wags happily. "Oh it's the human from the ceremony! How nice of you to come by."

Dave bends down to peer at me. "Friend, is it just me or does he look a little different to you?"

The Great Guardian of the Left scratch her head with a claw. "Per...haps he got a haircut?"

"Sort of the opposite," I say. "But man am I glad to see somebody familiar. What are ya'll doing here?"

"You see, the start date for our guarding position in Silent Bastion isn't for a few more days," The Great Guardian of the Left says. "So we're take temporary jobs as a side hustle. Gotta pay the pedestal bills you know."

"And as trained experts in our field, I highly recommend that you save your progress now, human." Dave says. "Because there is a very important cinematic scene coming and you shall not be able to see us for a while."

_Save?_ It's startin' to feel like everybody here know somethin' that I don't. "Do you mean like a movie cinema, cuz otherwise I don't know what you mean."

"It's sort of like..." The Great Guardian of the Left looks to Dave. "Help me out here, Dave. I don't know how to explain cinematic scenes."

"Eh..." Dave's ears flatten. "I don't know how to explain it either, friend. But you'll definitely know when you're in one. You can feel it. I always get the chills."

"Really?" The Great Guardian of the Left asks. "Sometimes I hear music. I've never gotten the chills."

"I think I'm going to have to pass on this savin' and cinema thing, you two," I say. "I need to go and find Sul Li."

"Oh you can never skip a cinema scene, friend," Dave says. "But we wish you the best of luck."

"We can heal your HP and...err..." The Great Guardian of the Left's tail hook over in a question mark. "Are we doing the MP meter system or is it the PP system? Or AP? Or SP?"

"I think PP. MP always stands for Magus Panther these days," Dave says.

I walk in between them both. "I think I'll pass on that too." I step close to the geyser water. _What do I do?_

_Just touch it,_ Forte says. _We'll be taken to the Niflheim._

I touch my nose to the water and a rush of warmth pours into my body.

"You'll regret not saving, friend!" Dave calls after me.

In a flash of light I'm paws-deep in icy snow-slush. Skeletal trees rise high all around me like skyscrapers and only hints of black sky and auroral light shine down from between their branches and black goo covers much of the snow. Bitin' wind nips through my fur, makin' me shake. _Brr, who turned on the air? It's freezin' out here._

_That's probably Forte,_ Aria says, appearin' in front of me, her bodily light makin' a misty bright orb around her.

_He's talking about Niflheim,_ Forte says. _It is always below freezing here, human. Our power will help you adjust to the climate._

That's a relief cuz I sure ain't come all this way to become a Häagen-wolf bar. _Which way next then?_

_I think the better question is where are we right now?_ Brio asks, appearin' next to Aria. _We might have gotten away from those Seekers, but we aren't out of the woods yet._

Aria glares at him. _Monkey this is no time for jokes!_

Brio smacks his forehead. _I wasn't trying to make a joke! But now that I'm looking at everything, isn't it a bit odd?_

_Hmm..._ Aria twists to look all around. _You're right. The forest is so empty. What happened to all of the forest life?_

The shape of a black serpentine dragon appears next to Aria, holdin' the shaker of Slap Ya Mama that I thought lost. _The air is tainted with darkness... It wasn't like this before._

I sit quiet in the midst of them until I remember the voice I heard when I first woke up. It was tryin' to say somethin'. Could that be it? "Hey guys, I heard a voice earlier that said somethin' about bringing the hourglass I got to the Shrine of Life. Whatever that is."

Brio, Aria, and Forte look amongst themselves.

_I think I know of that place,_ Eir says. _All things become new there._

_But how did you hear a voice that I did not?_ Forte asks.

I shrug my shoulders. "Beats me. I just heard it _."_

_Let me check the hourglass,_ Forte says. He briefly hops into me and then hop back out with the hourglass which is now broken clutched between his claws.

_How did it break?_ I ask.

_Skoll and Hati,_ Forte says. _But_ _the item description says it will restore something important if we take it to the Shrine of Life._

_Well let's go then,_ Brio says. _If a Key Item says go, then I say we go. Maybe it'll restore this mess._

_Can't we take five first?_ I ask. _I'm a bit tired._

_Very well, human. Let's find a suitable place to rest,_ Aria says. _I have a bad feeling about being open like this._

All of my Helpin' Hands jump back into me and I pad off into the forest. Before long, I find a big pink flower like bulb that looks promisin'. As I get near it, I feel a welcomin' warmth radiatin' from it. I settle down next to it.

_Human are you sure you should settle here?_ Brio asks. _I've never seen a flower that warms you up._

"Well I'm as cold as a icicle." I curl up next to it. "So I'm stayin'."

As soon as I close my eye, the ground starts rumblin'. Without warnin' the flower bulb closes up and begins to rise up out of the snow. And along with it come up eight vine-like legs and a head full of eight bulbous eyes and a crooked flagged notes.

I jump straight up and back away from it.

_I knew something about it wasn't right!_ Brio screeches.

The giant spider peers down at me. "Well, well, well... what do we have here? An after dinner snack?"

My legs tremble in terror. "You wouldn't want to eat me, Mr. Spider. I ain't even showered today."

The spider swipes its tongue over its jaws.

I back away and bolt.

The spider lift its legs and brings it down in front of me. "Not so hasty now. I'm sure I can make you taste good!"

The spider lunges at me.

I jump out of the way. "Help!"

The spider spits snow out of its mouth. "Hold still you!"

Heart poundin' fast, I leap to avoid another leg. Then sprint away. _Guys, don't just watch! Help me!_

_Sorry human we're thinking,_ Aria says.

_Turning you to stone isn't exactly helpful here,_ Brio says.

_Just keep running,_ Forte says.

_I like that advice,_ Aria says. _Just keep running human._

"That ain't no help!" I yell.

I keep runnin' until I get to the edge of a snowy cliff. "Uh-oh."

"Oh yesss," says the spider. "Come to Papa you delicious little mor—"

Before the spider can finish, a streak of bright light flashes from behind it and trip it off its legs.

_Now's my chance!_ I run around the spider to find a middle aged man in a thick parka with what looks like a guitar made of light in his hands.

"Get behind me!" The man yells.

Not needin' to be told twice, I dive behind him.

The spider clambers back up onto its legs and turns around.

The man quickly strums chords on his guitar, causin' more like to jet from it. The light strikes the spider on the skull.

"Aaaaaaaaah!" The spider teeters from left to right. It tries to cover its head with it legs, but that only cause it to shudder violently.

Then without warnin' the spider explodes into a mist.

For a few moments, I'm only able to just stand there with my jaw hangin'. Then common sense tell me I should thank the guy who helped me. "Thanks, sir. I owe you one."

But the man round on me, his bearded face angry. "Thanks? You probably alerted all of Niflheim with your girly yellin'! Every Darkborn will be on their way."

I duck my head in shame. "Sorry sir. I didn't mean to cause trouble."

_"_ Hmph..." The man's guitar shrivel to a baton. Similar to the one I saw Go Dong wield.

"Dae!"

I turn to see two pale young men joggin' up to us with swords in their hands, followed by Su Ho and Go Dong. _Them again?_

"It's already over," Dae says. "Put your swords away."

The first young man, brown-haired and with half-moon like eyes, puts away his blade. "Leave some for us next time."

The second young man, shaggy-haired like a wolf and with piercing glacial blue eyes shakes his head. "Life out here is hard enough without unnecessary fights to get in."

Dae does not respond to either of them and instead looks me up and down. "Well? What's your story boy?"

"I got dragged out here," I say, standin' up. "By two hyena things. They call themselves Skoll and Hati."

The brown haired young man steps toward me. "You know them?"

"Are they famous around here?" I ask.

Dae and the new arrivals share a puzzled look amongst themselves, makin' me wonder what I said wrong.

Then the brown haired young man says, "They're servants of Fenris. He's the reason why the land is covered in Dark Blight."

"Dark Blight?" I echo.

"All that foul-smelling dark goo you see around Niflheim," Dae will say. "It's making everything waste away." As he finishes, a cold gust blows over us, makin' everyone shiver. Then he says, "Come on, let's set up camp."

I follow Dae and the others back to the forest, where we settle inside a huge fallen log. Dae and the two young men I don't know, take off to go hunt, leavin' me with Go Dong and Su Ho.

"So..." I begin as Su Ho and Go Dong start scroungin' up wood. "How did this all happen after the chicken fiasco?"

Go Dong picks up a thick piece of bark and gives me a baffled look. "What are you talking about?"

I cock my head. "You don't remember? You stopped me on the bridge for chicken and—"

But Go Dong shakes his head. "We never did anything like that!"

Su Ho stands up. "Yeah, how can we do anything like that when we barely saw you today?"

I blink. "You mean... you don't recognize me?"

Go Dong and Su Ho exchange a glance. Then Go Dong says, "We'd remember if we saw your face." Then they walk off to collect more firewood.

I stare after them in shock. _They really don't know me._

_Maybe it has something to do with the broken hourglass,_ Brio says.

_Time itself seems to be broken,_ Aria says. _I certainly don't remember any of this happening._

_If that is true, then it would make sense why the human heard the voice saying go to the Shrine of Life,_ Forte says.

_But where is it?_ I ask.

_I'm not sure,_ Forte says. _Maybe we should ask our new friends?_

The two young men return with rabbits in hand. The brown-haired young man says, "I believe I've neglected to introduce myself. I'm Seo Hyun." He motions to ol' Shaggy Hair. "This is Kwan."

"Kurai," I say. "Nice to meet both of you.

"Kurai..." Seo Hyun repeats. "You're not from these parts are you?"

I shake my head. When I see Dae comin' behind them I ask, "Hey, Dae is it? Do you know where the Shrine of Life is?"

Dae's eyes narrow. "What do you want with that place?"

"I was told to go there to fix my magic hourglass and set everything back in order."

Kwan scoffs. "And you believed that?"

"With what magic hourglass?" Dae asks.

_Guys?_ I call.

_Forte,_ Aria says.

The broken hourglass poofs onto the snow. Dae picks it up and examines it before returnin' it so Forte can poof it back.

Dae starts a small fire. "And what are you gonna do if this trick of yours don't work?"

My heart pounds at the question. I didn't think of that.

Kwan's lip curls. "You want us to take you out into the Dark Blight and you don't even know if your plan will work?"

"All I know is that I'm s'posed to go to the Shrine of Life," I say. "I don't know what's gonna happen when I get there."

"So we could risk our lives for nothing," Seo Hyun's tone is not judgmental, but his face ain't approvin'.

Kwan turns too Dae. "You aren't buying this fool's nonsense are you?"

Dae don't seem to hear. His stare is fixed on the distance, mind in his own thoughts.

"Dae—"

Dae snorts. "I _heard_ you Kwan." Then he shrugs. "And quite frankly I don't care. I'm tired of living in the dark. If we don't do anything, the darkness is gonna keep chasing us until it's picked us off one by one." He gets up. "Sooner or later, I'm gonna be too old to keep this junk up. My swing already ain't what it used to be." He looks up. "I remember a time when men walked these plains freely. Nobody had to look over their shoulder like a jumpy squirrel."

"A nation united under mountain, air, and sea..." Seo Hyun mutters.

Dae looks at him, and the pair seem to share the same melancholic look.

Then Dae says, "If it means a better future where no one has to live this way, then I'll give up whatever it takes. Even if it means I'm a nobody in the next." He looks at me. "We'll take you to the Shrine of Life, boy. But there's no telling what we'll face out there. I hope you can pull your own weight because the Darkborn out here are nasty like no man's business. We ain't pullin' it for you."

The next mornin', or rather I should say black mornin' since the sky look the same, Dae rouse us up and it's time to go. We trek over a strip of blight-gunked land until we reach the outskirts of another leaf-stripped forest. And from there Dae takes into the heart to a where a stone pedestal juts up from the snow.

"This don't look much like a shrine," I say. "Is this really it?"

"Yep." Dae walks over to the pedestal. "Your hourglass can fit in here if you put it together."

"Do you think it'll work broken?" Seo Hyun asks.

"There's only one way to find out," Dae says. Then he steps aside, "Put it in. Let's see your human side."

"My human side ain't got one of those fancy parkas," I mutter.

"Have mine," Dae says sheddin' his, only to reveal another beneath it. "It's warm."

"Alright then." _Umm, Forte? How do I become human again?_

_Allow me,_ Forte says. Warmth bubbles all over my body and I'm human again, only for the cold bite of the snow to hit me.

I take Dae's parka and sigh in relief at the furnace-like warmth it brings. "Thanks." _Now can I have the hourglass?_

Forte poofs it into my hands. I walk up to the pedestal and place the hourglass into it.

The ground rumbles.

We all stagger to gain our footin' as a great blue-bricked shrine rises from the snow.

"So that hourglass is magic after all," Kwan says.

"I dun told ya'll it was," I say. But on the inside, my heart is knockin' on my chest like a crazy pinball. I don't know what I would've done if the hourglass didn't work. I take it the hourglass out.

"How did you know about this place Dae?" Su Ho asks.

Dae walks up to me and hands out a sword. "I've known about it for a long time."

I take it. "I'm glad I ran into the right person then."

Dae is the first to step inside. I go second and I find that there are stairs. I grip the rails carefully and follow behind Dae down into the belly of the shrine. Soon, the stairs open into a room covered in gunk and with another pedestal inside.

The moment we step in, tiny imp Darkborn rise from the gunk and charge for us.

I duck to avoid a jumpin' imp before whirlin' around and stabbin' through the crooked note on its back. It disappears quickly.

Around me, Dae gets rid of three with one strum of his guitar while Su Ho and Go Dong are tag-teamin' on a bigger imp. Seo Hyun and Kwan finish off the ones in front of them and the battle is quickly over.

"Piece of cake," Su Ho says.

"We got lucky it was only little imps," Dae says. "Don't get too excited." Then he looks toward the pedestal. "What's that all about?"

I go over to check it. The face of the pedestal is like a clock with twelve tick marks all around it and hands which are currently set to six o' clock.

"The walls have three on them," Seo Hyun says, observing the walls. "Think that means something?"

"Maybe three o'clock?" I say, turnin' the dial to three o' clock.

There's another rumble as the stone door in front of us rolls away...

And more Darkborn run in.

"More of them!" Kwan yells.

We dispatch the new Darkborn quicker than the first.

I put a hand over my chest and catch my breath.

"Oh no..."

I look up. "What happened?"

Su Ho holds up his sword, which is nothin' more than a stump. "My sword broke."

"Well you're in the right place," Dae says. "All things can become new here."

Su Ho pokes his lip out. "Yeah, but _where_ in here?"

Go Dong puts his hand on Su Ho's shoulder. "I'll cover for you buddy."

Seo Hyun walks to the new entrance and peers inside. "At least there's no Darkborn in here."

I walk through the new entrance. The next room is circular in shape. The outskirts of it is surrounded in a grand waterfall of light and the floor is covered in thin circular groves. There's a pedestal in the center bein' covered by a smaller light waterfall. A dark shadowy veil separates the first half of the room from the second.

"I think this is the river of restoration," Dae says. "Try it Su Ho."

Su Ho stretches his sword into the waterfall. His eyes go big as it comes back whole. "This thing really works."

I stick out my hourglass and watch completely awe-struck as the glass mends itself back into how it was when Eun Hae gave it to me. I hold it up and watch the glittery sand on top tinker down.

Seo Hyun walks up to the shadow veil only to get pushed back. "Looks like there's no getting past this."

"Hey," Dae thumps my back. "Don't forget we're here because you said you can fix everything. Get to fixin' it."

I clutch the hourglass against my chest to keep from droppin' it. "Okay, okay, sheesh..." I walk up to the pedestal and place my hourglass into it and wait.

We all stand around until Kwan is the first to huff.

"I knew it was too good to be true," he says.

"Maybe you did something wrong?" Go Dong asks.

"I put the hourglass in there like it fits," I say. "There ain't nothin' else I can do."

Seo Hyun looks to Dae. "What do you think Dae?"

But Dae is lookin' elsewhere with that far-off look in his gaze.

I turn to the hourglass. _C'mon..._ _Why don't you do somethin'? We're all standin' here waitin' for you to fix everything. Everything should be fixed already._

_Have you tried turning it on and off?_ Brio suggests.

_Monkey, this is no time for jokes,_ Aria says. _Human maybe try taking it out again. Maybe it's sensitive._

I reach to take the hourglass out, but a bright white light flashes through the whole room.

"What's going on?" Seo Hyun asks.

The whole room begins to quake violently.

I grab hold off the pedestal to keep from fallin'.

The shadowy veil tears from top to bottom, and the room flashes white again.

"Hold me Su Ho!" Go Dong screams. "I'm too young to die!"

"Me too!" Su Ho says, flingin' his arms around Go Dong.

The flashes get more frequent. A mighty rush of wind fills the temple. The wind gets so strong that Dae, Kwan, and the others begin to lift from the ground. I cling to the pedestal for dear life. My feet lift up, but I keep on hangin'.

A final great flash fills the room. I hear the screams of Dae and the others, then everything falls eerily silent.

When the light subsides, I'm alone in the room.

_What happened to Dae and the others?_ I think.

_I'm not sure, but the better question is did we restore time?_ Forte says.

_The only way to find out is by going outside,_ Aria says.

I take the hourglass and all the way up to the entrance. Outside, the trees are full of leaves despite the snow and the ground is free of gunk.

_Everything looks normal again,_ Aria says. _I guess we did fix time._

_But that don't explain what happened to Dae and the guys,_ I say.

_They must not be part of this time,_ Forte says. _Maybe things will be back as you remember it._

_But how do you think things got wonky in the first place?_ Brio asks.

_Seo Hyun said that Fenris is the reason why the land is covered in Dark Blight,_ Aria says. _So we must've time-travelled to before that maybe._

_Soooo... what now?_ Brio asks.

_We go to Silla like we were s'posed to,_ I say. _Any of ya'll know where that is?_

_Oooh! Let me see..._ Aria says. _We're in the Forgotten Lands._

_Someone called them Forgotten Lands?_ I ask. _And can one of ya'll change me back to a wolf? I was warmer._

_Done,_ Forte says. And immediately the same warmth change me back.

_Maybe they're named Forgotten Lands because someone forgot to name them,_ Aria muses. _But anyway..._ Aria turns me around to a jagged mountain peak loomin' over the tall trees. _You want to go this way human. Once we get to the other side of that peak, it's an easy walk to Sillan territory._

_I would hesitate to say easy, Forte_

_Yeah, Forte's got a point._ Brio says. _We can get there fine, but how exactly are we going to get them to let us in when we get there? The Hwarang patrols will chew us like squeak toys._

_We have the Grand Belle's sword and her bag,_ Aria says. _They ought to at least hear us out._

Forte scoffs. _You are hoping very high, Aria._

_Well one step at a time, Mr. Pessimist,_ Aria says. _Let's worry about the Gayans first._

_And uh speaking about those Gayans..._ Brio gulps. _They're already here._

Five shaggy wolf-bears steps out of the trees lookin' like an assorted box of meanness. All of them bristle at me, but thankfully none of them attack outright. They fan out around me, sniffin'.

Their leader, a big white wolf-bear breaks the ranks to stand almost nose-to-nose with me. "Are you with the Sillans?"

My gaze travel over the others as they close in. "No, sir. Not like that."

His lips peel back. "Do not lie, outsider. You smell like you've been around them."

"He could be a spy, Kwan," A gray wolf-bear adds.

"Are you with Baekche?"

At the name Kwan, I perk. "Kwan? Do you recognize me?"

Kwan's eyes narrow at me. "I've never seen you before in my life. Now answer my question."

_Not this again._ I sigh. "I've never heard of Back-what's it you just said."

"Korguryo?"

"No."

"The Tang?"

"I never heard of most of those things sir." I swallow, before utterin', "I'm just here to take something to somebody in Silla, then I'll be on my way."

A low growl rumbles in Kwan's throat. "Not with them but delivering something to them?"

Cold tremble swell through my spine. "She uh, left her stuff at my house."

An amused round of chucklin' go through the remainder of the wolves. Kwan raises both of his tails for quiet. "Who is she? A spy?" His hackles go up. "Tell me or I'll tear you—"

"Wait a minute, Kwan..." A brown-furred wolf with a dragon tattoo on his back pads around me. "He's got a dragonbird phoenix on his back."

Kwan cranes his neck to look. "Dragonbird? He is a prince of Silla?"

My eyes widen. "I'm a _what?"_

The brown wolf-bear tips his head. "You don't know your own Helping Hands? You really _are_ an outsider." He pads back to where Kwan stands. "From waaaaaaay outside, apparently."

Kwan stares at me. "You are a prince and the Sillans did not kill you?"

My ears flatten against my head. "What are you askin' me for? This is my first time hearin' anything about bein' a prince of something."

The Gayan wolf-bears look amongst themselves. Kwan paces in front of me.

"Why don't we take him to Gwang?" The brown wolf-bear suggests. "We'll never get another opportunity like this."

I stiffen. Another opportunity for what?

One of Kwan's ears swivel towards the brown wolf-bear, but his gaze remains on me. "Very well. We will take him to camp. But if this folly angers Gwang, it is on your head, Ha Jong."

"I don't mind stayin' here if it'll cause ya'll trouble," I mumble, but the other wolf-bears start surroundin' me like I'm a prisoner and I decide against sayin' anything else. _Best not to argue with these folks._ For all I know, they might be fine with takin' me to this Gwang fellow in pieces.

My escorts start usherin' me deeper into the woods where small rabbits and deer run at our approach. The walk is long and uneventful aside from a bird twitterin' here and the wind rustlin' a branch there, but it is mighty humblin' too. It's one thing to see the trees in Sul Li's memory and the Queen Mama's story. Seein' one in person is a whole different story, and I can see why Sul Li was makin' such a big deal out of it. Even though they don't have a face, every tree here feels as unique as any familiar person you might know in your neighborhood. But at the same time they're so _big_ and majestic like natural royalty _._ It's hard not to look, remember how small you are, and not be full of awe all the same.

Kwan's folk glance at me every now and again, Ha Jong especially, but I notice they're keepin' a much closer eye on everything around them. And it's a tad unsettlin' to watch. When they brought me along, I figured they were the big bad honchos in these parts, but now that I'm watchin' them I get the funny feelin' that maybe their escortin' is just as much for keepin' somethin' out as it is for keepin' me in.

_I wonder if the Darkborn have struck here too?_ Aria asks. _They're behaving like something might jump out._

_I wouldn't be surprised,_ Forte says. _Darkborn appeared even in the human's realm. They're bound to have showed up here first._

_Can they appear anywhere?_ I ask.

_In theory, yes,_ Forte says. _In practice, no. By nature, they can't stand to stay in the same areas where light reigns, such as in Silla, Baekche, and Korguryo. Even in Tang China._

Aria hums in agreement. _The reverse is true as well. If we had not acted quickly and helped you get out, the Blinding Dark would eventually make you ill and kill you, even if you had good food to eat and water to drink._

_That is if Darkborn don't flash-mob you first,_ Brio mutters.

_Father Wolf did not give Man the strength of the pack for vanity's sake, human,_ Forte goes on. _He gave it because Darkborn sense when humans are alone. For them, it is an invitation to kill and prevent you from gathering with others._

My whole body shivers at the memory of the little gremlin thing that Jin Yi struck down. It _did_ come when I was alone and I wanted to rest. And so did Skoll and Hati. If I knew that, I would've stayed my butt home. How was I s'posed to know Sul Li's junk would be in my house? But then again, no one told my sorry hide to come runnin' out here either. I sigh. _I was just tryin' to do something helpful by bringin' Sul Li's stuff cuz it meant a lot to her. I didn't want all this to happen._

_Oh don't be hard on yourself, human,_ Aria coos. _Doing what you know is right and hoping for the best is the most anyone can really do. The outcome is beyond our control._

_And besides, the story ain't over yet, human,_ Brio chirps. _Things are bad now, but just wait and see!_

_Yes, they just might get worse,_ Forte growls.

Brio groans. _Dude, you're not helping._

Soon, Kwan leads us into a glade of dark gray tents with blue cloud-patterns. Wolf-bears stroll the area in groups and some armed men patrol slow on the backs of drakehorses. Folks of all ages eat in circles, heads bent close, and thick-furred parkas drawn around their faces while they watch a man in the center of camp instructs his friend to pick a drum and start hittin' it. But the moment he turn his back, there's a loud _BOOM_ and a dark cloud rains all over the poor drum guy who drops the drum and runs away, causin' an even bigger cloud to appear and follow him.

_See human?_ Brio says. _If you ever feel you're having a bad day, remember that at least you're not him._

My gaze follows the runnin' Gayan man. _Thanks for the cheer?_

Kwan stops us in front of a tent where a red-brown wolf-bear stands guard. Ha Jong says, "Let us in, Daeshim. There's something important Gwang needs to see."

The sentry's gaze slides towards me, his ear twitchin' in an unimpressed way. "He needs to see an extra mouth to feed?"

Ha Jong's neck fur bristles. "He can be of use!"

Daeshim snorts. "Use? He doesn't even look like he could kill the slowest rabbit in the forest." Then he turns on Kwan. "And you let this outsider come all the way to our camp?"

"It was Ha Jong's idea. Not mine," Kwan says. "I only entertained the idea because this outsider bears the dragonbird of Silla. Gwang may find that interesting."

Daeshim sits still, but his tail lashes back and forth. "Perhaps. But even still..." He swings his head to glare at Ha Jong. "Just because you are Gwang's family does not mean you can do as you like here. If I find you wasted Gwang's time with this, I'll rip your fur off myself—"

"And use it as a rug?" Ha Jong yawns. "Yeah, yeah, I know already. Just let us in."

Daeshim growls loudly, but move aside to let Ha Jong and I through.

_He must be a hoot at ceremonies,_ Brio mutters.

Aria giggles. _Forte, I think you and Daeshim would be best friends._

_No. He deserves to be J-kicked,_ Forte says. _Ha Jong too. I don't like either of them._

_Forte, do you even like anyone?_ Brio asks.

Forte says nothin'.

Strange orbish lights brighten the inside of the tent. Swords, bows, and horse equipment sit up on one side of the right. Wood, saws, and other woodcuttin' tools sit up over the other. At the back of the room, a big man sit cross-legged at a low table, deep toasted tan, with raisinish eyes baked in. His arms are thick as whole roasts, stretchin' the limits of his whole robe as he carves a dragon totem. He looks up at us, face seasoned with no-nonsense, and frowns at the sight of Ha Jong. "Another outsider?"

Ha Jong puffs himself up. "Not just any outsider! A prince of Silla! And he was on his way there too."

Gwang seems to stare through Ha Jong. "Is that right?" Then he looks at me. "Come here, outsider. Have a seat. Leave us, Ha Jong. Tell Daeshim to come in."

Ha Jong backs out of the tent. I walk forward until I'm in front of the table. There ain't really much of a seat to have, so I opt to sit on my bum.

Daeshim enters shortly and sits not far from me. He dips his head to Gwang. "You wanted to see me?"

"I'd like to hear your counsel if necessary," Gwang says. Then to me, he says, "Why are you going to Silla if you bear that mark?"

"My friend Sul Li left something important behind when she left," I say. "I just wanted to take it to her. I didn't know anything about this prince junk when I came from my house."

Daeshim peers at me. "Sul Li? You are that familiar with the Grand Belle?"

"What is this important thing that you have?" Gwang asks.

_Uh guys,_ I ask. _Which one of ya'll are in charge of the pocket with the important stuff?_

_Fooooooorte, that's you,_ Aria chirps.

_I don't need the reminder,_ Forte growls. His energy warms me up briefly, then Sul Li's stuff appear right on the table.

Gwang picks up the sword first, examinin' the blade. "Mmm...It smells like hers alright. Enchanted by Kim, Min Ah too." He sets the blade down, then looks at me thoughtfully. "Where is your home, outsider? You don't sound like you were raised anywhere near Silla."

"I came from Honeythorn Village, sir. I live there with my uncle."

"Uncle..." He says the word as though it's an interestin' morsel. "Then is it safe for me to assume that you are Chun Chu of the Kim Clan, son of Cheong Myeong?"

My jaw falls open. "How do you know that?"

"We were in the Hwarang, about your age probably, when it was ruled that our family was unfit to be part of the Kim Clan and that your father would not be king," Daeshim says.

Gwang nods, his eyes bleary. "No one took it seriously in those days. Most of our family ignored the warning. But one night, the Tiger Fury rose up and attacked all of us. Men we served with dragged us from our beds and killed every man who didn't lay down his weapon. You were fortunate. Yong Chun had already taken you away. But the Kim Clan marched the rest of us out of Sillan territory in the cold."

"What about my dad?" I ask. "Did you know him?"

"Of course, we trained under him and General Hong Do," Gwang says. "King Dae Wong was one of Silla's best warriors before he became king." He exhales through his nose. "But no one cared about that. We were just the scapegoats to throw away when things started getting bad for her side of the family. Queen Seon Deok said that if we brought her proof of Dae Wong's death, then we could return to Silla."

Daeshim growls softly. "Because she knows we won't. No honorable man would sell out his family for a comfortable bed."

"Where is the king now?" I ask, unable to keep the hope out of my voice. "Is he still alive?"

Gwang shrugs. "I can't say. The last I heard from him was when he gave us his spear Mjolnir and he left by himself. He's not the type to die foolishly. But even so, a man traveling alone is easy prey for the Darkborn, even if he is well-trained."

"How long ago was that?" I ask.

"Centuries ago," Daeshim says. "You were still probably a pup then."

My shoulders slump. Would my dad even still be around, even if he was alive? But then again, my uncle is an old fart and still kickin'. And Queen Mama Ma Ya is much older than him and she's older than everybody.

"You and Seung Man were so young when it all happened..." Gwang picks up the Sul Li's sword again. "I doubt she remembers it. "

"But even still, she is a Gyeongju Kim. I know you two were betrothed in the past, but her first loyalty is to them," Daeshim says.

Gwang grunts. "As the saying goes, Kims are bred for ambition. As much as I'd like to help you, I can't send you into Sillan territory without rolling over in my bed at night." He lays the sword down again. "Especially not over a weapon that's easily replaceable for someone of her stature. It's appalling enough that you were around them and lived."

"But folk didn't even know who I was," I say. "Sul Li didn't even know who I was until I showed her my necklace. And she didn't want me dead."

"And she didn't want you king of Silla either," Daeshim says dryly. "Otherwise, she would've told you the whole truth of your heritage. Not just the parts she had fun with."

As he says those words, my paws seem to turn to immovable rocks.

Why _didn't_ Sul Li tell me that I was the prince?

Maybe...maybe she had a good reason? That has to be it. Sul Li wouldn't just... My thoughts don't finish.

_But she kept secrets from me._ On _purpose._

What 'friend' would do that? Even if she told me, it wasn't like I'd jump up and leave my family for a throne I barely learned about.

"That's how Kims are, Chun Chu," Gwang says. "Queen Seon Deok was your father's friend before she betrayed him. Seung Man would only do the same if it suited her. Don't want for their throne, your father always considered it a curse."

I feel my own body burn like a hot pyre at those words. He sounds just like my uncle. Thinkin' he knows everybody. But at the same time, Daeshim's words keep my mouth closed. Gwang might be mouthin' off, but that don't change that Sul Li could've and should've said somethin'.

When I don't speak, Gwang says, "We don't currently have any extra tents ready for a guests, but if you'd like to remain here, we would welcome you. Once the people get to know you, and you are properly schooled, I'm sure that they would not object to you being the next king of the our tribe. But if you do not want that and you just want to return home, I'll have you escorted back to the Vision Gate."

I restrain my jaw from clenchin'. "I have to decide now?"

"No. Look around at our camp for a little bit and consider it," Gwang says, takin' Sul Li's blade.

"Wait a minute." I get up. "What are you doin' with that?"

"There is no need to hold onto this," Gwang says. "We will get you a proper one if you want to learn the sword." He stands up. "Daeshim, take him to Hye's place. She should have space."

Daeshim dips his head again and turns around. "Come Chun Chu."

With a last look at Sul Li's sword, I follow after Daeshim. He leads me to a tent where a white swaybacked drakehorse chomps quietly outside. But as we near the tent, a loud shriek pierce both our ears.

"Hold still ya baby!" An old lady snaps. "If ya'll can get cut with a sword without cryin', then ya'll can get healed without whinin'!"

Daeshim gestures for me to go in with a huge paw. I push my way through the tent flap.

A gray wolf-bear holds up a gashed foreleg, ears flattened against his skull. Hummin' to himself, a Labradoodle Helpin' Hand grabs a mortar and pestle from a bottom shelf in his jaws. A hunched old lady with a crow Helpin' Hand on her shoulder crabs her way around the back, pickin' herbs and beeswax off the shelves and grumblin' to herself. "Takin' all the jobs..." She give us a mean case of stink eye over her shoulder. "What do ya want, sonny?"

"Gwang wishes for our guest to stay here for the night, Hye," Daeshim says. "If you could please spare some room—"

Hye whirls around like a spinnin' top, grindin' the gapped and chipped remains of her teeth. "Spare some room? Spare some _room?"_ She throw her materials up in the air, turnin' redder than a pepper. The crow squawk and fly away. "What do I look like an inn? Just push all the adventurers on the poor old lady huh? Use up her food and herbs? Make her save every half-baked heroes progress, huh?" She fold her arms. "What's next? Ya'll gonna break my pots too, right? And go through my undie drawers for Key Items to steal too. That's what all you hero types do!"

I take a step back. _This lady is loonier than Pip on bingo night._ "I don't want to trouble nobody, Ma'm. It's okay if you don't want me to—"

"Oh _no._ " Hye march up to me and point a finger at my nose. "You're stayin', but you ain't about to stay for no free, boy. If you stay here, you're gonna do some work, so hop to it. Shmoop! Bring him that bowl over here. He's helpin' Su Ho and Go Dong make the meds today."

_Su Ho? Go Dong?_ They're here too?

Shmoop the Labradoodle pad over and set the bowl at my paws, lookin' like he feel bad for me.

Daeshim coughs. "I think I'll go back to my guard duties." He backs out of the tent. "See you tomorrow, Chun Chu."

_Yeah you do that, buddy,_ Brio grumbles. _Go and leave us with all the work._

_Can't say I don't see where Hye is coming from,_ Aria says. _You can't just push a stranger on someone on somebody else and expect them to foot the expenses._

_Are there truly people who go around to other's homes for the sole purpose of breaking their pots?_ Forte asks. _They sound mentally disturbed._

Hye jerks her thumb over where the brown wolf is sittin'. "Han over there needs a comfrey poultice on his wound. So hop to it! Chop, chop! Get those Helping Hands out and helpin'."

_What?_ Aria squawks. _We have to suffer too?_

_HA!_ Brio leap out of my body with the biggest grin on his face. _I thought you understood where she was coming from, Aria._

_Grr..._ Aria leaps out too. _Hush monkey._

_That's karma for making me be in charge of the Medicine pocket,_ Brio says.

Aria struts past him. _We're still not switching if that's what you think._

Brio's shoulders droop. _Come on! Let me have a turn to do something else!_

Aria huffs. _Why are you complaining? You haven't even had to hold anything. Forte's been doing all of the work so far._

As Forte's name is called, hot energy floods through my body and I feel myself bein' forced upright as a human again. Forte coils next to Aria with the Slap Ya Mama in his claws. _Yes, and I am tired._

"Well you take a break, Forte. You've done enough, and I've made comfrey poultices plenty of times." I look at the Labradoodle. "Eh...Shmoop, right?"

Shmoop wags his tail.

"Got any clean water or bandages around here?" I ask.

Shmoop tilts his head, then he runs out of the tent. Moments later, a familiar voice yells, "HEY! We're not slacking!" Go Dong and Su Ho enter the tent with gourds and bandages in their arms while they make sour faces at Shmoop who barks excitedly and scurry all around them.

_I'll go look at Han's injury,_ Aria offers, flappin' away.

_And I'll get the comfrey, I guess._ Brio mutters, startin' for the dried herbs on the shelves. _Anything else you need me to pick up?_

_Nah, comfrey and some water ought to be okay._ I glance at Han's gash. _But we might need quite a bit of comfrey. If there's anything to keep the bandage still, bring that too._ I pick up the mortar and pestle that Shmoop left behind. And as I get up, I find Go Dong and Su Ho comin' towards me with their faces frowned up all tight. And I know sure as snow in winter that these two are my chicken thieves.

"Well look who it is," I say. "Ya'll ain't got chicken wings to steal?"

They both cringe.

"Hey man, we were just hungry!" Su Ho says. "We were gonna starve if we didn't bring back the Grand Belle."

"Starve?" Go Dong scoffs. "Starving is the _least_ of our problems. King Seo Hyun would kill us for losing the Grand Belle." He holds out a dark green gourd to me. "Here. You don't have to worry about us stealin' anything." He turns and walks over to Han and sits down.

Su Ho holds out a bandage roll to me with a childish pout. "You couldn't even give us a little chicken wing?"

"They weren't mine to give, buddy," I say. "And I sure ain't lettin' no thief punk me for my delivery food."

"WHAT ARE YA'LL STANDIN' AROUND FOR?" Hye screech. "I DON'T SEE A SAVE POINT OVER THERE!"

Su Ho and I both cringe and run over to where Aria, Han, and Go Dong are.

"Yeesh..." Su Ho mumbles. "Her mouth is bigger than Fenris and Jormungand combined."

Go Dong scoffs. "Let her yell all she wants. At least she feeds us and doesn't smack us around like the White Tail Pack."

I pour a little water into my bowl. "You mean those folks I saw you with used to hit you?"

Go Dong nods and gestures for Han to stretch his foreleg out. "Yep. Though these days, food was gettin' scarce there wasn't enough to go around. Folk like us who mess up just get to watch everybody else eat."

"That's terrible," Han says. "But why is he calling himself King? Only the Three Kingdoms call their leaders that."

Su Ho shrugs. "Beats me. He started calling himself that not long ago. I don't know how he got that in his head."

"But speaking of kings..." Go Dong looks at Aria and then at me. "You're really the king of Silla? I thought they didn't have one."

"I ain't king of anything except maybe grillin' some mean short ribs," I say.

Go Dong squints at me. "Grillin'?"

"Yeah, ya'll don't grill steaks and ribs on the barbecue pit? Ya'll seem like the outdoor cookin' types."

"Barbecue pit?"

Before I can explain it, Hye crabs over again and frown up at me. "What are ya' doin'? There ain't no time be chattin' about kings when there's work to be done!"

"I am," I say. "Just waitin' for the stuff I need."

"Come on stop wolfing on him, Hye," Han says. "He's got a dragonbird. He's a _king."_

Hye's eyes widen. "A king?"

"Yeah!" Su Ho adds in. "Roy-al-ty."

My face go hot. "No, no, no! I'm not—"

"Oh _ho!"_ Hye put her hands on her hips and glower at me. "So you think you're unique, Mr. Royal Highness? Think you deserve some _special_ treatment, do ya? Well you came to the wrong tent, mister! I'm sick and tired of all you hero types!"

"Ma'm I'm not—"

"First, ya'll mess up the economy and give the fortune-tellin' jobs to the prophets..."

"Ma'm—"

"Smashin' our pots, goin' through our private treasure chest, stealin' our dungeon keys, bargain' into our houses—"

"Ma'm—"

"Lookin'. At. Mah. _Pantaloons!_ "

"Ma'm?"

But Hye is grindin' her teeth and boilin' red. "And you think that we're supposed to fall over and do what you say like we ain't got lives of our own! Well, you ain't treatin' me like no NPC. No, siree. And you ain't gettin' no special treatment here. I don't care what quest you're on. You're gonna sit here and make salves till your eyes _bleed!"_

"For the love of Mother Bear woman, calm down before you bust a vessel in your brain or something," Han says.

With a loud sniff, Hye crabs away, grumblin' angrily to herself. Shmoop pads over cautiously with Brio, his eyes flickin' from Hye to me. He noses a bowl of dried comfrey up to me. _Don't take anything she says personally. We've had a lot of selfish types show up here. It's not any of your fault._

I bring the bowl closer to me, _I figured that. Thanks for helpin'._

As Shmoop pads away, Brio sits down and dumps a handful of comfrey into the water. _Talk about having a chip on your shoulder. That lady has the whole doggone Forgotten Lands on those bony sticks._ He jumps back into my body. Aria follows suit.

"Eh...she's usually nicer when we don't have visitors," Go Dong says.

"You should've seen her when Ha Jong turned up," Su Ho whispers. "She was _really_ ticked."

"Yeah, but Ha Jong is a jerk," Go Dong says. " _And_ from Silla. Two strikes, man."

"That reminds me..." Su Ho nudges my arm. "We heard Ha Jong talking about you earlier."

"Me?" I churn the comfrey with the water. "What's he talkin' about me for?"

"I guess it's because you're from Silla, and he's from Silla," Su Ho says with a shrug. "I think Kwan is from there too."

Go Dong snorts. "Tch. How come the jerks get all the luck? What I wouldn't give to be Sillan? We'd eat like..." He stops, lookin' over his shoulder. Then very quietly whispers, "...kings. Every day."

Once the comfrey leaves clot up into a thick dark green paste. I dab the paste on Han's gash. "Is it really that great?"

Han winces at every little touch. "According to everyone who's old enough to remember, yes. Gwang says no one ever starves or freezes. Everything is clean and the capital shines like gold. I wasn't old enough to see it. I wish I was." Then his ears prick towards me. "But I'm surprised a prince like you is all the way out here and not in Silla."

"Wasn't raised anywhere near here," I say. "I came out here to take something to Silla, but Gwang don't want to let me."

"I can see why," Han says. "There's still a lot of bad blood between King Dae Wong's family and the rest of the Gyeongju Kims. Queen Seon Deok would kill you just for being related."

I finish wrappin' his leg so Go Dong and Su Ho can pin it together. "But why? What did he do that was so bad?"

Han puts his paw down experimentally. "As far as I know, nothing."

"Yer' darn tootin' it was nothin'," Hye says comin' over with her arms folded. "They riled us up for no reason. But let me tell you. Things were already awful enough. A man always had to look over his shoulder in his own clan manor because he can't even trust his own folks. Next thing you know, we're gettin' herded out like sheep for a crime we didn't even do." She shakes her head, then scrutinizes my work. At the very least, she seems to have calmed down from earlier. "Not bad for a newbie'. You earned yourself a healin' potion. Here."

As soon as I reach out with a hand, the potion disappears into thin air.

**Healin' Potion x1 Obtained!**

_I guess that works too—_

_OH MY BEARS!_ Brio screeches. _IT'S EVERYWHERE!_

_Brio what the heck?_ Aria squawks.

_THE OLD LADY DIDN'T CLOSE THE POTION ALL THE WAY!_

Forte lifts his head from his paws, eyes narrowin'. _Do I have to come over there and J-kick someone?_

_No...I-I got this. I just need a mop or something._ Brio says. _Ugh, it's warm too. Eww. It's gonna stink in here for days._

_I think there's a mop in the Main Menu._ Aria says. _I'll go get it._

_Thanks Aria._ Brio sighs. _Next time, check the top before somebody gives you something, human._

**Half-spilled Healin' Potion x1 Obtained!**

Hye jerks her thumb towards a curtained path leadin' further into the tent. "You can go get settled in the back while dinner is cookin'. You can use the sleepin' pallets there."

We have a bland meat stew, rice, and pickled radish that leave me wishin' Forte took my chili powder from home instead of the Slap Ya Mama. Hye leaves us alone the rest of the night and keep to her corner in the tent, stirrin' herbs into a big _ttukbaegi_ in the low-lit gloom and gruntin' about oracles stealin' jobs and sellin' bootleg voodoo while her crow Helpin' Hand sit on her shoulder. Occasionally, she throw some powder that make the fires flare up and a clawed hand reach up out of the pot. A few days ago I woulda been scared out of my mind to see that, but now it seems as normal as breathin'.

After dinner, I slip into the back along with Go Dong and Su Ho for sleep. They must've been workin' like dogs (well, harder than Shmoop) because they drop off to sleep as soon as their heads hit the floor, but I lie awake on my pallet. Forte coils in the corner with an ear angled toward me and his glow reduced to a faint mist.

I turn on my side, starin' at the tent wall. _Aria? Are you awake?_

Aria appears faintly. _What is it, human?_

_Am I really the heir to some throne? What if it's a mistake?_

_A mistake?_ Aria fluffs herself up. _Phoenixes do not make mistakes about kings! I was already with you since your birth. Why, if you weren't a king, I simply couldn't be here with you now._

I frown into the prickly thatch. _What do you think about what Gwang and Daeshim said? About stayin' here?_

Her crest stands straight up. She smoothes her feathers. _It is hard to say. Their fears are valid. They lived through the pain themselves. But a dragonbird never feels at home on a perch that doesn't truly belong to them. And besides..._ She touches my chest with her beak. _I can tell leading here is not what lies in your heart._

_But Sul Li didn't tell me the truth! No one told me! You guys didn't even tell me!_ I say.

_Did you truly never think to yourself what you really were?_ Forte's growl cuts in. _Your grandmother is Queen Mother, and it never crossed your mind once that you could be royalty?_

_But still Forte..._ Aria adds gently. _The human has a point. Sul Li is supposed to be his friend. That is something very important to leave out, don't you think?_

_I do not think one should rely on others to give them all the answers, whether they have good intentions or not,_ Forte says. _But I do not see him blaming Eun Hae when she knew just as much. Maybe even more._

I quiet. He's right. I _don't_ blame Eun Hae. But unlike Sul Li, Eun Hae kept things a secret because she thought I wouldn't be able to sit on the sidelines if I knew, which now I see why was right on her part. If I went home now, I'd never stop thinkin' about the life I'm s'posed to have. About the life I could choose right at this moment.

At the same time... it's _terrifyin'_. I've never really had people just outright _want_ me dead. Sure, you can't get along with everybody, but knowin' that people want to kill you just for bein' you? Skoll and Hati were my first taste of that and I barely want to think about it.

If I decided to be king, I wouldn't know where to begin. I don't know anything about rulin' anybody. I don't know anything about Silla. I don't know how to make it out in the wilderness to get that far, even if I knew the way.

And even if I made it to Silla, what would I do? It's not like I can just walk in and say 'I'm king, let me rule you now' (or at least not as far as I know).

_I s'pose if I did go, Eun Hae would be the best person to ask._ I don't know how much influence Hwarang folk have, but havin' somebody on my side is better than nobody. If she can't help, then at the very least I ain't completely alone.

"Psst. Hey you."

Huh? I turn over to find Ha Jong's face pokin' under the tent walls. "What do you want?"

Ha Jong's ears flatten. "Shh...Not so loud." With a nervous glance at the curtains to the main room, he says, "What did Gwang say? Is he taking you to Silent Bastion to return the Grand Belle's stuff?"

"No," I say. "He took her stuff and said that he's either gonna to send me home or keep me here."

One of Ha Jong's ears swivel. "But you're the king of Silla. We _need_ a king. Everything is falling apart back home without one."

I stay quiet for a heartbeat before askin', "It is?"

Ha Jong nods. "Nobody back home likes admitting it, but we're in some deep trouble with all the neighboring kingdoms _and_ the Darkborn. Queen Seon Deok is holding everything together, but she can't do what a king can do."

I prop myself up with an elbow. "You're from Silla, ain't ya?"

Ha Jong nods. "I'm going back soon. You could tag along with me if you still want to go. I'm sure that I could still get us in."

"But even if I wanted to go, what are people gonna think if I start callin' myself king?" I sit up.

"Yeah, and how is he even gonna get in?" I look over to find Go Dong sittin' up and rubbin' his eyes. "I've never seen the Hwarang let anybody in without official business."

"And I don't have any business without Sul Li's stuff," I add. "If I could get that back, maybe I'd consider it. But don't sit around waitin' for me if you have to go soon."

Ha Jong sits quiet for a few moments. "What if I can get her stuff for you? Would you come with me?"

My chest inflates with a tiny flare, but then goes still. "Wait a minute. How are you going to do that?"

"But would you come though?" Ha Jong asks again, his voice more urgent.

"Heck, not right now." I ruffle my hand through my hair. "But sure. I'd go."

"Good, then be ready." Ha Jong starts to crawl back under the tarp. "Nothing is happening tonight, but when I say we have to go, we can't wait for anything."

As he disappears, my stomach fill up with cold jitterin', but at the same time I can't hold back my excitement. _I'm goin' home._ To my _real_ home.

"Are you really gonna leave with him?" Go Dong asks.

"I can't stay here," I say. "Even if I didn't go to Silla, there's folks countin' on me back home. But if he's right and Silla needs a king, then sittin' my butt here ain't doin' anybody no good."

"Well if you go, will you take us with you?" He asks.

"You want to go?" I lay back down. "I thought you were okay here."

"Tch. We're practically slaves." Go Dong plops back on his pallet. "Gwang would never trust us to be one of his tribe. At least in Silla we could do some honest work and have our own place to stay. I'm sure Su Ho would go. And besides..." He looks over at me. "You've got medicine know-how and cooking know-how. But we've got survival know-how. And then you've got the Darkborn to worry about. Two wolves out alone won't keep Darkborn away."

That's true. If I meet Skoll and Hati again, I reckon I'd be the weakest link even with my Helpin's Hands help. And if we have a bad run-in with the Hwarang, I doubt I'd come out in one piece. "Well, if ya'll want to come, be ready to go. You heard what Ha Jong said, we can't wait for anything."

In the darkness, I spot Go Dong move his hand over his chest and breathe deeply. "Because once we start, we can't come back."

### _1-7_

THE NEXT DAY, I get up and both Su Ho and Go Dong are gone. Only one around is Shmoop who folds up blankets with his mouth near Su Ho's pallet.

His head pop up as soon as mine does. He points to where an abandoned bowl of rice, meat, and vegetables lay. _Eat quickly, human. I think Daeshim will arrive to get you soon._

I get up, fold the blanket and lay them at the pallet. _Forte? Brio? Aria?_

_I am here,_ Forte says.

_Presente!_ Brio says.

_Here,_ Aria chirps. _What did you want, human?_

_Just checkin' on ya'll._ I pick up my food and eat next to Shmoop. _Go Dong and Su Ho split on me like an open banana._

_I'm sure Hye probably just put them to work,_ Aria says.

_Hopefully, they're not doin' anything too crazy,_ I say. _If Ha Jong says somethin', they're gonna to need to know._ Once, I finish eatin', I take my bowl into the main room of the tent. There I find Hye chattin' with a bald, thick-set man who I realize from his eyes is Daeshim in human form.

He smiles. "Good morning, Chun Chu. I trust that you slept well?"

"It was a little rough, but I'm fine," I say.

Daeshim approaches me with a thick parka and furred pants. "Gwang told me to give you these. Those clothes that you have on aren't suitable for the cold."

I take them and thumb the thick coarse fur. "Thanks. Is Gwang up now?"

"Of course, he's awaiting your decision still. I'll take you to him."

_Eager to keep me here or kick me out, huh?_ I put the clothes over my arm without a word. "Give me a minute..." I go into the back to change. Surprisin'ly (and eerily so), my clothes fit perfectly as though they took my measurements. When I come out, Daeshim gives an approvin' nod.

"You look like one of us already," he says.

I don't say anything to that and instead follow him outside. The sky, I notice, ain't changed color since I last came, but the sky still has the northern lights in them which are orange today and in the shape of a lungin' tiger.

"The sun ain't comin' out?" I ask.

"The sun never rises in Niflheim," Daeshim says. "The Symphonic Stream you see up there is our only light."

"Only?" I ask. "How do you grow crops and stuff then?"

He shrugs. "We are not big growers like the Three Kingdoms or the Tang, so we don't worry about such things," he says. "Such a thing is just a bother if you move often."

"Ya'll move all the time?"

Daeshim nods, he lifts Gwang's tent flap for me. "We must keep after the herds."

Inside, Gwang is waitin' at his table, carvin' into his box from yesterday. Without looking up he says, "Good morning, Chun Chu. I wondered if you'd ever stop hibernating."

"Sorry, sir. I don't really understand the time here," I say. "It's hard not having the sun around to tell what time it is."

"You'll grow accustomed to it...if you're staying that is." Gwang pushes his box aside. "Have you made your decision?"

"I think I'll have a look around before I decide anything," I say.

Gwang nods slowly. "Keep to the inside of camp until you decide. Some patrols might mistake you for a rogue if you hang around the edges."

"Yes, sir." I back out of Gwang's tent with Daeshim, only to be stopped by Kwan and a few other Gayans.

"Come to see Gwang?" Daeshim asks.

"Actually, I came to ask if you've seen Ha Jong at all," Kwan says. "I thought he was supposed to be on hunting duty with us."

My pulse thuds between my ears. Ha Jong is gone? What's he runnin' off for? Unless...he went to Silla without me?

Daeshim does not answer right away. "He was. But Ha Jong always thinks the rules never apply to him. Just take someone else, Kwan. I tire of worrying about him."

The patrol dips their heads to him and chorus a quiet, "Ye." Then they walk off.

When they are gone, Daeshim shakes his head. "Spoiled high-breeding do not make a man." He turns to me. "If you are staying here, do well to remember that words are meaningless if the way you live does not match."

I watch him leave and then start walkin' through the tents. By the look of things, I'm the last one up. Everyone and their mother is busy with something: handlers scrape the flakin' scales off the drakehorses, teenagers sit in on a sparrin' lesson from an old teacher...I even see that guy that got rained on the other day and his buddy. Today it seems they're teachin' how to make windy gales come up from the ground—or rather I should say tryin' to, cuz the guy that got rained on can't seem to make anything happen like his friend.

One thing that I _do_ notice though, is that most the folk that either had their faces frowned up at me or didn't even pay any attention to me are smilin' through their teeth today. I wouldn't be surprised if Gwang and Daeshim were behind it.

I walk past a pair of women makin' arrows and stop at the sight of Go Dong and Su Ho luggin' a huge clay pot. "Hey, Go Dong! Su Ho!"

Su Ho puts down his pot. "Hey! I thought Hye would've put you to work by now."

"Nope. I'm just s'posed to be lookin' around to see if I like it here or not." I peer down at the pot. "What's this?"

"Old lady Hye made us go get some more soybean paste and other cooking ingredients," Go Dong says.

Su Ho puckers up his face, grind his teeth together. "Get up you layabouts! I want soybean paste and some chili powder. _Nyaaaah!"_ He crab-walks around the pots and makes grumblin' noises. "Takin' all the jobs. _Nyaaaah!_ Save your progress. _Nyaaaaaaaaaah!_ I healed you, you ungrateful lout! _Nyah, nyah, nyah!_ "

I laugh. "Since when does she say nyah?"

"Since I put my own spin on it," Su Ho says in a nasally Hye voice. "I practice when she ain't lookin'. _Nyaaaaaaaah!"_

"Hey. Stop that." Go Dong says, but he can't hold in his laughter. "If you keep callin' Fenris, he'll appear."

Su Ho stands up straight, grinnin'. "Yeah, but I do a good impression, don't I?"

"I can't tell the difference," Go Dong says, puttin' his pot down and uncappin' it. He sniffs and frowns. "Oi, this smells funny."

"Funny?" I echo. "Like what?" I sniff too, but it smell like regular old soybean paste to me.

"I don't think this is as fresh as the trader said it was," Go Dong says. "It's not going to make anybody sick or anything, but this isn't first harvest paste."

"I don't think she'll notice the difference," Su Ho says. "Yesterday, she was eating napa cabbage that had some really nasty-lookin' black spots on it and didn't even bat an eye."

Go Dong makes a face. "Yeah, but still... Picking the wrong ingredients always puts a bad taste in my mouth, even if I'm not the one eating it."

"Well we can't do anything about it now." Su Ho puts his hands on his hips. Then he looks at me. "Hey, did Ha Jong say anything yet? I'm in on goin' to you-know-where."

"No. I heard he was s'posed to go huntin' this mornin'," I say. "Daeshim just told Kwan to go on without him."

Su Ho frowns. "He just up and left without tellin' anybody?"

"Aish... It would be just like him to just leave us high and dry," Go Dong says.

Su Ho lifts a finger. "You know...We could probably pull it off on our own if we could get the Grand Belle's stuff and maybe something else that Queen Seon Deok would like."

"Well, hold on," I say. "It ain't even been a few hours and ya'll already givin' up."

"Yeah, but you haven't been around Ha Jong," Go Dong says. "He's around one minute and just poofs off the next. We're all sick of it. I say go. With or without him."

"If we don't see him in a day or so, then we figure something out," I say. "But let's at least give him a chance."

As the day goes on, Ha Jong doesn't show his face or poke around the camp. I keep an eye peeled, watchin' every part of the clearin' as the patrols come in, but none of the men that come in are Ha Jong.

I sit on a log. _What gives? He hasn't been here all day._

_Be patient, human,_ Aria says. _Something might have happened._

_Yeah, the folk around here already don't like him,_ Brio says.

Before I can say anything, I spot Kwan and the rest of his patrol comin' in. A team of drakehorses haul in a deer. But Kwan's horse has a person draped on the saddle, as they pass and go to Gwang's tent, I see the face and all my limbs turn to rock.

It's _Ha Jong._

_I found him,_ Forte says.

_You don't say..._ Brio says dryly.

_Forte, are you making a joke?_ Aria asks. _That's very unlikely._

As soon as I get a hold of myself, I get up and rush for Hye's tent. "Su Ho! Go Dong!"

Shmoop runs out of my way as I enter. Both Su Ho and Go Dong lay all their ingredient pots against the tent wall.

"What's the yelling for?" Su Ho asks. "You want to wake up all the jotnar?"

I halt in front of them. "I saw you know who outside. He wasn't lookin' so hot."

"It's below freezing out here," Su Ho says, earnin' a slap from Go Dong.

"That's not what he meant, you dingus!" Go Dong hisses. "How did he look? Did he tell you anything?"

"I don't think he'll be sayin' anything to anyone ever again," I whisper. "He didn't look alive when Kwan took him towards Gwang's."

Both Go Dong and Su Ho's eyes bulge wide as the pots next to them. Then they look at each other.

"W-what are we gonna do then?" Su Ho asks. "He was gonna take us."

Go Dong smacks Su Ho's shoulder. "Hey, you were talking all big about leaving without him."

"Yeah, but I don't know my way around anything! How would we get there now?" Su Ho massages his shoulder. "You're sure he's dead?"

"If he's not, they'd be in here by now," Go Dong says. "Not going to Gwang's tent. Gwang's the one that has to tell Queen Seon Deok what happened."

"Maybe we could piggyback off that?" I suggest.

"Tch. Fat chance," Go Dong says. "If Queen Seon Deok sees your phoenix, you're done. And besides...He'd just send a letter and the body with one of the patrols. Gwang won't let you go on one of those unless you're trained."

"Then what?" Su Ho asks. "We give up?"

Both Go Dong and Su Ho look at me, and the pressure in their hopeful gazes makes me wish I could disappear on the spot. They're countin' on me to make something happen, but what can I do? I exhale through my nose. "I don't want to give up, but I don't see anyway forward on this, guys."

"I'm sure there's something we can do," Go Dong says. "Maybe we just overlooked something."

"YER DARN TOOTIN' YOU OVERLOOKED SOMETHIN'!" Hye crabs her way into the room, teeth already grindin' away. "You didn't bring any mushrooms. Or any cabbage! And I see you put the pots in the wrong order. Get off your bums you layabouts! This ain't no Pokemon Center! It takes work to heal and save games! And that work is comin' from _you._ "

Go Dong and Su Ho get up immediately and scrabble to get back to work. But when I get up, Hye says, "Not you. Daeshim told me that they put up a tent for you. Come here."

I follow her outside around the back of her tent. Not far from it, there's another tent with a small green rug at the entrance. We go inside. There ain't much to it besides a huge chest to put stuff in and a pallet with some cozy-lookin' blankets. "How am I s'posed to cook?"

"You'll hardly have the time for stuff like that," Hye says. "You'll have to hunt and patrol most days. Everyone at camp takes care of that. Have a look at your stuff, sonny. I've got to go back and watch the lazies."

Once she leaves, I head over to the chest, kneel, and open it.

A thick blue book and a spear lay inside of it. I pick up the blue book first. It's a similar make to the one Sul Li. But as I flip through to the end, most of the beige pages are blank. I stop and thumb through the front pages. A few pages in, I stop to peer at a familiar-looking pair of pups.

That's Sul Li and me.

My hands tremble.

This is _my_ Lifebook.

How did Gwang get a hold of this?

The young versions of us both scamper through a dark tunnel like a silent film: her prancin' confidently and me lookin' around.

_I can't hear anything._ How did Sul Li make them come out? She pinched them, didn't she?

_You don't have to pull the memory, human,_ Eir says. _You can just touch it and still experience it._

I lay a hand on the page.

The room around me crumbles into sand and repieces into the craggy walls of a cave. Tiny glowin' chips shine from the walls, givin' only a little light for the path ahead.

Sul Li trots ahead, turns to look at me, and then stops and makes a huffin' sound. "Chun Chu stop dragging your paws! We could be there already!"

Little Me pads slowly behind her, his ears flat. "Stop telling me what to do. You're not the boss of me. I can go as slow. As. I. Want." Little Me punctuates each statement by goin' so slow he's barely movin'.

"Yeah, slow like a Bok-Bok _chicken_ ," Sul Li sneers.

Little Me bristles. "Hey! I'm not a chicken! Stop calling me that!"

"Well if you're not a chicken, then I guess you can catch up later." Sul Li pads on ahead, the darkness engulfin' her form.

"H-hey! Wait up!" Little Me takes a few sheepish steps forward. "Sul Li! Sul Li!" He squints ahead into the dark, tail quiverin'. "Sul Li?"

But no one comes.

Little Me sits there for a long while, shakin' so much that I can feel it again and the terrible cold emptiness in my belly at the thought of being completely alone in the dark and the heaviness boltin' my paws to the ground. He calls. " _Abba?_ "

But again no one comes.

After a long moment, he crouches and inches forward little by little into the darkness. Until his muzzle butts against something. He stretches his paw out, and the dark thing gives a startled squeak and backs into the light, revealin' Sul Li with her fur all fluffed out like a chow chow.

Little Me gets right up and growls. "Sul Li! I thought you ran off without me!"

"Well, I was gonna 'cuz you were sooooooo slow," Sul Li says indignantly. "But you kept standing there like you weren't gonna be okay. So I stayed to make sure."

"Well _don't_ do that again," Little Me pads to her. "Promise with banana notecake on top."

"I don't like the banana one though..."

_"Promise!"_

"Fine, fine. I promise." Sul Li sits on her haunches. "Besides, it wasn't any fun."

Little Me nips her ear. "Come on. Let's go then! Where are we going?"

Sul Li bats at Little Me playfully. "This tunnel has a Circle of Fifths that goes all the way to the garden where my room is. So you can visit anytime!"

Little Me steps back, lookin' put off. "That's it? That's what it's for?"

Sul Li's ears flatten against her skull. "What did you think it was for?"

"Well, I thought it'd be for something cool."

Sul Li stamps her paw. "What's cooler than visiting _me_?" Then she huffs. "Oh, I don't know why I brought you in the first place. You're _so_ thick-headed!"

Little Me cocks his head. "If it means that much, I'll visit you."

Sul Li's tail curls, but before she can say anything, footsteps sound in the tunnel. Sul Li and Little Me freeze, pelts fluffed up in terror.

Sul Li whimpers. "What was that?"

"It wasn't me." Little Me scoots closer to Sul Li. "Was it you?"

"No." Sul Li's stretches her neck to see ahead. "I think it's gone."

"I hope it's not the Booger Man..." Little Me mumbles.

"Who's the Booger Man?"

"Uh...he's a big scary man with reeeeeeaaaaaaally long sharp pointy nails," Little Me says. "And he sticks them in your nose and pulls all your boogers out and he eats them with milk!"

Sul Li's ears twitch. "Well that doesn't sound bad. I don't like boogers in my nose."

"Well, he'll put you in his sack and steal you away too!" Little Me says. "And you'll never been seen again! What about that, huh?"

"Chun Chu."

"What?"

"Which side of me are you on?"

"Why are you asking me that? I'm right _here._ "

Sul Li goes still.

"Sul Li?"

"Uuuuhhhhh...B-b-b-b..."

Little Me picks his head up.

Long claws stretch into the light.

Both Sul Li and Little Me shriek, "BOOGER MAN!"

"Grrrr. I'm the Booger Man!" General Hong Do's broad polar bearish head lowers into view, his brown eyes lookin' pleasantly amused.

" _Abba!_ " Bristlin', Sul Li stomps up to the bigger wolf-bear and boops him on the nose with her tiny paw. "That's for scaring me!"

"Ooof!" He rolls on the floor with his belly up. "Vanquished by Seung Man! Oh, I'll never eat another booger again." He puts his paws together in a praying position. "Mercy please! No more boops on my snoot!"

Sul Li sniffs. "Only if you don't do anymore meanie jokes, _Abba_. That's _not_ nice."

Little Me scampers forward to clamber all over the General. "What are you doing here, Mister General?"

"I came to look for my wife, my lord," General Hong Do says. "She always comes down here from time to time. I figured that she might be here today."

"We haven't seen anybody besides you, Mister General," Little Me says, slippin' down.

The General flips over and gets up. "She wouldn't be in this part of the cave. She'd be in the part with the Gratitude Glass."

"Gratitude Glass?" Sul Li echoes. "What's that?"

"It's a very special kind of sea glass that she collects," General Hong Do starts paddin' ahead into the dark tunnel. "Just like how a damaged soul will leave behind a Darkborn when it dies, a kind and loving soul will leave behind a shard of Gratitude Glass so that someone like you can have a wish in this world."

Sul Li and Little Me dash after him. "A wish for _every_ piece of glass, Mister General?" Little Me asks.

"Nice try," General Hong Do says. "But it is one wish for every _thousand_ shards collected, my lord. And Gratitude Glass is not easy to find, even if you know where to look."

Sul Li skips ahead. "What is _eomma_ wishing for, Abba?"

"I'm not certain," the General says. "But I'm sure it must be very important to her if she's making the time for it."

"I'd wish for no boogers in my nose!" Little Me says with his chest puffed up.

Sul Li snorts. "Why? The Booger Man isn't real."

"If he's not real then why were you screaming, chicken?"

"I wasn't screaming!"

"Owww! Hey! Mister General, Sul Li booped me!"

"Abba! Chun Chu called me chicken first!"

"Mister General!"

_"Aaaaaaabbaaaaaaaaaaaaa!"_

"Life was simple then, wasn't it?"

I jump at the sound of Gwang's voice. The book flies out of my hand.

The memory dissolves and I find myself lookin' at Gwang.

I clasp both hands against my chest and almost fall backwards. "Wooooooo nelly! You scared me! What are you doin' in here? I thought you were seein' Kwan."

"They only came to tell me that Ha Jong is dead," Gwang says. "I wanted to see how you were settling in."

_I ain't even said I was gonna settle here yet._

"Well, I sure wasn't expectin' to find my Lifebook here," I say, leanin' over to pick it up. "Ya'll were holdin' onto it, this whole time?"

Gwang nods. "I left your father's spear as well. Since, he's no longer around, it's rightfully yours."

"I don't really know much about spears though," I say. "Unless we're talkin' about asparagus."

"We can teach you all you need to know about spear fighting," Gwang says. "By the time you're done, you'll throw just like your father."

A barb of irritation pricks me. _But I didn't say anything about wanting to be like him. I don't even know if he's a guy I want to be like._

Gwang's gaze shifts to my Lifebook. "Be careful where you leave that. I doubt anyone would go out of their way to bother it, but still... " He gets up and heads to the entrance. "I'll leave you to..." He flips the tent flap up to find Kwan standing there. "What brings you here? Is something the matter?"

"I wanted to speak to our guest," Kwan says.

"Very well." Gwang turns to me. "Kwan to see you, Chun Chu."

"Come on in. I ain't busy," I say.

Gwang leaves and Kwan steps in. Even as a human, Kwan's shaggy hair and furred garbs make him look as beastly as his wolf-bear counterpart. He sits in front of me for a while sayin' nothin'.

"Erm. Didn't you want to talk about something?" I ask.

Kwan puts a finger over his mouth, and continues to say nothin'.

_Well, this is a very riveting conversation,_ Aria says dryly.

_This must be how he gets all the ladies,_ Brio says. _Who needs words when you can stare into those soulful eyes?_

_I do,_ Aria says. _Because I don't read minds!_

After a long awkward lull, Kwan finally says, "How do you know me?"

I rub my hair. "Err...It's a long weird story."

"Tell me."

"Well I sorta met you while I was tryin' to put time back in order..." My voice trail as Kwan's face contort up in confusion. I quickly say, "I just thought I saw you somewhere. My mistake."

Kwan tip his head and then says, "You wanted to go to Silla, correct?"

I put my Lifebook next to me. "You can take me?"

Kwan looks away. "It is very risky. If I go, it is on one condition."

"And that is?"

"Give me your father's spear," Kwan says.

"Give it to you?" I echo. "I just got it and you want me to just give it up?"

Kwan's already narrow eyes get even thinner. "Queen Seon Deok will not let you merely waltz into Silla, even if you have the Grand Belle's possessions. The Hwarang will only send you away and present it to her themselves."

I fold my arms. "And how do you know all that?"

"I used to be part of the Tiger Fury Guard before I was exiled and I know that the Queen is no fool," Kwan says. "She'll only let an outsider into Silla if he has proof that King Dae Wong is dead. But one look at you and she'll know that you're lying. If I went, she'll be more inclined to believe it."

"And what? You get your pardon, but what about me? I don't know how any of this is gonna make me king."

"You should worry about getting into Silla and staying alive before you worry about any of that." He puts a hand on his knee. "If you declared yourself king, I don't know very many people who would let it go without a fight."

"I get all that, but I just have a hard time picturin' what happens to me in all of this," I say. "You get the spear, but I've only got Sul Li's stuff. You're sayin' that don't count."

"I did not say that. I meant it means nothing on its own." He gestures to the spear. "If we present the spear and the Grand Belle's possessions, we'll be allowed into Silla and likely for an audience with the Queen and the Grand Belle. If you two are truly acquainted, I'm sure that the Grand Belle will vouch for your presence in Silla. I only have to impress Her Majesty about the spear."

"So it's that easy?"

"I'd wouldn't say that," Kwan says. "The minute we leave, we're fugitives. If we don't succeed, and the Queen sends us back, we're as good as dead."

Ice soaks into my bones. "Both of us?"

"It's treason."

Those two words seem to fill the whole tent.

I summon up the courage to ask, "Why are you comin' then? They don't know me, but you're stickin' your neck out."

"I have family up there," Kwan says. "I don't know how they're faring now, but they were hardly faring to begin with."

_I hope they weren't strugglin' long._ "So what do we do then? I'm in for leavin'. Go Dong and Su Ho want to come too."

Kwan's gaze hardens. "This is not an amusement trip."

"I know, but they were already gonna go when Ha Jong was talkin' about it. They won't bother much."

Kwan expression does not faze. He looks up to the ceilin', frown deepenin'. "I didn't realize he asked you already. Maybe that's why..."

"That's why what?"

Kwan stands up, shakin' his head. "We will leave tonight. I'll see about the Grand Belle's things, but you ought to tell Go Dong and Su Ho to meet us at the old fortress by the hour of the pig or we'll leave without them."

My heartbeat skips. "What about us? I don't know what time that is."

"It's better everyone goes separately. Don't worry about it if you don't know." Kwan hold up his fist. The silver panther glyph on the back of his hand flashes twice. "I'll have Caddy come get you when it's the right time."

"You're like the third person I've seen with that mark," I say. "Are ya'll part of some secret Illuminati club that I don't know about or what?"

Kwan stares at me. "Illuminati?"

"Nevermind. Forget I said anything."

Kwan only shrugs and stretches out his hand. A black panther appears beside him, tail curled over its paws. He pats it between the ears, earnin' a chuff from it. "The two of us together will make too much noise, so when Caddy comes to get you, she'll take you to the fortress to wait for me. I'll worry about the Grand Belle's things and meet up with you at the hour of the pig."

My gaze flicks between Caddy and Kwan. "You sure it's gonna be alright with just me and Caddy?"

"As long as you follow her and don't draw attention to yourself. She knows the patrols as well as I do," Kwan says. "But once you leave camp, make sure you roll in something that can mask your scent until I catch up with you. Even though most people don't know your scent yet. They'll be keen to investigate since you're an outsider."

My heart thuds harder and harder at every word Kwan says. Heck, I haven't even tried to sneak out yet and I'm already scared out of my mind! And there ain't no preparin' for it either. It's _tonight._

" _What?_ "

Go Dong slaps Su Ho upside the head. "Sssshhh!" He turns back to look at the tent flap, then at me. "That soon?"

"Yeah, so if you're coming, you both better get to the fortress by the hour of the pig."

Su Ho rubs his head and stirs the stew at Hyde's cauldron. "You're not going with us?"

"Kwan said everyone is goin' separately," I say.

"So we don't get caught," Go Dong mutters. "A lot of people together would get a lot of attention."

"You guys can make it right?" I ask.

Go Dong and Su Ho exchange a frownin' look. Su Ho's shoulders slump. "I didn't think it would be _this_ soon. The Nag Bag might have us working still. We're stocking up for a feast. You know how she is. If we even slack for a second, we'll never hear the end of it."

"Kwan's not gonna wait though," I say. "If you guys aren't there by the hour of the pig, we're gonna be gone."

Go Dong scrubs his forehead. "It's gonna be hard for us. We can't just walk out of camp like everybody else here."

"Come on, man," Su Ho says. "We got try."

"I don't know, Su Ho." Go Dong gets up. "What if we fail, huh? That's the end of all of us. Poof!"

Su Ho's eyebrows furrow. "What are you talkin' about? You're the one that wanted to do it in the first place."

Go Dong frowns. "I know I just..." He gives a weak shrug. "It's not _that_ bad here."

At this Su Ho gives him a hard up and down look. "Just say you're scared."

Go Dong whips around. "What did you say?"

"Why don't you just admit it, huh?" Su Ho snaps. "You always back out first out of everything."

Go Dong squares up, his face reddinin' up like a pepper. But then he just folds his arms up and says, "I don't need to prove anything to you." He stalks outside. "I'm getting some air."

Su Ho's lips press together into a thin white slash. He doesn't say anything, but instead just stirs the stew.

My heart sinks. "I didn't mean to—"

"It's not your fault," Su Ho says firmly. "Just thought he was better than that. He was the one who told me about it and got all excited."

I glance at the tent exit. "Are you goin' then?"

"You kidding?" Su Ho ladles a small bit of stew into a bowl. "I'm not passing this up. You _have_ to take the chances that come to you. Who knows when it'll come around again. Forget Go Dong."

"Well be safe out there," I say. "I don't want nothin' happenin' to nobody for my sake."

"I'll try to stash some food for the road," Su Ho says. "It'll save us time."

"Good thinking," I say. "Let me go and get ready. I don't know when I'm gettin' picked up."

Su Ho wets his lips with soup. "Good luck. And don't get caught."

I head back to my tent and open the chest. I take out the spear. _Can you guys take this?_

_I'll take that,_ Forte says. As he finishes speakin', the spear poofs out of my hands. _What of your Lifebook? Shall I take that as well?_

_Give me a little longer with it._ I take the blue book out of the chest. _I want to look at the memories before we go._

_Oooh, I'm getting nervous and this isn't even my save file,_ Brio says.

_What do you have to be nervous about, monkey?_ Aria asks.

_I hate stealth missions,_ Brio says. _I'd rather run up to all the guards and bonk them on the head._

_And get surrounded and arrested and executed too, I see,_ Forte says. _I despise stealth missions too, but waltzing through armed establishments as one man is unrealistic._

_Look who's talking about unrealistic, Mr. Slap Ya Mama!_ Brio shrieks.

I tune them out as they go on and thumb through the memories. I realize with an uncomfortable prick that all of them have Sul Li in them. I frown. _We did everything together._ If we were that close, why would she leave out the truth?

_"But wait a minute. What do you mean by us leavin' havin' something to do with you? You did something?"_

_"I'm not sure, Chun Chu. It's just a feeling I had. I don't know if it's true and I really don't want to talk about it either."_

Could it be that?

I flip through the memories again, focusin' on just Sul Li. And I notice that the same memory of her, Prince Ui Ja and me is there. The last memory in fact. When I get to the blank pages, I stop. _This is must be the point where I was taken away._ Which means whatever happened after that was what triggered it. And if it really happened to her, Sul Li ought to have it recorded in her Lifebook. I wish I'd thought to ask.

But then again, knowin' Sul Li, she'd probably tell me off for stickin' my nose in her business.

_I wonder if it had anything to do with Yami._

A quiet chuff from outside gets my attention. I turn around to find Caddy pokin' her head into my tent. "It's time already?"

Caddy nods and creeps in, lookin' at me expectantly.

"Dang it. Kwan wasn't jokin' about gettin' out of here," I mutter. _Forte, take the Lifebook for me._

The book immediately poofs out of my hand. I stand up and look around one last time to make sure there's nothin' I'm forgettin'. "Alright, I'm ready."

Caddy curls a paw toward herself and disappears.

_Heh...Guess that disappearin' trick is really all in the panther._ I step cautiously out of my tent and look around.

I find Caddy crouched at the edge of the forest not too far away, her green eyes blinkin' slowly.

I start toward her, but then I pause and peer around the tent.

"AND WHERE DO YA THINK YER GOIN'?"

Alarm roots me to the spot. I scan around, but it's not me. Not too far away, Hye is havin' a go at Go Dong, shakin' her fist and grindin' her teeth. They ain't payin' attention, but if Hye sees me and open up her big mouth, I'm done for. I glance at where Caddy is—or rather where she was. She ain't standin' there now.

_If I can creep real slow, I don't think they'll see me._ I crouch down and inch carefully.

"—Slackers thinkin' ya'll can get away with doin' no work!" Hye goes on. "Who do ya think _you_ are?"

When I get to the other side, I hide in a bush and let out my breath. _Whew! That was nerve-wrackin'._

"And where are you going?" A new voice says. "Aren't you Gwang's guest?"

I jump to my feet, clingin' to the nearest tree.

The newcomer is a man I've never seen before: thick-set and with a weedy-thin mustache. He has a hand on his blade. Patrol man, no doubt.

"Errr...I was just uh..." _Come on... Think stupid!_ "Just... goin' to the bathroom?"

His eyebrows furrow. "Room? For a bath?"

My pulse fires faster and faster. Oh right, they don't have bathrooms here. "Eh, I gotta go use the loo."

"Loo?"

"To do number 2?"

The man scratches his head. "I don't know what you mean."

"I have to poo really bad!" I blurt out.

The man's face wrinkles in disgust. "Ugh! Why didn't you just say that?" He points his sword away into the forest. "Go do it far away. I don't want to smell it."

"Don't worry." I slip past him. "I'll make sure to go real far."

As the man leaves, I creep away. And as soon as I get a few trees away, Caddy reappears. "And where the heck have you been?"

The panther's ears swivel at the question. She turns and vanishes, reappearin' farther away and curlin' her paw in a beckonin' gesture again.

_Not much of a talker, huh?_

_Eh, Magus Panthers tend to be the quieter sort,_ Brio says.

With a last look behind me, I follow after Caddy. The sound of Hye's voice quickly fades behind us. _I hope she falls asleep soon._ Now that Go Dong's been caught walkin' around, it's gonna make it hecka hard for Su Ho to get out. Why couldn't go Go Dong just walk to a different part of the tent? Argument or not, that was still dumb.

_Dumb...or genius._ Brio says. _After all, misery loves company. Like crabs in a bucket._

_What do you mean?_ Aria asks.

_I heard somewhere that if you put crabs in a bucket, they just drag each other down while they try to escape,_ Brio says. _Humans do it to each other sometimes._

_It ain't really our business why anybody did anything,_ I say. _It's only our business to scoot when Kwan says to scoot._

_I agree,_ Forte says.

The trees thin into the crumbled remains of a limestone fortress built into a rock face. Caddy pads to the edge of the stream passin' through and laps at the water. I go around the walls and peer inside. Empty. _Kwan ain't here yet._ I s'pose I might as well make myself comfortable. S _ure wish I knew what time it is._

_I'm certain Kwan will come on time,_ Aria says. _He seems to be the more serious type of man._

_And we've got bigger fish to fry,_ Brio adds. _Like what's the plan when we get to Silla?_

_The Queen has to check us both out, don't she?_ I pick a grassy spot next to the fortress doorway. _Kwan's doin' the heavy part._ At the same time, all that work is just to get us _inside_ Silla's door. People need support for bein' king, don't they? Far as I know, I don't really have much of that. And the "supporters" that I do have are all up in the air. Even Kwan. He's doin' all of this for his family, not for me. _Much as I don't want to say I can't trust nobody in this world, it's startin' to look like I've got to act that way, ain't it?_

_For now,_ Forte says. _I think that you are worrying about kingship much too soon. Trust takes time to build, even with one person. Would not building trust with millions be a commitment as well?_

_Yeah, but remember what Ha Jong said._ I pull at the grass. _Silla needs my help._

_If that is true, then it is more advisable to wait and be still,_ Forte says. _Silla is still a land you hardly know._

_I agree with Forte,_ Aria says. _Let's learn our way around things first._

_Preferably without tutorials,_ Brio mutters. _Because if we have to stop for a tutorial every time we see something new—_

_Enough about tutorials,_ Forte snaps. _You_ **_will_** _endure one if the situation calls for it._

_Speakin' of endure..._ I begin. _Hand me my Lifebook, I'm gettin' bored._

My Lifebook poofs into my lap and I pass the time, flippin' through the memories and keepin' an eye on Caddy who sits in the fortress doorway. Eternity and a dog's age seems to pass before I hear a rustlin' sound. I lower my book.

Su Ho is the one that stumbles out into the clearin'. He waves at me.

I wave back. "You made it!"

"Almost didn't though." He walks over. "Hye was watchin' everything like a hawk since she caught Go Dong outside. But Daeshim called her and—whoosh! I was gone like the Gayan winds!" He plops down on the grass with a broad smile. "Where's Kwan? Isn't this his panther?"

"He didn't show up yet." I close my Lifebook. "Go Dong really ain't comin'?"

Su Ho's smile fades. "Looks like it. He saw me leaving and he didn't do anything." He gives a brittle shrug and puts on an even more brittle smile. "Too bad. He's the one missing out."

I don't say anything. Though I ain't been around them long, I'd always had the feelin' that they were close buddies. Almost feel like I'm responsible for splittin' them. I look at Caddy who's green gaze is trained on the direction that Su Ho came from. She gets up and chuffs.

Kwan steps into the clearin', Sul Li's blade in one hand and her bag slung over his shoulder. He stops in front of us, his blue gaze flickin' between me and Su Ho. "Where is Go Dong?"

"He ain't comin'," I say, gettin' up. "We don't have to—" I stop as a putrid stink waft right up to me and clamp my hand over my nose. "Ewww... did you step in dog doo-doo or something?"

"No. I rolled in old drakehorse manure," Kwan says matter-of-factly. "Like you two _should have_ done before coming here. If a patrol discovers us, your scent will lead them right to us. Even a Sillan pup knows that."

Su Ho's lips suck in. "Oh...sorry."

Kwan shakes his head. "It doesn't matter now. We need to cover as much ground as possible tonight. So I hope you have everything that you need."

"I don't suppose you brought any food with you?" Su Ho asks hopefully.

Kwan just gives him a dirty look, tosses me Sul Li's bag, and walks on without a word.

Su Ho frowns and gets up. "Guess not."

I get up. My Einherjar take my Lifebook and Sul Li's bag.

_Ewwww!_ Aria squawks. _Did he roll in the manure with the bag too? It stinks._

_Hehe. Gotta be convincing Aria,_ Brio snickers.

The wind picks up as we follow Kwan's lead through the forest. We stop only once for a piss in a life-dead clearin' and press on until we get to the edge where the forest tapers into a huge red-brown pass glazed with snow.

"Woo! We made it to Stone Bear Pass!" Su Ho cheers. "Silla isn't far right?"

"No," Kwan says curtly. "Silla is nowhere near here. Silent Bastion isn't even close, because this _isn't_ Stone Bear Pass. This is the Forgotten Canyon."

"How far to Silent Bastion then?" I ask.

"We can make it there by midday tomorrow, provided that we have no delays or problems..." Kwan's voice trails as he looks up. Snow patters down from up above, dottin' his parka in white. Kwan's seemin'ly permanent frown deepens. "We need to get out of the open. We can't afford to get sick in the snow."

"Woo, I'm glad to hear that," Su Ho says. "My feet are killing me."

I almost chime in, but Kwan says, "They'll kill you for real if you can't keep up." Then Kwan plunges ahead without us.

"Hey!" Su Ho jogs ahead. "Wait up!"

I follow quietly, takin' in the towerin' cliffs. _One more day and I'll be at my real home._ My heart thuds, but my stomach is twistin' itself into knots. I wonder if I should've listened to my uncle and Eun Hae after all and just stayed home and never even bothered with Silent Bastion.

Kwan takes us into a fissure that we all have to squeeze into usin' our wolf-bear forms. The inside is a little roomier at least, but it's hardly enough for three grown wolf-bears. And it don't help that Su Ho keep squishin' himself near me because Kwan smells like applewood smoked shit.

"Kwan, can you go wash that off?" Su Ho moans. "I don't want to sleep with that stink in my nose."

"You also don't seem to want to live either," Kwan says. "Because if I do that, it will make it easier to find us."

Su Ho sniffs. "Meh. You've always got something to say, don't you?"

"Only for the exceptionally stupid." Kwan gets up and pads to the cave entrance. "But I don't recall inviting you here."

Su Ho's neck fur sticks straight up, but he keeps quiet and just turns away toward the wall.

I curl up and do my best to cover my nose until I drift to sleep.

When I dream, I'm in the dark, surrounded by the glowin' walls and cavernous darkness that was in my memory. My tail pins against my legs. "Sul Li?" The voice that comes out of me is small and childish.

But just like the memory, no one comes.

My paws shake under me. _Come on. If this is just like the memory, she's there hidin'._ I bring each paw forward, movin' toward the darkness. "Sul Li, I know you're there. You don't gotta hide."

But the further I walk into the dark, the more that terrible emptiness claws at me. And the more I feel the emptiness, the more I start to wonder if I really am completely alone.

"General Hong Do?" I call.

No one comes.

"Anybody?"

My voice echoes into the tunnel, then everything quickly returns to silence.

Two pairs of bright yellow eyes beam at me from the darkness. "Poor Wolfy...All alone _again._ "

Ice spreads through me from nose to tail-tip. _Skoll and Hati!_ I take a step back. "Why don't ya'll leave me alone? I was having a nice dream without ya'll."

"Nice dream?" One pair of eyes rotate a full one-eighty degrees. "We have nice dream too until Wolfies show up."

"But now I have better dream!" Skoll says. "I have dream that one day all Darkborn be free!"

"I have dream one day all Darkborn have justice!" Hati sings.

"I have dream Darkborn be safe and happy!" Skoll says. "And meanie humans are put away!"

"But you know who else have a dream?" Hati asks.

The whole cave tremors. A third pair of yellow eyes the size of headlights pierce the darkness.

Wind buffets me from behind, pickin' me up and carryin' me all the way to that...that... _thing._

"Stop kicking me you crazy furball!"

I wake up to find Su Ho jabbin' me with a paw. "Hey!" I push him away. "Cut it out!"

"You were making so much noise," Su Ho says. "Kwan told me to get you up before you tell every Gayan tribe where we are."

"Sorry," I mutter. "I wasn't havin' the best dream."

"I can tell." Su Ho sits up and grooms himself.

I get up too, lookin' for Kwan only to realize he's not here. "Where's Kwan?"

"He's outside checking how much snow fell last night," Su Ho says. "Sometimes when there's a lot of snow, we get false paths. Take one step on 'em and _whoooooop!_ " Su Ho theatrically falls over. "I know falling, isn't a big deal for you Sillans, but it's a big deal for the rest of us! And besides, you never know when a Darkborn nest is nearby."

"That's right," Kwan pokes his head inside. And he smells noticeably cleaner today. "Which is why we should get moving as soon as possible."

"But I'm hungry," Su Ho says. "When are we going to eat?"

"There is a small bit of unclaimed woodland just beyond the canyon before we reach the Sillan forests," Kwan says. "Make sure to eat as much as you can when we stop. If we kill anything on Sillan land, it only make it harder for them to listen to us, so hurry up and get ready. And you..." Kwan's attention shifts to me. "Make certain that your dragonbird is invisible."

_Got it!_ Aria chirps. _You won't have to worry about me._

Su Ho pulls himself to his paws and winces. "Oooh, I'm sore from yesterday."

When I get up, my paws and legs ache all over just like the day after I ran around with Sul Li on my delivery. _Boy, I ain't built for all this walkin'._

_At least there isn't much left,_ Aria says. _Remember, we'll be in Silla by today!_

_Or rather that is the plan,_ Forte says.

_Forte stop being such a downer, will ya?_ Brio asks. _We need hope._

_No, you need to be realistic,_ Forte says. _Not overinflated optimism._

I join Kwan outside and we wait for Su Ho before we continue. Yesterday, the snow barely speckled the canyon, but today our paws have a bit of crunchy slush to sink into. The cold numbs my pads underneath, and I can barely wait to have real floors under me.

As promised, Kwan stops us for a hunt as soon as we get out of the pass, and I quickly learn that I ain't good at it. Two rabbits run right through my paws while Kwan and Su Ho snatch them up like it's an all you can eat buffet.

Kwan tosses me one. "Alright, I think we've seen enough suffering."

Already eatin', Su Ho swipe his tongue over his lips. "You get a 'Pass' for effort."

"Effort doesn't feed anyone," Kwan says flatly. "Food does."

_Heh. We've got another Forte in the house,_ Brio says.

_J-kicking you sounds like a better option every day,_ Forte says in equal flatness.

"Leave him alone." Su Ho turns his half-finished meal over to the other side. "It's not like he'd know how to hunt."

"Most huntin' I've ever had to do was lookin' for good avocados at the grocery store," I mutter, flippin' my rabbit over with my nose. I nip at the fur with my teeth experimentally and spit it out. _Ick!_ I feel like I'm lickin' and nibblin' on somebody's dirty apartment floor.

Kwan stop eatin', his ears twitchin'.

Su Ho pauses. "What?"

But before Kwan can say somethin', the bush beyond start rustlin' wildly.

Su Ho and I jump to our feet, backin' away.

Kwan growls. "Who's there?"

A huge sable wolf-bear tumbles out of the bush, his eyes fearful. "Don't hurt me!"

Su Ho's eyes go wide. "Go Dong! I thought you weren't comin'!"

Go Dong picks himself up. "There's no time to explain! Gayans are behind me!"

Kwan pelt bristles to make him look twice his size. "You brought them _to_ us? Are you stupid?"

"This way!" A man shouts.

Go Dong crouches in the snow. "Sorry."

Kwan bares his teeth. "Enough of your blubbering! Move now!" Without waitin' for us, he runs past our kills. "Our only chance is to hope they don't cross Sillan land!"

Su Ho seems rooted at the command, but when the furious sound of paw steps get closer. He bolts off after Kwan. Go Dong and I run after them.

My pulse is gallopin' faster than I am. The Gayans are gainin' on us. Their pelts streak closer in the corner of my eyes.

_Gods don't let them get us!_

Without warnin', a blunt weight slams into me.

Pain explodes into my side. The blow carries me off my paws. I struggle to get up, but claws clamp to my shoulders and fangs pinch into my neck.

Electric panic flares through my whole body. _They're trying to kill me!_

"Ain't even going to fight back?" The Gayan growls in my ear. "You have some nerve running off!"

A sharp yelp pierces my ears. I stiffen. _Su Ho!_ They're probably tearin' him to bits too!

Everything is goin' wrong!

_Stay calm, human,_ Forte says. _Don't move wait until you feel his teeth. You can catch him off-guard._

It takes all my willpower to stay there. As the seconds rake on, I'm acutely aware of how vulnerable I am like this. What if Forte is wrong and this guy doesn't use his teeth at all? What if I wait too long exposed and he kills me some other way.

But a sharp prick in my neck dispels my thoughts and I push up with all my strength.

"Aroo—ack!" He flies off me and drops into a bush.

But the rest of the woods is a sea of fur, snow, and blood. Su Ho kicks at two Gayans that have him pinned. Go Dong grapples with another Gayan as big as him. I don't see Kwan, but I do see Caddy and three Gayans circle her with a wide berth.

And to make it worse, there are even _more_ Gayans comin'!

I turn to bolt, but the Gayan I threw off bars the way.

His nostrils flare. "You got lucky. But I can guarantee you can't pull that again."

"I agree," comes Jin Yi's voice. "Because you'll _never_ cross our territory like this ever again."

I look up and I only register a flicker of moment before Sillans rain from the trees above and completely overtake the Gayans.

I flatten myself against the ground, half-expectin' to be attacked too. But the Sillans run past me like I ain't even here.

When the last Gayan is gone, the Sillans give a long victorious howl.

I look around. Go Dong picks himself up. Kwan joins Caddy, patches of fur missin' from his flank. Su Ho is the ground and hardly movin'. Go Dong runs to him. "Su Ho!" He shakes Su Ho. "Buddy? Come on man, say something!"

At the cry, a white Sillan wolf-bear nudges a silver one with a honey badger on her back. "Commander, that outsider is hurt."

"Geum Young," Jin Yi calls, causin' a smaller black bear-wolf to perk her ears. "Go check on the injured one. I'll deal with the other outsiders."

As Geum Young goes off to fulfill her orders, the rest of the Sillans form a tight circle around us. For a brief moment, it crosses my mind that Jin Yi just might finish what the Gayans started, but then she asks, "Why are you on our lands, outsiders?"

Kwan, Go Dong and I look amongst each other. Go Dong backs behind Kwan, usin' him as a shield.

"Why are you quiet?" Jin Yi demands. "You've brought bloodshed to our doorsteps. The least you could do is explain yourselves."

When I realize nobody else is gonna say anything, I say, "I found Sul Li's sword and her stuff that she lost. I wanted to bring it back to her."

"And you are a fool for coming all the way here for just that," Jin Yi says coldly. "And risking your friend's health on top of it."

"We did not come for just that," Kwan says. "We've brought proof of King Dae Wong's death as well."

"If that is so, then let me see your so-called proof," Jin Yi says.

_Guys,_ I call. _Let her see the spear._

Mjolnir poofs into the snow before Jin Yi. She lowers her head to inspect it briefly before she eyes us.

"Don't tell me you find fault with it, Commander," Kwan says.

"I am not blind." She pushes the spear towards me and turns to face Kwan. "What I am not sure about is how you really came by this. With how the four of you struggled today, you expect me to believe that any of you could kill a man as skilled as King Dae Wong?"

Kwan holds her gaze evenly."We thought Queen Seon Deok would be more interested in discerning that for herself."

Jin Yi's twin tails twitch back and forth, but she remains silent.

My paws start to shake as the forest's silence becomes more pronounced. Gods, I hope Kwan didn't say anything to screw up our chances of gettin' in.

Finally, Jin Yi turns toward Geum Young. "How is he?"

"I've stopped the bleeding," she says. "He'll be okay, but he'll probably need a little more care. We can move him if we're careful."

My heart jumps into my throat. Does that mean she'll take us with her?

Jin Yi's gaze sweeps over us and she finally says, "Queen Seon Deok is not in Silent Bastion at present, but if you truly wish to have an audience with her then you may come with us."

"Really?" I blurt out. "That's great! Can you get us in to see Sul Li too?"

Growls and flattened ears break out at the question.

"Perhaps..." Jin Yi raises her tails for quiet. "But for now I am placing you all under arrest."

My jaw falls. "Under arrest? But I thought—"

Her eyes narrow. "Do you need everything repeated to you, boy? Outsiders do not get to trespass freely."

I feel my own tail droop behind me. Well gee... Back to square one, just like when we met at the ruins. I can't say I expected Jin Yi to be all over me when I arrived, but seriously? I guess I can't complain. At least we're gettin' into Silla.

The rest of the Hwarang with her surround us and take it upon themselves to carry Su Ho. Jin Yi leads us deeper into the forest. Kwan follows close behind her. Go Dong, on the other hand, hangs back closer to Su Ho and looks at him every now and again.

My legs jellify by the time we finally get to the first sign of bein' in the heart of Sillan territory: evergreen trees and pretty firefly-like lights that scatter at our approach. The lights go higher and higher until I realize they're goin' towards a matrix of platforms and bridges up in the trees above us. Each layer of bridge and platforms connect to one another in a unique pattern like a snowflake.

"Whoa..." Go Dong whispers. "It's Silent Bastion." He nudges me excitedly. "We're really here!"

My whole body almost quivers. _I'm home._ It ain't the way I imagined, but I'm really home.

### _1-8_

JIN YI LEADS us up a spiralin' wooden walkway that curves around the center tree trunk. I know people say it ain't polite to stare, but I can't bring myself to blink until my eyes sting. There's so much to see!

We reach the lowest of Silent Bastion's platforms and Jin Yi takes us across a moon bridge. Trains of flowerin' ivy climb up the ribs of the arches that loom over our heads. I don't see any dirt or soil on the ground, but a curly vine streetlight blooms a peach-shaped lantern and shines. And not just that, but paulownia trees and wisteria (normal sized ones, thank the gods) don't seem to have any trouble rainin' lavender blooms in the dead of winter. It ain't particularly cold in Silent Bastion either, as if we left it behind on the ground.

We cut through a square where a bit of the crowd is gatherin' up to watch a woman dancin' with fans. Her red and black skirt ebbs like water. As she spins, her fishtail braid whips with her; she spills into a fluid bow, smile peekin' beneath her red hat.

I squint. Is that Eun Hae? It looks like it, but Eun Hae is part of the Hwarang. She probably don't have time for any of that junk. But now that I'm thinkin' about it...I'm here, so wouldn't she be able to hear me if I tried to reach her? Or at least sense my thoughts? Experimentally, I try to reach out with my mind. Though, it's hard to tell if I'm doin' any good, cuz the only thing I feel is my brain strainin'.

The woman twirls one fan and then the other, brings them together, handle to handle across her chest. But then she pauses. Her head tilts. She flutters her fans upward like the wings of an exotic butterfly and as she does the lip of her hat lifts. It _is_ Eun Hae.

And I run smack into a tree trunk for not payin' attention to where I'm goin', earnin' a few laughs from Jin Yi's patrol.

Brio stifles a laugh. _Real smooth, human._

_Don't make fun of him monkey!_ Aria chides. _Human, are you okay?_

_Yeah, I'm fine. Just didn't expect to see familiar faces that soon._

Go Dong waits for me to get up, lookin' plenty amused himself. "Never seen a courtesan before?"

"We don't have those where I come from," I say, pushin' myself off the ground. When Go Dong turns around, I look back to sneak another look at Eun Hae, but the crowd is already dispersin' and I can't see a thing.

But I do sense a fleetin' hint of curiosity that isn't mine.

Jin Yi stops us at a circle with letters on it. To the guards, carryin' Su Ho she says, "Take him to the Falling River Compound."

They give a brief, "Ye" before scurryin' off to who knows where. Then Jin Yi gestures for us to get on the circle.

Once we're all standing on it, it blinks us up another layer where we finally backtrack towards the centermost tree, but unlike the layer below, a grand multi-storied pagoda castle stretch high like the neck of a bird and two-shaped towers beside it. The latticed wooden doors slide open for us.

Aisles of books stretch as far back as I can see and most folk got their noses buried in at least one. I don't see anybody readin' the way Sul Li showed me—which I guess make sense since this looks like some sort of library; everybody here reads with a finger on the pages. Cats of all kinds stroll around with noisy bells on their collars and bellhop uniforms on their heads. A white cat ambles over to one of those teleportin' circles, but instead of blinkin' the cat away it lights up and a stairway of light spirals up to the next floor. One shifts into a mountain lion to pick up a whimperin' book off the floor and put it back on its proper shelf.

The patrol escorts us to the front desk where a brown Main Coon tabby shoves a graspin' hand back into its story book.

"I'LL HAVE YOUR FAMILY TIED TO HORSES AND—" The man don't get to finish before the cat push him all the way in.

"And your mother didn't love you enough?" The Main Coon yawns. "Yes, yes, I know, King Jin Ji. I've only heard you tell me seven million five hundred ninety two thousand six hundred twenty seven times and still counting." He closes the book and shakes himself to ring his collar bell and taps it twice to make it glow. "Keeping Cat to the front desk! Please return King Jin Ji's Lifebook back to the Memoir Cemetery. He refuses to use his inside voice and he's rather quite annoying. Thank you."

At our approach, the tabby's tail sweeps behind him. "Welcome to the Grand Library of Lore where we have books, soaps, and unhelpful observations galore! Are you here to stay or just to listen to all the embarrassing secrets that I know about everyone?"

"Neither, Zhen Lao," Jin Yi says. "Where is the Grand Belle?"

"Ah-hem." Zhen Lao points to his own bell. "I'm wearing quite the grand bell here if I say so myself."

"I mean Seung Man," Jin Yi says. "I brought in prisoners that claim they have her possessions. I wish to ask her feelings on the matter."

"Oh her." Zhen Lao's whole body sags in disappointment. "I think she said that she'd be praying at the Ancestral Altar today." He glances up as a snowshoe cat comes up to the counter. "Do me a favor, Xue Fang. While you're on your way to the cemetery, let these humans up to the Ancestral Altar, please."

The snowshoe cat shakes itself, shiftin' into a snow leopard. "Very well, but I must warn you that it's a long walk."

And a long walk is right.

Xue Fang takes us all the way up to the top floor of the whole library with no fancy teleportin'. And by the time we get up there, my legs feel like they're ready to give out. Heck, I thought deliverin' to Kage Village was hard. Jin Yi's folk ain't even so much as blinkin' at this. Sillans must have nothin' but diamonds in their calves and thighs.

At the top floor, more lattice doors open for us. Up ahead, the doorway takes the shape of a dragon's face. Its eyes fix on us and it clenches its fangs to shut the doorway.

"Firewall, we need to get in," Xue Fang says. "Our guests need to see the Grand Belle."

Smoke purls out of Firewall's nose. "If you wish to see the Grand Belle, you must past my ultimate test or face my Blue Screen of Unpleasant Obliteration! I've been working on it for quite some time and I've finally perfected it."

Xue Fang tilts his head. "Again?"

Firewall ignores that and clears his throat loudly. "I'm thinking of an animal aaaaaaaaaand—"

"Is it a dragon?" Xue Fang asks.

Firewall gawks. "How did you know that?"

"That was the answer last time, Firewall."

Firewall pouts. "Ooooh, come on! Best two out of three?"

Xue Fang's tail twitches irritably. "No, Firewall. We're on official business."

Firewalls sighs. "You Keeping Cats keep guessing all my answers. But no matter... I'll just have to think of another test. You may proceed! For now!" Firewall opens his mouth all of the way and a blue carpet rolls out, endin' at our feet.

We step into a long hallway with a high vaultin' ceilin'. The right wall teems with tally marks, but the left wall swirls with reliefs of giant monsters and small men strugglin' against them; the scene changes with our steps—to men fightin' the Darkborn, then to men fightin' men.

"What is this place?" Go Dong asks.

"This is the Wall Of War," Jin Yi says. "Every war Silla has had to fight is magically recorded here." She points to the tally marks on the right with her muzzle. "Those are lives lost. Uncrossed ticks are people who died at the hands of another man in combat. Crossed ticks are those who died to Darkborn attacks."

"The Grand Belle prays here and does the soothing rites for all of Silla's dead," Geum Young adds. "So those who die traumatically do not become Darkborn themselves."

As we walk, I can't help but notice that the crossed ticks outweigh the uncrossed ones by a long shot. I shiver.

Inside the next room, aisles of pine and cedar incense seethe from fat-bellied lotus censers. Yellow dragons dangle their tails, end hooked to hold glowin' pearls and their mouths bared up at the glass ceiling clock and the gold tiger in the Symphonic Stream above.

Atop a flight of steps, back turned, Sul Li lights the large golden dragon censer on the altar in front of her. Smoke becomes the spine of mane. Smoke becomes the tail tip. Smoke curls beneath it like bed of clouds. Without turnin' to see us, Sul Li says, "I thought I told you no audience today, Firewall."

"I'm sorry, Your Highness, but they guessed the password," Firewall's voice booms from all around.

Jin Yi shifts into human form and gets down on one knee. "They claim they've slain Dae Wong and brought your things."

Sul Li brings the joss sticks to her lips, blowin' out the burnin' tip. "That's quite a claim." She faces us, and I feel I'm lookin' at her for the first time again. But at least the first time, I didn't know anything about her or her family. There was no fear to feel. The gold floral spangles woven into her hair jingle as she descends the steps in brilliant white robes. "One that I hope is true for their sake."

My heartbeat hammers so wild in my chest that I almost feel a little sick. Does she recognize me? She's never seen this form of me. But even still, I could recognize General Hong Do and Jin Yi when they were transformed. It's hard to tell from here, but the longer she remains quiet, the more I start to think that maybe she does recognize me and that maybe Daeshim and Gwang were right, after all. Chest tightenin', I step forward, "Please, Sul Li. I came all this way to—"

The Lion Heart wolf-bear next to me growls. "You were not invited to speak, outsider!"

I jump at his voice and go back to where I was with no choice but to just look at Sul Li.

"Even so..." Jin Yi goes on. "They trespassed on our territory and brought Gayans on our land to come here. I thought to take them to Restricted Access initially, but if their deed is true then Special Collections might be more fitting. But I thought your counsel might be best to decide the matter."

"I see..." Sul Li says. "I wish to speak with the outsider."

Another Lion Heart guard pricks his ears. "Just one, Your Highness?"

"Yes. The one who spoke," Sul Li says. "The others will wait outside. Please silence the room on your way out."

Jin Yi stands at once and faces the rest of us. "You all heard her. Move it!"

All the guards, Kwan, and Go Dong hoof it on the command.

_Forte, let me be human,_ I think. Forte's magic releases me from my wolf-bear form and I stand up. Sul Li's stuff poofs into my arms. I hold it out to her. "I brought your stuff."

She looks at the bag and shakes her head. "You should not have."

My shoulders slump and I clench the bag tighter. "Well it's too late for that, ain't it? I can't even get a 'thank-you' or a 'hi', for comin' all the way out here?"

She yanks her bag out of my hands. "Chun Chu that's not the point! Do you know what could happen to you just for being here?"

"I sure do now. No thanks to you." I fold my arms. "When we you gonna tell me that I'm the prince of Silla, huh?"

Sul Li steps back, her face goin' just as red as her lips. But the way she just looks down and don't answer is the most horrifyin'.

I step away from her. "You weren't gonna tell me, were you?"

Her gaze snaps to me. "I was! But—"

"But it would get in your family's way, wouldn't it?" I snap. "So you let me live a lie!"

Sul Li bares her teeth. "I let you live your life the way you were used to! What was wrong with that? And besides, I showed you parts of our life."

"The parts that don't tell me jack-diddly about who I really am!"

Sul Li scoffs. "Am I your Keeping Cat? Is it my job to tell you everything you can't figure out for yourself?"

"No. But you're supposed to be my friend." I jab a finger at her.

"I am your friend!" Sul Li says.

"But you didn't tell me the truth," I snap. "But I guess since your Momma is Queen and all—"

She puts her hand on her hips. "And what of it? Do you think I'm supposed to betray my family just because you walk in here?"

I grit my teeth. "So it don't matter what happen to me as long as your folks are cozy on the throne? Even after you wanted me to come here."

"I wasn't thinking!" She lowers her bag on the ground. "And I said never mind, Mr. Forgetful."

"Not thinkin', huh?" I splay my fingers to keep from clenchin'. "So you never even wanted me here?"

"That's not what I meant. Stop twisting my words!"

"Then say what you mean! Because I don't like people actin' all buddy-buddy one minute, and leavin' me high and dry the next."

"As if it's that easy!" Sul Li snaps. "If my mother knew who you were, she would have you killed faster than you can say Silla."

"And what's keepin' quiet doin'? Ya'll are awfully comfortable on my throne."

Sul Li's nostrils flare. "What would you have me do? Tell everyone who you are and get you killed?"

I stare at her. "I want my throne."

"I can't give you that."

"Can't or don't want to?"

Her eyes widen. "You really think I would keep it from you just to be selfish?" She steps closer. "Chun Chu, I don't want to see you die over a crown."

"Well, you ain't gonna have to worry about that, because I'm gettin' mine and I'm livin' to tell the tale," I say. "With or without your help."

Wild hot anger flares in Sul Li's eyes. So much that her whole body shakes. So much that I can almost feel it as a thorny palpable wall.

So much that even I start to feel a little afraid.

Sul Li clenches her fists extremely tight. And quietly says, "Fine." She turns around and walks back up the steps. "Firewall! Tell Jin Yi and the others to come in!"

"On it!" Firewall chirps.

In a few moments, Jin Yi and the others come back in.

Sul Li says, "Take the outsiders to Special Collections for now. I will review their case this evening and send word to Her Majesty. If she does not reply, I will give a sentence, but when she arrives her word is final."

Jin Yi and the other guards dip their heads and usher us out the room. But even with my back-turned, I feel Sul Li's gaze brandin' me on the way out.

As it turns out, Special Collections is really just a fancy name for jail.

We're escorted down into a dim cellar hall flanked with iron-barred bookshelf cells. Huge armored lions prowl the corridors alongside the Hwarang and the occasional Keepin' Cat. Lantern sprouts cast a weak eerie light into the gloom.

Jin Yi stops us at a deep three-tiered shelf. The gear-shaped lock snarls and whirls a full-spin clock-wise. The guards take Kwan up to the top level. Go Dong to the second. And me to the lowest.

As Jin Yi locks me in, I grip the icy bars. "It's really gotta be like this? Just lockin' me up and throw away the key?"

"I would be grateful if I were you," Jin Yi says. "We put the irredeemable criminals in Restricted Access."

"Restricted Access?" I echo.

But Jin Yi don't answer and instead turns to leave with her patrol. As she leaves, a ginger Keepin' Cat shakes his bell and yowls, "Lawful Lion to the Satire section! Lawful Lion to Satire! Thank you!"

One of the huge lions come to stand guard at our cell and the Keepin' Cat trots away.

I slump down into my bed. What a day... Not a single thing went right. And so far, everybody except for Eun Hae just treated me like a dirty bug that need squishin'. And poor Su Ho probably need stitches. Now I won't say I expected an easy ride on the way here, but of all things the things that could've gone wrong, why couldn't what Daeshim and Gwang be wrong?

Sul Li didn't tell me I was king and she didn't even mean it when she said she wanted me to visit. Comin' to Niflheim wasn't even my plan, but still... No 'hey' or 'hi dawg'?

_Cheer up, human,_ Brio says. _It may look bad now, but this story isn't over yet!_

_Are you going to keep saying that through this whole adventure?_ Forte growls. _We'll get another monkey to fill in if you make that a habit._

_Just trying to bring some cheer,_ Brio mutters.

_Monkey, you should know by now that Forte hates that,_ Aria says. _And leave the human alone, he's probably tired._

Tired is an understatement. My calves are barkin' like chihuahuas and I don't want to imagine what kind of blisters and corns grew on my feet from walkin' all day.

"Hey..." Go Dong calls. "You two still up?"

I sit up. "Yeah, why?"

"What do you think is gonna happen to us?" He asks. "They wouldn't kill us, right?"

Kwan's snort sounds from up above. "Hwarang are not in the business of killing clueless idiots. That's why we're in Special Collections, not Restricted Access."

"Jin Yi was sayin' that, but what is that?" I ask.

"A part of the Grand Library of Lore you never want to go to," Kwan says. "The worst criminals and unmanageable books are kept there."

I frown. "Ya'll have trouble with books?"

A loud roar blast my ears.

"USE YOUR INSIDE VOICES AND NOT A DECIBEL MORE!" says the Lawful Lion. "THUS SAITH ZHEN LAO THE GRANDEST KEEPER OF LORE!"

I clamp my hands over my ears,. When the lion settles down, my muscles still shake. I stare up at the ceilin', wishin' it were my own. I'm home, but it's just as cold and strange and dark as the rest of Niflheim. I squeeze my eyes and shut. I can almost hear Skoll and Hati tauntin' me now about how alone I am.

I listen to stillness and the distant sounds of paw steps and Hwarang boots for a while, and then a thought pops into my mind.

Is Eun Hae nearby now?

Now that I'm thinkin' about it, what's the range on this..."connection" we have? After all, Eun Hae had been in my sight and I'd barely been able to sense her. But at the party, I couldn't even see her and she spoke clearly in my head. But knowin' Eun Hae—or rather knowin' so little about who she is, it probably ain't that straightforward.

But maybe I can call her from here and ask her what to do? I certainly can't get out of this mess myself.

Like last time, I try castin' the reaches of my mind as far as I can, but without her in front of me I'm left to focus on just my memories of her. I keep puttin' my thoughts out there until strain starts to set in and I stop to keep from startin' my own headache.

Wherever Eun Hae is she probably can't hear me.

I pull my pillow close so I can lay on it and shut my eyes.

When I wake up, I feel lighter. Not like a million bucks, but at the very least I do feel like I can handle today. I swing my legs over to get up from bed only to find Eun Hae outside of our cell, openin' up the bars.

"Eun Hae!" I jump out of bed, but then I stop and take a step back. "Err...you ain't here to send me off to Restricted Access or nothin' like that, are ya?"

"Restricted Access? A lamb like you?" She laughs softly and pushes the bars all the way back. "The Hwarang is not that unreasonable."

I step out of the cell. "Well what's a guy s'posed to think when someone he thinks he knows just arrests him?"

"It is a part of Jin Yi that everyone gets used to eventually," Eun Hae says. "It doesn't mean she likes you any less."

"Sure could've fooled me," I says.

"Well look at it this way," Eun Hae says. "These days a man is better protected here than on the streets of Silla." As a mental whisper she adds, _Especially the noble sort._

My neck prickles at the word noble. I glance down both ends of the hall. Seein' no Lawful Lions, I look back at Eun Hae. "So...am I free? Did Sul Li decide what to do with me?"

Eun Hae touches a finger to her chin. "Free is a very strong word. Indentured is probably a lot more accurate." She leans against the wall. "Queen Seon Deok's correspondence arrived this morning and Her Majesty ruled that you are not a threat, but your claims about the king's death will still have to be investigated by her. You and your friends will see her at Kim Manor when she decides your appointment." Eun Hae claps her hands together. "In the meantime, you are all free to go where you like in Silent Bastion, provided that you don't leave our borders."

"But when would that be?" I ask. "Remember I ain't got anywhere to stay here, and I don't know how busy the Queen is."

"Likely not very long. Her Majesty will return to Silent Bastion within today or tomorrow. She'll want to settle this matter quickly," Eun Hae says. "Until then, I can offer a little bit of space in the Falling River Compound, but if you do you'll have to do work just like the rest of the Hwarang." Then she smiles. "But at the very least, you'll get see how your companions are doing. And some familiar faces from the Telling are visiting today."

My heart flies into my throat. _Mi Shil!_ I'll get to see her again! "Count me in! What do you need me to do? I can cook for ya'll if you want me to."

"Then you can go with Jin Yi to the market and help her make today's meal with your friends."

At the mention of friends, I look back at the cell to find that Kwan and Go Dong are not in their cells. "Speakin' of my friends—"

"They are already at the compound," Eun Hae finishes with an amused grin. She starts down the halls. "You are the only late sheep."

"Well excuse me," I mutter. "Why didn't you just wake me up when you got them?"

She looks over her shoulder. "You looked so peaceful there. Who am I to disturb you?"

I put a hand to my head. "C'mon Eun Hae. I don't want to play _that_ game today."

She chuckles. "I'll spare you the pain then."

We leave the Grand Library of Lore, where Honey stands in between the lines of a rectangular box that I can only assume is s'posed to be a drakehorse parking space. A burly man in Wings of Heaven tunic stands between her horse and another blue-gray one standin' all over the lines of its space and the ones next to it. He scrawls somethin' on a parchment pad with a calligraphy brush, tears it from the pad and smacks it right on the blue-gray drakehorse's butt, earnin' a confused-soundin' whinny from the incorrectly-parked animal.

"Don't try to act all innocent now!" The man says. "If you want to give excuses, you and your owner can tell it to the traffic magistrate." He jabs a finger at the scaly horse's nose. "Next time, you're getting towed and impounded, buddy. Other people need to park too."

"Catching violators early, Al Cheon?" Eun Hae says as she unties Honey's reigns from the parkin' post. "I love the smell of perpendicularly-parked horse in the morning."

"You're darn straight I am!" He semaphores to the drakehorse in front of him like an air traffic man havin' a fit. "Look at him, Commander! He's taking up three spaces! Three!" Then he notices me and perks up, "Who is this?"

"This is Kurai," Eun Hae says. "He's going to be staying with us until the Queen sees him. Kurai, this is Al Cheon. He's one of my senior officers."

"Well it's nice to meet ya," Al Cheon says. "Sorry in advance for bein' loud."

"Don't worry. I'm used to hearin' people bein' loud at home," I say.

Eun Hae and Al Cheon exchange a look. Then Eun Hae mounts Honey. "At home, he says."

"If you say so, buddy," Al Cheon says. Then he puts up a finger. "Oh yeah before I forget! The real reason I came all the way out here was because Ah Ri wanted me to ask you what she should do with Hwarang reassignment applications. She's never dealt with those before. And You-Know-Who is nagging about wanting them asap."

"I'll take care of those myself." Eun Hae turns Honey around. "But Ah Ri didn't accept any applications did she?"

Al Cheon's pad and brush poof away. "Nope. I told her not to like you said. But the deadline isn't up yet and people keep submitting," Al Cheon says. "The Queen had it extended. I don't know what she thinks we're going to do with those trainees."

"It is probably for the bigger guards," Eun Hae says. "Bo Jong said that the Tiger Fury are going to give every pack the max amount of trainees."

Al Cheon frowns. "Sweet horse butter loogies... All of them? What for?"

"Supposedly it's for border security, but a little bird told me that the Dragon Dance guard came to Queen Seon Deok appealing for it a while back," Eun Hae says. "Then Lord Sada Ham appealed to Her Majesty for it."

Al Cheon puts both hands on his head, his frown deepenin'. "He's everywhere, isn't he?" Then he shakes his head. "Can't believe people are still thinking about clan rivalries at a time like this."

"If you're sticking around Silent Bastion, ask Min Ah if she's done with the registry," Eun Hae says. "I need the names."

"You got it, Ma'm," Al Cheon says with a salute. "I'll see you back at the compound."

As he walks off toward his own horse, Eun Hae urges Honey forward. "Come. Let's go before Jin Yi leaves to the market."

I lengthen my strides to catch up to Honey's pace. "Who is Lord Sada Ham?"

"That's a good question."

I scrub a hand over my face. "Oh gods almighty, please don't tell me I walked into another essay."

Eun Hae side-glances at me, smilin'. "Another essay? Is that what I've become to you these days?"

"No, but I've seen and heard enough to write a whole novel," I say.

She chuckles. "You don't say."

"Yes I do say. Unless you got a secret over there I should know, Miss Smiley."

The only answer to my comment is a raised eyebrow and a nonchalant smile as she leads us to the entrance of Silent Bastion and down the spiral walkway.

I peer around at the Hwarang dottin' the ground below. "We're leavin' Silent Bastion?"

"Not completely," Eun Hae says. "The Hwarang compounds are kept away from Silent Bastion to deter the Darkborn from coming near and to catch other threats. But also in case you haven't noticed, Silent Bastion is all wood." She pats Honey's neck. "And our scaly friend here is part fire-breathing dragon. All it takes is a little extra fiber for breakfast or an upset stomach and all of Silent Bastion will come burning down. Unless you have special accommodations of course."

I look at Honey's tail in bewilderment. _And here I thought eatin' a spicy fish burrito was bad._

The Symphonic Stream carves out the open gates of the compound in red light. Inside, a blue flag with tree wavy lines flaps a totem pole clock tower. I recognize Sul Won standin' guard at the entrance with another doughy-lookin' boy. They dip their heads as Eun Hae stops Honey and climbs off.

"Welcome back, Commander," Sul Won says. "Shall I take Honey to the stables?"

"Please do." She hands him the reigns. "Tell Chul Soon and Dong Moon to come take your shift."

"What about me?" The other boy asks.

"You get to show Kurai around the compound for a little bit," Eun Hae says. "Kurai, this is Jin Soon of the Kim Clan. He's also a temporary volunteer."

Jin Soon puffs up. I don't think I ever seen any man so crowed up with pride. "What an honor!"

"It's nice to meet you Mr. Jin Soon," I say.

"Wait until you see the workshop!" Jin Soon says. "And the chess room!"

"That's a good start," Eun Hae says. "Just be certain to take Kurai to Jin Yi once she's done tending to Su Ho. She'll be expecting him by the hour of the Horse."

"Ye!" Jin Soon ducks his head so hard that his little Hwarang hat falls right off his head. "Whoops!" He stoops to pick it up. "Sorry about that."

"You're fortunate we're not real Hwarang," Sul Won warns. "It's a penalty when conditioning is over."

Eun Hae turns to me. "If you need me for anything, I'll be in my office."

I nod slowly.

"I'll leave you both to your little tour," Eun Hae says, walkin' away. "Try to stay out of trouble. The Lion Heart trainees are officially moving in today."

"We will!" Jin Soon chirps. Then he pumps both fists up. "Where do you want to go first?"

You're way more excited about this than me... "Anywhere is fine..." Then a thought comes to mind. "Hey, I don't suppose Mi Shil is here, is she?"

"Mi Shil?" Jin Soon scratches his head. "Eh? She might be? I don't really know everybody's names. Is she a trainee?"

"Nope. She's a volunteer too."

Jin Soon's lips purse. "Oh uh...maybe she's been on different shifts than me? I see new people all the time so it's hard to keep up."

"Which makes me wonder what exactly is the volunteer thing? I thought it was only for the Telling," I say.

Jin Soon shakes his head. "Well the whole thing is for people who have family in the Hwarang. Even though we're not Hwarang, we're allowed to assist and wear uniform for certain events."

"But don't normal people get you confused with the real authorities?" I ask.

"Nope," Jin Soon says. "Real Hwarang usually have their weapons visible somewhere when they're on duty." He points to his hat. "Or you can just check their mogwan. They're the real deal if they have an emblem on front. You'll see when we go in." Then he stands up and beams at me. "So let's get going, outsider!"

Unlike the rest of Silent Bastion, the Hwarang camp starts on the ground. The moment we step in a huge common room sprawl out in front of us with a pair of slidin' doors on every side. Two curved staircases rib alongside the walls and splay to different entrances on the next floor above. Two blue and black-clad guys that I ain't seen before sit around on the fur-pelted cushions.

A guy with a long ponytail and a scarred cheek glances at me and bounces to his feet, lips curled."An outsider! Who let _you_ in here?"

"An outsider?" The brunette beside him looks up from his book. "Ooooh! Why is he so dark like a Pak?"

The first young man rolls her eyes. "It's probably sunny where he came from, Mijin Bu." Then his eyes narrow at me. "And where he should go back to."

"Hey hey Bo Ri, calm down," Jin Soon says standin' between me and them. "Commander Eun Hae brought him. He's our guest."

At this Bo Ri and Mijin Bu look at one another in bafflement.

"The Commander _brought_ him?" Mijin Bu asks in disbelief.

Bo Ri's eyebrows scrunch together. "On...purpose? He is staying?"

Their words take me completely aback. _Well damn._ "Maybe we should go, Jin Soon."

Bo Ri sniffs. "Yes, you should. We don't need any outsiders around here."

"Ehh...How you we go to the Magi's Workshop?" Jin Soon asks with an overly huge smile that I can tell is meant to distract me. "Some people are working in it now so it out to be reeeeeally fun. Then I guess I can show you to the Library of War, so you know where it is. He pulls on my sleeve, "Come this way."

I follow him through the right hand pair of doors into a long hallway, though not before lookin' behind me where Bo Ri and Mijin Bu are settlin' down again. I shiver. I knew people didn't like outsiders much here, but I didn't expect _that. Guess I ought to stay away from them._

Jin Soon counts five rooms on the left hand side before he pulls open the doors.

Long low desks squat against the ground in rows while shelves and cabinets ring the walls. Buildin' materials lay everywhere: corks, cogs, springs, tools, toolboxes, saws, logs, scrap metal, boxes with those funny rune letters on them, mannequin stands, antennas with blinkin' bulbs on the end, drafted blueprint pinned to the tables, and even flint and tinder unstruck. A smoky maples-sweetness hangs in the air.

My eyes widen as I take in the whole room. Then my gaze goes to two trainees in blue tunics surroundin' a gorilla golem made from wood. "Ya'll build stuff?"

"Cool right?" Jin Soon chirps. He makes a wide gesture to the whole room. "This is where the resident packs make their jotnar." He points to a fire elephant in the back of the room thats busy flappin' its ears and trumpetin' loudly. "See? That's Pats over there. He's a fire jotun. And professionally built by our instrumentalists!"

"What do they do?"

"It depends," says a familiar feminine voice.

My heart skips.

We both turn around to find Mi Shil and her brother walkin' inside.

Mi Shil nods towards Pats. "Some jotnar are used in warfare, but we design most models to help ordinary people do different tasks."

"Aaaaand don't forget Magi's Chess!" Jin Soon jabs the air in front of him. "You should see the championships! They're so intense like brrrr—bwoosh! Boom! Bam! Woopa-woopa-woopa!"

Mi Shil's brows furrow up, but her eyes crinkle in amusement. "I'll take all your fancy noises with a grain of salt."

"You sound like the Kangaboos we used to see at home," Mi Saeng says. A hint of a smile seems to come to his face, but it quickly firms back into a frown. Then he throws his arms behind his head. "Magi's Chess isn't that impressive. I'd rather be a treble musigician."

Mi Shil huffs. "You say that now, but wait until you have to learn music theory. And even then, you still have to build jotnar."

"Yeah, but I don't have to do it the way bass musigicians do it," Mi Saeng says.

Jin Soon's lips press together tightly. He folds his arms. "Are you both on shift?"

"No, but I thought I heard Kurai's voice," Mi Shil says with a smile at me. "You're the last person I thought I'd see here."

My cheeks warm. "This is the last place I thought I'd be honestly. Jin Soon was just givin' me a tour."

"And we need to get moving," Jin Soon says with a glance at Mi Saeng. "Jin Yi is expecting us."

"Mind if I join you then?" Mi Shil asks.

"Join them?" Mi Saeng asks. "Why?"

Mi Shil puts her hands on her hips. "You can stay here if you have a problem."

Mi Saeng opens his mouth, but whatever he has planned out gets drowned out by a loud, "STOP THAT BOO BOT!"

We all turn around to see a giant squirrel jotunn swattin' at a stocky Wings woman and gettin' dirt all over her clothes. But by the time we all run over there, the disheveled woman thrusts her hands out at the jotunn, causin' the red cuffs on her wrists to glow.

The squirrel's arms stop-mid swat and fall to its rocky sides.

"Are you alright, Ji Won?" Jin Soon asks.

The woman adjusts her Hwarang hat. She heaves a huge breath. "Oh I'm fine. I was just trying to test Boo Bot out."

"But Mastah..." Boo Bot says. "It is time for your butt-kicking."

Mi Ho rubs the back of her neck, givin' a sheepish smile. "Ehh...He has a little glitch."

I hold my snort. A little glitch? Boo Bot sounds like he needs a twelve step program all to himself.

Mi Shil asks. "How did you graft his heart? That's the only thing I can think of if his circuits are all correct."

"Kyu Ri is the one who does all the grafting for me, so I don't know," Ji Won says. "But at least he's battle ready."

"Battle ready?" says a passin' Lion Heart magus. He holds up his dirt stained white cape. "Tch. You think?"

"Sorry about that," Ji Won mutters. "I'll clean it." She turns back to the rest us and peers at me. I reflexively flinch, but Ji Won only says, "And who might you be, outsider?"

"This is Kurai. He's the Commander's guest!" Jin Soon chirps immediately. "I'm giving him a tour."

"Oh welcome, Mister Guest!" Ji Won salutes. "I'm Ji Won, Right Flank of the Thunderwind Pack.!"

I relax. _Thanks gods, she's friendly._ "Nice to meet you. What does a Right Flank do if you don't mind me askin'?"

"I handle our pack's jotnar and supervise them when they deliver supplies, of course," Ji Won says. "I also give the A-okay to whatever equipment other people send us. Kyu Ri is my leftie, and she's _supposed_ to be helping me but..." Ji Won shrugs. "She went with Mane Hei Ryung to the Courier's Office to pick up a part, I think."

"So everyone has a different position?" I ask. I glance at Mi Shil. "Do you guys have a position then?"

"No, it's only for the officers and trainees who are actually in the guard," Mi Shil says. "If we joined, we'd get one. But I think the Wings of Heaven are full..." She looks to Ji Won. "Are they?"

"I dunno. I'm not in charge of that. We're missing a Heart though," Ji Won says. "We don't usually fill that one because we don't have anyone to train them. I don't think the Commander would rip a mentor from another pack to train them."

I frown. "But ain't the Heart s'posed to heal and cook stuff for ya'll? What if ya'll are in a fight? Ain't it dangerous?"

"Nah, we'd still be fine. It's rare for a pack to get deployed alone unless you mean something like a border scuffle," Ji Won says. "But even then, we know how to patch up basic stuff. It's just the big problems we need a Heart for..." Her gaze flicks toward the door. "Hey! I've got a bone to pick with you!"

"Sorry! Sorry!" A noodlish girl with a fishtail steps into the workshop, followed by a shorter girl with spectacles. "The part we needed came in for the new jotunn."

"Never mind that." Ji Won points to Boo Bot. "How the heck did you graft this thing? He's been trying to kick my butt, Kyu Ri!"

"Kick your butt?" Kyu Ri folds her arms. "I'm pretty sure I programmed him to kick butt for master, not kick master's butt."

The spectacled Wings of Heaven girl frowns. "Maybe it's a syntax error?"

"I don't care _what_ it is." Ji Won puts her hands on her hips. "If we don't get the kinks out before the Commander comes by we'll get _our_ butts kicked!"

"Alright, alright. I'm sure I can fix it. Just let me go get another heart," Kyu Ri says.

As she leaves, the spectacled girl gives me a curious sniff. "And who is this?"

"Kurai is our new guest apparently," Ji Won says. "Kurai this is Hei Ryung. She's our Mane."

"If you ever need mail delivered, I'm your gal," Hei Ryung says.

"Alright..." Kyu Ri returns with a pearl-like orb in hand. "Take the old heart out for me."

"Speaking of Hearts..." Mi Shil pulls out a silver palm-sized pocket watch from her tunic. "Aren't we supposed to be going to visit Jin Yi?"

Jin Soon squints at them. "We? I'm escorting the guest, you know."

"Oh come on Jin Soon," I say. "Let them come along."

Mi Saeng folds his hands behind his head. "No thanks. I'll stay behind and help them clean up. Boo Bot made an awful big mess."

Mi Shil raises an eyebrow. "You? Clean? Help? Since when?"

Mi Saeng just shrugs without a reply and brushes past her to the cleanin' closet.

Jin Soon sighs. "We're really going straight to the library now? You don't want to explore the camp more?"

"Maybe I go after I do what Jin Yi needs me to do," I say. "This place seems awfully big, and I'd hate to be the guy to hold up everybody's food."

Jin Soon puts a hand on his stomach. "Come to think about it... I _am_ getting a little hungry."

"Maybe we'll get a sneak peek to see what's for dinner," Mi Shil says.

Hei Ryung and Ji Won waves goodbye to us and helps Mi Saeng to clean Boo Bot's mess, while the rest of us leave the workshop. Jin Soon takes us down to the double doors at the end of the hall. He tries to open them, but they don't budge. "Locked."

"Maybe someone is inside?" Mi Shil asks. She raps her knuckles against the door frame. "Hello?"

There's a click and a rectangular panel on the doorway wall slides open. Two green cat eyes peer back at us. "Who there?"

"Hi, are you Tiberius?" She says. "Is Commander Jin Yi inside? We need to talk to her."

The cat's eyes narrow. "Tiberius I might be! Jin Yi? Here? Maaaaaaaybe...You bring me loopy drug like..." He makes a loud puffin' sound. "That one, yes?"

"Loopy drug?" echoes. "Sorry. We don't have any—"

"NO PASS FOR YOU!"

The panel thunks shut.

"Sorry, sorry!" Tiberius sings.

For a full minute we all stand there, mouths open, bolt-shocked. But Jin Soon sober up first and bang on the door. "Hey! You can't just ignore us! We need to get in there!"

"NO LOOPY DRUG NO PASS!" Tiberius yowls back.

"WELL YOU'RE LOOPY YOU—"

Mi Shil pulls Jin Soon back by the shoulder. "Don't argue with him. That's only going to make it worse."

Jin Soon puff up and glare at her for a heartbeat like he might start yell at her, but instead he just brush off her hand like he got something dirty on his clothes.

A sharp pang ripples through my chest at the sight. _Ya'll barely know each other! Why are ya'll so mad?_ But I'm suddenly reminded of the icy look Mi Shil gave that other guy at the party. Up until now, I forgot all about the hostility. Come to think of it, Se Jong was a Kim and Mi Saeng had seemed ready to jump down his throat. Jin Soon said he was a Kim... _Uh-oh._

I swallow the knot in my throat. "Hey, hey, guys. We can figure this out together, right?"

Jin Soon splays his fingers and then just shrugs. "Yeah, but what's a loopy drug supposed to be? We're not allowed to have any drugs. Unless the herb store counts, but that's in the Library of War."

Mi Shil snaps her fingers. "There's an herb patch outside, isn't there?"

"What does that matter if you don't know what you're looking for?" When Mi Shil starts smilin', Jin Soon folds his arms. "What?"

"I'll be back in a little bit," Mi Shil says. "Wait here." Mi Shil jogs out of the hall, leavin' me and Jin Soon alone.

He leans against the wall, mutterin', "Maybe she'll stay gone."

I pretend I don't hear him. "What do you think she went to go get?"

"Not sure," Jin Soon says. "The rules on what can grow on the herb patch are strict. Jin Yi wouldn't grow drugs, so it has to be something medicinal, or something that can be eaten."

Before long, Mi Shil elbows the hall doors aside and comes back to us with something cupped in her hands. "Tiberius!"

"What's that?" Jin Soon asks.

"You'll see," Mi Shil says.

The panel opens a crack. One of Tiberius's eyes peer back at us. "Why you still here? I already say no pass for you. Go away. Go away." The panel shuts again. "No drug. No play."

"But I brought you something," Mi Shil says.

The panel slides all the way open immediately. Tiberius wedges his bald pink muzzle into the hall. "Loopy drug?"

Mi Shil lifts her hands to his nose.

Tiberius sniffs eagerly and then gasps. "GIMMELOOPYDRUG! GIMMELOOPYDRUG! YOU PASS NOW!"

Both lattice doors slide open and we all enter. Tiberius, a thickly-wrinkled Sphinx sits on top of a bookshelf, tail lashin' impatiently as Mi Shil approaches him. The moment she drops the herb in her hand, Tiberius rolls around in it and giggles like a maniac.

"Hey that's pretty smart," Jin Soon says. "Catnip was the last thing I was thinking."

"Huh?" Mi Shil's face contorts into a look of confusion. "It's not catnip."

I blink. "It ain't?"

"Tiberius hates catnip," Mi Shil says. "But I saw Sada Ham bring in that plant once and I remembered Tiberius went nuts over it."

I peer at the now crushed and crumpled pink flowers fallin' from the bookshelf. I pick one up. Well, I certainly didn't see that comin'. "What is this exactly?"

"Horny goat weed." Jin Yi steps out from a pair of bookshelves. "Commander Bo Jong ordered that we grow it and he's been like this ever since." Jin Yi gestures to Tiberius who seems to have officially pooped himself out and resorted to just layin' on the horny goat weed with his tail twitchin'.

"Isn't it supposed to be for impotence or something like that?" Jin Soon asks. "A lot of people in my family use it."

"Supposed to be," Jin Yi says. "I've hardly seen a difference when it was used and when it wasn't. But that is another conversation for another day."

"Eun Hae said that you had some work for me," I say.

"We're making _maekjeo_ k today," Jin Yi says. "Have you heard of it?"

" _Maekjeok_?" I echo. "I think so. Isn't it like grilled pork? I've eaten it a few times, but I've never made it myself."

"That will change today," Jin Yi says. "But we're short on ginger, honey, rice wine, chives, and soybean paste."

Mi Shil tilts her head. "But don't we grow those here? I could've sworn I saw some ginger in the herb patch when I looked for the horny goat weed."

"That's because we have a medical supply and a cooking supply," Jin Yi says. "And the medical supply is shared by all guards in a compound. A guard could get into a lot of trouble if he takes from the medical supply just because he wanted something to eat."

"Can I help you?" Jin Soon asks.

Jin Yi shakes her head. "That is up to your superior officers. Not me. I have enough help with Kurai, Geum Young and the other outsider."

The other outsider? Su Ho is probably still injured...so does she mean Kwan? Or Go Dong?

As if hearin' my thoughts, Go Dong comes up beside Jin Yi. His eyes are bleary and ringed with shadows. "Where are we going?"

"To the market," Jin Yi says. "Meet in front of the compound gates when you're both done."

When Jin Yi leaves, Jin Soon turns to me. "Let me know when you come back, okay? We can pick up where we left off." He glances at Mi Shil, as if expectin' her to say something, but her attention is on Sul Won walkin' in.

Sul Won stands in the doorway, book tucked under his arm. "Is something going on?"

"No, we're were just leaving," Mi Shil's voice is polite, but curt as if to say _And you can't come_.

I flinch at the tension in the air. Does anyone here get along?

Sul Won lingers a moment before pickin' out a corner to himself and openin' his book to study. Though his gaze does sneak to the door every now and again.

Go Dong joins me at the library doors with a yawn. "When did you get here?"

"Just a little while ago," I say. "How's Su Ho? Have you seen him?"

Go Dong perks up a little. "Uh-huh. He's awake now. But he was in so much pain that he almost barfed up almost everything Jin Yi gave him. So she just gave him ginger tea with some slices so he wouldn't be so nauseous. Right now Geum Young is keeping an eye on him."

"That's great," I say, steppin' out into the hall. "I was worried when I didn't see you and Kwan around."

"Eun Hae has been talking with him, I think..." His voice trails as he leans closer to me and whispers, "Word on the tree is she wants him to join the Wings of Heaven."

"Kwan?" I echo. "But he has to get his record sorted out with the Queen first, doesn't he?"

"I guess so," Go Dong says as we pass from the common room out and go into the compound yard. "But he's a really good fighter too. Supposedly, one of the officers was going to penalize her for not having enough members in her pack, so she has to fill it on really short notice."

"Why are they nit-pickin' at that stuff now if she's been fine all this time?" I ask.

Go Dong shrugs. "Beats me. But ever since I've gotten here, I've seen a whole bunch of guards acting more catty than the real cats here, so I guess that's just how things work."

I stick my hands in my pockets. "Probably because we're not from here. It happened to me too."

"Yeah, but they're being a lot nicer to us than I thought they'd be," Go Dong says. "I'm grateful enough for that." He elbows me with a grin. "I overheard Geum Young tellin' Jin Yi sayin' that I have a good nose for picking the fresh ingredients. If I'm lucky, I might get to stay and work in their kitchen."

"Really? Jin Yi offered to let you stay?"

"Eh..." He tugs at his parka collar. "Well, Jin Yi didn't say that part, but it doesn't hurt to hope right? Besides, it's gotta be why she's lettin' me come along."

I don't say anything to that. I was done assumin' what Jin Yi was thinkin' when she arrested us. "Have you seen the kitchen yet by any chance? Jin Soon didn't show me."

"No, but it's not in the camp," Go Dong says. "When I asked, Jin Yi said that it was outside in a separate area."

"Outside?" I ain't ever heard of puttin' no kitchen outdoors. "Why is it out there?"

"Because in case your eyes have failed you, our compound is in a tree." Jin Yi steps outside, a large pocket watch danglin' from her arm. "If someone lights a fire and it gets out of control, the whole camp will burn down. Or weaken and collapse later."

"Wait a minute..." I fold my arms. "Then what about Pats? He's made of fire ain't he? How come he's allowed to stay?"

"If you are talking about our jotunar, they are safety-locked," Jin Yi says. "Bass musigicians own melody cuffs to prevent accidents like that. And when a jotunn isn't being used, it's deactivated entirely. More than likely Pats will be put away once his musigicians are done with him."

I s'pose that makes sense, considerin' Eun Hae mentioned that people even had to be careful about bringin' their horses up to Silent Bastion.

"Go Dong, get one of the carts over there," Jin Yi says, noddin' toward a trio handcarts beside the clock tower.

Go Dong salutes. "Gotcha."

Jin Yi starts walkin' away. I glance at Go Dong scurryin' for the cart before I catch up with Jin Yi. "Can I ask you something?"

The Lion Heart Commander gives me a sideways look. "Yes."

"My uncle trained you right?"

Jin Yi's attention returns to the path ahead. "What of it?"

"What was it like?"

She does not answer.

Frustration bubbles in my veins. _Hey, don't ignore me!_ "Jin Yi?"

"Yes?"

"I thought you were going to tell me what my uncle was like."

Jin Yi raises an eyebrow. "I just did. He never handed me the answer by just telling it. But I will show you how he taught me when we get to Silent Bastion." Jin Yi takes us back up to the first layer of Silent Bastion. Before the streets hardly had much people, but now the bridges and plazas are burstin' with folk who seem to think that today was a nice day for shoppin' too. By the look and smell of things, I reckon everybody just got started. A merchant unloads barrels of mussels, mackerels, and crabs that are still movin' their pinchers and ironically—just like Brio said, are pullin' each other down into the barrel. Not too far away, a lady stacks napa cabbage from the back of a horse-drawn cart next to huge Tohenian pears and bok choy.

I crane my neck, tryin' to peer around to see if any ginger or chives are hidin' at the stand, but I don't see any. Maybe someone else is stockin' them today.

Jin Yi stops us beside a hay salesman. "I want you to find fresh quality ingredients for our dish."

I glance at Go Dong who looks just as confused as me at the sudden command. "Who? Me? Or Go Dong?"

"I can find them really fast if you want me too," Go Dong offers.

"I know you can." Jin Yi says. "Which is why you're going to correct Kurai if he doesn't pick the best ingredient."

I blink a few times at the statement. "Wait a minute. This is some kind of test then?"

"Why not?" Jin Yi looks over her shoulder. "I thought you were a cook."

At those words, I feel a hot surge of indignation. "I _am_ a cook." I fold my arms. "It's just how am I supposed to know I've got the best ingredient? We could be standin' here all day while I nit-pick."

Jin Yi shakes her head. "If it takes a Heart all day to get ready, then their pack will either starve or their patients will die." She glances at her pocket watch and twists one of the side knobs. "You have twenty minutes to find everything and be back here."

My jaw falls. Everything? What is this? A cookin' show? "Hold on now. I don't even know where to find—"

Jin Yi hands the pocket watch to Go Dong. "You have nineteen minutes and fifty seconds. I'm going to find fresh pork neck." Without waitin' for a reply, she disappears into the crowd.

My shoulders sag. "So we're just on our own? She didn't even give us any money to buy anything."

"She did." Go Dong holds up the golden watch. "This is a Life Watch. I've seen lots of folk buy stuff with them."

I grab a fistful of my hair before forcin' myself to let go. "Alright, what do we need to get again? I know we need ginger and chives, but what else?"

"Ginger, chives, soybean paste, honey, and rice wine," Go Dong says. "I think the honey and paste merchant is a few stands over."

We jostle through the crowd until we come to come across a stand with huge jars of honey that seem to come in shades from a pale cream color to deep gold and pots covered with white cloth. As we approach, loud snores pierce my ear drums. I cover my ears. "Good gods, what is that a bear?"

Go Dong peers over the counter. "Actually, it is. And a man too."

I look over too to find a panda einherjar and an equally bearish man, snorin' away on low benches on the other side. And sweet honey biscuits, it's astonishin' how they can stand each other's noise.

"Oi! Sir!" Go Dong yells. "SIIIIIRRRRR!"

But the two snooze on as if Go Dong was as quiet as a pin droppin'.

"Wish I could sleep that good," I mutter.

"It's no use," Go Dong says. "And we've got to get the other ingredients too. This is a waste of time."

"Think we should come back?" I ask.

"Come back? Dae are you sleeping' on the job _again_?" Without warnin', a pineapple-shaped woman with bristly gray ponytail come out of the small shack behind the counter with a broom. At the sight of Dae and the panda and start smackin' Dae upside the head. "I know you ain't out here sleeping on the job, Dae! Get up you worthless lout! Get up!"

"Owww! Owww!" Dae covers his head. "Woman, why do you have to hit so hard?"

The panda sits up bewildered and vanishes before the woman can take another crack at him.

The woman kicks Dae until he gets off the bench and go stand in the doorway of their shop grumblin' and massagin' the places where he got hit. The pineapple woman roll up her sleeves and shake her head. "Sorry for that. What are ya'll lookin' for?"

"Errm... Do you have any soybean paste? And some honey?" I ask.

The woman's eyes brighten. "Is that right?" She hoists two large jars from the ground into our cart and pats them. "These are both five years old. And..." She pushes a creamish honey with tiny brown flecks towards me. "...very good.."

Go Dong hands her the watch and puts the honey on the cart. The woman puts the watch on a tiny stand with its own clock. She pushes down on the top button, causin' the stand to ding! Then she hands the watch back. "Here you go. Ya'll be careful now, you hear?"

"We will," Go Dong says and pulls the cart along. "C'mon. We need to hurry."

As we leave, I glance over my shoulder. The woman is already roundin' on Dae and fussin' some more. "Boy is she hecka mad."

"I'd be too if my workers were sleeping on the job." Go Dong looks over his shoulder too. "What if someone wanted to walk up and just take a jar?" He checks the watch and makes a face. "We really need to get moving or we're not going to have enough time for the other ingredients."

Givin' one last glance at the old couple, I start lookin' around for the other things Jin Yi told us to get. Though, despite Go Dong's warnin' on time he sure don't seem to be in any hurry about nit-pickin' about the ingredients I grab. No sooner than after we grab our ginger and chives the watch brrrrrrings loudly.

"Whew. Just in time," Go Dong says. He counts the supplies in the cart. "Looks like we grabbed everything."

"I don't remember Jin Yi sayin' where to meet her," I say.

"We should probably go back to where we were," Go Dong says. "This is a really big crowd."

Go Dong and I trundle the cart back to the hay salesman to find Kwan and Min Ah talkin' to Jin Yi.

"So what do you think?" Min Ah asks. "Would you be interested?"

"I'd have to think about it," Jin Yi says. "Even if it's for a good cause, Eun Hae is taking a huge risk by associating with someone like Bi Dam." Her attention shifts to us. "You are late."

"But the watch just went off," Go Dong says. "We got the ingredients in time."

Jin Yi snorts. "And how would you like a doctor if he had a habit of getting to his patients just after they died?"

I look over at Kwan and Min Ah, who look like they enjoy each other's company just as much as Dae and the honey merchant. "You two know each other?"

"Unfortunately," Min Ah says dryly. "I've had better company from a cactus."

"They're selling cacti here," Kwan says in his usual monotone. "You're more than welcome to be a nuisance to them instead."

"Eun Hae asked us on an errand," Min Ah explains, foldin' her arms. "But what are you doing here, Kurai?"

"It's a long story," I mutter, glancin' at Jin Yi in the hopes that she might save me from the explainin', but her attention is elsewhere. "I'm helpin' Jin Yi out for a little bit until Queen Seon Deok gets back."

"You'll not be waiting for long then," Min Ah says. "She's due to be here this evening." All of a sudden, she straightens. "And before I forget! Did the General send word to you about his visit yet?"

At this Jin Yi's attention snaps back to Min Ah. "Visit who? Our compound? Since when does anyone from the Imperial Army come to us?"

"His old Darkborn wounds are acting up," Min Ah says. "Also I hear he's coming over for dinner to discuss fortification plans with you, Eun Hae, and Bo Jong."

"Fortification plans?" Jin Yi says. "For where? Here?"

"I think Stone Bear Pass," Min Ah says. "They've been sending more reports as of late."

"Hopefully none that are too bad," Jin Yi says. "But right now I'm afraid we need to get back to the compound to fix dinner. Otherwise we won't be done in time." To Go Dong and I she says, "Come."

After partin' ways with Kwan and Min Ah, we head back to Fallin' River Compound take our groceries to a pavilion-covered yard beside a small stream. Under the coverin', lots of servin' folk mill back and forth with pots, utensils, and other ingredients. A man with a wispy gray moustache and pale blue attire bows to Jin Yi as we step in. "We've already started on the side dishes. Shall we fetch Geum Young?"

"No, she is busy taking care of a patient. When you're done with the side dishes, make sure set some aside for him and take food to the Library of War before you prepare the tables. In the mean time, these two will be assisting us." She gestures to me and Go Dong in turn before handing the package of pork neck to the man. "Wash this and make slices."

He dips his head. "Ye."

Jin Yi turns to me. "While they clean the meat, go wash your hands. I'm going to need you to peel and cut a whole ginger root for the marinade. Go Dong, you unload soy bean paste. The servants will tell you where to put it."

"Gotcha." Go Dong hoists a huge pot of paste and lugs it away.

I look at the ginger reluctantly. Did it have to be ginger? "Can't I start with another ingredi..."

But like always Jin Yi is already leavin' off to do her own thing.

I sigh and grab some knobby ginger roots out of the cart and head to the stream to wash the ginger and my hands. When I'm done, I find an empty table to myself and a nice choppin' knife before I start the tedious task of peelin' the papery skin away.

Soon the kitchen becomes no more than a hodgepodge of smells and noises to me: ginger, garlic, sweet leafy herbs, soy sauce, soy bean paste the _glub-glub_ of toasted sesame oil being poured out, the _thok-thok_ of the knife against the cuttin' board, and the musical hiss of layin' marinaded pork neck on a hot grill, and the cracklin' as it browns. The other cook staff come and transfer the cooked meat to a silver platter and cover it with a dome.

After the last slice of maekjeok leaves, I go and wash my hands in the stream again. My legs are stiff and achy from standin' rigid, but inside I'm still brimmin' with energy.

Once the servants are done cooking their dishes, we all clean and wipe down the kitchen. Jin Yi and a few of the senior staff members inspect each area and give a nod of approval as they pass by. Once all areas get the approval, the servants finally open the _maekjeok_ and all the other dishes that they made and set aside portions for Jin Yi and me before hurryin' the rest inside.

Jin Yi picks up her plate. "You are done for the day."

I pick up my own dish. "Already?"

She glances at me. "Did you want more work?"

"No it's not that..." My voice trails as I look around at the now spotless kitchen. "I just didn't think it would go by that fast. I thought there'd be more to do and cook. I didn't know you had staff to help you."

Jin Yi shakes her head. "A Heart's first priority is the patients in their care. If I cooked every dish and scrubbed every pot, no one would be alive to eat it. We plan the meals, replace supplies, and we keep track of our inventories most days. If you were my trainee, you'd have classes to worry about as well and medicine to learn. It is not practical to add more to our duties. "Come. We should join everyone else."

I follow after her. "What do ya'll eat out there then if you're in a hurry?"

"Raw game, dried food, and prepackaged things mostly, to keep packing light. Sometimes foraged things. Cooked foods are rare unless we know there's time to camp."

_Yeesh, talk about hardcore._ Brio says. _Remind me to never join the military._

_You make it sound like you've never eaten raw food before, monkey,_ Aria says.

_Not meat! It at least needs to be rare or something,_ Brio says. _I don't like the way it looks. I keep feeling like my food is looking at me or something._

_That is why you eat the head first,_ Forte says. _Then it can't look at you._

_Bruh, we can't all be a fearless J-kicking, head-biting dragon like you,_ Brio says.

Once inside the compound, we find a line of Hwarang going through the north door. I spot Mi Shil standin' in line next to her brother. "Hey, Mi Shil. What's the line for?"

She turns around, eyes widenin' at my food. "You have food already?"

"I helped cook with Jin Yi and the kitchen staff so..." My words halt as soon as I realize Jin Yi split on me like a slippery banana again. Gods, maybe this woman is a Magus Panther.

"Ah. I see," Mi Shil says. "I wish I was a Heart." She stands tiptoe to see over the trainee in front of her.

"I don't," Mi Saeng says. "You have to cook and change stinky bedding for patients who can't go do their business outside and tend the garden like some rice farmer. Who wants to do that?"

Mi Shil huffs. "It's not like you can do it anyway. You're Year of the Dog!"

"You can't be Heart if you're Year of the Dog?" I ask.

"Nope," Mi Saeng says. "Keeping Cats don't like you if you are."

"Hey, Kurai..." Mi Shil begins. "Since you have food already, why don't you find us a place to sit? The line is so long, all the good seats are going to be taken at this rate."

"No problem!" I blurt out. "I'll find you the best seat in the house."

"Good because I'm sitting in it," Mi Saeng says with a sharp edge to his tone, as if darin' me to say something else.

"Oh, uh, sure. That's cool too I guess." I inch away from them. Once I'm far enough away, I hold the rim of the plate against my heart, which is beatin' rapidly. Whew. Talk about grouchy... What's everyone's deal here? Dog, a guy can't even offer to get somebody a seat without gettin' snapped at?

I squeeze past the people in line into ceilin'less cafeteria. The tables...well, I'm not really so sure that they can be called tables. They're pretty much cat condos, but people-sized with multi-levels and tables inside the numerous alcoves. A pair of trainees leap straight from the ground to the fourth floor of a dark gray condo and squeeze into its alcove.

_Holy pigs on ice! They can just jump that?_ I know Sul Li said that she could jump high, but it's hecka mind-bogglin' to actually see someone do it.

I pick a blue "cat" condo with numerous ramps and go up to the second floor. As I go up, I spot Mi Shil and Mi Saeng pickin' up their food. I wave them over and we all squeeze into the alcove, which to my surprise is really warm. An invitin' heat seeps up through the floor, makin' it cozy. I could almost fall asleep here.

Mi Shil sits down. I start to sit next to her, but Mi Saeng wedges himself right in between us, so I'm left to sit on the opposite side of her.

I almost say something, but a glance at Mi Saeng's knuckles shut that plan up real quick; they're bruised and crusted with scabs, scars, and dried blood. He probably ain't no stranger to knockin' people's head off. I pick off my egg bread and look outside.

Jin Soon gets his food and looks around for a place to sit, though it don't look like anybody is takin' him.

"Hey, I think I see Jin Soon," I say. "I don't think he's got anywhere to sit. Think we should let him come over here."

My words are met with silence. Mi Shil's sigh is the only indication that I was heard. But aside from that, they keep their eyes on their food.

My heart slinks down at the sight. "Guys? He—"

Mi Saeng's hands slam down on the table. "Look outsider. You're not bringing that Kim over. I know you came all the way down from wherever, but we do things a lot different here."

Mi Shil winces at the words. She gives me a sheepish look. "What he means is...we don't want any trouble with their family. More often than not, fights happen because someone from another clan won't keep to themselves." She glances out at the alcove. "And even if we did call him, I doubt he wants to be around us anymore than we want to be around him. It's just too much trouble."

"Just to eat next to the guy?" I ask.

"Too much bother," Mi Saeng says sharply. "If you're such good buddies, _you_ go sit with him."

After that the table descends into another silence that feels nearly unbreakable. And despite bein' next to Mi Saeng and Mi Shil, I feel that same endless chasm of loneliness I did in my memory.

_He's a ball of sunshine, isn't he?_ Brio mumbles.

_Not much different than almost everyone we've seen since being in Niflheim,_ Forte says.

_Way to be optimistic guys,_ Brio says.

_Well, they're volunteers, right?_ Aria says. _The Thunderwind all seem like they get along fine, so I doubt it's everyone._

As soon as Aria finish speakin', Eun Hae, Al Cheon, Jin Yi, General Hong Do, and a few more officers I don't recognize come towards our condo. They acknowledge us with brief glances, which Mi Shil and Mi Saeng return with head dips each, and go up to the floor above us.

My heart thumps. _I hope the General likes my cookin'._ As I eat, I strain my ears to hear them.

"...whole seal wasn't restored...there's protection but...prepare for anything," General Hong Do whispers. "I may go myself."

"You?" Says a female voice I don't recognize. "With all due respect sir, surely someone in better health can go. Your wounds..."

General Hong Do sighs. "Better health yes. But with Darkborn experience, no. Her Majesty does not want the task in the hands of someone who has not dealt with them. And the only other one I know of who has is Bo Jong."

"Where is he anyway?" asks Al Cheon.

"Leave him be," Eun Hae says. "He is attending a funeral for men who were very close to him."

"A funeral?"the same feminine voice from before asks.

"Really? No wonder he's been so upset lately," Al Cheon says. "Does Her Majesty know?"

"She will soon if she does not already. It was a Magus Panther incident after all," General Hong Do says. The officers are quiet for a time above us, but then the General suddenly says, "Hmmm..."

"What's wrong, sir?" Al Cheon asks.

"This _maekjeok_ ..." The General says. "Who made it?"

My blood gallops between my ears. He's eatin' it!

"That's all Jin Yi's cooking!" Al Cheon chirps. "She always makes the best food."

"Not this time," Jin Yi says. "I let the outsider from the Telling help cook it."

"You permitted an outsider in the kitchen?" Asks a male voice I don't recognize.

"He wanted to know what a usual day of training was like for a trainee, Sada Ham," Jin Yi says. "And he was already familiar with cooking, so I saw no harm in teaching him for a day."

Al Cheon grunts. "Could've fooled me. I didn't even taste a difference."

The General says, "I can." I hear a table scrape. "Excuse me."

Footsteps sound above us and my heart goes still. Mi Shil and Mi Saeng stop eatin' too. Thousands of terrible scenarios gallop through my mind. All of them of the General tellin' me how much he hates my food.

But the General does not stop at our alcove, or even acknowledge us with a look. He heads back to the common room, dabbin' his mouth with a handkerchief the whole way.

"Uhhh... Is the General gonna eat that?" Al Cheon asks.

"If you want more food, get it from the staff, greedy," Jin Yi says. "I'm sure he'll return."

"Sure didn't look like—Ow!"

Eun Hae clears her throat. "If he does not eat his, we'll give it to the drakehorses so it is not wasted."

"To the horses? But Commander, a perfectly good human is hungry here," says Al Cheon. "Geeze, what a waste of food."

"It's not surprising he didn't eat it," Sada Ham says. "An outsider made it, after all."

"I've never known the General to be so picky about who prepares what," Jin Yi says.

"I'm certain that it not what upset him," Eun Hae says. "But I am worried. Did he not come here because of his wounds?"

"I'm certain he'll return. Or send for the medication later when he remembers," Jin Yi says. "Common sense is more important than an offended food palette."

Every comment feels like a jab to my stomach, hittin' the wind out of me. _The General hated it._ He must have. Why else would anyone just up and leave their dinner?

_Human, the General didn't say that he hated it,_ Aria says.

_Doesn't matter if he says that or not,_ Brio mutters.

_Monkey, who's side are you on?_ Aria huffs. _I thought you were all about being positive?_

_I'm just sayin'... what does some stuffy old General's opinion mean anyway?_ I say forget about him, Brio says. _He ain't worth getting worked up over._

Maybe not, but...I think hard about when I was cookin' in the kitchen, but I can't think of what I did wrong. Literally. After all, it was my first time makin' the dish. All I had was Jin Yi's instructions and I was sure I followed them exactly.

_I don't see anyone outside saying how horrible it is,_ Brio says. _You did fine. It's not like Jin Yi wouldn't have said something if you didn't do something right._

_Well, Mi Shil and Mi Saeng are eating it and they seem happy,_ Aria points out. _Don't fret about it too much, human._

But I don't stop frettin' about it the whole meal. I keep tryin' not to think about it, but the way the General went off just eats at me..

"We should finish eating soon," says Sada Ham. "The Queen will arrive in an hour."

There is a strange pregnant pause before the earlier feminine voice pointedly asks, "What would you have us do, Commander? Shall we greet her?"

"Our presence isn't required, Ah Ri," Eun Hae says. "But I'm sure the rest of guard would appreciate it if you came out to greet them, Ah Ri. I have other matter pressing matters to attend to."

"You have very many for a Commander that is not on duty," Sada Ham says.

A chair scrapes suddenly from above. Ah Ri snaps, "That is her business, isn't it?"

"Ah Ri..." Eun Hae's voice is calm, but the warnin' in it is strong.

I stiffen, waitin' for the telltale sound of scrapin' seats, irritated huffs, or sharp words. But none come. Beside me, Mi Saeng and Mi Shil's gazes wander up toward the ceilin', their bodies frozen in a tense stillness as if they expect it too.

Eun Hae only says, "I hope you do not mean to suggest that I am neglecting my Hwarang."

"Not at all," Sada Ham says slowly. "It is just there are more threats to Silla's safety than ever these days. Most Commanders prefer to be close to their guards at such time."

"Well, the Wings of Heaven did not become the best of the best by doing what _most_ guards do, sir." Eun Hae says flatly. "Nor would an elite guard fall apart simply because one person is not present."

"I see you," Sada Ham says. But his empty tone makes me wonder what he really means by that.

The officers remain completely quiet up there for some time. Then Sada Ham leaves first. Then Ah Ri. Then Al Cheon.

Jin Yi finally says, "He is very bold for a lesser officer."

"That is the problem with a clan guard," Eun Hae says. "Familial bonds are very powerful when a pack rallies together, but it is a poison when there is too much authority in the wrong place."

"Have you told Bo Jong of this?" Jin Yi asks.

"He is well-aware," Eun Hae says. "At this stage, there is nothing that can be done."

### _1-9_

AFTER DINNER, I find Jin Soon in the common room with his nose in a book. He lowers it. "Hey, just the guy I'm looking for. We're gonna have to postpone the rest of the tour. Some of the officers are gonna be working late and I don't think the Commander wants us disturbing them."

"Fine with me," I say. "I was gonna ask if we can skip out anyway. Dinner made me a little sleepy."

"Same." Jin Soon closes his book. "Plus it's getting late.

"Well never mind then," I say. "I'll just catch them later. It's getting late. They won't be in the mood to talk anyway. Come on."

We both head up the staircase. Jin Soon pushes aside the lattice doors, revealin' another hallway. "This is the sleeping quarters for all the male volunteers." He points to the larger pair of doors at the end of the hall. "That's one of the overseeing offices for the superior officers. One of the higher ups are usually in there during the day incase you need to report something."

I gaze at the door. "Is that where Eun Hae's office is?"

"The Commander?" Jin Soon scratches his head. "No. The Commander's Loft is way up on the top floor. Come here I'll show you."

I follow Jin Soon to the end of the hall. He counts the six doors on the left and he opens up the seventh pair. Inside lays one of those fancy transportin' circles glowin' faintly.

"This is the Circle of Fifths that takes you up to the Commander's Loft." Jin Soon folds his arms. "But don't go up there just because you want to say hi or something. All guard leaders stay up there and they won't appreciate it you barging in for silly stuff. Especially not Commander Jin Yi."

"I can't even ask a question?"

Jin Soon makes a face. "Eh...You _can._ But if it's something another officer can answer, you ought to ask down here. We can get into big trouble for wasting a superior officer's time."

My gaze lingers on the circle. _I can imagine._

We backtrack three rooms until we get to a room with three portraits on woodblocks attached to three different boxes with slits in them. Two of them I immediately recognize as Mi Saeng and Jin Soon. The third portrait is a burly trainee I don't know, and the fourth box don't have a portrait.

I point to the empty box. "What are these for?"

"Hmm?" He glances over. "Oh those? Hei Ryung delivers letters in those when we're gone. But we don't have any keys for the box yet, so if you get something Hei Ryung has to bring it to you. Or we've got to pick it up all the way from the Courier's Office which is a real big pain. I doubt you'll have to worry about it." Jin Soon pulls open the room doors and gestures inside. "Don't be shy! Step inside! Our beds are on the right."

Much like Hye's tent, there ain't much to really see. Two cup shaped bunk beds flank the left and right wall. A strong smell of sweet hay in the air wafts from the beds. The beds themselves are straw nests much like something you'd expect for chicken to lay her eggs in and not for a grown man to sleep in.

I approach the bed cautiously. "We sleep in these?"

"It's more comfortable than it looks, I promise," Jin Soon says. "Don't get in unless you want to fall asleep. My first day here, I got in just to see what it was like and..." He makes a loud snorin' sound. "Out like a light. And I even missed dinner too." He walks around to the ladder and gestures to the window. "The Pak guys always complain if I try to open the window so sorry if you like the air. But on the bright side, I think Queen Seon Deok and the rest of the Wings of Heaven are gonna pass this way and we pretty much have a front row seat to see her."

_Yeah, but you ain't on her kill list, buddy._

The sounds of rummagin' snaps me out of my thoughts. I look up to find Jin Soon goin' through a drawer next to the bunk bed.

He pulls out a small blue and gold chest. "Want to see something cool?"

"Sure." _Not like there's anything else to do around here._ More than anything, I'd rather be in the Library of War helpin' out, but I doubt there's much to do with someone else takin' care of Su Ho.

Jin Soon opens the box revealin' a big nacre sphere that glows softly.

"Is that one of those pearl-thingies that Ji Won was talkin' about?" I ask.

"Pearl? Pffft." Jin Soon lifts it out of the box lightly. "It's a heart. A _special_ jotun heart," he says with a smug grin. "My grandfather gave it to me before he passed away and he was an amazing magi. All his jotnar were in the battle for Daeya. So when I become a bass musigician, I'm going to be just like him and make jotunn too."

"Like Ji Won and Kyu Ri?" I ask. "So then you're gonna join the Hwarang officially?"

"Uhh...actually I don't know," Jin Soon says. "I kinda like volunteering, but the Wings of Heaven are really intense about test scores and everything. The cutoffs would probably get me. Otherwise, I'd do it."

"Why not join another?" I ask.

"Too late for most of them," Jin Soon says, takin' a book out of his drawer. He climbs into bed. "Some are clan-based, so I can't join. Don't meet the requirements for the rest. But it's okay, I can still be a bass musigician and get the training. That way I'll have the time to keep thinking about what I want to join."

"Sounds like you've got it all figured out then," I say. Then I take off my shoes and climb into the bunk nest. Jin Soon was right about the nest bein' real cozy despite the looks. It ain't ever gonna beat memory foam but hey at least it's warm and soft enough that you don't really need a pillow too much. "By the way, do you know when our roommates are gettin' back?"

"Usually late," Jin Soon says. "But they don't make much noise, so it's not much to worry about."

_Good._ Cuz I've had my share of nights where Gio stumbled in the house drunk or high and I don't want a repeat. I pull a blanket off one of the sachet-like bags from the side of the nest and curl around towards the window. From here, there's a clear view of the forest Jin Yi led me through yesterday.

In the distance, a bright orange glow cleaves the darkness.

I lift my head to see over the rim of the nest. _What is that?_

_It looks like a fire,_ says Forte.

_That's an awful lot of fire for a forest full of flammable trees,_ Brio says.

But even sayin' a 'lot' is underspeakin'. As the flames come closer, the reason for it become mighty clear. As the flames draw close they carve out the red and black forms of Wings of Heaven guards holdin' torches as they ride their drakehorses in double-file lines.

_The Queen is returning,_ Aria whispers.

Cold pinpricks drive through my spine as I stare, eyes glued to the rivers of fire. _But which one is the Queen?_ I scan the flames over and over, but I don't see anyone among them who looks like they qualify to rule over anything. As the trail of soldiers end, my breath holds still.

_Where is she?_ Did I miss her in the crowd? I sit up for a few heartbeats more, but then slump down into my bed. _Guess I missed—_

A chorus of howls make me jolt upright just in time to see a huge blue roan drakehorse with black feathered feet step out of the darkness. And on its back rides none other than the Queen herself. She's a lean-cut of woman, pinned up hair well-oiled and the black of flame-broiled char. Gold tigers season the sleeves of her cloak. Her gaze is intense like as fierce as any real wild predator. Seein' her in the flesh, I can get why my uncle chose to run for the hills. Queen Seon Deok ain't lookin' directly at me, but I still feel the intensity of her presence all the way on the second floor. It's that same uncanny feelin' of dread you get when your parents come home and you just _know_ you're gonna get your butt torn up.

I gulp. How in the heck do you lie to _that_? I wilt back into my nest, starin' at the hay surroundin' me. I crush my hand to my chest where my heart thumps wildly.

Gods, what have I gotten myself into?

"GET UP YOU GRASS-EATIN' SHEEPIES! BAAAAAAA!"

My ears ring at the boomin' yell. Groggy, I flail around, gropin' for the edge of the bed. Once my hands find the edge, I pull myself upright and open my eyes to find Jin Soon, Duk Bae, and Mi Saeng scrabblin' around to grab their clothes while a huge ram bark at them with a voice that sound a hella lot like Al Cheon's.

As Duk Bae bends over to pick up his hat, Al Cheon kicks his butt with a hoof. "Come on! Move your fat woolly butts!" He whirls on Jin Soon who just happens to make eye contact at the wrong moment. "And what are you starin' at, huh? What do I look like, a sheep?"

Jin Soon backs up. "Erm... yes, sir?"

"Oh ho ho! I see somebody's got jokes _._ " Al Cheon paws the floor and lowers his head. "Not in my guard, you don't!"

Before Al Cheon can charge, Jin Soon tears out of the room with Duk Bae and Mi Saeng on his heels.

"And that's how you clear a room without rippin' a loud and stinky one," Al Cheon says cheerily, shiftin' back into his human form. He turns around to look at me. "Oh whoops! I forgot you were in here. Sorry about that. You don't have to get up with everybody else."

"It's alright." I rub my eyes. "You gave me fair warnin' yesterday."

His face brightens. "Good, then I've got an assignment for you after we get you out of those clothes." He brings his hands together. "Jin Yi plans on tending the herb garden and her trainee is looking after your friend and some of our other guys who came back last night, so do you mind giving her a hand today?"

"Sure thing." I climb out of the nest. "But I don't know where to get any of that horny weed stuff for Tiberius."

"Don't worry about that," Al Cheon says with a dismissive wave of his hand. "I'm going down there with you. So if he's got something to say, he's gonna be saying it to _me_. Now let's get you some clothes..."

I wait in the room while Al Cheon brings me a black tunic, some matchin' pants to wear, boots, a towel, and a bar of white soap that don't have any smell on it. I go in the bathroom where the Silla version of showers turns out to be upside-down blue lotuses with three vines hangin' down: one for hot water, one for cold water, and one to stop the water altogether. As I adjust the vines for the right temperature, the soap begins to give off a lemony tea tree smell. _Huh, I can smell it now._

_Ooooh, it must be Anynote soap!_ Aria squeaks excitedly.

_Whoa ma'm, you are a little too excited over a bar of soap,_ Brio says.

_Because it's not just any soap...erm actually it sort of is,_ Aria says. _But that's not the point! Anynote soap brings out your true scent!_

_And again, I repeat, you are a little_ _**too** excited_ _over a bar of soap,_ Brio says.

Aria huffs loudly. _Of course, you don't care, stinky-mitts. You smell like you haven't showered in centuries! Right, Forte?_

_Don't bring me into this conversation,_ Forte says.

Aria sighs. _Oh ignore them human. Scents mean a lot more in Silla than you think. Why, some women won't even go near a man if he smells a certain way!_

My soap bar almost slides out of my hand. "For real? Or are you just pullin' my leg?"

_It is true,_ Aria says. _People here will smell you before they even ask your name. It is very important._

I look at the bar of soap and sniff it and frown. _It smells a little bit like Sul Li._ After the way she treated me, she's the _last_ person I want to smell like. But I'm already butt-naked in here and I ain't got much of a choice.

I shower quickly and head down to the main floor where trainees of different guards are gettin' howled at by the other officers. I slip along the wall to avoid the stampede and go to the library hall where the door is already open. Inside, I find Al Cheon puttin' a caddy of tea bags next to a vase of bright orange flowers. Curious, I scan around lookin' for Jin Yi, but it seems that he's nowhere to be found either and neither is Tiberius by the looks of things. "Where's Jin Yi?"

Without turnin', Al Cheon says, "Probably still in the Commander's Loft. She'll be down in a bit."

Geum Young steps out from between the library aisles. "Can I help you with something?"

"Actually, I brought our guest to help Jin Yi with something," Al Cheon says.

"Help?" Geum Young's eyebrows come together as her gaze slides to me. "Okay. I wasn't told that—"

But Al Cheon is already headin' for the door. "See ya'll later. I gotta help Ah Ri herd the sheepies!" He clacks the doors shut.

Geum Young runs a hand through her hair. "I was going to say that the Commander didn't tell me we were getting help, but...he always runs off in a hurry." She sighs. "Did he talk to her before you came here?"

"I dunno. He just told me to come down and help her with the herb garden, so I'm just doin' what I'm told," I say.

Geum Young nods slowly, but her puzzled expression remains. "Well in that case, I'm sure the Commander wouldn't mind you being here. She usually comes after she's done with the trainees, but until then you can help me give tea to Su Ho, I suppose."

_Su Ho!_ I ain't seen him since I got here to Silent Bastion. And that was what? Two days ago? Though, time is so slow and wonky here, I feel like I've been here for a month already.

Geum Young leads me through the book aisles to one of the rooms in the back. Su Ho lays on a straw mattress inside, bandaged up and his face splotched with bruises here and there. He's not awake yet. Interestingly enough, Tiberius is in here too on the side bookshelf. He's wrapped in a little eskimoish parka shiverin' and sniffin' while a ginger tabby pushes a tiny bowl of milky-looking soup towards him.

"Tiberius is sick too?" I ask.

"Too much loopy drug," Tiberius says.

"Not that you should be having any at all," the tabby says. She turns to us and her green eyes widen. "A guest!"

"He's come to help us, Muffin," Geum Young says. "Show him where we keep the dried herbs and the cups. The kettle should go off at any minute for tea."

Muffin jumps off the bookshelf, her fluffy squirrels tail wavin'. "Follow me human. Let's put those opposable thumbs to good use."

I follow Muffin down the hall to a long room with lots of cubbies—most depleted, I notice. "What kind of tea are we makin'?"

Muffin leaps onto the rung of a step ladder. "Su Ho's been really nauseous because of all the pain he's in, so we've been making him ginger, peppermint, and marshmallow root tea for his stomach."

"Ginger again?" I frown. "Don't tell me I have to cut some more up."

"No. We have dried ginger that you can use." Muffin climbs up to the top rung and stands on her hind paws. She points to an almost empty cubby of shriveled ginger slices just out of her reach. "As for the marshmallow root..." Her voice trails as a howl-like whistle pierces the air. "Oh that's the kettle. Can you take it off the fire for me? I'll get the marshmallow root."

As Muffin bounds away, I grab a few slices and continue down the cubby until I find a countertop with four Circles of Fifths on it. A celadon wolf-shaped with silver Helpin' Hands on its back kettle sits on one of them, howlin' a thick flurry of steam from its lips. I pick it up by the tail handle and pour hot water into one of the matchin' puppy cups on the side. Muffin comes back with the peppermint and marshmallow root in a small swatch of cheesecloth. I add the ginger to the mix and I steep the tea until the minty smell sweetens the air. Once done, we return to find Geum Young changin' Su Ho's bloody bandages and Su Ho finally awake but blinkin' tiredly.

"G'mornin'," I say. "You feelin' alright?"

"Nope," Su Ho croaks, but a smile cracks his face. "It's about time you came to see me. I thought you forgot about me."

"Of course not." I set the tea down on the stand by his bed. "Where's Go Dong? I thought he'd be in here by now."

"He was up late last night, putting together a gift for Commander Jin Yi," Geum Young says. "He's still probably asleep."

"A gift?" I echo. Findin' an empty stool by the window, I plop down. "Gift for what?"

"Jin Yi's been nothing but kind to me since she got here, so he wanted to thank her," Su Ho says. "He already made one for Geum Young."

Jin Yi? Kind? "Hold on now..." I put both hands up. "Are we talkin' about the same Jin Yi? The no smilin' kick-your-butt-to-kingdom-come Jin Yi?"

Geum Young laughs softly. "Just because the Commander is strict doesn't mean she lacks a heart." She finishes wrappin' the bandages and discards the dirty ones into another bag. "She's not hard to get along with as long as you do everything she expects from you."

_Could've fooled me._ But then again, I s'pose that do make sense. Thinkin' about it now, the only times Jin Yi really went ham on me was when I trespassed. But still, how's a guy s'posed to know when he's on her good side or bad side if both of them look the same?

The sound of footsteps draw my eyes to the door. It's Jin Yi decked fully in her uniform. She stares at me in a way that make me wonder if Al Cheon led me into a some kind of a trap. She quietly asks, "What are you doing here?"

"Al Cheon told me to help you." When her eyes narrow, I hastily add, "I'm just doin' what ya'll say so I don't get my butt-kicked."

Jin Yi cocks her head and for a heartbeat I think she might just do it anyway. But instead, her hands move to the chin straps of her hat to untie them. "I'm not sure why he'd send you here. But since you are here, wait in the herb garden for me."

"Where is that at?" I ask.

"All the way down this hall," Geum Young says. "Muffin can show you."

Muffin's ears flatten. She stalks past me, grumblin'. "Honestly, I'm startin' to wonder if I'm just the Chaperone Cat around here."

I follow Muffin outside to the lattice doors that lead out into the garden. And as soon as I do, Muffin and I are immediately swaddled by long grasses, tall bushes, and hedges.

"Watch your step," Muffin says. "Lots of shoes get lost in here."

I put up a hand to shield my face from gettin' thwacked by the grass and to keep Muffin in my sight as she takes us along through a narrow aisle between the hedges. Eventually, the hedges give way to a clearin' with a shed and a dragonbird fountain spewin' water. A dirt cross of divides it into four sections, each leadin' to a different part of the junglish garden. In the center of the cross, a sign points to each direction with different pictures on it for each direction: apple for north, turnip for west, and mint leaves for east. Much to my surprise, a lot of the kitchen staff from yesterday are here pickin' through the small vegetable patch for baby bok choy next to the west exit.

_They must be here to get the supplies for dinner._ I watch one of them break off and start rootin' through the garlic. _Looks like they might be makin' some kind of stir-fry._ After a while of lookin', I realize that Muffin's bein' awful quiet so I look around only to find that Muffin ain't around.

The hedges ruffle behind me, but it's only Jin Yi in just her uniform pants, short-sleeved tunic, and a huge wicker basket. She puts the basket in front of me, and walks toward the shed. "Hold Muffin for me."

"Muffin?" I peer into the basket, only to find it empty. "Where is she?"

"I'm right here, _"_ says the wicker basket. "You don't think we're called Keeping Cats for no reason, do you?" Two white stubby paws flail at the sides of the basket. "I can barely hold anything with these things."

"Well, 'scuse me. I didn't know ya'll turned into stuff." I stoop down to pick her. "It ain't like I've been here that—"

Soon as my fingers touch Muffin's side, she leans away. "Nuh, nuh, nuh, nuh, _nuuuuuuh!"_ She hops a few steps away from me. "Your fingers tickle."

I fold my arms. "Well how else am I gonna hold you? With my eyeballs? C'mon now. Jin Yi is gonna be back."

"Then don't pick me up all weird," Muffin says with a sniff. "Pick me like you'd pick up a cat."

"But you ain't shaped like a cat."

"Use your imagination, buckoo!"

I roll my eyes, but I bend down and pick Muffin up the "right" way, which makes her purr. "Can you not do that? This is hecka weird, man. Even comin' from a magic cat-basket."

Muffin goes still as Jin Yi approaches with a golden waterin' can. She gestures with her finger for me to come and I follow her down the eastern path where dew-wet herbs grow in thick patches and gold cherry lanterns give them light.

My insides stir at the sight of so many herbs together in one place. Back at the village, I'd never been one to keep a garden. It always seemed enough to pick it up at the store, or from the patches outside the village, but seein' a garden like this makes me wish I saw sense to give it a try.

She stops beside a cherry lantern. "Do you recognize the herbs here?"

Startled at bein' put on the spot, I stammer, "A-all of them?"

"I will fill in the ones you don't know,"

"Oh. Ha. Let's see there's..." I spot long pointed leaves. "I see lemon verbena there. And I see marigold, tansy, coltsfoot..." I pause at the sight of a blue bulb-shaped flower with bright pink streaks on the outside petals. They almost glow in the darkness like the Symphonic Stream. "What's that blue one?"

"Blue one?" Jin Yi's ears prick as she surveys the field. Once her eyes settle on it, she says, "Pup's Bane."

"What's that good for?" I ask.

"Dying," Jin Yi says flatly. "It's a poison."

"Then why do ya'll have it here?" I ask.

"Baekche warriors grind the seeds and mix it with honey and water to make traps and coat their weapons. And the only anti-venom that works requires Pup's Bane." Jin Yi says. "Since our compound watches that border, we need a large stock of anti-venom. So if you truly intend on remaining in Silla and pursuing medicine, it's important that you have the anti-venom on you at all times. We deal with it often here."

I glance at the blue flower wide-eyed. "Does it kill fast?"

"No, but the anti-venom needs to get into the person's system quickly," Jin Yi says. "Otherwise, the poison gets to the person's chi pathways faster than the cure can act." She digs a few Pup's Bane flowers by the roots. "And at that point, it doesn't matter how much cure you put on the wound."

I lay them carefully into Muffin. _Damn._ Back in Honeythorn, I've always been aware of poison herbs to watch out for, but I've never had to seriously think about what to do if someone ate one. Or had to treat someone who was gonna die. _I sure hope I don't have to._ As Jin Yi puts more Pup's Bane near the basket, I decide to change the subject. "Can I ask you something that's been botherin' me?"

Jin Yi turns pick the marigold next, bitin' the stems with her teeth, and diggin' the roots out. "Yes. Help me pick this marigold."

"Nobody seems to get along here," I say.

Jin Yi drops a bundle of marigold beside Muffin. "That is not a question."

I bend down and pull a fistful out by the stem. "But I ain't wrong, am I? Even at the Tellin', people didn't want to talk to other folk because of their family and all that junk. That ain't normal for so many people to be fightin'."

Jin Yi don't say anything at first, makin' me wonder if she even gonna dignify what I said with a response. But she noses a loose marigold head toward the basket, and says, "I wouldn't say 'so many', but a _certain_ many."

I pause from pullin' stems. "What do you mean?"

The honey badger disappears back into the throng of marigold. "There has been bad blood between the Pak Clan and the Kim Clan for a while."

Rememberin' Mi Shil's reaction to Sul Won at the Tellin', I ask, "But if it's between Paks and Kims, how come I've seen Jeongs involved around here?"

"The Jeong Clan and Pak Clan are close allies with their ruling families tied by many marriages, as are the Choi Clan and the Kim Clan. But neither the Jeong Clan nor the Choi Clan are not nearly as large as the Kim or Pak Clan, so they pick fights very sparingly." Jin Yi's head pops up among the marigold stems further in. "But other clans like the Hwang Clan and the Lee Clan do not care for the feud at all."

I exhale through my nose. "But what are they even feudin' about?" At Jin Yi's silence, a surge of irritation almost make me throw down the marigold in my hands. _She ain't even listenin'!_ But as I look at Jin Yi again, I notice that she's lookin' at something further ahead. I follow her gaze.

Half-crouched in the grass, a huge white panther stares back at me, completely still except for a twitch of its tail. It takes an uncertain step toward me, but its attention shifts to Jin Yi as if lookin' for permission. But then it goes still again and turns away, fadin' into a wink of light.

Jin Yi remains still for a few more moments before she returns to herb-pickin'. "Do not be alarmed. Cream is just curious about you."

I let out the breath I didn't even know I was holdin'. "Is that your Magus Panther?"

"Yes. She normally protects the garden when I'm away," Jin Yi says. "And to answer your question. Magus Panthers are the reason why there is so much strife here."

As we work through the rest of the marigold, I glance at the spot where Cream was standin'. "What's wrong with Magus Panthers?"

"It depends on what you believe is wrong," Jin Yi says. "Magus Panthers are not good or bad in themselves. They reflect their masters like any mirror would."

I pull up the last of the marigold near me. "Then what's the problem?"

"First, to even be able have a Magus Panther, you have to have a vendetta with someone, or a very strong hatred for them," Jin Yi says. "Panthers are born from that anger and they feed on it. The angrier you are the stronger and more violent the panther. They are not like Helping Hands in that you can call them off when they do something you don't like. Sometimes, it takes much force to get them to heed a command. And if you are weak-willed, there is a high chance that you will lose control. And panthers are very dangerous when they are allowed to go that far, even for a whole patrol. Many deaths have been at their claws recently."

"But they can't be all bad. I mean, you and Eun Hae don't seem violent," I say.

"Because we let go of our grudges and we are mere individuals," Jin Yi says. "Issues only started when panthers realize how strong they were together. When we still had a king, we were very concerned about Baekche and Korguryo trying to push into our territory. His Majesty thought it would be a good idea to use the Magus Panthers to our advantage. It was an excellent idea in theory, but he did not take into account a panther's nature."

"Which part? The losing control?" I ask.

Jin Yi shakes her head. "The vendetta. There were two groups: Panthera Black and The Gift of the Magi. Some of the Imperial family participated by becoming panthers. Many others were peasants, orphans, and those who suffered a lot of misfortune. They performed extremely well in warfare and against the Darkborn, but when Silla's enemies were dealt with, they began to target members of the Kim Clan. And since the king's family had participated..."

"They were blamed." I finish.

Jin nods. "The king's family are Kim's by name, not by blood. In reality they come from the Pak Clan, who are equally as powerful as the Kims in strength. Since the king did not want to take action, the Kim Clan saw the attacks as collusion. They drove out anyone who was not a true born Kim and ordered the execution of all Panthera Black and Gift of the Magi members. Other panthers like Eun Hae and I were forced to be documented in the Magus Panther registry."

"Everybody in the groups?" I bring Muffin over to gather the comfrey. "Were they all really guilty?"

"I am not certain. We knew many people in both groups, but never participated directly," Jin Yi says. "But from what our old ties told us, Panthera Black had nothing to do with the attacks."

"Then why hurt them and other folk? Wouldn't it be better to punish the attackers?"

"It is not that simple. You seen already how a panther can disappear without a trace," Jin Yi says. "It's near impossible to catch a panther unless you are one. And if your loved ones are dying, you'll not want to wait to figure out how."

"I understand but that's no reason to hurt innocent people too," I say.

Jin Yi shakes dew and dirt off her paws. "Man has never been a creature of reason."

The hedges rustle loudly. Hei Ryung arrives with a lanky guy in a blue tunic and moccasins who reeks of drakehorse manure.

"There you are, outsider!" Hei Ryung says. "We were looking all over for you!"

"Me?" I stand up. "What for?"

The guy with her clears his throat and straightens up, but his evident fear of eye contact with me just makes him look downright awkward. "I come on behalf of the Grand Belle and her family to invite you to stay at Kim Manor until your appointment with the Queen."

My stomach hardens. _And what do you want, Sul Li?_ "What about Kwan and everybody else?"

The servant blinks, lookin' abashed. "Everyone else?" He shakes his head. "Oh, no, no. She was strictly clear that the invitation to stay was only for you.

Tch. So I get to stay in a manor while my friends stay out in the cold? Why is that even surprisin'? "I don't know how I feel about goin' up there, sir."

"I'll escort you there myself," Jin Yi says, shiftin' back into human.

"Thanks, but I'll have to really think about that," I say.

The servant looks like he wants to say somethin', but instead he just ducks his head and says, "Very well. I'll tell her your thoughts. But the invitation remains open." He reaches for the tied scroll at his pelt and hands it to me.

I take it without a word and watch Hei Ryung and the servant leave. _Guys, can one of ya'll take this?_ Immediately the letter poofs out of my hand. As I turn back to Jin Yi, I find her starin' at me. "What?"

"You were so eager to see her when you first came here," Jin Yi says. "It's surprising you're hesitant now."

I give a quick shrug. "Things are different now, I guess. I don't really know how to feel about your Grand Belle an invitation after what she said at the library." I bend down, preparin' to pick up any more loose comfrey Jin Yi pulls up, however the Lion Heart Commander isn't diggin'. "What?"

Jin Yi sits down in the dirt. "If you are going to decide how to feel about someone, you should do it after you've gotten to know them, not sitting here and going off on brief encounters."

"I don't want to give her another chance to throw me in library jail," I say.

Jin Yi raises an eyebrow. "You think that being over here stops her from doing that?"

"No, but I sure feel a lot better bein' over here than bein' over there." I pick at the comfrey clumps in the ground, acutely aware of Jin Yi's gaze still on me. "How come you keep lookin' at me like that? You were standin' there when she threw me in jail."

Jin Yi side-glances at her usual impassive way. "As understandable as that anger is, the streets are hardly safe for an outsider to be wandering. It's not even safe for ordinary Sillans. But even so, it is always a grave mistake to judge someone you hardly know, and an even graver one to judge at all." She gets up again. "So if you going to decide how you feel about her Highness, decide _after_ you've seen her."

I look at the comfrey at my feet and sigh. "Fine, then. I'll go. If that's what you really want."

"Now, go wash off. The Kims will throw a fit if you get dirt on their carpet."

I look at Muffin. "What about the garden? You don't want me to keep helpin' you?"

"No. I can tell you just want an excuse to stay here."

_Ahhh... Busted._ "Alright you got me." I get up. "Are you sure you don't got special Owl eyeballs?"

"I've got a Hwarang that's been dealing with trainees for centuries," Jin Yi says. "Do you really think I haven't heard every excuse in the book?"

"Well—"

Jin Yi's eyes narrow. "Boy, go wash your hands."

_Butter biscuits almighty_ ...As I leave, I can't help but look over my shoulder a few times. _I feel like you care more about me goin' than I do._

I wash my hands in the Library of War's restroom before headin' into the common room. I pause at the stairs, tryin' to think if there's anything I could've forgotten in the room. _Guys, do we have everything?_

_Oooh, let me count everything,_ Aria says. _There's the spear, the curry powder, your clothes, your betrothal necklace, your Lifebook..._

_I've still got that stank potion and your dirty undies from the old lady, if anyone cares,_ Brio says.

_Which reminds me..._ Aria says. _Someone please hurry and get injured so we can get use it. I hate that awful smell. It's starting to come over to the Main Menu._

_I don't smell anything,_ Forte says.

_Forte does your nose even work?_ Brio asks.

_I'm gonna take that as yes we got everything,_ I say. But that knowledge ain't a comfort. I feel like I _should_ have more, done more, or at least _be_ more. I'm gonna be stayin' at the queen's home while she's is _in_ there. I suck in a shaky breath. I think I'd rather be in a cage with a real tiger.

"Nervous?"

The sound of Mi Shil's voice suddenly so close to me, makes me jump back against the stair railin'. "Woman, you scared me!"

She tips her head and laughs. "But I walked right in front of you and said hello! I even waved my hand and everything. You looked like you saw a ghost."

"No." I peel myself from the banister. "I'm just nervous cuz I have to go to Kim Manor." When Mi Shil's cheerful expression starts to melt, I hastily add, "It's for a hearin' with the queen. I can't get out of it."

Her eyes widen. "The queen? What did you do?"

"We didn't do anything," I rub my neck. "But some of the Gayan folks who came here with me were talkin' about settlin' and you know...if the queen gives her say so, I might be able to stay here permanently. I saw her from the window yesterday, and she looked mighty scary."

"I would imagine," Mi Shil says. "She's the tiger of Silla after all. I bought this honey notecake in Silent Bastion earlier, but..." She reaches into a string pouch at her side and pulls out something circular wrapped in cheesecloth. "I think you might make better use of it."

I take it. It's warm and still smells faintly of vanilla and honey. "Well thank you. I've never heard notecake before. Is it better than ordinary cake?"

"Mmhmm... It's our custom to get them engraved with musical enchantments to protect us or strengthen us," Mi Shil says. "The enchantment for this one is pianissimo _._ It tones down troubling thoughts and feelings I was going to save it for my placement exam, but you're going to need it far more than me if you're really seeing Her Majesty."

I gape at the cake. "For real? I can eat a cake for almost anything?"

"Well...The cakes can protect you against a lot, but they tend to not protect your waistline," Mi Shil says. "So don't over indulge."

As soon as she finishes speakin', Jin Yi comes into the common room, fully dressed again.

"I gotta go," I say. "Thanks for the gift. And good luck on your exam."

_And I'll take that!_ Brio says, takin' my honey cake.

Aria squawks. _Hey! Who said you get to take the food, monkey?_

_Ahem...Please read the item description. It is a food item with a calming effect on the human, therefore it's a healing item._

_It doesn't heal any HP,_ Aria says.

_It_ _heals **status**_ _effects,_ Brio says. _And whose department is that? Oh yeah. Miiiiiiine!_

Aria huffs. _Well, nice to hear you sound so pleased for once. Any other time you complain about being in charge of medicine._

_Nope, If I get to hold onto food, I'm stickin' with the Medicine Pocket!_ Brio chirps.

**_Mi Shil's Oh-So-Delicious Honey Notecake (Pianissimo) x1 Obtained_**

A tall Lion Heart guard comes in from the compound entrance and dip his head to Jin Yi. "Your horse and the other escorts are ready in the front, Commander."

"Good, tell Gi Su that she's in charge until I return," Jin Yi says. Then she approaches me. "I hope you're prepared. Once we leave, I doubt you'll get to come back here until your business is done. So if you think you've forgotten anything, go look now,"

"It's alright. I've got everything I need."

"Good. Then come." Jin Yi brushes past me to go outside. I wave goodbye to Mi Shil and hurry outside to catch up with Jin Yi. Outside, Jin Yi mounts a kneelin' black drakehorse while three other Lion Heart guards mount their steeds.

"I don't get to ride a nice horse?" I ask.

One of the Lion Heart guards gives a boisterous laugh. "Ride somebody else's horse? What? You wanna be kicked, outsider?"

"Don't laugh at him, Bo Han," chides a brunette guard. "It's not like an outsider would know anything about drakehorses."

Bo Han trots his horse up to me. "Well don't be fooled. They look all nice and calm when we're on them. It's another story when you want to ride one."

"Unfortunately, you'll have to walk all the way up to Kim Manor," The brunette says. "It's on the highest floor of Silent Bastion."

"Everything I need to get to tends to be on the highest floor of somethin' in this place," I say. "I'm used to it now."

Bo Han follows behind Jin Yi's lead. "Hey, well at least you don't live there _and_ serve like the Tiger Fury. Otherwise you'd have to go up and down every day."

This mornin' Silent Bastion is bubblin' full of life like boilin' soup. A troupe full of children with a wagon of colorful-lookin' cakes are flaggin' people down in this square though... with the way some of them are waving' those cake knives, I suspect there's some hecka shady solicitin' goin' on over there. But at least there are a whole lot more Hwarang out there in the streets keepin' the peace.

We get on the final Circle of Fifths that takes us up to the top-level where Kim Manor towers on the centermost platform, cobalt curl-eaved roof gleamin' under the Symphonic stream and gold statues shinin' just as bright. Up here, tiger Helpin' Hands prowl freely in the squares. There ain't many folk out, but there sure ain't a single poor man on this floor. Everyone's got tasseled shoes, jewlery drippin' all over them, layered robes, fancy parasol, and a well-dressed servant always somewhere close. Heck, even the Keepin' Cats are dressed better than me. There ain't no dirt or trash either. And it's quiet as standin' water.

"Must be nice to be rich," I mutter, watchin' two ladies have tea in front of fountain-shaped like tiger killin' a dragon.

"Kims always take care of their own," Bo Han says. "You'll never see a Kim living here who doesn't have the best of everything."

I scan the plaza, wonderin' if I might catch a glimpse of Sul Li. But none of the pale faces here are hers.

"The Grand Belle isn't here," the brunette says, as if readin' my mind. "It'd be awfully rude for her to call a guest and not be home to receive them."

Jin Yi leads us under a vine-ridden archway. Two tiger dog statues stand guard on the walkway that leads into Kim Manor, but it's not Dave and the Great Guardian of the Left. The left statue is too muscular to be feminine and the sunglasses and durag he's got on don't really strike me as something she or Dave would wear. The one on the right got a bright blue scarf on her head.

The moment we walk up to them, their tails cross in front of us.

"Uh-uuuuuh!" snap the statue on the right. "Ya'll can't just roll up on Queen Seon Deok's place like that. What ya'll think this is? Back. It. _Up!"_

Jin Yi nods to the rest of her guard and they part from in front of me. She says, "We've brought the Grand Belle's guest as she requested."

The muscular statue lowers his huge head to be level with my face. He bellows a deep, "You might be important and all, but you still don't roll up on nobody's house like you ain't got no sense. I'mma need to see some ID, short stack."

"And some air freshener!" The right statue put a paw over her nose. "Cuz ya'll stank like _real_ bad. Hooooo _wheeee_! Buddha have mercy. Either somebody's underarms are musty or a bunch of ya'll are Magus Panthers."

"I don't think Febreze was invented yet," says the statue with the durag. "Or deodorant."

"Don't tell me that lie," the female says. "All the Kims that walk around here are must- _free,_ so I _know_ ya'll can wash up under them arms!"

Bo Han blinks. "Since when does the Kim Clan have such...colorful statues?"

"Excuse you?" The female glares at him. "I got a name. You can call me the Great Guardian of the East Coast, thank you very much."

"We are the Magus Panthers," Jin Yi says. "I assure you that the Grand Belle's guest is not."

I open my hand and the invitation poofs into it.

Both statues look at each other, then let their tails down. Then the Great Guardian of the East Coast points at her mouth with her paw and jab it at me. "Alright, but I got my 'Ah' on you, musty. Cut up just _once._ Just _once._ And me and the Great Guardian of the West Coast are gonna pound you into rice cake."

The Great Guardian of the West Coast bare his sharp gold fangs at me. "There's gonna be a cremation urn with yo' name on it short stack."

_Yeeesh!_ Even the statues around here are mean and nasty.

"Look here, musty." The Great Guardian of the East Coast raise the paw that ain't on her nose. "You're gonna all the way down this lane make a left at the split and go all the way down to the main hall. If you get punched in the face, then you've gone too far and it serves you right." Then the Great Guardian of the East Coast make a shooin' motion at me. "Get up on outta here with yo' nasty self before I Aerosol you, Musty. But the rest of ya'll need to go on back home because I don't see no parkin' permits on these horses and I don't feel like callin' a tow ox."

I hurry away from the statues, lookin' back once at the Lion Heart guards. My heart thuds thickly in my throat. _I'm alone here._ My chest constricts at the thought. Up until now, I never really gave much thought to the folk I've been around and how assurin' their company was. I force myself to focus on the words that the Great Guardian of the East Coast said. _Okay, okay... she said turn at the split._

_Haven't seen one of those yet,_ Brio says.

_This is one awful long walkway,_ Aria says. _Why do rich people need so much room?_

_I have a better question,_ Brio says. _Why does an Imperial dragonbird need a Main Menu and a Treasure pocket all to herself? Oh wait._

_Well if you'd like to give up the honey cake—_

_Look here,_ I say. _One of ya'll better not eat my cake. I'm tryin' to save it for the hearin', but if ya'll keep talkin' about it, I'm eatin' my cake right now._

When the two quiet down, I return to lookin' around. Deep blue lotuses laze on a tiger-shaped pond. Blue-clad soldiers patrol by, eyein' me but they don't stop me. A train of blue and violet hydrangeas dot the bushes leadin' up to the split that the statue talked about. A couple chattin' together in a gold-roofed pavilion pay me a glance as I pass.

The left path take me down a wide line flanked by stone lanterns lit with gold flames. At the end, I spot the main hall, but even more relievin' is the sight of the Great Guardian of Left on her pedestal. But by the looks of it, Dave's pedestal got a standin' Buddha statue on it. As I get closer, the Great Guardian seem to just be gnawin' on her gold ball with droopy ears, but she perk up on her pedestal and wag her tail at the sight of me. "Oh it's my favorite suspicious-smelling human that I almost murdered! What are you doing here?"

"Sul Li invited me for a visit," I say. "How come you're out here by yourself? Dave ain't here too?"

Her shoulders slump. "He's feeling a bit under the pedestal this morning. Poor fellow came down with a case of the Autosave. He can't heal anyone's HP, PP, or switch party members, but it wasn't that severe so he ought to be well enough for dinner guard duty. In the meantime, we have a temporary worker but..." She looks at the Buddha statue. "As you can see he's not much of a social bug. I haven't gotten a single word of him since he showed up. He doesn't even move, friend. He's like a rock."

_Probably cuz because he is a rock._ "Maybe he's shy and you're scarin' him. No offense, but you're kinda intimidatin'. Give him some time."

The Great Guardian of the Left snorts. "Shy? Look at him! He's always smiling over there like he knows something that I don't." She plops her butt down on her pedestal, cuttin' eyes at the Buddha. "I don't like it. It makes me feel stupid."

"Oh come on now. It ain't nice to be talkin' about other people like that," I say. "Especially in the third person, when they're standin' right there."

But the Great Guardian shakes her head. "But human I've _tried_ speaking to him in the first person and second person already. I tried multiple viewpoint characters and head-hopping. I even tried third person omniscent!" She sighs. "Third person limited seems to suit him best."

My gaze flicks between the Great Guardian of the Left to the Buddha. "Maybe he's just the strong silent type."

The Great Guardian of the Left frown up like she ain't convinced. Then her tail curls up, "I suppose it doesn't matter. Queen Seon Deok is the one we have to impress at dinner. Can you believe they're doing a Ward Away Evil review already? We were just imported."

"Well are ya'll prepared?"

"I feel good about it, but Dave doesn't have that intimidating confidence, you know? He's worried Queen Seon Deok won't like him because his nose chipped off." The Great Guardian of the Left scuff her pedestal top with a paw. "I wish he wouldn't fret about it so much. I think he's fine the way he is."

I fold my arms. "Well, you said ya'll ain't been here long as the other statues, so she probably ain't gonna be harsh on ya'll."

The Great Guardian of the Left put a paw to her chin. "I hope so. I've heard the Queen doesn't suffer tolerate anything less than flawless performance. Or go easy on newcomers."

"Good luck, then," I say. "Tell Dave I'm hopin' he feels better. And let me know how your review goes."

The Great Guardian of the Left purrs. "We will. See you at dinner, human."

In the main hall large foyer spreads out before me full of guards, servants, and even more nobles. Interestin'ly enough, for all the hostility and xenophobia I've seen in Silla thus far, don't seem to be here in Kim Manor. Folk stare at me with the same unabashed openness of a child curious about somethin' they've never seen before. I can only guess that these people don't get out much (or other folk don't get in much).

I pause beside a wooden pillar, to deflect some of the looks and peer around at the numerous doors leadin' to different parts of the manor. _Well where am I s'posed to go now?_ Those statues were so focused on tryin' to threaten me that they didn't tell me where to go—

A sudden weight on my head jolts me out of my thoughts. _What_ the? I turn around to find a short elderly man and a woman with their hands stretched out on my head, and their eyes wide. I stare at them. "Can I help ya'll?"

"Your hair is so pointy!" The Kim man says, smushin' my hair with his hand. "You look like a hedgehog."

"What oils do you put on it?" asks the woman. "I've never seen this at the Soap Deli."

I open my mouth to tell them off for just walkin' up and puttin' their hands on me, but their earnest looks make me stop. These folk really don't seem to know better. It wouldn't be right to just go off on them. "My hair is always like that after it gets wet. If ya'll got some mousse, you can use that to make your hair spiky."

The two stare wide-eyed at each other.

"Moose!" The elderly woman squeaks. "I think the Tiger Fury brought one in earlier! Let's go ask them for the fat, dear!"

"Uh, ma'm. That's not the kind of mousse I was—" But the two are already leavin' to the western pair of doors. However, as they are about to disappear they pause and step back to let Queen Mama Ma Ya and Sul Li enter the room.

My heart squeezes. _They're here!_

The four chatter on for a little bit, with the elderly couple spewin' words excitedly. However at the look of confusion on Sul Li and the Queen Mama's face, I figure they must be sharin' what I told them. The couple point in my direction, causin' Sul Li to look my way.

My breath catches as our eyes meet. From here it's impossible to tell what could be on her mind. But she gently guides Queen Mama Ma Ya towards me.

The air gets thicker and thicker by the second as they get closer.

The tip of Queen Mama Ma Ya's walkin' crook taps my foot. "Welcome, young one. The winds of heaven must be up to something to blow you all the way to Silla after we met."

"I've never been much of a believer of fate," I say. My gaze slides momentarily to Sul Li, who seems to interested in everything else in the room besides me. "But some things do feel like they really are meant to be."

"No matter what brought you here, you are welcome in Kim Manor. Usually it's our custom for the clan leader to receive our guests and join them for a meal, but unfortunately the Queen is discussing important matters with our clan council. General Hong Do has offered to have breakfast with you in her stead. I'd like to show you around myself, my bones are old." Queen Mama Ma Ya reaches for Sul Li's hand, gettin' her attention. "Why don't you show him to the General's quarters, little one?"

Sul Li dips her head and gestures to the eastern doors. "This way." Her tone is stiffly formal.

_Our last talk ain't been forgotten I see,_ I think sourly. _But why even invite me over here at all, if you're_ _gonna have an attitude about it?_ I follow her, keepin' myself occupied by lookin' at the servants and silently wish one to come over and make the walk less awkward, but no one comes.

The guards at the eastern doors bow to Sul Li and open the doors to let us through into an outside passage walled off by the other buildin's. Sul Li goes first onto the gravel-flanked walkway, hands clasped in front of her gold robes, but she waits until I'm at her side and keeps pace with me. The only sound out here is the creak of our shoes on the wood beneath us.

My heart thrums hot and uncomfortable. I consider askin' Brio for Mi Shil's honey cake to calm down, but opt not to. It wouldn't feel right to be eatin' and snackin' before a meal with somebody.

In the corner of my eye, I see Sul Li raise a hand to move a strand of hair behind her ear. "You seem well," she says quietly. From her lips it almost sounds like a question.

My teeth clench involuntarily. _No thanks to you throwin' me under the bus._ "I'm fine." I spit the words out harder than I mean to.

The silence comes back thicker as we round the corner to another labyrinth-like passage way. I don't look at her, but I can feel that same porcupine-like energy Sul Li had at the library prickin' me now.

A knot wells in my throat. _Please don't say anything else. Please don't—_

"You are not going to speak to me in my own house?" Sul Li demands.

A heated barb itches my fists. I whirl to face her. "What do you want me to do? Babble like a fool? If I _ain't_ got anything to say, I _ain't_ got anything to say."

She puts her hands on her hips. "How about 'hello'? Or 'how are you doing'?"

"Well 'scuse me, Miss Nacho Belle Grande. You didn't exactly _look_ like you wanted to talk to me."

"The last time we spoke you didn't _look_ like you wanted to talk to me either," Sul Li snaps back.

I throw up my hands. "Then what did you invite me for?"

Sul Li's nostrils flare. "Because maybe I wanted to do something _nice_ for you."

I snort. "Oh yeah, you want to be nice now _after_ you throw me into jail."

She scoffs. "If I wanted to be cruel, I could've done much worse. I didn't _have_ to open my home to you."

I fold my arms. "I didn't _have_ to open mine to you either. Or feed you. Or help you when you were sick. And for the record, you didn't _have_ to throw me in jail either." When Sul Li clenches her fists, I says, "But it don't count cuz I'm a nobody, right?"

Sul Li gapes at me for a long moment. "You think you don't count to me?"

"What am I s'posed to think when my so-called _friend_ puts me behind bars like I'm some kind of dirty dog?"

"You could at least say 'thank you'! Compared to the streets and Restricted Access, Special Collections is a _luxury._ "

"Which is exactly why you ain't stayin' there, right?" I look her up and down. "I came here to give you the benefit of the doubt, and you got the nerve to say I should be _grateful_ to go to jail?"

Sul Li's lips pinch. "And what? You think I can bend rules for you whenever I feel like it?"

"Did you think I should bend my uncle's rules for you?" I retort.

Sul Li scoffs. "And what countries does your uncle rule?"

"Maybe this one if ya'll didn't boot people out," I snap. "Should I be grateful for that too?"

Sul Li looks away, head shakin'. Blinkin' a few times, she just heaves a sigh, and whispers, "It was a mistake to ever speak to you."

My heart stops. My muscles slacken as I watch her leave, but then I tighten them up harder when she's gone. _Speak for yourself._

_Human...you shouldn't have done that,_ Brio says.

Anger rises in my stomach. _What do you mean? Did you even hear the way she talked to me first?_

_Not that! She was our way to the General!_ Brio says.

_It's fine,_ I say. _We'll just have to get there ourselves. I'm sure we can ask a servant or Keepin' Cat._

_Even still..._ Forte says. _I feel that Brio is right. You shouldn't have done that._

I scoff. _Don't tell me you're taking up for her, too?_

_No, but I sensed a very strange energy in her,_ Forte says. _I don't think it should be trifled with._

_You're talkin' to the wrong one, Forte. I ain't the one that's triflin'._ But as I start walkin' to try to find my way around, I can't help but remember the way Sul Li had acted at the library and the fear I felt when she looked at me. At the time, I figured that I felt that way because she seemed so angry. Then again... every time Sul Li did give off that eerie energy she _was_ angry, but I s'pose that now it don't matter given that Sul Li probably don't want anything to do with me now.

After a few minutes of wanderin' around, I manage to flag down a servant who takes me to a small buildin' tucked in the furthest corner of Kim Manor. Inside, huge gold screens depict huntin' scenes and silk paintin's of sandalwood gardens hang on the walls. Though it's quiet all over the Kim level of Silent Bastion, there's a melancholy about General Hong Do's place that just seems to ooze self-pity. And judgin' by the way the dust cakes up on some of the screens and how attendant-free it is, I'd say the servants don't clean everywhere equal.

The servant stops us in front of the largest pair of double slidin' doors and knocks. "General Hong Do, the guest has come to see you."

"Splendid!" General Hong Do says. "Send him in."

The servant pulls the doors apart for me and I step in.

A messy tangle of brushes, ink pots, ink sticks, rice paper, silk, and brushes lay everywhere amidst unfinished paintings, weapons, strategy maps, and the occasional erotic picture book. His desk has been cleared and arrayed with our meal, but General Hong Do is in the corner, paintin' a tiger and a dragon bound together by some kind of cloth around their necks. He looks over his shoulder and dips his brush in the water. "Welcome! I was starting to get worried about you."

"I got lost," I say. "Ya'll have a pretty big place."

His eyebrows furrow. "I thought Sul Li was supposed to escort you." He dries his brush off. "Well no matter. Have a seat and help yourself. We have much to discuss."

_We do?_ I hope it's not about my cookin'. I sit down in the guest chair. The servant opens the dome trays on my side: chicken ginseng soup and potato pancakes. It's lukewarm and nothin' fancy (which is a surprise for Kim Manor), but havin' not eaten earlier, I scarf everything down like its the meal of a king. General Hong Do must have been starvin' too because he's eatin' as fast as I do. Full, I lower my spoon beside my soup. "What was that you were paintin'?"

"Oh that?" The General looks at the tiger and dragon paintin'. "Do you like it? I call it The Wedding of the Tiger and Dragon."

"Weddin'? They're gettin' married?"

General Hong Do nods. "When a couple wants to get married in Silla, they go to a musigician that makes them a wedding tie and make preparations to depart for their Bonding Journey."

I sit up. "So ya'll don't go to no shrine or a temple for a ceremony?"

He gives me a baffled stare. "A ceremony?"

"Yeah, that's how we do it where I come from," I say.

"But how do you know if your partner loves you or not?" the General asks.

"They agree to it?"

The General shakes his head. "They could be lying!"

"Well how do ya'll do it then?" I ask.

"Why...You send the engaged couple off on a long grueling journey in the wilderness!" General Hong Do says as if it's somethin' I should've learned in kindergarten.

"In the wilderness _?"_ I repeat the words slowly, but puttin' them in my own mouth don't help me believe them. "Ain't that dangerous?"

"Of course it is!" General Hong Do says. "The more dangerous the better. How else are you going to know that you _really_ love them?"

"When she's sorta not dead next to me?"

General Hong Do gives a dismissive wave. "If your spouse dies, it probably wouldn't have worked out anyway."

I suppress the urge to scrub a hand over my face. "Do ya'll make your king and queen do this too?"

General Hong Do blinks. "Are you kidding? Why, the Bonding Journey is the _most_ important test for the King and the Grand Belle before they reign! We make that one the most dangerous of all."

I gawk. "For real?"

"If they cannot even handle a mere trip with just the two of them, how can they handle the pressures of an entire kingdom and all outside them?" He brings another potato pancake over to his plate with his chopsticks. "Unthinkable! We make certain that they go on a very long and difficult journey to prepare them. It jolts the soft palace coddling out of them."

_Guess I'm never gettin' married in Silla then._

The General eats his pancakes, glancin' at me every so often.

"Is something on my face sir?"

"No, but if you don't mind..." He dabs at his lips with a handkerchief. "I have some questions for you."

I rest my hand on my knee to keep it from bouncin'. "This ain't about yesterday, is it?"

"Hmm?" His forehead wrinkles up. "You mean your cooking? No, not at all." He signal to the servants to skidaddle with a grand sweepin' shooin' motion. He laces his fingers together. "Truthfully, your cooking reminded me of someone I knew a long time ago."

I pull at the collar of my shirt. "But all I did was follow the recipe like Jin Yi said. If anyone should be gettin' credit, it should be her."

"Oh, but I don't deny her part in it. I've had plenty of Jin Yi's cooking and I could still taste her hand in it." He pats his stomach. "But every craftsman leaves his unique mark on what he touches. And so I have to ask..." He pushes his bowl of soup aside. "Who are you, my boy?"

_Eun Hae put you up to this, didn't she?_ But Eun Hae never asked that question to get a right answer (since she already seem to know everything about me by whatever crack voodoo she does on the side), if anything she only asked that question to see what I would say.

She also _wasn't_ a Kim that was alive when my folks were driven out. "I don't know what you mean, sir. I'm Kurai."

The General's eyes thin, makin' a cold pricklin' flood through my skin. "No, that is your name. I asked who you _are."_ He brings a cup to his lips. "Family clan, parents, _lineage_. I know you have one. I tasted it."

I sit back in my chair. "Hold on...Rewind or push the pause button or somethin'. How in the heck do you get all that from a plate of pork I cooked?"

General Hong Do rubs his temple and sighs. "Boy, I just told you..." He shakes his head. "Oh. Never mind. I'll just say it outright. I _know_ you're Prince Chun Chu."

"I still don't get how you jumped from grilled pork to prince."

"You cook like your uncle."

I scoot further back in my chair. "Is that s'posed to be a compliment, sir? Cuz my uncle's meat usually come out tastin' like a shoe."

The General bangs his fist on the table. "It doesn't matter! _You_ are the Crown Prince. And the _rightful_ king of Silla." When I don't say anything, he goes on and says, "You understand what a prince, don't you?"

"I understand Queen Seon Deok will pop me upside the head. If she don't chop it off first."

General Hong Do gives a small awkward cough. "Ah yes, her. I suppose that's a valid concern. I got a little ahead of myself."

I fold my arms. "And how do I know that you ain't gonna turn me over and get me shot with arrows?"

The General squints at me. "Boy, it's not Silla's custom to lie to who we don't like. If I really wanted to do such a thing, I could've ordered for you to be arrested in your sleep or as soon as you walked in here." He leans back in his chair. "I'm not in the business of dooming Silla's future."

"Speakin' of your wife, how come she's Queen, but you ain't king?" I ask.

The General's gaze falls to the table. "It is very hard to explain. But to put a long story short, she has the Mandate of Heaven and I do not. There are other issues, but I'm certain that you are already aware that a man must have a dragonbird phoenix, correct?"

I nod.

He stretches both hands. "When the chosen ruler takes the throne and chooses their lifemate, normally their lifemate will get the dragonbird's blessing as well. It did not happen for me. But even so, Silla needs their King and Grand Belle. Not just one king or one queen. If you truly plan on remaining here to be king, you should start looking for a wife soon if you haven't already."

"Well, that's all nice and dandy, but how do I even be king in the first place?" I ask. "I'm a nobody."

The General looks up at the ceilin'. "Hmm. I wish I had advice to give you. Your father's acension was rather straight forward and widely accepted. But I do not think you'd have that luxury since no one knows you."

"I already knew that much since even before I got here, sir," I say. "But ain't there at least one person who can do somethin' to help?"

The General scratches his chin. "In the past, a whenever a king was troubled about something, he always sought the Hand of Time for guidance. Unfortunately, when King Jin Ji usurped the throne, Lady Hwang went into hiding. She was the Hand of Time of your father's reign. She no longer lives unfortunately. But if I recall, Lady Hwang did anoint you king before she perished. Therefore, the succeeding Hand of Time should already be assigned to you."

"If that's true, then why don't the Hand of Time come out now?" I ask. "There ain't no reason to hide."

He shrugs. "The Hand of Time always works in mysterious ways. Even when Lady Hwang was around, it was hard to understand what she would do and wouldn't do. However, a Hand of Time will always be faithful to her king, so I'd imagine that if she still lives, she is waiting for you."

I sigh a noisy breath. "But waitin' _where?"_

The General puts up both hands. "Don't be cross with me, my lord. I never understood how being king works. When your father and I were friends, even before he became king, he told me that he knew it was Lady Hwang, even before they formally met. So I was always under the impression that it is not something you can be ignorant of."

"Apparently, unless you're me," I say, slumpin' in my chair. "Not that it matters right now. I've got the Queen to worry about. I don't s'pose you know when I'll see her, do you?"

"Tonight at dinner," General Hong Do says.

"Wait a minute. Is it just gonna be me?" I ask. "My friends are s'posed to give their testimony too."

"Don't worry. She has not forgotten them. But as for your Hand of Time..." The General drums his hands on the table. "I really feel it is a matter that you do not need too worry so much about. If you are king, it is natural she'll want to be near you, so she'll come to you, if she has not done so already."

"Already? And the Hand of Time definitely can't be a man?"

"Well..." The General pulls his ear. "Technically, the Hand of Time can only be the opposite gender of their chosen king. So, unless there are female kings running around, it's always going to be a woman."

My gaze trails to the wall absently. _I guess that leaves Sul Li out since she doesn't want to be near me_. Mi Shil could be, but she strikes me as an ordinary person. But if I've met the Hand of Time already, then I'd be the dimmest lightbulb in the pack if I didn't put Eun Hae up as a suspect. But if that's true, then there's a whole lot more that doesn't make sense.

For one, if I'm _her_ chosen king, then why toy with the option of lettin' me stay at home at all? What good would it do to stay in the village when I'm s'posed to be here? And second of all, if she's the Hand of Time, why didn't she say that when I asked her on the night of the Tellin'? It wouldn't have been that hard, and it sure would be much easier to understand than her sayin' that I Am nonsense. But if she's _not_ the Hand of Time, then cream of mushroom soup almighty I don't know who it could be.

"And before I forget..." The General's voice brings me back to the present. "Look into Hwarang service. It's a requirement for a king to have military service under his belt."

Before I can respond, there is a knock on the door.

"Come in," General Hong Do says.

The doors come apart and Min Ah ducks under the doorway to get inside.

"Good, just the shaman I wanted to see," the General says. "Would you take our guest to the Library of SHIS?"

I do a double take, wonderin' if I heard what I just heard. "The what?"

"The Library of SHIS," the General repeats firmly. "You know, like the Grand Library of Lore?"

At a complete loss for words, I can only manage a nod and look at Min Ah.

"What does he need to go for?" Min Ah asks.

"He needs to look at the records for the Hwarang, but more importantly the boy needs to learn how to read and write," General Hong Do says. "He might fill out an application. You are filling out one as well, aren't you?"

She blinks. "Well yes, but...that's an application for a Hwarang transfer it's not quite the same. I don't think trainees are still being accepted in every guard." She glances at me. "And it might be a problem since he is an outsider."

"Well, it is up to the Hwarang leaders is it not?" the General says. "Maybe he can appeal to one of them. I'm sure. And if not, we are seeing the highest law of the land at dinner, so I am certain that it is no problem."

I don't say anything. _Yeah, but that's assumin' the highest law of the land buy my story and don't figure out who I am._ And somethin' tells me that Queen Seon Deok ain't the type that'll fall for just anything.

### _1-10_

KIM MANOR'S LIBRARY of SHIS ain't as big as the Grand Library of Lore, but despite the name, and like everything else on this level, it's not bad-lookin' or lackin' anything in the fancy department. The book aisles curl in white half-circles like crescent moons and the ceilin' above is clear like it was in the Ancestral Altar. Cool minty green light shinin' from the Symphonic Stream seems to soak into all the furniture and give it a heavenly glow.

"Do you know what book you're looking for?" Min Ah asks. "Or have an idea of which guard's record that you want? Because we can—"

"Min Ah!" Two girls in blue King's Hand cloaks and books clamped to their chests make a beeline for us. The long-legged one poke her lip out like she's most ready to cry and says, "Min Ah you've got to help us! Our treble musigician exam is tomorrow and I'm so confused about the Rushin' Roulette. I don't get it at all."

Min Ah cross her arms over her chest, frownin'. "Bo Jong is having you learn the Rushin' Roulette? But it's so soon for a technique like that."

"Yeah, but our Field Marshal said it's going to be on the exam and we didn't cover it!" the other girl wails. "Could you show us how to do it? We don't want to get marked down."

Min Ah looks at me. "Would you be okay finding your way around if I helped them? It will take a little bit."

"Sure. Take your time," I say. "I'll be in the military stuff."

"Then the Keeping Cat at the Help Desk should be able to help you find it," Min Ah says. "I'll come meet you afterwards." "She turns and walks off with the other girls. "Now why in the name of Father Wolf is Bo Jong pushing that on you?"

"Oh my gosh! I don't know..." Their voices fade.

I turn and make my way to the Help Desk where a very familiar lookin' brown Main Coon is lickin' himself next to a pile of books. "You work in this library too?"

He cocks his head. "What are you talking about, human?"

"Ain't you the cat that work in the Grand Library of Lore?" I ask.

The tabby keep starin' and then he stands up and says, "Oh I see how it is. Just because Zhen Lao is Chinese, all of a sudden every cat here is Chinese, aren't they?" He sniffs disdainfully. "Well, I'll have you know that not all cats are the same! I am Count Von Fluffles and I was here _first."_

"Well, sorry. I ain't ever had to tell any cat apart from another one," I mutter. "My mistake."

" _Clearly."_ Count Von Fluffles curls his tail over his paws. "Anyway, welcome to the Library of SHIS where we have somewhat helpful information stuff technically and a five-star rating from Ghosts Could Be Lurking. How may I help you? Not that I want to."

"Sorry, but I do need help."

Count Von Fluffles groans. "Ugh. _Helping_."

"I'm looking for stuff on all the different Hwarang," I say, ignorin' the Count's attitude. "Where can I find it?"

He unfurls his tail, pointin' through the center of the library. "All the way down, make a right and go all the way to the purple books. If something screams like a crazy woman, please remind it to use its inside voice. People may be in excruciating agony, but this is still a library and _some_ people come here to read."

"Alright. Thanks for the help." I make my way through the throng of people and keep track of the book colors on each shelf. As I do, I realize that they don't have any words on the them. How in the heck do Sillans find anything here?

As I start to turn onto the aisle of purple books, a glimpse of a familiar blue cloak stops me makes me pull back around the corner in an instant. Did I just see what I _think_ I saw?

I inch my face closer to the edge of the bookcase, heart beatin' faster and faster.

It's another man. His black and yellow robes get my attention right away. Even though I haven't been here that long I know for fact that he can't be a Kim. The beginnin' of thin mustache threads across his upper lip. I guess that he's about the same age as me and Sul Li. He holds Sul Li as she puts back books on the higher shelves which makes me wonder when there's a perfectly good ladder right behind them gettin' no action whatsoever. But my wonder quickly dissipates once he says, "See? No more noodle arms."

"They're _passable_ ," Sul Li teases as he lets her down. "But I'm sure I felt a shake or two."

An uneasy pang shifts in my heart. Who is _that_?

_"_ Tch. You just don't want to admit I'm getting better," he says. "Anyway I thought you said you had a surprise for me today. I haven't gotten any surprise unless it's that you gained a few pounds."

Sul Li click her tongue. "If you keep at it, getting escorted out of Kim Manor will be the surprise."

He laughs quietly. "Alright alright. I'll be nice. What is it?"

Sul Li sighs. "I'm afraid I don't have it right now. I did but things didn't go as well as I hoped. Your visit is rather moot now. I'm sorry."

"It's fine. I'm always happy to see you. But it would be nice sometimes if you came to see _me._ "

"Soon."

"You always say soon."

"I have a lot of duties. You're one to talk, sir. How many times did you promise to return the book I asked for?"

He chuckles. "Soon."

She chuckles warmly as well. "Feel fortunate I'm lenient enough to not charge you a late fee this time."

"It's not my fault. General Gye Baek doesn't want to give it up. He reads it so much these days that I can't even get it out of his hands."

"But why? It's not like our Hand of Time would care for anyone but Silla's king."

"I wish I knew. But I think I can get the book to you. Just give me some time."

"Thank you. I'd appreciate it greatly."

"Enough to come see me?" He asks, his voice hopeful.

"I don't know if I can visit Solemn Bastion directly, but my training will start again soon. I'll certainly be around that area more. If Gye Baek takes you on patrol, perhaps I'll have the chance to say hello."

"Good..." He leans in closer to her.

I lean away of the aisle and stare at the desks against the wall, completely frozen. When I can't hear anything at all, I look again. _They're gone._

A knot of fire lingers in my chest. I take a few deep breaths to make it go away. I finally walk into the aisle. The scent of lemon verbena hangs thickly still. Sul Li's friend, however, does not seem to have a scent.

_Well whoever it is, I guess it ain't my business to know._ I start flippin' through the books.

"Aha," Min Ah's face pokes into the aisle. "I wondered if you'd find the right place without your English inscriptions to help you."

"I almost got it right," I wave a small book and put it back. "I found the general section. But I haven't seen any helpful Hwarang stuff. Just some borin' old bios."

"Oh, I can show you where the records are." Min Ah leads me a few sub-sections down the books nearly to the end of the steps. As we pass, some books quiver, others glow on the shelves, and some even ooze different smells and soft sounds; I catch a whiff of one that smells like melted butter and sizzles as we walk by. _That one must be a Heart. It sounds like somebody who liked to cook._ "All the books are pretty lively here."

"Those are Lifebooks. Some get a little moody because they feel _entitled_ to be read." Min Ah says with a glare at a book on the end train' to wiggle out from its shelf at the end. She clears her throat loudly. The book stops at once with a guilty-soundin' whimper. Min Ah pushes it back into place. "Informational books and fiction are usually much better behaved. But it's not entirely bad that they're active. Imagine how impossible it would be to find the right book if none of them were unique. Do you know what guard you wanted to join?"

"Only ones I know are the Wings of Heaven and the Lion Heart," I say. "How many more are there?"

"Well there's the Tiger Fury from my family, but I don't know if they'd except an outsider. The Belle's Guard is really good, if you don't mind all of your service being for the Grand Belle." Her steps start to slow as she counts off on her hand. "Then there's the Phoenix Cry, Storm Surge, Wolf's Bay, the King's Hand, Star Flight, Song of Thunder, and some others. But I don't recommend picking them based on their name. Pick the guard that you really feel at home in. It might be a bit hard since most don't really want to accept anymore trainees."

"I really liked the Lion Heart guard, and I'm used to workin' with Jin Yi already," I say. "What about them?"

Min Ah taps her chin. "I don't know about them." She trails her finger across the purple spines. "Lion Heart, Lion Heart, Lion Heart...Ah. Here they are." She hands me the book, before puttin' the finger on the spine of another. "Do you want the Wings of Heaven too?"

"I thought they weren't takin' trainees."

"You can still make a special appeal if you think you'd be s strong fit," Min Ah says. "It won't hurt to try."

"Alright, give it to me then."

When my arms get full of books, Min Ah takes me to a small study room. "Do you know how to pull memories?"

"Pull?" I echo. "Is that the same as touchin' them?"

Min Ah shakes her head. "No. Resonant Touch is more convenient when you're in public or if the memories that you're pulling is too noisy or personal. But it's not very good for your body if you do it too often. If you're in a closed room like this one, then you can save your energy by pulling the memory."

Min Ah sits across from me and flips open the Lion Heart book to where the Jin Yi stands uniformed with the white Lion Heart flag in her right hand. "All you do is pinch the memory like so..." Min Ah dips her thumb and forefinger into the page, causin' the mini-Jin Yi in the picture to back away. "Oh no you don't. Come here you..."

"Oh, _that's_ what you mean. I saw Sul Li do that before," I say.

Min Ah is quiet as she plucks Jin Yi from the book and drops her onto the floor.

Bright light floods my eyes and when it clears, the room has transformed into the front of Fallin' River Compound with nobody else around but Jin Yi standin' with her flag.

"Curious about the Lion Heart, are you?" Jin Yi begins. "We're the second oldest Hwarang guard and third in overall Hwarang ranking. And in the Lion Heart, you will not find a single weak link in our ranks. Every man is taught to fight with his all. Our requirement to enter are simple, our ideal trainee must be of age, have at least two Helping Hands besides his birth ones, and be willing to take on one more in a Vision Quest upon arrival. He must also fill out our application in the Grand Library of Lore, listing his preference to be a bass or a musigician in the application so we can sort him into a fitting pack as soon as possible. And finally, he must pass the exams for either occupation at Grand Staff Academy."

The memory dissolves.

"That's all?" I ask.

"I assume so," Min Ah says, turnin' the page. "Jin Yi isn't one to pad a speech."

_But she sure as heck one to throw me some fortune cookie stories in a heartbeat._ "Either way, I don't think I qualify since I haven't passed any exam."

"You might be able to talk to her," Min Ah says. "The Hwarang have made exceptions before."

"Min Ah, this is _Jin Yi_ we're talking about."

"Oh right..." She makes a face and pushes the Lion Heart book towards me. "Well in that case, you're completely screwed."

I move it aside. "Which guard application were you fillin' out?"

"I'm transferring from the Tiger Fury to the Wings of Heaven," Min Ah says. "Ah Ri and Al Cheon are handling the applications this year, but getting in doesn't necessarily mean staying in." She folds her arms. "They're the best guard in Silla, so it's very demanding, even for those of us who already have experience with physical training and combat. Only about a hundred or so make it out of the thousands of applications they get. I'm only getting in because I have other merits, so I'd not make that decision lightly if I were you. You only get to apply to three guards."

"At one time?"

" _Period."_ Min Ah adjusts her spectacles. "And you have to wait a whole year to apply again if you're dropped."

_Then I can't mess up._ I look at the other books on the table. Maybe I should wait when all the guard options are open. But then the problem is waitin' a whole year. What would I do for another year? I'm sure the Hwarang won't let me pal around them forever. And I highly doubt Sul Li would be willin' to extend the expiration date on my stay here. Maybe the General would but... "There ain't no other option for military service?"

"There's the Imperial Army, but people tend to only go there if they don't make the Hwarang," Min Ah says. "But personally, I don't think it's worth it. The Hwarang has more benefits and more say in Silla's politics."

Min Ah and I cycle through the rest of the guards, but most of the ones that are still open to applications are either clan-specific, or they've got a bunch of requirements I don't fit. Unless Queen Seon Deok makes somethin' happen or Jin Yi makes an exception (which is highly unlikely), the Wings of Heaven is really my only option.

And if want to be king any time soon, I _really_ can't screw it up.

Once Min Ah and I are done lookin' we take the books back to their shelves. Min Ah pulls out her LifeWatch. "Hmm. We still have a little bit of time before dinner, is there anything you want to do?"

"Honestly, I don't think I'd be much use for doin' anything right now with dinner on my mind," I say.

"The dinner?" Min Ah echoes. "Oh...meeting the Queen. I wish I had some advice for you, but it's not like you've broken any laws here, have you?"

"Define 'broken any law'. Sul Li threw me in jail on the first day because s'posedly I broke one."

"On second thought, I take that back. Don't answer. " Min Ah puts her watch away. "Kwan is giving a testimony for something, isn't he? Let him do all the talking. Everything depends on the Queen's mood."

"I don't s'pose she's in a good one today?" I ask sheepishly.

"Not really, but..." Min Ah's gaze trails to the ceilin'. "She has had a lot on her mind recently and I'm sure she's tired from her journey. She might not question you so harshly if you're lucky."

"Keyword is _if_ ," I mutter and put a hand to my pulsin' heart. "But woooowee...I feel like I might have a heart attack, and she ain't even in the room."

Min Ah beams. "I think I know what might help. Do you mind a little bit of music?"

"Music?" I echo. "Sure, I guess. If you think it'll help. What instrument do you play?"

Min Ah look at me like I'm crazy. "You don't _play_ the instruments. That's unsanitary. Unless you're a courtesan or something."

"Then how does it make noise if nobody is playing it?"

Min Ah reaches into her blue cloak and pulls out two wands with tiny rune letters etched into them: one cobalt with gold writin' and the other gold with blue writin'. "You command them with a bass clef or a treble clef. It will make more sense once we get to my room."

But when I get to Min Ah's bedroom I find myself questionin' what sense she's goin' by. When she said she'd play some music, I was expectin' a one instrument thing. But violins, cellos, guitars, basses stand upright in the corners. Piccolos, flutes, and other woodwinds sit neat on her desk and dressers next to stacks of papers and potion vials. Tiny drums, shakers, and other percussion sit next to a podium on the opposite end from the bed. And the walls are chocked full of mounted brass instruments. The whole place feels like a concert hall and science lab.

_Geeze, do you really need your own symphonic orchestra?_

Min Ah heads over to the podium. "Have a seat."

I opt to sit at her desk. "How exactly does this work?"

"In the Hwarang we have something called the Harmonic Command. It lets a Commander make large groups of soldiers move all at one time to one order, or direct them one by one. Almost like an orchestra conductor," Min Ah says. "In my research, I've discovered that it has other interesting uses like helping pups and insomniacs go to sleep, or calming people who are restless. Unfortunately the problem with living subjects is that it demands a lot of trust between a Commander and the one being commanded. It's usually not a problem, but some rebels slip through the cracks. Though I've heard some people can placebo the effects if they're afraid of their commanders, but I don't know how true that is."

"So you can make someone jump around the room and dance?" I ask.

"As long as that person has a beating heart," Min Ah says, rappin' the cobalt clef onto the podium edge.

The instruments bounce to life and hop from their places to stand in front of Min Ah.

_Tink! Tink!_ A glockenspiel inch out from under the bed and pauses.

Min Ah clears her throat loudly at it and points to an empty spot next to a pair of maracas.

_Tink!_ The glockenspiel slump like a guilty dog and slink into line. The maracas shake at it and clock it on the frame for bein' late.

"Thank you for joining us, Mr. Glockenspiel," Min Ah says dryly. "If you're tardy again, you're going back in the case. Now..." She lifts her cleft again and a blue light glows at the tip. The blue glow envelops the rest of the instruments.

The percussion section beat on themselves in a steady beat, then the strings croon low. Guzheng plucks fill the air. The flute chirps high and crisp.

As each instrument joins in, the hard knot in my stomach comes undone and soft vibrations thrum inside me as if the music is sittin' in my blood. "I'm feelin' better already! How the heck did ya figure that out?"

Min Ah beams at me. "Music doesn't need much help to move the heart. We all want to dance and move when we hear ordinary music, don't we? It's just a derivative of that."

"I ain't never thought of it that way, but it sure is cool," I say, gettin' up.

A gentle knock sound at the door. Min Ah commands the instruments to be quiet with a flick of her clef. "Come in."

Queen Mama Ma Ya nudge the door open slowly with her cane. "Have you been composing again? I feel like I've heard that one before."

"I have to for my thesis," Min Ah says. "I'm working from the old lullaby you used to sing."

"Sleep Little Silla Sleep?" Queen Mama Ma Ya echoes, feelin' her way in the room with her cane. "Hmm. I haven't sang that one since Sul Li was a pup. Maybe I ought to for tonight's Telling."

"You're doing another Telling?" Min Ah asks.

"I've gotten a request to do a small one after dinner," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. Her milky gaze shifts to me. "You're both welcome to join us. Tonight's story is a real hoot! Heehee..."

"I don't mind listening," Min Ah glances at me. "If you want to go, of course."

"I'd love to come," I say. Hearin' Queen Mama Ma Ya is probably most relaxin' thing that's been suggested since gettin' here.

"Splendid!" Queen Mama Ma Ya puts a hand up on the door jamb. "I hear we're having curry imported all the way from India, so let's skidoo!"

Min Ah steps down from the podium. "Here, let me help you, _halmae_."

The three of us head pop 'round the manor some more until we finally come to a great hall filled with tigerdogs lined up outside the hall. At the end of the line I spot the Great Guardian of the Left and Dave, though Dave is kinda shiverin' with some kinda funny lookin' red clown nose stuck into the place where his nose chipped off.

The Great Guardian of the Left waves a paw at me. "Oh human, do you have a minute? Dave could use some encouragement."

"Are you nervous about the dinner too?" I ask.

"Nervous is an understatement," Dave says, his shiverin' gettin' worse. "It's my first review."

"Dave, I'm sure ya'll do just fine," I say. "I mean, what could she really mark you down for if ya'll just got here? It ain't like ya'll would know everything."

Dave kneads his paws on the rug. "But Queen Seon Deok has high standards, friend! I feel like I've forgotten everything about being a statue and I can't think at all!" Dave huddles on the ground with his paws coverin' his head. "Does my nose look okay? What if she doesn't like it?"

The Great Guardian of the Left puts her paw on Dave's head. "Dave, if your nose mattered, she wouldn't have hired us both."

"But friend the gap is _hideous._ "

The Great Guardian of the Left look at me. "Human, help me! Say something to him."

I kneel down beside Dave. "C'mon Dave, it's a dinner. Queen Seon Deok is there to talk to us. She probably ain't even gonna notice you as long as ya'll just stand there and just be statues."

The Great Guardian of the Left nudges Dave with her nose. "You can do that, can't you Dave? It's easy and simple."

Dave stops, quiverin'. "Y-yes. I can do that. That's not hard."

The Great Guardian of the Left's tail curl up like a spitz. "We can do it, Dave. We're professionals!"

Dave and the Great Guardian of the Left hi-paw each other.

The halls side doors open and in enter Su Ho, Kwan, and Go Dong. Kwan's face is serious and unreadable as always, but Su Ho and Go Dong look just as unsettled as Dave was a few moments ago.

"You're all just in time," I say. "Dinner is about to start."

Go Dong puts a hand over his stomach. "I don't know how I feel about dinner after walking in here. The guards were mighty scary."

"Hmph. What do you expect?" Kwan asks. "You are a stranger on their territory."

"Won Kwang?" Queen Mama Ma Ya reaches out with a hand. "Is that you?"

I brace myself for Kwan's scathin' response, but to my surprise, he stretches out a hand to let Queen Mama Ma Ya touch him and draw close.

"Deok Man let you return?" Queen Mama Ma Ya asks.

"For now," Kwan says. "Depending on how dinner goes, it could be permanent. But it's better explained inside."

As soon as he finish speakin', the doors at the south end of the huge hall swing open.

The Great Guardian of the East Coast stand in the doorway. "What are ya'll standin' in here lookin' around for?" Queen Seon Deok is about to roll up in this mug like now. To the left or to the right or somethin'!"

"Move it peasants," The Great Guardian of the West Coast bellows, strollin' in. "Or I'mma have to open up a can of samsara on all yo' unenlightened butts."

Everyone in the hall edges toward the walls at the command. The Great Guardian of the East and West Coast trot ahead, leadin' the way for the Tiger Fury guards behind them. I spot a few noblemen that I don't recognize.

Sul Li is the next to enter. Her gaze meets mine, but she quickly averts it. Interestin'ly, no one enters with her.

_Not bringin' your friend to dinner? Or is he somewhere in the back?_

However, it's only Queen Seon Deok and General Hong Do bring up the rear of the military train, arm in arm. Thankfully, Queen Seon Deok is on the General's right side, so he stand between me any her. But that don't mean that her presence ain't any less potent than it was when I saw her in the forest.

Min Ah nudges me. "We go in after them."

I swallow. _Follow behind the queen?_

_Chin up, human!_ Aria chirps. _Hwaiting!_

_Hwaiting?_ Brio echoes. _You mean fighting?_

_Yes, it's like do your best,_ Aria says.

Brio _tsks_ at her. _You've been watching dramas and reality shows in the main menu again, haven't you?_

Before I can chime in, Min Ah and Queen Mama Ma Ya are already fallin' into step behind the Queen and Kwan, Su Ho, and Go Dong follow behind them. Heart hammerin', I catch up behind 'em. Dave and the Great Guardian of the Left come up behind me and we all file into the great dinin' hall where servants stand with covered trays for every guest ready.

Without bein' told, everybody kinda just fall into place, mostly where they entered the line from which put me at the end of the table, next to Queen Mama Ma Ya and Bo Jong. The statues move up to the empty pedestals around the room, though Dave's nerves clearly ain't holdin' because he's shiverin' so hard that his pedestal rattles with him. And frankly, I'm probably more scared for him than I am for me at the moment. He look like he's gonna shit a real brick.

Each servant set down the trays in front of us and open them, revealin' our chicken curry rice and a cucumber salad on the side. The room goes completely quiet as everybody look at Queen Seon Deok. She takes the first bite, which seems to be the cue around here because the whole room seems to relax and settle into dinner.

I spoon chicken, potato, and rice into my mouth and savor the satisfyin' warmth as it settles into my stomach. Which reminds me...didn't Forte swipe my curry powder from home? Maybe when I go back to the Hwarang Compound, I ought to make some.

Watchin' the Kims together feels something like peerin' into a secret room that you ain't s'posed to be in. At first, you're moonstruck that you're there, maybe even terrified and want to run for the hills, but the peculiarity of it all makes you want to look around. And I'll tell you, there's nothin' more peculiar than seein' a room full of Kims at the dinner table. Side conversations happen in tiny emphatic blips and peter out suddenly, and the whole knife hands thing that I thought was Sul Li-specific is a family epidemic and everybody got they own version: Kwan has the serrated sawin' knife hands, General Hong Do's knifehands are much more like a peelin' knife with swift and careful motions, Queen Seon Deok and Sul Li emphasize almost everything with full-on head-loppin' knifehands, Min Ah's knifehands are like stabbin' daggers, and Queen Mama Ma Ya's are delicate little butter knives spreadin' her points.

But where their knifehands all match up, almost every personality here almost flip-flops completely. Sul Li eats with her head down like she don't want to be noticed, and interestin'ly enough she's only one not eatin' curry. Guess she must be allergic or something.

The man beside her, who resembles General Hong Do in nearly all, but gray hair and waistline, stares off into space often with his forehead all wrinkled up. Strangely, the two chairs beside him is empty. The elf-like man across from him glances at the empty chairs from time to time and whispers to his buddy next to him, their faces both grim. Min Ah and Kwan steal glances at one another. General Hong Do look all shrunk up next to his wife like a timid chinchilla. Queen Seon Deok, blinks slowly like a tired cat, but there's an awful noticeable distance between her and her husband. Queen Mama Ma Ya is the only one who nibble at her food with a pert little smile on her face: the only one at the table that seem to have anything to be happy about.

The elfin-lookin' man lowers his spoon. "Bo Jong, where is Eun Hae? Was she not invited to come tonight?"

I pause from my own meal to look up. Eun Hae was s'posed to be here? I'm tempted to try and reach out with my mind to ask, but a glance from Queen Seon Deok startle me so much that I stop altogether.

Bo Jong, the man next to Sul Li looks up, his eyes wide at bein' put on the spot suddenly. "I reminded her before I came. I think she had business to attend to, Sada Ham."

"More important than being with the Queen?" Sada Ham asks. His gaze shifts to the Queen, as if expectin' a reaction, but she seems far more preoccupied lookin' over at Sul Li. "And Al Cheon is not here either."

"If we are going to point fingers at who is missing, then let's ask where Ha Jong is," Bo Jong retorts. "He has not reported for duty since I've returned to Silent Bastion. Was he not under your leadership?"

Sada Ham's gaze darkens. "Ha Jong has always done what he likes regardless of what orders anyone gives."

"He is not the _only_ one," Bo Jong mutters.

Queen Seon Deok clears her throat. "Keep your swords and claws sheathed at the dinner table. In case you've forgotten, we have _guests."_

Bo Jong and Sada Ham both duck their heads and mutter an apology, but the two continue to eye each other with dirty looks.

I scoop up the last of my curry, and I notice that Su Ho, Go Dong and Kwan aren't far behind me. How much more of this dinner are we gonna have to deal with? I would've thought the spear and testimony would be the first thing we got out of the way. Heck, we ain't even been invited to speak yet! It ain't like she ain't had the opportunity to bring it up. We've had enough quiet at this table to fill up a countryside.

"So..." General Hong Do pipes up, tryin' to break the ice. "Did anything good happen to anyone today?"

"I finally caught that psychopath that was smashing everyone's pots," Sada Ham says.

Sul Li lifts her head. "That was real news?"

Sada Ham nods. "He was the one that claimed to be the Hero of Time."

Queen Seon Deok raises an eyebrow. "Hero?"

Bo Jong shrugs. "Apparently, he thought he could make these rupee-things appear if he smashed pots."

General Hong Do chuckles. "Was he smashing pots or 'smashing pots'?"

"Smashing pots?" Queen Mama Ma Ya lays her spoon down. "Sounds like the kind of man I need to smoke with."

Queen Seon Deok huffs. "Oh no you don't, Mother. He was a lunatic, just like the one who thought the children were after his lucky charms. That weren't lucky or charms, mind you."

"He's nowhere near as weird as the one who thought he'd be invincible if he touched a star," Min Ah says.

"What happened to him anyway?" Sul Li asks.

"Fellow died to head trauma from hitting his head against too many brick walls. And on purpose of all things," Min Ah says, shakin' her head. "This is why we all stay educated."

"Oh I'm sure they were all nice people," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "Who are we to judge them?"

"Silla is the only one that attracts the weird ones it seems. I never heard of this happeningin Baekche or Korgur..." Queen Seon Deok's voice trails. "What is that noise?"

Everybody pauses. And only then do I start hearin' some really panicky breaths.

My insides knot back up as my gaze slides to the wall where Dave is.

Or should I say... where Dave _ain't._

Because he's right next to Queen Seon Deok's elbow, starin' her in the face.

Queen Seon Deok raises her arm. "Can I help you, Mr. Guardian Statue?"

"Uh...uh...hi," Dave says. "I'm Dave."

"Hello there, Dave," Queen Seon Deok says.

A long uncomfortable pause follows with nothin' but those two starin' at each other and the rest of the whole table watchin'.

"Dave..." The Great Guardian of the Left growls between her clenched gold teeth. "Get. Back. Here."

Dave's tail tucks between his legs. "Erm. You have a nice dinner, Your Majesty."

Queen Seon Deok just stare at him as he slink back to his pedestal. Then she turns back to her food. "O...kay." She clears her throat. "Anyway, about this Hero of Time. Did you question him?"

"Yes, but he didn't seem to know anything about the Hand of Time, so I'm certain he wasn't related in anyway," Sada Ham says.

"Which reminds me... we're going to have to step up our efforts to find the Hand of Time," Queen Seon Deok says. "The Tang will be coming soon and I tire of the Emperor teasing us for having no king."

General Hong Do glances at me.

My heart pounds hard against my ribs. _Can you be any more obvious?_ Is he tryin' to get me killed?

"Outsiders." Despite her address to all of us, her attention is solely on me.

My legs jellify into a quiverin' mess. "Y-yes, Your Highness?"

"You'll have to forgive me, but you've been sitting with us all this time and I've not even asked any of your names," she says.

"I'm Kurai and this is Su Ho and Go Dong." I gesture to the both of them, and I'm glad when her attention finally shifts to them.

"What tribe are you both from?" she asks.

"W-we left the Whitetails," Go Dong says. "The Cloud Rain kept us for a little bit."

"I'm sure Silla is quite the change for you," the Queen says. Then her attention shifts to Kwan. "I'm surprised you are showing your face."

"I thought proof of King Dae Wong's death would please you," Kwan says.

Something seems to flicker in the Queen's gaze, but it's so quick that I can't tell what it could be. "Show me this proof."

_Uhh, Forte?_ I ask. _Or whichever one of ya'll are holdin' the sword...I kinda need it now._

The heft of Mjolnir falls into my lap. I pass the spear along to my left. Everyone at the table watches as it finally reaches Queen Seon Deok's lap.

Then that heavy breathin' starts as Dave is at Queen Seon Deok's side starin'. _Again._

"H-hi," Dave says.

Queen Seon Deok's eyes narrow. "Hello, Dave. What do you want?"

Dave's ears pin against his head. "I'm here."

The Queen's eyes close briefly. "Yes, I see you, Dave. But what do you want?"

Dave just kind of sit there for a while, lookin' round at the table at everybody with big kittenish eyes. "Um...Do you...need help?"

Queen Seon Deok draws in a deep breath. "No, Dave. I am fine."

"Okay..." Dave turns and slinks back next to the Great Guardian of the Left who sits with a growl that look like she's just about ready to slap the taste of Dave's mouth.

" _Without_ anymore interruptions..." Queen Seon Deok lifts the spear, examinin' the ice-gray tip first, then the rune letters on the shaft's center. A soft smile comes to her lips. "This is indeed Dae Wong's weapon. I will pardon your past offenses." She lays it down. "However, I will not restore your old property nor restore your position in the Tiger Fury or the Council, Won Kwang. If your service is satisfactory, that may change." She faces Go Dong and Su Ho. "As for you both, I've been told that you've been lending your talents to the Hwarang at Falling River Compound. If you wish to continue to give your help as a member their staff then you may do so." Then the Queen Seon Deok's attention returns. "And that leaves you stranger. You came from the villages near Aeternum Ruins are you not? To return Seung Man's belongings?"

My insides liquify as everyone, includin' Sul Li, turn to look at me. "Yes, Your Majesty."

"That is a long way for a village boy to travel for the sake of a stranger." She looks at the spear again. "And dangerous. Some might even say it's very foolish." She lays the spear back down in her lap. "But you do not have a criminal record, nor is your lineage restricted by law. However, I believe your bravery and effort is worth a great reward. Ask anything and if I can grant it, I will."

_Don't kill me then._

_Human be serious,_ Aria chides.

_That is a serious request Aria,_ Brio says. _A perfectly valid one if you ask me._

I put my hands in my lap. "If it ain't much trouble, I just want to be allowed join the Hwarang."

Queen Seon Deok tilts her head in thought. "You are fortunate. We recently ruled for outsiders to be allowed to join. Consider it done."

On the other side of the table, Sul Li drops her spoon. "No!"

Queen Seon Deok blinks. "No?"

Sul Li's lips purse under the attention. "I...It's just... joining the military is not a commitment a man should make after being here a few days. And he is not even a citizen. How do we know he is really loyal to Silla?"

It takes all my willpower not to holler back: _And what do you know about bein' loyal to anybody?_ Why can't she just mind her own business?

Queen Seon Deok glances at me and then Sul Li. "Did he not help you? Why are you opposed?"

Sul Li's mouth opens wide, but then she shuts it, her face goin' pink. "He did, but even so I am only suggesting that if he wants to choose that then there is no reason to _rush."_ She says that last part with a pointed glance at me. "And besides, most guards are no longer taking submissions. If anything it would be best for him to wait until next year. And he'll have all of his legal information as well."

Bo Jong folds his arms. "Her Highness has a point. How is he even going to complete a basic application? He has no family records or a legally registered scent. Then if he's to live here, he'll need to have a Life Watch and a Lifebook. And loyalty to one's nations isn't forged in a day. How do we know his heart is truly with us?"

"That is true," Queen Seon Deok says. "You wouldn't be able to live here, let alone join the Hwarang without those." She glances at Su Ho and Go Dong. "Even Gayans have Lifebooks and Life Watches."

"Surely we can make an exception just this once?" Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "Let him join on probation and have him get those things while he's in service."

" _If_ he's in service, _halmae,_ " Sul Li says. "No guard has accepted him yet."

Queen Seon Deok nods slowly. "Most Hwarang swear their loyalty to Silla or family clans, not to the throne, so the most I can do is write a request. It is up to leaders to make up their mind on what to do with you. But as far as what to do _if_ one accepts you...Seung Man, since you brought it up. Why don't you oversee his probation? And his progress?"

At this, Sul Li throws me a triumphant look. "With _pleasure._ "

"But since she seems to have suddenly gotten a short-term memory..." Queen Seon Deok says this with a scoldin' glance at Sul Li. "I'd like to formally thank you on behalf of the entire Kim Clan for helping Seung Man when she was ill."

The other Kims slowly pause from eatin' to clap for me, except for Sul Li who just sit there like she ate somethin' sour.

_Ha. That's what you get for meddlin' in other folk's business._ But my insides are still jittery. Sul Li's bound to make everything impossible on purpose.

But as the sound dies down, a certain somebody's breathin' get loud again.

Queen Seon Deok goes unnaturally still, face burnin' an angry red. She slams her spoon on the table and gets up from her seat with Mjolnir in her hands. "DAVE WHAT DO YOU WANT NOW?"

Dave shrinks back. "Uh..."

"DAVE!" The Great Guardian of the Left snaps. "GET. BACK. HERE!"'

"SILENCE!" Queen Seon Deok roars, makin' the Great Guardian of the Left hide behind her pedestal. Then the Queen Seon Deok turns to Dave with her hands on her hips. "Well? You have my attention. What is it?"

"Uh..." Dave twiddles his paws. "I just wanted to know...Do you...like my nose?"

Queen Seon Deok scrubs a hand over her face and sighs. "Dave, Dave, Dave..." She plucks the red nose from his muzzle and squeezes it. It squeaks. "It makes noise. Do you hear that everyone?" She squeaks it again. "It makes _noise."_ She glares at Dave. "You interrupted my dinner _three_ times for a nose that squeaks?"

"I can sing a song with it," Dave says, his tail waggin'. "Do you want to hear it?"

Queen Seon Deok opens her mouth, but then opts to put the nose back on Dave instead. "I'll use my imagination. Just get out. Please."

"But—"

Lightning flashes from the spear, makin' everybody else hit the floor. "OUT DAVE!"

Dave scurries out of the room with his tail tucked against his belly.

Queen Seon Deok glares around the room. "Does anyone else want to be an idiot tonight?"

Nobody says a word.

"Good." Queen Seon Deok sits down. "Now everyone eat your food."

And everyone does.

As everyone continues eatin', my skin tingles in excitement. _I'm finally on my way to bein' a real Sillan!_

The rest of dinner blows by in a surreal blink (mostly due to the Queen's wantin' to get the heck out of dodge). After the presentation of the spear and Dave's shenanigans, Queen Seon Deok don't even so much as glance at me, Su Ho, or the others. It feels like a sharpened guillotine stopped just a hair breadth from me. And though I feel mighty sorry for Dave, but at the same time I have a funny feelin' that if it weren't for him gettin' all stirred up about his nose the Queen might have asked a lot more questions.

After dinner, Min Ah, Go Dong, Su Ho and I help Queen Mama Ma Ya up the stairs to a readin' loft in the Library of SHIS where she sits on her rocker chair and sticks some kind of cherry-smellin' wolf dope into her smokin' pipe. Min Ah lowers her lit gold clef to the ancestral tiger censers curled on the amberwood stands, to the wicks of half-melted candles on the dressers, to her grandmother's pipe. The whole room blooms with the sweetness, and smoke unfurls like a flowerin' bud, coverin' us all in a faint haze.

Queen Mama Ma Ya offers us a tasseled blue cushion to put on the floor so we can sit cozy, then she start rockin' in place. Her chair moans forward, groans back as if it too feels the hard clutches of old age. While Min Ah opens the windows, Queen Mama Ma Ya hums a gentle tune; her voice seems to become a force of nature, braidin' with the wind, with all of Silent Bastion, with the soul of Silla.

Min Ah takes a cushion from Queen Mama Ma Ya and sits down. "What story are you telling this time?"

"You'll see when Sul Li brings it from the library." Queen Mama Ma Ya cups both hands into her lap. "It's called The Song Of The World."

I clench the fabric of my pants and unclench it. Gods, I can't even relax after dinner without her showin' up?

Min Ah tucks her gold clef away. "It sounds a little familiar, but I don't recall you telling that one before."

"I found it in the old collections a while back," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "It's one I don't think I ever told at a Telling before. But if the spirits permit, I shall correct that."

Su Ho nudges Go Dong with his good arm. "Hey haven't we heard that story from the elders before?"

"The Song of the World?" Go Dong closes his eyes in thought. "Hmm...Maybe? Is it the one about the woman and the owls of legend?"

"It is. It's nice to see that Tellings go on even outside of Silla." As Queen Mama Ma Ya finishes talkin', the loft door squeaks open.

Sul Li stands in the doorway with a thin cream tome in her arms. Without a word, she hands the book to Queen Mama Ma Ya and sits down on Min Ah's other side.

Queen Mama Ma Ya smiles. "Everyone is here." She flips the book open to its first page to where an owl and a young woman are singin' in the middle of the forest. "Now let's begin." Queen Mama Ma Ya pulls the story from the pages and the whole room transforms from a cozy little loft to the heart of a young pine forest under the stars and the Symphonic Stream.

"Once there was a time when our kingdoms were just tiny sapling villages starting to grow, and when Owls were the most musical songbirds out of every fowl. It was the Owl's pure voice that woke us by day and soothed our people's pain. Their voice brought the sun into the sky, the wind when the days grew hot, and the cycle of seasons to bring forth crops and give the earth rest."

As she turns the page, the forest fades into a grove where dark hyena shapes rise from the darkness and run after parka-wearin' villagers in the snow, whoopin' and laughin'.

A trio of mottled shapes swoop down from the trees: heads and wings of owls, but with the bodies of lions. Each one plants down between the villagers and the hyenas, roarin' a high echoy song that make the hyenas wheel around and run back for the darkness. The villagers gather around the owls, pattin' them on the head.

"The Owls' voices were so mighty that they turned away the Darkborn that hunted us and all enemies that sought to invade our homeland. Our people would sit in the heart of Owl Grove to hear them and bring gifts to honor our friendship with them and give thanks for their protection ordered to us by the King of Owls that guided us with His Eyes as according to our covenant with him."

Queen Mama Ma Ya turns the page again and the owl creatures dissipate. We're taken to a snowy clearing in the tangled woods where giant owl-shaped totem pole stands tall. The owls fly around it, callin' up flames. A pale woman with brown hair and gold eyes steps into the clearin' with a covered wicker basket in her arms. She stares at them mesmerized.

"One night, it came to pass that the village's high priestess was to visit Owl Grove to leave an offering and make intercession to the Owls on behalf of all the villagers, and she was startled to see that the Owls' miraculous works with her own eyes. For though, she came to the grove regularly and knew that the Owl's songs helped and protected us, no one had _seen_ or _heard_ their magic. The Owls' songs were special in that a Man could not hear or sing unless his eyes and ears were opened, knowing all the things of heaven and the earth."

The high priestess rushes forward toward an owl griffin that sings on a huge stump and she lays her basket in front of him. She bows low. "What is that song you're singing, Prince of Owls? It sounds very beautiful."

The Prince of Owls straightens up on the stump and says, "It's the most sacred of all Owl songs! We call it the Song of the World."

"Why is it the most sacred one?" The high priestess asks. "Are not all the songs you sing sacred?"

The Prince of Owls tilts his head. "All songs that we sing are but fragments of the Song of the World. One part brings the sun and the moon. Another shifts the seasons. Others control all of the elements and mends the most broken hearts and heals the sick."

"But is it not true that Owls do not become weak nor weary?" The high priestess. "That they neither tire, nor bow to the light of either the sun or moon? That in the winter, they have no trouble finding grain or meat? Or even that they have no need for medicine because they do not fall ill?"

"That is so, but why do you ask me such things?" asks the Prince of Owls.

"The smith trains his apprentice to be a smith as great as he. And so does the wise man instruct his son so his foot will not be moved," the high priestess says. "Father Wolf and Mother Bear have anointed all men in their image and gave all things we might need to survive. And yet the Owls hold back the very thing that would greatly help us. Surely, it would make sense that the power lie with those of us who ail and whose days are like the wind?"

The Prince of Owls is quiet for some time. "You are human, made from the dust of the earth and yet you speak things that are of heaven. Why do you ask of things far greater than you?"

"Every year our people toil and still the Darkborn kill and take away because we cannot bring our prayers to you in time," the high priestess says. "Nor can we set our borders afar, lest we be too far for you to hear our cries when they overtake us. What hope is there for us, when we are not like you?"

Queen Ma Ya turns to the next page. "And the Prince of Owls was moved with a great compassion for the high priestess's plight. And so it came to pass that the Prince of Owls made the high priestess fast and prepare herself until the time between the Hour of the Tiger and the Ox, when the spirits and great powers are said to walk among us. And it was then that the Prince of Owls taught the high priestess the Song of the World. When she returned, the high priestess did great works and wonder that caused the people to marvel. She was so overjoyed that she returned to make bountiful offering to the Owls as according to their covenant. And again the high priestess sang as one of them. When she returned to the village, they were so grateful for what she learned that they bowed to her feet and brought her offerings.

Soon word began to spread in the village that the woman knew how to heal the sick and grow the crops faster and people began to come to her with their requests and gifts while she would go to Owl Grove and sing with the Prince of Owls.

But every night she did so, less and less people would visit the Owls until the woman was the only one who came, and this made the Prince of Owls very grieved in his heart."

The scene shifts quickly from the woman and the Prince of Owls to villagers millin' about their hamlet. Then the scene darkens slowly. And the woman returns to Owl Grove, but the owls' bodies are dark and huge against the trees. Their big eyes glow menacingly. The Prince of Owls sit tall on his stump as the high priestess comes forward with her gift.

"What is wrong?" The woman asks.

"Who are you to come here and stand before all Owls?" a side owl demands.

The high priestess clutches both hands against her chest. "I don't know what you mean. Is it not my duty to come and give offerings?"

The owls in the clearin' growl. One jumps to its paws screechin', "Mother of lies! Filth of the earth!"

But the Prince of Owls raises his wings for quiet. "Be not wroth my friends." Then he turns to the high priestess and asks, "Why do the people no longer make their offerings along with your own?"

"They do not want to come," the high priestess says. "The desire in their heart is for our home to grow."

At this, the Prince of Owls thinks a little bit and then says, "Perhaps if I become a man and speak to them, then they will come back?"

The high priestess thought this idea was a good one so the Prince of Owls took Man's shape and came down to the village to speak to the people."

The scene changes again to the village where the Prince of Owls and the high priestess try their hardest to speak to everyone, but people only glance at them or shoo them away.

"When he tried to ask people to come to Owl Grove, everyone refused or did not want to listen because the Prince of Owls was so strange to them," Queen Mama Ma Ya continues. "The high priestess tried to help and explain, but the other villagers could not be swayed. They held fast to their beliefs and threw the Prince of Owls out. One day it came to pass that the Prince of Owls became so very wroth that he ordered Owl Grove to be closed off from the humans forever. And from then on the Owls did not sing and the song. Soon the sun and moon did not rise. The crops did not grow. Darkborn and other creatures would attack the villagers in great numbers."

The scene changes again to the Darkborn hyenas runnin' down villagers and draggin' them into the trees by their teeth. Then it changes to the village where a mob gathers in front of a tiny house.

"The disasters became so great that villagers became furious at the woman and blamed her for all their misfortunes. So one night, they stormed to her house."

A man with a pitchfork bangs on the door. "If you do not fix this mess, we'll throw you out to the beasts you vile woman!"

Inside the house, the woman huddles in bed, cringin' at the noise. Queen Mama Ma Ya turns the page again and the village vanishes, replaced by the woman sprintin' for Owl Grove. But once she gets to the entrance, Owls swoop down and swipe their claws at her.

"The woman was so afraid that she went to Owl Grove once again and asked to see the Prince of Owls, but she was turned away. But because of the villagers' anger she couldn't return home either."

"Please..." The woman pleads to two guard owls at the forest's edge. "I need to speak to the Prince of Owls. Have I not served faithfully?"

But the owls bristle and hiss at her, unmoved. "And who are you? What covenant do we have with a harlot? Bring us the one you call master in your heart and let them speak among us."

"Faced with no other hope or choice, the woman got down on her knees and sang outside the Owl Grove for nine days and nine nights with her own voice," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "Whether it rained or snowed, whether Darkborn attacked or she starved, the woman kept singing the Song of the World. The Owls only ignored her. But on the eve of the tenth day, the woman was distraught to find that she had worn her voice completely."

The high priestess slowly crumbles down on to the snow, and cries hoarsely with her head buried in her hands. After a while, she reaches for the tree, leanin' on the trunk for support.

"She was sure that she would never be able to return to the village, but as she rose that day, the sun rose with her," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "When she lifted a hand, the crops moved with her. For she had sung the Song of the World so many times outside of Owl Grove and sang it so earnestly that the song itself was moved by the woman's determination and was ingrained deeply within her. But because the Song of the World chose a new master. But as a result, the Owls could no longer sing.

When the high priestess returned and saw that she could carry the very sun on her shoulders, the people fell at her feet and hailed her as the 'Goddess of the Sun'. The Owls were so very wroth at this that the Prince of Owls came to the village to see Sun Goddess, but she, remembering her own treatment by the Owls, regarded them not, nor did she regard the villagers who cast her out. And when the Owls persisted, she used the Song of the World to hold them with light of the moon. This thing upset the Prince of Owls so greatly that he told the Great King of Owls who was said to have bore a grudge so strong that it swept his soul," Queen Mama Ma Ya slowly closes the book. "And from then on he became a hunter of the night and stalks Man when he cannot See. This is why many owls hunt by the moon and seek shelter in the day. For it is said that they are still wary of kindling the wrath of the Sun Goddess."

The forest around us dissolves back to normal.

My skin tingles as she finishes. And I find myself wigglin' my fingers and stretchin' out my legs to put feelin' back into my body. I gaze around the room to find Sul Li huggin' her knees, Min Ah starin' pensively at the ceilin', Su Ho massagin' his arm and.

"I don't get why the Owls were so upset at her," Sul Li mutters. "It wasn't her fault that people did not listen."

"The Owls were not punishing her specifically, little one," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "It was Man's satisfaction with their own efforts that caused the rift in the first place."

"But why were they calling the priestess harlot and mean stuff like that? All she wanted was to give power to the people." I ask. "If the Owls shared with everybody in the first place, it wouldn't be a problem."

Queen Mama Ma Ya rocks back with her pipe in hand. "Did it matter that the woman shared power with the people?" Queen Mama Ma Ya raises her pipe to her lips. "They were content with bringing offerings to her, even after she returned with the knowledge. They did not care for truths or learnings when they had to work for it as the priestess had. Or the Owls for that matter. They only asked things and it was done. Why would they look any deeper when they had never challenged themselves to ponder?" Her milked gaze sweeps over us. "Min Ah? You are not usually so quiet after a tale."

"Hmm? Oh, sorry, _halmae._ It's just..." Min Ah folds her arms. "I think I've heard that story before. It didn't go like that at all."

"Oh?" Queen Mama Ma Ya lean forward, takin' a puff of her wolf dope. "What was the other version? Do you remember it?"

"Same here," Go Dong says, raisin' a hand. "I don't remember the part about the singin' for nine days and nights happening like that. Wasn't there eight saints?"

"Saints?" Min Ah shakes her head. "I remember there being a fox in the version that I heard. And there was something else that went wrong, I think."

"Wasn't there two priestesses in the story?" Su Ho asks.

" _Two? "_ Sul Li scoffs. "Why would there be two priestesses? A village that small would only ever needed one at a time."

Ma Ya rocks forward, puffin' a smoke plume in the shape of a nine-tailed fox. "Hmm...I would not be surprised if there are many versions of the tale."

"Why would someone write different versions to the story?" Sul Li asks. "Isn't one enough?"

"That's the funny thing about stories, little one," Queen Mama Ma Ya says. "There's never quite just _one_ version _._ Even if two people go to the same event, they will never tell the same story of what happened. And some stories are far too complicated for one telling, but that doesn't mean they all shouldn't be heard."

"But there can only be one _truth_ ," Sul Li insists. "Right?"

Queen Mama Ma Ya remains quiet for some time. She rocks back in her chair. "There is one objective truth." Queen Mama Ma Ya says with a glance in Min Ah's direction. "But the problem is...you can never trust anyone to tell it."
